155b1 FLM Easa

Issue Dated : 18/10/2016
EC 155 B1
FLIGHT MANUAL REVISIONS STATUS
EASA CERTIFICATION
This manual must contain the normal revision (RN) and rush revisions (RR) listed under the relevant
issue (EDIT).
PRESCRIBED SECTION PRESCRIBED SECTION
Volume 1 Volume 1
SECT. . . SECT. . .
/ EDIT . / EDIT .
SUP. . DATE SUP. . DATE
0 -> 5 RN16 16-25 R SUP 36 RN0 02-20
SUP 0 RN18 16-25 R SUP 37 RN1 05-14
SUP 1 RN8 15-15 SUP 38 RN0 06-39
SUP 6 RN1 16-10 SUP 39 RN5 14-42
SUP 11 RN4 14-26 SUP 40 RN1 14-07
SUP 14 RN6 14-46 SUP 51 RN1 03-04
SUP 15 RN4 15-12 SUP 52 RN2 08-50
SUP 17 RN2 14-04 SUP 53 RN2 11-48
SUP 18 RN0 05-41 SUP 54 RN1 06-49
SUP 19 RN0 04-20 SUP 55 RN1 02-47
SUP 20 RN0 02-20 SUP 56 RN4 06-14
SUP 21 RN1 02-47 SUP 57 RN3 10-29
SUP 22 RN0 02-20 SUP 58 RN1 05-32
SUP 23 RN1 14-04 SUP 59 RN1 10-28
SUP 24 RN2 03-41 SUP 60 RN3 15-28
SUP 25 RN1 03-41 SUP 61 RN0 13-09
SUP 27 RN0 02-39 SUP 62 RN0 16-25 R
SUP 28 RN1 03-41

COMPLEMENTARY SECTION
SUP 29 RN2 03-38
SUP 31 RN1 02-45 Volume 2

SUP 32 RN1 06-28 SECT. EDIT DATE
0, 6 -> 10 RN16 16-25 R
SUP 33 RN5 16-25 R
APP.9.1 RN1 12-08
SUP 34 RN0 02-20
SUP 35 RN1 15-28
Page 1 / 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
TYPE CERTIFICATE EASA.R.105
REGISTRATION No. SERIAL No.
APPROVED BY:
The DIRECTION GENERALE DE

L'AVIATION CIVILE ( DGAC )
Date of approval: 31 JUL 2002
The Rotorcraft Flight Manual consists of all pages marked "DGAC approved"
or "EASA approved" or "APPROVED"
IMPORTANT NOTE
The practical value of this manual depends entirely upon its being up-dated correctly
by the operator.
The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the List of Effective
Pages.
AIRBUS HELICOPTERS Direction Technique Support

Aroport internationnal Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France
APPROVED EC 155 B1
0.0.P1
A 14-28 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DGAC APPROVED EC 155 B1

0.0.P1
A 02-20 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
REVISION TO AIRCRAFT PUBLICATION: EC155 B1

PUBLICATION CONCERNED: FLIGHT MANUAL VOL 1 + VOL 2
CERTIFICATION: EASA A
- The outline of the revision is given below:

. Supplements affected (added or modified),
. Major points of the revision.
- Check that pages in each supplement are those specified in the list of effective pages.
- Withdraw old and insert new pages affected by this revision.
- Return the acknowledgement card.
- This list of amended pages may be filed (apart from the manual).
UPDATE GUIDE
PAGES TO BE DELETED PAGES TO BE INSERTED
SECTION PAGES DATE-CODE SECTION PAGES DATE-CODE

FLM
REVISIONS SRD 1 23/06/2016 - 1 18/10/2016
STATUS
Section 0.0.P5 1 to 4 14-40 0.0.P5 1 to 4 16-25
0 to 5
2.3 5 04-36 2.3 5 04-36
NR 16 2.3 6 14-40 2.3 6 16-25
SUP.0.P1 1 to 3 14-48 SUP.0.P1 1 to 3 14-48
SUP.0.P2 1 14-48 SUP.0.P2 1 14-48
SUP.0.P2 2 to 3 14-48 SUP.0.P2 2 to 3 16-25
SUP.0
SUP.0.P3 1 14-48 SUP.0.P3 1 14-48
NR18
SUP.0.P4 1 14-48 SUP.0.P4 1 14-48
SUP.0.P5 1 to 2 14-48 SUP.0.P5 1 to 2 16-25
SUP.0 1 to 3 14-48 SUP.0 1 to 3 14-48
SUP.33.P1 1 04-23 SUP.33.P1 1 16-25
SUP.33.P5 1 13-05 SUP.33.P5 1 16-25
SUP.33
SUP.33 1 13-05
NR5
SUP.33 2&3 04-23 SUP.33 1 to 11 16-25
SUP.33 4 to 10 13-05
UPDATE GUIDE
16-42 Page 1/2
FLIGHT MANUAL
UPDATE GUIDE
/ / / SUP.62.P1 1 16-25
SUP.62
/ / / SUP.62.P5 1 16-25
NR0
/ / / SUP.62 1 to 18 16-25
0.0.P5 1 to 6 16-12 0.0.P5 1 to 7 16-25
VOL 2 9.0.P6 1 13-29 9.0.P6 1 13-29
NR16 9.0.P6 2 16-12 9.0.P6 2 16-25
/ / / 9.31 1 to 13 16-25
OUTLINE OF THE REVISION SECTIONS PAGES
PMVA - NR16 - 16-25

- Update of the List Of Approved Effective Pages and Log of 0.0.P5 1-4
Normal Revisions,
- Addition of "Dual GTN 750H GNSS RNAV system" in Single 2.3 6
Pilot IFR requirement,
SUP.0 - NR18 - 16-25
- Addition of "AVYDINE TAS 620" reference in SUP.33 and SUP.0.P2 2&3
addition of SUP.62 DAUL GTN 750H RNAV SYSTEM,
- Update of the List Of Approved Effective Pages and Log of SUP.0.P5 1&2
Normal Revisions,
SUP.33 - NR5 - 16-25
- Introduction of GTN 750H to monitor and display ACAS, SUP.33.P1 1
"Ryan 9900BX" is replaced by "Ryan 9900BX or Avydine TAS
SUP.33.P5 1
620", update of section Limitations, incorporation of new
brand "Airbus Helicopters" instead of "Eurocopter", "EASA SUP.33 All pages
APPROVED" is replaced by "APPROVED" in footpages, and
layout improvements,
SUP.62 - NR0 - 16-25
- Creation of Supplement No.62 "DUAL GTN 750H GNSS SUP.62.P1 1
RNAV SYSTEM, SUP.62.P5 1
SUP.62 1 to 18
PMVN - NR16 - 16-25
- Update of effective pages, 0.0.P5 1 to 7
- Creation of new section "COMMUNICATION, RADIO 9.0.P6 2
NAVIGATION AND NAVIGATION INSTALLATION WITH 9.31 1 to 13
THE DUAL GTN 750H.
UPDATE GUIDE
16-42 Page 2/2
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
OF CONDITIONAL REVISIONS (RC)

This manual contains the following pink pages except those canceled when the conditions
are complied with.
CAUTION
IF A NORMAL REVISION (RN) MODIFIES THE PAGE NUMBER FOR ANY

INFORMATION CONCERNED BELOW,THE READER WILL HAVE TO
CHANGE THE NUMBER OF THE PINK PAGE BY HAND,SO THAT THE
INFORMATION REMAINS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PARAGRAPH
CONCERNED.
N Section Page Date Applicable before condition is met:
0.0.P3 1 *RC* 09-04
RCA 3.2 5 *RC* 09-04 AMS 07-22B52 (PA N8.30)
RCB 2.3 2 *RC* 04-29 AMS 07-53C49 (Superior reinforced

guiding rail)
RCC 2.2 1
2.3 3 AMS 07-62C17, AMS 07-67B62 and
4.2 3 CANCELLED AMS 07-39C30
4.8 1 The RCC is cancelled. The AMS are
incorporated in the RN5 : 04-36
5.1 1
RCD 2.1 1 *RC* 04-15 AMS 07-67B62
RCE 3.2 6 *RC* 04-15 AMS OP-79B31
RCF 4.3 2 *RC* 06-14 AMS 07 -71C16 (TU 93C)

4.9 3 *RC* 06-14
4.9 4 *RC* 06-14
4.9 5 *RC* 06-14
4.9 7 *RC* 06-14
4.9 8 *RC* 06-14
EASA APPROVED EC 155 B1

0.0.P3
A 09-04 Page 1
*RC*
FLIGHT MANUAL
LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES

EASA CERTIFICATION
(1) Page Revision Code
- R : Revised, to be replaced
- N : New, to be inserted
SECTION PAGE DATE (1) SECTION PAGE DATE (1)
0.0 P1 1 14-28 2.4 1 12-16

0.0 P1 2 02-20 2.4 2 05-25
0.0 P1 3 02-20 2.4 3 05-25
0.0 P2 1 02-20 2.4 4 05-25
0.0 P3 1 02-20
0.0 P4 1 02-20 2.5 1 12-16
0.0 P5 1-4 16-25 R 2.5 2 12-16
2.5 3 05-25
1.0 P6 1 02-20 2.5 4 13-48
2.5 5 12-16
1.1 1 02-20 2.5 6 14-40
1.1 2 02-20
2.6 1 07-06
1.2 1 02-20
1.2 2 02-20 2.7 1 12-16
2.7 2 14-40
1.3 1 02-20
1.3 2 04-07 3.0 P6 1 14-40
1.3 3 02-20
3.1 1 12-16
1.4 1 02-20 3.1 2 14-28
2.0 P6 1 04-36 3.2 1 12-16

2.0 P6 2 14-40 3.2 2 12-16
3.2 3 12-16
2.1 1 14-40 3.2 4 14-28
2.1 2 02-20 3.2 5 12-16
3.2 6 14-28
2.2 1 12-16 3.2 7 14-28
2.2 2 04-49 3.2 8 02-50
3.2 9 14-28
2.3 1 02-20 3.2 10 12-16
2.3 2 12-16 3.2 11 14-28
2.3 3 04-36 3.2 12 02-20
2.3 4 04-36 3.2 13 12-16
2.3 5 04-36 3.2 14 14-28
2.3 6 16-25 R 3.2 15 12-16
APPROVED EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
A 16-25 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.2 16 04-36 4.2 2 12-16

3.2 17 12-16 4.2 3 12-16
3.2 18 14-28
3.2 19 12-16 4.3 1 12-16
3.2 20 12-16 4.3 2 12-16
3.2 21 12-16 4.3 3 12-16
3.2 22 12-16 4.3 4 12-16
3.2 23 14-28 4.3 5 07-06
3.2 24 12-16 4.3 6 05-25
3.2 25 12-16 4.3 7 05-25
3.2 26 12-16 4.3 8 14-28
3.2 27 12-16 4.3 9 12-16
3.2 28 12-16 4.3 10 12-16
3.2 29 14-28
3.2 30 14-28 4.4 1 12-16
3.2 31 14-28 4.4 2 12-16
3.2 32 12-16
3.2 33 12-16 4.5 1 12-16
3.2 34 12-16 4.5 2 12-16
3.2 35 12-16
3.2 36 12-16 4.6 1 14-28
3.2 37 12-16
3.2 38 12-16 4.7 1 12-16
3.2 39 12-16
3.2 40 12-16 4.8 1 12-16
3.3 1 12-16 4.9 1 14-28

3.3 2 02-50 4.9 2 12-16
3.3 3 02-20 4.9 3 12-16
3.3 4 02-20 4.9 4 12-16
3.3 5 14-28 4.9 5 12-16
3.3 6 14-28 4.9 6 04-36
3.3 7 14-28 4.9 7 06-14
3.3 8 14-28 4.9 8 06-14
3.3 9 14-28 4.9 9 04-36
3.3 10 14-40 4.9 10 04-36
3.3 11 14-40
5.0 P6 1 04-36
4.0 P6 1 12-16
4.0 P6 2 12-16 5.1 1 12-16
5.1 2 02-20
4.1 1 12-16 5.1 3 04-07
4.1 2 02-50 5.1 4 04-49
5.1 5 04-49
4.2 1 09-04 5.1 6 02-20
APPROVED EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
A 16-25 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
5.1 7 02-20 5.1 18 04-36

5.1 8 04-49 5.1 19 04-36
5.1 9 04-49 5.1 20 05-25
5.1 10 04-49 5.1 21 04-36
5.1 11 12-16 5.1 22 02-20
5.1 12 04-49 5.1 23 02-20
5.1 13 05-25
5.1 14 04-36 5.2 1 12-16
5.1 15 02-20
5.1 16 04-36 5.3 1 04-36
5.1 17 04-36
LOG OF NORMAL APPROVED REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 02-20
EASA approval No 10041911
on October 24, 2012
on February 19, 2014
Main Points Modification of the authorized fuel
Revised
0.0.P5, 2.5 page 4
information
Deleted
None.
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
A 16-25 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
LOG OF NORMAL REVISIONS (CONT'D)
Approved on October 28, 2014

NORMAL REVISION 14 date code 14-28 under the authority of EASA Design
Organization Approval No.21J.056
Incorporation of new brad "Airbus Helicopters" instead "Eurocopter"
Main Points
Incorporation of customer remarks.
Revised 0.0.P1 - 0.0.P5 - 3.0.P6 - 3.1 p.2 - 3.2 p.4, 6, 7, 9, 11, 14, 18, 23, 29, 30,
information 31 - 3.3 p.5 to 11 - 4.3 p.8 - 4.6 p.1 - 4.9 p.1
Deleted
None.
information
Incorporation of new prohibited maneuvers. Limitation duration of 2 min
Main Points for high amperage in yellow range.
Paragraph Emergency exit moved to section 3.3 9.
Revised 0.0.P5 - 2.0.P6 p.2 - 2.1 p.1 - 2.3 p.6 - 2.5 p.6 - 2.7 p.2 - 3.0.P6 p.1 -
information 3.3 p.10 & 11
Deleted
None.
information
EASA approval No.10059787
on October 17, 2016
Addition of "Dual GTN 750H GNSS RNAV system" in the Single Pilot IFR
Main Points
requirement.
Revised
0.0.P5 pages 1 to 4; 2.3 page 6.
information
Deleted
None.
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
A 16-25 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
CONTENTS
2.1 GENERAL PAGE
1 APPLICABILITY ...................................................................................................... 1
2 APPROVED TYPES OF OPERATION .................................................................... 1
3 CERTIFICATION CRITERIA ................................................................................... 1
4 PROHIBITED MANEUVERS ................................................................................... 1
5 MINIMUM FLIGHT CREW / MAXIMUM PERSONNEL
TRANSPORT CAPABILITY ..................................................................................... 2
6 INSTRUMENT MARKINGS ..................................................................................... 2
2.2 WEIGHT AND CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS

1 WEIGHT LIMITS ..................................................................................................... 1
2 CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS .............................................................................. 1
2.3 FLIGHT ENVELOPE LIMITS

1 AIRSPEED LIMITS (IN FLIGHT) ............................................................................. 1
2 APPROVED ALTITUDE/TEMPERATURE ENVELOPE .......................................... 3
3 HEIGHT/VELOCITY DIAGRAM ............................................................................. 4
4 LOAD FACTOR ...................................................................................................... 4
5 IFR FLIGHT ............................................................................................................. 6
2.4 VEHICLE LIMITATIONS

1 ROTOR ................................................................................................................... 1
2 FIRST LIMITATION INSTRUMENT ........................................................................ 2
3 N1 ......................................................................................................................... 4
4 FREE TURBINE SPEED......................................................................................... 4

2.0.P6
A 04-36 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
2.5 SYSTEM LIMITATIONS PAGE

1 ENGINE .................................................................................................................. 1
2 GEARBOX .............................................................................................................. 3
3 HYDRAULIC ........................................................................................................... 3
4 FUEL ......................................................................................................................4
5 ELECTRICAL ......................................................................................................... 6
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LIMITATIONS

1 TAXIING LIMITATIONS .......................................................................................... 1
2 TAKEOFF AND LANDING ON SLOPES ................................................................ 1
3 HEATING SYSTEM OPERATION .......................................................................... 1
4 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ................................................................................. 1
5 MANDATORY EQUIPMENT .................................................................................. 1
2.7 PLACARDS
1 OPERATING LIMITATIONS PLACARD ................................................................. 1
2 STANDBY STATIC PRESSURE SYSTEM OPERATION....................................... 1
3 FLOOR LOADINGS................................................................................................ 2
4 ORDINANCE LIGHTS (IF INSTALLED) ................................................................. 2
APPROVED EC 155 B1
2.0.P6
A 14-40 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 2.1
GENERAL
1 APPLICABILITY
COMPLIANCE WITH THE LIMITATIONS PRESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION IS
MANDATORY.
The limits specified herein apply to the basic aircraft version.
Any further restrictions arising from optional equipment systems are specified in the
relevant SUPPLEMENTS.
2 APPROVED TYPES OF OPERATION

Helicopter operation is approved, except in icing conditions, for:
Day and night IFR - VFR
3 CERTIFICATION CRITERIA
The helicopter is approved in the TRANSPORT category under JAR 29 first issue,
CATEGORY B and CATEGORY A.
CATEGORY A operation is covered by SUPPLEMENT 1.
4 PROHIBITED MANEUVERS
The following are prohibited:
Aerobatics.
Running landings at Gs > 35 kt (64 km/h) except emergency maneuver and
associated training.
Intentional running landings on soft ground.
Intentional full autorotation landings.
Intentional single-engine flight in normal operation, except for maintenance test
flight.
Single-engine training and demonstration flight except training mode (refer to
Sup.56).
Intentional use of engine backup except in case of FADEC failure.
External loads in IMC.
Back course approaches.
Use of CRHT in IMC or over the ground.
Deliberate penetration into clouds with massive vertical development.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
2.1
A 14-40 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
5 MINIMUM FLIGHT CREW / MAXIMUM PERSONNEL

TRANSPORT CAPABILITY
Minimum flight crew:
one pilot in right-hand seat .
Maximum number of seats (including flight crew): 15.
6 INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
6.1 COLOR CODE AND MARKINGS
6.2 CPDS ANIMATION LOGIC

When a parameter reaches a limitation, the numerical value appears underscored.
When the parameter reaches the red area, the color ranges are filled.

2.1
A 02-20 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 2.2
WEIGHT AND CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS
1 WEIGHT LIMITS
Maximum approved gross weight................... 4920 kg (10846 lb).
CAUTION
USE OF WEIGHT ABOVE 4850 KG (10692 LB) IS SUBJECT TO EMBODIMENT OF

ALL EXTREME COLD WEATHER KITS, MOD DESCRIBED IN SECTION 2-3 PAGE 3,
AND IS LIMITED TO -30C< OAT +50C.
Depending on outside conditions (altitude and temperature), the maximum takeoff or

landing weight shall be limited to the maximum twin-engine IGE hover weight
(SECTION 5.1, figure 4) without exceeding 4920 kg (10846 lb).
Minimum approved gross weight..................... OAT > -5C: 3000 kg(6614 lb).
-5C > OAT > -25C: 3200 kg(7055 lb).
-25C > OAT > -40C: 3400 kg(7496 lb).
Maximum gross weight for taxiing ................... 4950 kg (10913 lb).
2 CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS
2.1 LONGITUDINAL CG POSITION
Figure 1 plots the approved extreme CG positions versus aircraft weight.

The CG datum is located 4 m (157.5 in) forward of the main rotor centerline.

2.2
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 1 - CG Position Versus Aircraft Weight
2.2 LATERAL CG POSITION
The CG datum is the aircraft symmetry plane.

2.2
A 04-49 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 2.3
FLIGHT ENVELOPE LIMITS
1 AIRSPEED LIMITS (IN FLIGHT)

1.1 POWER-ON FLIGHT
Absolute VNE :
- -1500 Hp 2000 ft ......................................... 175 kt (324 km/h).
- 2000 Hp 4000 ft ......................................... 175 kt less 1.5 kt per 1000ft
(324 km/h - 9 km/h per 1000m).
- Hp 4000 ft ..................................................... 172 kt less 3 kt per 1000 ft
(318.5 km/h -18 km/h 1000 m).
1.2 POWER-OFF FLIGHT

Absolute VNE ............................................................ 135 kt (250 km/h).
Changes with altitude :
VNE POWER OFF = VNE POWER ON - 40 kt (74 km/h).
NOTE
When the VNE is exceeded in power-on
flight, the PFD speed scale marking is
enhanced with a red band.

2.3
A 02-20 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.3 DOORS OPEN OR REMOVED

The VNE to be taken into account is the value given on either drawing hereafter
adapted to the doors configuration.
Cockpit doors fitted.
Cockpit doors removed.
CAUTION
THE OPERATOR MUST HOLD THE SLIDING DOOR WHEN OPERATING IT

2.3
A 12-16 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL

2.3
A 04-36 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
5 IFR FLIGHT
5.1 MINIMUM FLIGHT AND NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR

IFR FLIGHT
5.1.1 Two pilots

A standby horizon - Backup altimeter and air speed indicator.
Two radio-communication units.
Two radio-navigation units.
AP.
SAS.
5.1.2 Single pilot

Equipment in paragraph 5.1.1 plus:
Radio magnetic indicator (RMI) or DUAL GPS 400 W installation or dual GTN
750H GNSS RNAV system.
DME indicator.
NOTE
Communication and navigation systems must be suited to the ground
installations. The operational regulations in force must be observed. They may
call for additional equipment which must be approved and operational.
5.2 IFR OPERATING ENVELOPE
5.2.1 Fully operational autopilot

With 4 axis upper modes: V min. = 30 kt.
Other cases: V min. = 70 kt.
5.2.2 SAS mode (After AP failure)

IMC
- V min. = Vy or 70 kt (IAS), whichever is greater.
- VNE = 120 kt (IAS).
5.3 MAXIMUM APPROACH GRADIENT ON GLIDE SLOPE

Glide slope approaches are authorized up to 6.5.
5.4 DECISION HEIGHT

Decision height must be selected according to applicable requirements, and not
below 100 ft.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
2.3
A 16-25 Page 6
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 2.4
VEHICLE LIMITATIONS
1 ROTOR
1.1 MAIN ROTOR RPM LIMITS
: Minimum stabilised
: Max NR Power off
(3 Hz chopped tone).................. 330 rpm
(10 Hz chopped tone)................ 375 rpm
1.2 ROTOR BRAKE LIMITATIONS

Maximum rotor speed for rotor brake application....................................... 120 rpm.
Minimum waiting time between consecutive brakings.................................... 5 min.
Do not exceed three consecutive braking applications.
After three braking applications, wait for at least 10 min.
CAUTION
ROTOR BRAKE APPLICATION IS PROHIBITED PRIOR TO

ENGINE SHUTDOWN.
1.3 RPM HIGH LIMITATION

Use of RPM HIGH is limited to CAT A helipad or increased slope operations for
IAS < Vy.

2.4
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.4 WIND ENVELOPE FOR ROTOR STARTING AND STOPPING
2 FIRST LIMITATION INSTRUMENT

2.1 TWIN-ENGINE DISPLAY
(See NOTE 2)
LIMIT FLI marking N1 (%) TOT (C) Torque (%)
MCP 8.8 96.7 to 99.1 891 86
MTOP (5 min) 10 98.9 to101.3 929 100
Transient 10.7 100 to 102 944 107

(see NOTE 1) (see NOTE 2)

2.4
A 05-25 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 2.5
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
1 ENGINE
1.1 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE
NOTE
Upon starting, the pressure can reach 8.8 bars without damaging the engine.
If pressure exceeds 8.8 bars in flight, refer to TURBOMECA Maintenance
Manual.
Oil pressure in flight:

- Minimum for N1 > 85% ................................................................ 1.8 bar (26 psi)
- Minimum for N1 between 70% and 85%...................................... 1.5 bar (22 psi)

2.5
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.2 AUTHORIZED ENGINE LUBRICANTS

Description NATO symbol SPECIFICATIONS REMARKS
FRANCE USA UK
ASTO 560
NORMAL USE
CASTROL 5000
ESSO TURBO OIL 2380
Synthetic 0.156
MOBIL JET OIL II (or ELF TURBO JET
5cSt at 98.9C on MIL.L.23699 II)
average
MOBIL RM 254
TURBO NYCOIL 600
OIL 500 (ASTO 500)
EXXON 2197
TOTAL AERO TURBINE 535
OTHER OILS: USE AUTHORIZED BUT NOT RECOMMENDED. SHALL NOT BE USED FOR HIGH
TEMPERATURE 30C.
CASTROL 325
Synthetic fluid CASTROL 3C
from 3 to 3.5cSt at 0.148 MIL.L.7808 ESSO TURBO OIL 2389
98.9C MOBIL OIL AVREX 256
TURBONICOIL 160
0.150 AIR 3514 ELF JET SYNTHETIC OIL 15

TURBO NICOIL 13B
Synthetic fluid AEROSHELL TURBINE OIL 390
3.9cSt at 98.9C
NOTE
The oils mentioned under OTHER OILS may be the subject of particular
recommendations from the engine manufacturer.
For changing from one oil trade mark or specification to another, the oil system
must be flushed as prescribed in TURBOMECA Maintenance Manual.

2.5
A 12-16 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
2 GEARBOX
2.1 MGB OIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE
2.2 AUTHORIZED GEARBOX LUBRICANTS

Oils with different specifications must not be mixed.
SHELL is not authorized.
SPECIFICATIONS
NATO (At latest issue or amendment)
DESIGNATION REMARKS
CODE
FRANCE U.S.A. U.K.
NORMAL USE Mixing oils with
Mineral oil different
0.155 AIR 3525 MIL.L.6086 DTD.581
-20C < OAT <+50C specifications is
for starting not allowed
-40C < OAT < +50C SHELL is not
for flight allowed
COLD WEATHER Mixing oils with

Synthetic oil MIL.L.7808 J different
-40C < OAT < 0C 0.148 specifications is
for starting and flight not allowed
3 HYDRAULIC
3.1 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE

2.5
A 05-25 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.2 HYDRAULIC FLUID SPECIFICATIONS

Hydraulic fluids: Must comply with specifications:
- MIL-H-83282 for all temperature ranges.
4 FUEL
4.1 PRESSURE AND LOW LEVEL
Minimum engine starting pressure:

- Bleed phase preceding starting phase .....................................0.40 bar (5.8 psi).
- Starting phase ..........................................................................0.25 bar (3.6 psi).
4.2 AUTHORIZED FUELS
4.2.1 NORMAL FUELS

Fuel NATO SPECIFICATIONS Limit Temp Without
addition of additive in
A/C tanks
Type Symbol USA UK FRANCE RUSSIA Including Min. C Max C
Anti-freeze
1 Kerosene 50 F34 MIL-T-83 133 D.ENG.RD AIR 3405 Yes -50 50
(AVTUR-FSII) JP8 2453 F34 -
JP8
2 Kerosene 50 F35 ASTM-D-1655 D.ENG.RD AIR 3405 No -30 50
(AVTUR) Jet A1 2494 F35 -
JET A1
3 Kerosene ASTM-D-1655 - No -30 50
Jet A
4 High flash point F43 D.ENG.RD AIR 3404 No -30 50
Kerosene 2498 F43 -
(AVCAT) JP5
5 High flash point F44 MIL-J-5624 D.ENG.RD AIR 3404 Yes -40 50
Kerosene JP5 JP5 2452 F44 -
(AVCAT FSII)
6 Kerosene GOST No -30 +43C
TS-1, RT
10227
7 Chinese fuel No -30 50
Standard
National PRC -
No 3 Jet Fuel

2.5
A 13-48 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
4.2.2 ALTERNATIVE FUELS

These fuels shall be subjected to operating restrictions.
Fuel NATO SPECIFICATIONS Limit Temp Without
addition of additive in
A/C tanks
Type Symbol USA UK FRANCE Including Min. C Max C
Anti-freeze
8 Large cut F40 MIL-T-5624 D.ENG.RD AIR 3407
(AVTAG FS II) JP4 2454 Yes -50 +43C
JP4
9 Large cut (F45)* D.ENG.RD
(AVTAG) 2486 No -30 +43C
JP4
* Abandoned NATO symbol

JP4 operating envelope
Use of JP4 is limited to Hp=15000 ft
4.3 AUTHORIZED FUEL ADDITIVES

Anti-icing Additives:
S748 NATO symbol: MIL-1-27686, D.ENG.RD 2451 (AL-31), AIR 3652B,
or S1745 NATO symbol: MIL-1-85 470A, D.ENG.RD 2451 (AL-41), AIR 3652B.
Maximum concentration by volume: 0.15%.
Minimum concentration by volume: 0.10%.
Anti-icing additive must be used for OAT lower than -30C.
Antistatic Additive:
SHELL ASA-3 (maximum concentration 0.0001% by volume).
DUPONT STADIS 450 (maximum concentration 0.0003% by volume).
SIGBOL (TU38-101741) (maximum concentration 0.0005% by volume).
Antioxidant, Metal Deactivator, Corrosion Inhibitor:
According to the approved specifications in force.
Fungicide Additive:
BIODOR J.F type.
- Limited to a treatment every 500 operating hours or 3 months (curative
treatment).
- Unlimited (preventive treatment).

2.5
A 12-16 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
5 ELECTRICAL
5.1 VOLTMETER - AMMETER
Maximum consecutive engine starts or cranking cycles ....................................... 5.
NOTE
The maximum amperage limitation is not applicable during engine starting or
during the first minute of battery charging.
5.2 FLIGHT WITHOUT PASSENGER

Without passenger in cabin able to disconnect the equipment items connected on
ancillary connectors, the total intensity on the 3 ancillary connectors must not
exceed 17.5 A.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
2.5
A 14-40 Page 6
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 2.7
PLACARDS
1 OPERATING LIMITATIONS PLACARD

On canopy horizontal crossmember:
DAY AND NIGHT IFR - VFR
2 STANDBY STATIC PRESSURE SYSTEM OPERATION

Beside the control:
A placard indicates the corrections to be made, on the pilot indications only, in the
event of operation of the standby static pressure system.
STANDBY STATIC PRESSURE VENT

CLOSE THE DOORS AND WINDOWS AND SWITCH OFF THE VENTILATION
SYSTEM
CRUISING CLIMBING
INDICATED AIRSPEED (IAS) kt kt
ALTIMETER (HP) ft ft
NOTE 1
This placard is customized for each helicopter.
(See SECTION 7.10)
NOTE 2
The corrections are mean values; they may vary by 50%.
The values given for level flight approximately correspond to the best-range
cruising speed.

2.7
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
3 FLOOR LOADINGS
Inside the cargo bay door On the 9 bulkhead
Or Or
MAX. FLOOR LOADING:

61.5 POUNDS / SQ.FEET
MAX.
MAX. WEIGHT: FLOOR LOADING
661 Lb 125 POUNDS / SQ. Ft
4 ORDINANCE LIGHTS (IF INSTALLED)

"FASTEN SEATBELTS" and "NO SMOKING" ordinance lights are mounted in the
cabin.
or
or
APPROVED EC 155 B1
2.7
A 14-40 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
CONTENTS
3.1 GENERAL PAGE
1 LANDING EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ............................................................ 1
2 WARNING AND CAUTION ADVISORY PROVISIONS......................................... 1
3 AUDIO WARN ....................................................................................................... 2
3.2 FAILURES INDICATED BY ALARM LIGHTS

1 SYMBOLS USED .................................................................................................. 1
2 POWER PLANT FAILURES.................................................................................. 2
3 FUEL SYSTEM FAILURES ................................................................................... 8
4 GEARBOX FAILURES ........................................................................................ 10
5 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FAILURES ..................................................................... 13
6 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM FAILURES .................................................................... 16
7 MISCELLANEOUS FAILURES ........................................................................... 22
8 AP FAILURES ..................................................................................................... 24
9 PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM FAILURES ................................................................. 30
10 FCDS (PFD-ND) FAILURES ............................................................................... 30
11 CPDS (VEMD-CAD) FAILURES ......................................................................... 34
3.3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

1 AUTOROTATION LANDING ................................................................................ 1
2 ENGINE FAILURE ................................................................................................ 2
3 TAIL ROTOR FAILURE ........................................................................................ 6
4 LANDING GEAR SYSTEM FAILURES................................................................. 7
5 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM FAILURE ................................................................ 8
6 SMOKE IN CABIN ................................................................................................ 9
7 ICING CONDITIONS .......................................................................................... 10
8 STATIC SYSTEM FAILURE ............................................................................... 10
9 EMERGENCY EXIT ............................................................................................ 10
10 EMERGENCY EVACUATION ............................................................................. 11
11 ABNORMAL VIBRATION IN FLIGHT ................................................................. 11
12 ROTOR BRAKE INOPERATIVE ......................................................................... 11
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.0.P6
A 14-40 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 3.1
GENERAL
1 LANDING EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

The emergency procedures describe the actions the pilot must perform according to
the various cases of failure. However, according to the high diversity of the outside
factors and type of terrain overflown, the pilot may have to adapt to the conditions from
his experience. To help the pilot in his decision, the following four expressions are used
LAND (OR DITCH) IMMEDIATELY
Self-explanatory
LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE

Emergency conditions, land at the nearest site where a safe landing can be made.
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
Land at the nearest site at which technical assistance may be expected. Extended flight
is not recommended.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

Continue the flight as planned. Have repairs performed at destination in compliance
with the Maintenance Manual.
2 WARNING AND CAUTION ADVISORY PROVISIONS

The Warning panels, the Caution Advisory display, the flight control screens and fuel
management panel group all the Red and Amber alarms.
The illumination of a red light at the Warning Panel causes the WARN light to come on
on the instrument panel.
NOTE
After any failure indicated by the WARN light or light on the CAD, the crew must reset the
indicating system by acknowledging the alarm.

3.1
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
3 AUDIO WARN
In the ICS headphones:
An audio alarm sounds when:
Low frequency audio signal ............................................... NR 330 rpm

(3 Hz chopped tone)
High frequency audio signal .............................................. NR 375 rpm

(10 Hz chopped tone)
stroke sounds when LMT illuminates for:
On ground when the cyclic stick is moved too far from neutral position, inducing
excessive stress in the MRH.
DIFF Multigong = difference in N1 between the 2

N1 engines > 6%
FLI Gong: Power over limit.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.1
A 14-28 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 3.2
FAILURES INDICATED BY ALARM LIGHTS
1 SYMBOLS USED
Caution and Warning lights
- On Red Warning Panel
ENG ENG
# #
OUT ON
- On CAD and FCDS
ROTOR BRK ROTOR BRK
OUT ON
- On fuel management panel and control panels
OFF OFF
OUT ON
Presentation
- The actions that the pilot shall be able to perform from memory are written in bold
characters.

3.2
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
2 POWER PLANT FAILURES

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
IN FLIGHT
ENG
1 - Attain single-engine flight conditions
FIRE
- Affected engine
+ 2 - Fuel shutoff control lever .....Aft
3 - Rotary selector ......................OFF
1 SHOT 2
4 - ENG #......................................OFF
FIRE FIRE 5 - Booster pumps ........................OFF

6 - SHOT1 ....................................Strike
FAIL
FAIL FAIL
FAIL
+ EXT
EXT EXT
Fuel shutoff
control lever red 1 min later
light
ENG FIRE ENG

ENG FIRE
FIRE
+ +
FIRE FAIL
FAIL FIRE
FIRE FAIL
FAIL
7 - SHOT 2 ........................ Strike LAND AS SOON AS

PRACTICABLE
EXT
EXT EXT
1 min later
ENG FIRE ENG

ENG FIRE
FIRE
+ +
FIRE FAIL
FAIL FIRE
FIRE FAIL
FAIL
LAND AS SOON AS
LAND IMMEDIATELY
PRACTICABLE
HOVER, TAKEOFF, LANDING
LAND IMMEDIATELY
Apply ground fire procedure

3.2
A 12-16 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
ON GROUND
1 - Fuel shutoff control lever ...................... Aft

2 Rotary selector....................................... OFF
3 - ENG 1 and 2 ............................................ OFF
4 - Booster pumps ......................................... OFF
5 - SHOT 1 and SHOT 2................................ Strike
6 - Rotor brake control at NR < 120 rpm........ Aft
Evacuate aircraft and fight fire from outside.

3.2
A 12-16 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1 - Engine 1, 2 and MGB oil

OIL temperature indicator ............ Check
TEMP
Engine 1 and/or 2 Two engines MGB overheated One engine

or MGB overheated Refer to Gearbox overheated
temperature failures
excessive
2 - IAS ....... Vy 2 - Attain single-engine

flight conditions.
- Affected engine
LAND 3 - ENG #............ OFF
IMMEDIATELY
(Refer to SECTION
3.3 2.5)
LAND AS SOON
AS PRACTICABLE
ENG 1 - ENGINE 1 OR 2 OIL

PRESSURE INDICATOR ..... Check
#
+ P < 1.5 bar P > 1.5 bar

Reminding light
on cockpit
overhead panel
2 - Attain single-engine flight 2 - Oil pressure............. Monitor

conditions
Affected engine
3 - ENG #............................. OFF CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Engine 1 or 2
oil pressure (Refer to SECTION 3.3 2.5)
< 1.5 bar
LAND AS SOON AS
PRACTICABLE
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.2
A 14-28 Page 4
RCA FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Partial power loss on engine with low N1.
DIFF 1 - Attain single engine flight conditions.
N1 2 - OEI rating................................................. Selected as required.
3 - Engine parameters................................... Monitor.
+ 4 - Prepare for possible engine failure.
Audio warning
+ LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
HI CAUTION
Difference of THE FLI POINTER REPRESENTS THE ENGINE

N1 > 6% AT THE HIGHEST POWER SETTING. THERE IS A
between both POWER SHORTAGE.
engines PERFORM A PRECAUTIONARY LANDING
WITHOUT HOVERING.
FADEC FAIL 1 - OEI limit ...............................................Select as required.
2 - NORMAL/BACKUP switch...................BACKUP.
+
Reminding light on WA R N IN G
cockpit overhead
panel W H EN TH E EN G I N E I S SW I TC H ED TO B A C K - U P
+ M O D E, I T I S FO R B I D D EN TO M O V E TH E O TH ER
HI EN G I N E TO I D L O R TO O FF
+ NOTE
Avoid rapid movement at collective pitch.
FF + END
Collective axis of Autopilot must no longer be used.
Major governor
Failure CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
CAUTION
NOTE
THE BACKUP MODE MUST BE KEPT UNTIL THE
x Metering unit
END OF THE FLIGHT. IT IS FORBIDDEN TO
frozen at fuel
REVERT TO NORMAL.
flow value
upon failure. PERFORM A CAUTIOUS APPROACH AT LOW
SPEED. (AROUND 40 kt).
CAUTION : THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE REMOVED FROM THE MANUAL UNTIL MODIFICATION
AMS No. 07-22B52 (PA N8.30) HAVE BEEN EMBODIED TO THE AIRCRAFT.

3.2
A 09-04 Page 5
*RC*
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Partial power loss on engine with low N1.
DIFF 1 - Attain single-engine flight conditions.
N1 2 - OEI rating ................................................. Selected as required.
3 - Engine parameters ................................... Monitor.
+ 4 - Prepare for possible engine failure.
Audio warning
+
HI
CAUTION
Difference of
N1 > 6% THE FLI POINTER REPRESENTS THE ENGINE
between both AT THE HIGHEST POWER SETTING. THERE IS A POWER LOSS.
engines PERFORM A PRECAUTIONARY LANDING WITHOUT HOVERING.
FADEC FAIL 1 - OEI limit ............................................... Select as required.
2 - NORMAL/BACKUP switch ................... BACKUP.

+
Reminding light on WA R N IN G
cockpit overhead
panel W H EN TH E EN G I N E I S SW I TC H ED TO B A C K - U P
+ M O D E, I T I S FO R B I D D EN TO M O V E TH E O TH ER
HI EN G I N E TO I D LE O R TO O FF
+
NOTE
FF + END
Avoid rapid collective pitch movements.
Major governor
Failure CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
NOTE
CAUTION
Metering unit
frozen at fuel THE BACKUP MODE MUST BE KEPT UNTIL THE
flow value END OF THE FLIGHT. IT IS FORBIDDEN TO
upon failure. REVERT TO NORMAL.
PERFORM A CAUTIOUS APPROACH AT LOW
SPEED. (AROUND 40 kt).

3.2
A 12-16 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Avoid rapid collective pitch movements
GOV
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Minor governor
failure. NOTE
In this case, governing is ensured by back-up laws which may
cause the governed RPM to vary.
Upon return from flight, display the failure on the system status
page before switching off the battery.
ENG CHIP 1- Chip pulse system ......................... Activate
RH or LH ENG CHIP ENG CHIP
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT 2 - Wait 30 s ..................... Activate
ENG CHIP ENG CHIP

CONTINUE THE FLIGHT 3 - Attain single-engine flight conditions
Affected engine
Chip detected on 4 - ENG # .............................. IDLE
engine 1 or 2 (Refer to SECTION 3.3 2.4)
5 - Engine parameters........... Monitor
Unsteady Steady
6 - ENG # ............. OFF
(Refer to SECTION 3.3 2.5)
LAND AS SOON
AS PRACTICABLE
During approach:
ENG # ..... FLT
NOTE
In case of second ENG CHIP on the same engine, apply

procedure from item 1. A maximum of 2 chip pulse procedures is
possible during the flight
In case of third ENG CHIP on the same engine during the flight,
apply procedure from item 3.
In any case, after landing, apply the instructions in the
Maintenance Manual.
ENG CHP CT NOTE
RH or LH One or both engine chip detectors systems have failed.
Engine 1 or 2 chip
detection fault CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.2
A 14-28 Page 6
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
FIRE FIRE
FAIL FAIL
RH or LH
Engine fire
detection
inoperative.
EXT CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

RH or LH NOTE
Pressure drop or
corresponding In the event of fire, use the other extinguisher
extinguisher (press both push-buttons).
empty.
Engine oil X.X

overpressure or 1 - Pressure/Temperature ...................... Monitor
low pressure
2 - Attain single-engine flight conditions

- Affected engine
3 - ENG # .................................. OFF
Engine oil over 1 - Attain single-engine flight conditions
temperature
- Affected engine
2 - ENG # ................................... IDLE (Refer to SECTION 3.3 2.4)
Temperature < 115C Temperature > 115C

LAND AS SOON AS 3 - ENG # .......................... OFF
PRACTICABLE (Refer to SECTION 3.3 2.5)
During approach: LAND AS SOON AS
3 - ENG # ............................. FLT PRACTICABLE
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.2
A 14-28 Page 7
FLIGHT MANUAL
3 FUEL SYSTEM FAILURES

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1 - Booster pumps ON ..................Check
FUEL 2 - Fuel quantities .........................Check
Q
+ <5% 5%
QTY 3 - Make sure that the group is System jet pumps clogged
free from leaks
1 or 2 on fuel 4 - Transfer .................. Perform Avoid sudden maneuvers and

management fore-and-aft attitude variations
panel
CAUTION CAUTION
IF TRANSFER IMPOSSIBLE, IN THIS CASE, THE UNUSABLE FUEL

5 min AT MCP REMAIN QUANTITIES ARE INCREASED BY
BEFORE SHUTDOWN OF THE APPROX:
ENGINE CONCERNED. 130 kg FOR LH GROUP
Fuel quantity in
20 kg FOR RH GROUP.
corresponding
5 - Attain single-engine flight
feeder tank
conditions
14 kg.
LAND AS SOON AS LAND AS SOON AS
PRACTICABLE PRACTICABLE
1 - Booster pumps ON ..................Check

FUEL 2 - Fuel quantities .........................Check
Q
+ <5% 5%
System jet pumps clogged
QTY LAND IMMEDIATELY Avoid sudden maneuvers and
fore-and-aft attitude variations
1 and 2 on fuel
management CAUTION
panel WARNING
IN THIS CASE, THE UNUSABLE FUEL
5 min OF FLIGHT AT QUANTITIES ARE INCREASED BY
APPROX:
MCP ARE REMAINING 130 kg FOR LH GROUP
Fuel quantity in 20 kg FOR RH GROUP.
corresponding
feeder tank
LAND AS SOON AS
14 kg. PRACTICABLE

3.2
A 02-50 Page 8
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
FUEL 1 - Engine parameters .............. Monitor

+
Unsteady Steady
FILT
2 - Attain single-engine flight
1 or 2 on fuel conditions
management Affected engine CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
panel 3 - ENG # ....................... OFF
LAND AS SOON AS
PRACTICABLE
Pre-clogging of CAUTION
corresponding
fuel filter ILLUMINATION OF BOTH FILT LIGHTS ON FUEL
MANAGEMENT PANEL (FUEL CONTAMINATED):
REDUCE POWER IF THE ENGINE PARAMETERS ARE
UNSTEADY.
FUEL 1 - Fuel pressure indicator..................................... Check

2 - Flight altitude .................................................... Reduce if possible
+ 3 - High power ....................................................... Avoid
4 - Engine parameters ........................................... Monitor
PRS
1 or 2 on fuel
management Unsteady Steady
panel 5 - Attain single-engine flight
conditions
Affected engine
Fuel pressure 6 - ENG # .............................OFF CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
< 0.25 bar (Refer to SECTION 3.3 2.5)
LAND AS SOON AS
PRACTICABLE
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.2
A 14-28 Page 9
FLIGHT MANUAL
4 GEARBOX FAILURES
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1 - Power............................................................................Reduce
MGB 2 - MGB oil pressure < 0.6 bar ...........................................Confirm
P
+ LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
MGB P NOTE
+ If safe landing is impossible:
Reduce the power to a minimum for the continuation of
MGB AUX P the flight (Vy in level flight).
Land within 25 minutes following
appearance of the alarm.
MGB oil pressure
< 0. 6 bar
1 - MGB temperature,
OIL engines 1 and 2.......................Check
TEMP
MGB or engine 1 MGB temperature > 120C Temperature excessive on

and/or 2 one or two engine(s)
temperature 2 - IAS.......................... 120 kt See Engine failures
excessive.
OIL OIL
OIL
TEMP TEMP
TEMP
LAND AS SOON AS CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

PRACTICABLE

3.2
A 12-16 Page 10
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
MGB P 1 - MGB oil pressure and temperature ............................... Monitor

2 - Reduce the power to the minimum compatible with the flight
Main pump conditions.
failure.
NOTE
The auxiliary pump ensures lubrication of the MGB.
The oil is no longer cooled.
MGB AUX P NOTE

Auxiliary pump The main pump normally supplies MGB lubrication.
failure
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Except for intentional cases on takeoff and landing, check:
RPM H
1 - RPM .............................................................................. NORM
NR speed
selected at
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
360 rpm.
NOTE
ILS informations are unusable
VOR informations are degraded
MGB CHIP 1 - MGB oil pressure and temperature ............................... Monitor
Chip detected in
MGB.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.2
A 14-28 Page 11
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
TGB CHIP
Chip detected in
TGB.
MGB CHP CT NOTE

or MGB or TGB chip detector system has failed.
TGB CHP CT
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
MGB or TGB chip
detection fault.
ROTOR BRK 1 - Check rotor brake ....................Released in detent.
Rotor brake not

fully released or
switch failure ROTOR BRK ROTOR
ROTOR BRK
BRK
- Switch failure
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
1 - Pressure ........................................................................Monitor
MGB oil pressure

excessive

3.2
A 02-20 Page 12
FLIGHT MANUAL
5 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FAILURES

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
LG PUMP 1 - LG PUMP .................................... NORM
LG PUMP LG PUMP
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

Emergency
system hydraulic 2 - Landing gear ......................... Extend
pressure If the landing gear fails to extend:
> 95 bar.
3 - Emergency Landing gear
NOTE extension procedure .............. Perform
Possible LH LAND AS SOON AS

hydraulic PRACTICABLE
pressure drop
and
HYD
LH
+
SERVO
HYD NOTE
Loss of the main servocontrol upper body and tail
RH servocontrol RH body.
+ 1 - Restore the aircraft to level attitude.
SERVO Avoid sudden maneuvers, limit bank angle to 30 and avoid high
rate of descent.
No. 2 system LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

hydraulic
pressure
< 85 bar.

3.2
A 12-16 Page 13
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
NOTE
HYD
Loss of the main servocontrol lower body and tail
LH servocontrol LH body.
+ 1 - Restore the aircraft to level attitude.
Avoid sudden maneuvers, limit bank angle to 30 and avoid high
SERVO rate of descent.
CAUTION
DO NOT SET THE HYD ISOLATE

SWITCH TO CUT OFF.
No. 1 system LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

hydraulic
pressure NOTE
< 85 bar.
Extend the landing gear using the emergency system.
Brake application possible on accumulator.
HYD LEV NOTE
Loss of the tail servocontrol RH body.
RH
1 - HYD ISOL ........................................ CUT OFF
+
2 - Level attitude. ................................ Restore
SERVO 3 - No. 2 hydraulic system pressure ..... Check
Pressure drop Pressure normal
No. 2 system
reservoir level HYD
< 2 l. LAND AS SOON AS
RH PRACTICABLE
4 - RH HYD + SERVO
illumination procedure ... Apply
HYD LEV 1 - No. 1 hydraulic system pressure ..... Check
LH
Pressure drop Pressure normal
No. 1 system
reservoir level
< 3 l. HYD SERVO LAND AS SOON AS
+ PRACTICABLE
LH
2 - LH HYD + SERVO
illumination procedure ... Apply
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.2
A 14-28 Page 14
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
(Cont'd)
3 - Before landing:
- Ensure that ancillary accumulator pressure is at least 100
bars.
4 - After landing:
- Monitor the pressure of the ancillary accumulator.
CAUTION
IF THE PRESSURE OF THE ANCILLARY ACCUMULATOR
DROPS BELOW 100 BARS, CONSIDER THAT WHEEL
BRAKING IS LOST.
SERVO
Jamming of a
primary distributor
valve of a main or CAUTION
tail servocontrol DUE TO A POSSIBLE INCREASE IN LOADS,
or AP COULD BE DEGRADED.
detection failure IN THIS CASE, IT MAY BE NECESSARY
TO DISENGAGE UPPER MODES OR EVEN TO DISENGAGE
AP AND ENGAGE SAS.
No. 1 or 2 hydraulic
system pressure
excessive

3.2
A 12-16 Page 15
FLIGHT MANUAL
6 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM FAILURES

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
BAT 1 - BAT/ESS .............................. OFF

TEMP
Battery internal BAT BAT

BAT
overheating TEMP TEMP
TEMP
Battery thermal runaway CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

LAND AS SOON
AS POSSIBLE
NOTE
- Engine restarting impossible.
- If ICS inoperative, switch ICS to EMER.
1 - BAT/ESS .............................. OFF

BAT
2 - Faulty Generator .................. OFF
TEMP
+
At VEMD BAT BAT
BAT
31 v TEMP TEMP
TEMP
3 - BAT/ESS ..............ON
or LAND AS SOON
AS POSSIBLE CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
GEN # PARAM NOTE
OVER LIMIT - Engine restarting impossible.
- If ICS inoperative, switch ICS
to EMER.

3.2
A 04-36 Page 16
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1 - GEN 1 ................................. RST, then ON
GEN 2 - GEN 2 ................................. RST, then ON
RH + LH
GEN GEN
GEN
Cutout of both
generators RH + LH
3 - GEN 1 and 2 .............. OFF
4 - Rotary selector (28A) . OFF CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
5 - CAB LTS (1.6A) ......... OFF
The battery supplies the main buses. The flight time is > 30 min
with a battery charged to 80%.
If IMC exit IMC as soon as possible and in all cases
land within 30 minutes.
Automatic load shedding of:
Basic
Ancillary connectors AHRS1 - 1 A
FCDM1 - 1 A VOR 1 - 1 A
ADC1 - 0.2 A Copilot's pitot - 1.4 A
Radioaltimeter - 0.7 A Radiocompass - 1A
Instrument panel, overhead VHF 1 (Tx : 4.5 A)(R : 0.5 A)
panel, control pedestal Booster pump 2 and 3 - 4.7 A
lighting - 2 x 7 A
Customization: Mission equipment supplied by bus F and G on 3
and 4 Alpha breakers panel (located in the nose of
the aircraft).
CAUTION
EXTEND THE LANDING GEAR BEFORE THE BATTERY
VOLTAGE DROPS BELOW 22 V.
NOTE
During the 30 min, the pilot may use :
- Demisting .................. 4 min - VHF2 (Tx) .................... 2 min
- Transfer pump........... 10 min - Landing light ................ 3 min
- Wipers ....................... 3 min - Storm light ................... 2 min
If required, the load-shed buses can be reset with
the SHED BUS switch.
CAUTION
WHEN RESETTING THE LOAD SHED BUS, THE PILOT MUST
MANAGE THE ELECTRICAL CONSUMPTION BY LOAD
SHEDDING THE EQUIPMENT ITEMS WHICH ARE NOT
NECESSARY. THE FLIGHT TIME MAY BE LESS THAN 30 min.

3.2
A 12-16 Page 17
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
- On engine concerned
GEN
1 - GEN #................................. RST, then ON
RH or LH
GEN GEN
GEN
Cutout of 2 - GEN #..................................... OFF

corresponding CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
generator. 3 - Rotary selector
BAT/GEN1/GEN2 ................... On generator operative
At VEMD
XXX A XXX A
(If XXX (If XXX
>160 A) <160 A)
4 - Depending on the mission and

according with section 2.5 5.2 CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Ancillary connectors ....... Manually disconnect
And/or Switch OFF installations of comfort
(IFE, Dome light, Fridge, Air Cond, DMAP...)
until XXX < 160 A
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
NOTE
If IMC, transition to VMC as soon as possible.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.2
A 14-28 Page 18
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1 - BAT/ESS.............................RST, then ON
BAT
BAT BAT
BAT
Battery switched
off.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
NOTE
Engine restarting impossible.
BUS TIE NOTE

Loss of Crossfeeding is no longer possible.
connection of one 1 - BUS TIE RST......................Press
or both
main buses
BUS TIE BUS
BUS TIE
TIE
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
BAT/GEN1/GEN2 selector ........... BAT.

BAT voltage.................................. Check.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
CAUTION
EXTEND THE LANDING GEAR BEFORE
THE BATTERY VOLTAGE BELOW 22 V.

3.2
A 12-16 Page 19
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1 - GEN #................................. RST, then ON
BUS TIE
2 - BAT/ESS ............................ RST, then ON
+ 3 - BUS TIE RST ..................... PRESS
GEN BUS TIE BUS

BUS TIE
TIE
RH or LH + +
+ GEN BAT GEN
GEN BAT
BAT
+ +
BAT Loss of corresponding primary
bus
Short circuit on Loss of power supply of: CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

corresponding
primary bus LH bus: RH bus:
Anti-collision lights ADC 1 Fuel pumps 2 and 3 DME
Position lights Copilot's pitot Pilot's pitot Windshield wiper
Eng 1 FADEC channel B FCDM1 Pilot's landing light
Eng 1 over speed detection Cabin lighting AHRS1 ND1
Landing gear control VHF 1 Eng 2 over speed detection
Ancillary connector 1 VOR 1 Eng 2 FADEC channel B
IP/Cont pedestal lighting 1 IP/Cont pedestal lighting 2
Radio compass Land light 1 Ancillary connector 2
Radioaltimeter Storm light
+ Mission equipment
(if fitted) + Mission equipment
(if fitted)
Chip burner
Radar Air Cond
Anti-collision System (ACAS, Navigation system (GPS, UNS,
EGPWS, Laser) EURONAV)
Centralized control box 1 Additional navigation Display
Additional COM (VHF/FM, MF) Additional COM (V/UHF, HF,
IR light SAT, GSM, ICS)
Search light Centralized control box 2
Doors light Homing
Mirror Passenger address
Windshield deice 1 Sling Mirror Step
Ice detector Strobe light Internal lighting
Fridge HUMS (health function)
Radar FLIR
Windshield deice 2
Windshield washer
Hailer

3.2
A 12-16 Page 20
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
(Contd)
If short circuit on LH bus:
- On RCU ADC .................... ADC 2
NOTE
Extend the landing gear using the emergency system.
NOTE
IF IMC, EXIT IMC AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
1 - BAT/ESS ............................ RST, then ON

ESS BUS
Loss of power ESS BUS ESS BUS

supply of essential
bus
On VEMD
Electrical power consumption must be decreased.
170 A
Depending on the mission.
1 - Ancillary connectors ................................ Manually disconnect.

Or
GEN # PARAM 2 - Optional equipment (Hoist, light).......... Stop using

OVER LIMIT simultaneously.
Electrical power
consumption
above continuous
limit.

3.2
A 12-16 Page 21
FLIGHT MANUAL
7 MISCELLANEOUS FAILURES
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Heating rotary selector.............. OFF.
CAR
FIRE On LC FIRE section on overhead panel
+ SHOT 1 ........................................ Strike.
1 SHOT 2
FIRE FIRE LC EXTIN P. LC EXTIN P.
FAIL FAIL
+
OVERHEAT CAR FIRE CAR FIRE
+ +
FIRE FAIL FIRE FAIL
Temperature
LAND IMMEDIATELY LAND AS SOON
inside
compartment AS POSSIBLE
SHOT 2 ........................................ Strike.
> 85C
LC EXTIN P. LC EXTIN P.
CAR FIRE CAR FIRE

+ +
FIRE FAIL FIRE FAIL
LAND IMMEDIATELY LAND AS SOON

AS POSSIBLE
Evacuate aircraft and fight
fire from outside.

3.2
A 12-16 Page 22
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
ECS NOTE
In case of temperature > 90C, the heating system switches off
Over heating automatically and comes back on automatically as soon as the
above 90C or temperature drops.
fan speed 1 - Heating................................ Reduce
discrepancy
ECS ECS
2 - Selector ...................... OFF

NOTE CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
For OAT > 45C avoid ground
run and hover flight longer
than 30 min.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
OVERHEAT 1 - Rotary selector ................ VENT

2 - VENT LO / HI ................... HI
Temperature 5 min. later
inside
compartment OVERHEAT OVERHEAT
> 70C
LAND AS SOON AS
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT PRACTICABLE
FWD DOOR BEFORE TAKEOFF

1 - Door(s)............................. Close
IN FLIGHT
AFT DOOR 1 - IAS ................................... 110 kt (204 km/h)
2 - Door locking ..................... Check
LC DOOR
XXX DOOR XXX DOOR
3 - IAS ...... 110 kt (204 km/h)

LAND AS SOON AS CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
PRACTICABLE
AUDIO WARN 1 AUDIO WARN ................................................. ON
Aural warning CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

OFF.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.2
A 14-28 Page 23
FLIGHT MANUAL
LC EXTIN P.
Pressure drop or LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
extinguisher empty.
FIRE FIRE
FAIL FAIL
Cargo fire detection
inoperative.
8 AP FAILURES
GENERAL:
Red warning: AP is disengaged.
CAD CAUTION indicates a degradation of basic AP stabilization.
Amber indication on PFD with no CAD caution indicates an upper mode degradation
and requires pilot's attention.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Take over the controls.
AP
1- SAS..........................ON SAS
+
AP CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
+
on PFD
10 s flashing
NOTE
YR P
In IMC: Vy IAS 120 kt
C
+
AP disengagement

3.2
A 12-16 Page 24
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
AHRS DISC Take over the controls
+ With standby ADI

On PFD 1 - Failed AHRS........ determine
C RY P On RCU
2 - AHRS................... Reconfigure
+ possibly
On PFD ............... AHRSi

+ XXX
3 - Upper mode......... Reengage
ATT
AHRS discrepancy CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
ACTUATOR Attitude hold is degraded.
+
NOTE
on PFD
IAS < 60 kt collective upper mode is disengaged.
C IAS > 60 kt (except CRHT) collective upper mode shift on pitch
axis
and
R P
or
or XXX CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Loss of series
actuator

3.2
A 12-16 Page 25
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
ACTUATOR 1 - Feet ............................... on pedals.
No yaw stabilization.
+
on PFD Upper mode control via roll axis.
Y XXX
or
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Loss of yaw
series actuator.
TRIM NOTE
+ IAS < 60 kt collective upper mode is disengaged.
on PFD IAS > 60 kt (except CRHT) collective upper mode shift on pitch
axis.
C
AP reverts to 3 axis.
Longitudinal modes(IAS,ALT,ALTA,VS,GA) cannot be engaged
below 60 Kt.
If COLL LINK
Loss of collective pre-command.

Loss of collective Pilot must move the collective pitch slowly.
trim or stick
position sensors. CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
TRIM 1 - Cyclic stick...................... Hands on.

+ Attitude hold is degraded.
on PFD Loss of HDG and all navigation upper modes.
R P Loss of IAS upper mode.
+ Vertical upper modes remain available on collective axis.

on AP box
A. TRIM CYC
OFF
Loss of R and P CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

autotrim

3.2
A 12-16 Page 26
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
TRIM On PFD
+ If left or right
on PFD - Respective pedal ........................ push to extinguish.
Y
or XXX
NOTE
on lateral
axis If the slip indicator is not centered, there is a loss of pedal position
+ sensors: Pilot must control the yaw pedals.
on AP box
A. TRIM YAW
OFF CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Loss of yaw trim

or pedal position
sensors.
SAS AP "ON" : CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Loss or
degradation of AP OFF: LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
SAS stabilization

3.2
A 12-16 Page 27
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Pilot's attention required.
XXX one or
several upper
modes amber CAUTION
FOR LOC AND G/S IF ANY DOUBT ON ILS,

PILOT MUST GO AROUND
Degradation of
sensor or link NOTE
between AP and
sensor (AHRS, In 4 axis, monitor the power, if any doubt on auto pilot power
ADC, FLI, ILS ) management, revert to 3 axis.
VOR or VOR A Heading is resumed to course track with last estimated drift
correction.
+
To/from fluctuation
overstation sensing
or
deviation needle
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
fluctuation
VOR fluctuation
The displayed references may drift.

Closely monitor the engaged references (Attitude, IAS, ALT,
etc.).
NOTE
The upper mode references can no longer be "trimmed".
Degraded reliability Once an upper mode is disengaged, it cannot be reengaged.
of displayed
references
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

3.2
A 12-16 Page 28
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1. Relevant axis ......................................... Hands on
(label blinks from 2. On relevant axis. ..................................... Slight motion
green to amber)
with no pilot action
Loss of anchoring.
P R or C
Override detection failure. 3. On relevant axis ...... Keep
Attitude hold degraded on hands on
relevant axis.
Override detection
failure CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
In opposite direction from the reference motion.
XXX Beeptrim .............................................. Actuate for 2 s.
Related upper modes cannot be beeped any more but are
Moving with still operative at engagement reference.
no pilot action
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Beeptrim failure
In opposite direction from the reference motion.

HDG CRHT Beeptrim .............................................. Actuate for 2 s.
or
Frozen
+
Moving with no
pilot action Yes No
Beeptrim failure. Rotary selector failure.
Related upper modes cannot Related upper
be beeped any more but are mode ................... disengage
still operative at engagement
reference.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Beeptrim or rotary
selector failure
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.2
A 14-28 Page 29
FLIGHT MANUAL
9 PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM FAILURES
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PITOT 1 - Corresponding switch ON ..............................................Check
RH or LH CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

or
EMERG PITOT
No heating of
corresponding
Pitot.
10 FCDS (PFD-ND) FAILURES
NOTE
When a screen is OFF, the PFD combined mode is automatically displayed on the other
screen.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
F 1- Failed screen ............................................ OFF twice
30 s later
F Symbology appears
Failed screen ............... OFF
Screen failure
1- Refer to backup instruments and FMS/GPS information.

F
on PFD and ND NOTE

AP coupling is only allowed for ALT hold, IAS hold and GA mode.
Do not use beep trim function on cyclic and collective grip.
Loss of both 2- Recover VMC conditions.

screens
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.2
A 14-28 Page 30
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1- RAD ALT .......................................... ON

RA
RA RA
Radioaltimeter failure

NOTE
When RA is failed:
Radioaltimeter
failure GS label on PFD is displayed in amber.
The 65 ft or 80 ft (post MOD 22B55) level off at the end of an
ILS is no longer available.
CRHT mode is no longer available.
Reversion from V/S to ALT is invalid.
Weather radar may no longer be used.
XXXX i 1- RCU ......................................... Reconfigure
XXXX i disappears
( FCDM, AHRS,
ADC, ICP)
XXXX i
appears in reconfiguration message area
Sensor failure CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
LOC i CAUTION
ILS APPROACH IS FORBIDDEN.

Corresponding
reception not
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
valid
GS i CAUTION
GS IS UNAVAILABLE / UNRELIABLE
Corresponding CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

reception not
valid
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.2
A 14-28 Page 31
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
CHECK CONF 1- All equipment items on ............................. Check.
On ground
Upon electrical
power application
CHECK FCDM With standby instrumentation

Ambiguity ................................................... Solve.
On RCU
FCDM ......................................................... Reconfigure.
Error detected
by cross-
monitoring CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
1- Information with valid screen ....................... Compare.

CHECK SMD
2- SMD failed................................................... OFF if necessary.
PFD/ND cross CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

monitoring fault
CHECK PFD 1- Information with valid screen ....................... Compare.

2- PFD or ND................................................... OFF if necessary.
or
CHECK ND
PFD/ND cross CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

monitoring fault on
PFD or ND
1- Pilot and copilot range ................................ Align.

CHECK RANGE
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

3.2
A 12-16 Page 32
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Fault on Attitude, Heading, IAS, Altitude, LOC or GLIDE sensor:
Determine the incorrect parameter with the standby
instrumentation.
Or Select the valid channel on the RCU, if necessary.
LOC: if no cross-check possible, do not perform ILS approach.
GLIDE: if no cross-check possible, perform an approach
procedure without GLIDE.
NOTE
Divergence Relevant AP upper modes are displayed in amber.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

The failed control system switches over to the directional mode.
DG
On RCU
1 - AHRS ....................................................................Reconfigure
on AHRS NOTE
box There is no cross-monitoring on headings and attitudes.
The maximum drift in directional mode is 15/hour.
COMP
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Blinking
F
A NOTE
N
The FCDM failure may occur when OAT > 40C
If IMC, transition to VMC as soon as possible.
Loss of
ventilation on CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
new avionics unit
VNE The red line is frozen on the absolute VNE: 175 kt.
Computations described in section 2.3 ........................... Apply
Loss of VNE CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

computation

3.2
A 12-16 Page 33
FLIGHT MANUAL
11 CPDS (VEMD-CAD) FAILURES

11.1 FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OF A VEMD SCREEN
Failed screen ...................................................OFF.
Bottom screen
NOTE
On FLI : TRQ right + FLI DEGR
On CAD : GOV right
Top screen
NOTE
On FLI : TRQ left + FLI DEGR
On CAD : GOV left
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

3.2
A 12-16 Page 34
FLIGHT MANUAL
11.2 FAILURE OF BOTH VEMD SCREENS

VEMD .............................................................. OFF 1 and OFF 2.
The emergency page appears on the CAD. Check the N1 in compliance with the
following table:
OAT (C)
-0.3 0 0 TOP
50
-2.6 -2.2 -2.2 MCP
-1.8 -0.6 0 0 0
40
-4 -2.9 -2.2 -2.2 -2.2
-3.2 -2.1 -0.6 0 0 0
30
-5.4 -4.3 -3.1 -2.2 -2.2 -2.2
-4.6 -3.5 -2 0 0 0 0 0
20
-6.7 -5.7 -4.5 -2.8 -2.2 -2.2 -2.2 -2.2
-6 -4.9 -3.5 -1.4 0 0 0 0 0
10
-8 -7.1 -5.9 -4.3 -2.7 -2.2 -2.2 -2.2 -2.2
-7.4 -6.3 -4.9 -2.8 -0.7 0 0 0 0 0
0
-8 -8 -7.3 -5.7 -4.2 -2.3 -2.2 -2.2 -2.2 -2.2
-7.8 -7.7 -6.3 -4.3 -2.1 0 0 0 0 0
-10
-8 -8 -8 -7.1 -5.6 -3.9 -2.2 -2.2 -2.2 -2.2
-8 -8 -7.8 -5.8 -3.6 -0.9 0 0 0 0
-20
-8 -8 -8 -8 -7.1 -5.3 -3 -2.2 -2.2 -2.2
-8 -8 -8 -7.8 -5.7 -3.1 -0.2 0 0 0
-30
-8 -8 -8 -8 -8 -7.8 -5.7 -3.2 -2.2 -2.2
-8 -8 -8 -8 -6.8 -4.1 -1.3 0 0 0
-40
-8 -8 -8 -8 -8 -8 -7.7 -4.1 -2.2 -2.2
-2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 15
Hp (ft x 1000)
NOTE 1
Pilot shall take into account the last known OAT adjusted with the following law: OAT
increases by 2C when Hp decreases by 1000 ft
NOTE 2
The AP is no longer able to manage the power limitations.
When the value is -8 or when N1 is not displayed, apply the following

instructions:
Level Flight = max IAS < VNE - 40 kt
Stabilized climbing at Vy : do not exceed 1000 ft/min for Hp 2000ft.
500 ft/min for Hp > 2000ft.
Perform a precautionary landing without hovering.

3.2
A 12-16 Page 35
FLIGHT MANUAL
CAUTION
THE FUEL QUANTITY INDICATIONS ARE LOST.

THE FOLLOWING CAUTION LIGHTS ARE LOST:
ENG CHIP VEMD FAN ENG CHIP

MGB CHIP HYD LEV
OVERHEAT PITOT
SERVO
ROTOR BRK
11.3 FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OF CAD SCREEN

CAD .............................................................OFF.
NOTE
The CAU/FLI page must be privileged in order
to monitor the alarms.

3.2
A 12-16 Page 36
FLIGHT MANUAL
CAUTION
THE FOLLOWING CAUTION LIGHTS ARE LOST :
GEN BAT GEN

EXT BUS TIE EXT
ENG CHP CT ESS BUS ENG CHP CT
XXXDOOR EMER PITOT XXXDOOR
AP
NAV
ECS
AUDIO WARN
MGB AUX P
TGB CHIP
MGB CHP CT
TGB CHP CT
SAS
ACTUATOR
RECONFIGURATION
Single electrical failure cautions are lost - Nevertheless some double failures are still
indicated by ELEC on VEMD
GEN GEN
ELEC
BAT
BUS TIE
ELEC
GEN BUS TIE
ELEC
BUS TIE GEN
ELEC

3.2
A 12-16 Page 37
FLIGHT MANUAL
11.4 ALARM MESSAGES
11.4.1 System failure messages (explicit):

- LANE # FAILED ----> PRESS OFF #
- CAD FAILED ----> PRESS OFF
- CROSSTALK FAILED ----> PRESS OFF #
- VEMD BRIGHTNESS CONTROL FAILED
- CAD BRIGHTNESS CONTROL FAILED
11.4.2 Parameter exceedance messages

- CAUTION DETECTED
- FUEL PARAM OVER LIMIT
- VEH PARAM OVER LIMIT
A parameter on a masked page exceeds a limitation.
Press SCROLL to display.
Apply the associated procedure.
- GEN # PARAM OVER LIMIT

- ELEC SELECTOR PARAM OVER LIMIT
A masked parameter exceeds a limitation.
Press SELECT to display. Apply the associated procedure.

3.2
A 12-16 Page 38
FLIGHT MANUAL
11.4.3 Failure messages on FLI
- FLI FAIL
Loss of three
parameters.
The FLI pointer
represents the engine
whose parameters
are valid.
FLI computation
failure on one side.
The FLI pointer
represents the valid
side.
The numerical values
are valid.
NOTE
Automatic alignment of the engines at N1 provides the possibility of observing the
limitations.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
- FLI DEGR : Loss of one or two parameters (T, N1, N1 or TOT).

The FLI computation is performed with the remaining parameter(s).
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
NOTE
In case of FLI FAIL or FLI DEGR, perform a low power approach.

3.2
A 12-16 Page 39
FLIGHT MANUAL
- CHECK TRQ
The torque difference

is greater than 7.5%
N1/TRQ/TOT consistency ............Check
Correct Not correct
Loss of power on one engine. Incorrect computation of torque.
CAUTION
WHEN THE LIMIT IS THE TORQUE, THE FLI POINTER

REPRESENTS THE ENGINE AT THE HIGHEST TORQUE
AND IS NO LONGER REPRESENTATIVE OF THE
TORQUE 1 + 2 LIMITATION.
PERFORM A PRECAUTIONARY LANDING WITHOUT
HOVERING.
NOTE
In hover IGE with no headwind, misalignment may be observed when the current power
corresponds to the closing thresholds of the bleed valves. In this case, slightly change the
aircraft direction.

3.2
A 12-16 Page 40
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 3.3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
1 AUTOROTATION LANDING
1.1 ON LAND
1. Collective pitch.......................................Quickly reduce to maintain
NR within green range.
2. IAS ...........................................................Vy (head into the
wind).
3. Landing gear...........................................Down and locked.
4. Parking brake .........................................Released.
5. Nose wheel castoring lock ....................Locked.
6. Fuel shutoff control levers ....................Aft.
7. Booster pumps .........................................OFF.
8. Passenger ordinance lights ......................ON (if necessary).
AT ABOUT 120 ft ABOVE GROUND
9. Pull up the aircraft between 15 and 20 to reduce ground speed and increase
RPM.
AT ABOUT 20 ft ABOVE GROUND
10. Establish the landing attitude while increasing the collective pitch
to cushion the touchdown.
ON GROUND
11. Return the cyclic stick to neutral, reduce the collective pitch and apply the wheel
brakes.
Once stopped, rotor brake .......................Apply.
EMERGENCY CUT OFF .........................OFF.
Evacuate the aircraft.
1.2 ON WATER
The procedure is the same as for ground landing (ITEMS 1 to 8), except for the
following points:
AT ABOUT 120 ft ABOVE WATER
9. Pull up the aircraft to reduce speed to a minimum.

3.3
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
AT ABOUT 20 ft ABOVE WATER

10. Restore the aircraft to level attitude and cushion the touchdown with the
collective pitch lever and head, if required, the aircraft with the yaw pedals
according to the sea state.
11. Do not reduce the collective pitch and apply the rotor brake.
12. Unfasten seatbelts.
13. Jettison the windows and escape.
2 ENGINE FAILURE
2.1 SYMPTOMS
Yaw surge, dependent on flight configuration.
Illumination of lights:
ENG DIFF + Audio warning.
# N1
OEI page displayed on the FLI.
Setting of OEI 30 s.
RPM drop, dependent on the pitch value.
NOTE
When the power is set at OEI 2 min rating, the display shows a needle flickering
slightly above the red broken marking.
This has no effect on the actual stop monitored by the FADEC which remains valid.

3.3
A 02-50 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
2.4 ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR SELECTING AN ENGINE TO IDLE
1. Single-engine flight conditions ...........Attain.
2. Collective pitch...................................Adjust in accordance with OEI limitations
(Minimum Power Airspeed = Vy).
3. FLT-IDL-OFF .....................................IDLE.
DIFF
"Multi-gong" + ALARM + and
N1
On FLI
"OEI 30 s
armed"
4. Disarm OEI 30s.
5. Collective pitch...................................NR > 330 rpm.
6. Monitor the parameters of the engine selected to IDLE.
2.5 ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR SHUTTING DOWN AN ENGINE

1. Single-engine flight conditions ...........Attain.
2. Collective pitch...................................Adjust in accordance with OEI limitations
(Minimum Power Airspeed = Vy).
On affected engine:
3. FLT-IDL-OFF .....................................OFF.
DIFF
Multigong + ALARM + N1 and
ENG. # On FLI
"OEI 30 s
armed"
4. Disarm OEI 30 s.
5. Collective pitch...................................NR 330 rpm
6. Booster pumps...................................OFF
NOTE 1
If fuel transfer is required, first switch the booster pumps back on
in order to fully consume the available fuel in the fuel tank group for
the inoperative engine.
NOTE 2
It is recommended that the doors be closed if the flight is to be continued.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.3
A 14-28 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
3 TAIL ROTOR FAILURE

A tail rotor failure in power-on flight is indicated by a yawing motion. The rate of turn
depends on the aircraft power and airspeed at the time of failure. Depending upon the
type of failure a high vibration level may appear.
3.1 FAILURE IN HOVER OR AT LOW AIRSPEED IN GROUND EFFECT

Quickly reduce the collective pitch and
LAND IMMEDIATELY
3.2 FAILURE OUT OF GROUND EFFECT

3.2.1 Failure During Climb at Altitude
Reduce the collective pitch and maintain the heading by roll control.
Increase the airspeed and select the power setting to maintain adequate flight
control.
Look for a landing site that will permit a running landing.
Landing procedure
1. Landing gear .............................................. Down and locked.
2. Parking brake ............................................. Released.
3. Nose wheel castoring lock ......................... Locked.
Approach the landing site with the aircraft slipping to the left with an airspeed
60 kt (111 km/h).
Slowly reduce airspeed at ground level while using the collective pitch to
maintain the helicopter airborne.
Land when the nose swings into alignment (IAS should be between 45 and
55 kt (83 and 102 km/h)).
After touchdown, slowly reduce the collective pitch and steer the aircraft with
the wheel brakes.
CAUTION
LANDING IS EASIER WHEN THE AIRCRAFT WEIGHT IS

LOWER AND WIND COMES FROM THE RIGHT.
WARNING
BELOW 40 kt (74 km/h), GO-AROUND IS NO LONGER

POSSIBLE DUE TO TAIL FIN EFFICIENCY LOSS.
3.2.2 Failure in Level Flight
Yawing motion will be minimum in level flight due to the low thrust component of
the shrouded tail rotor. For landing, proceed as described in para. 3.2.1
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.3
A 14-28 Page 6
FLIGHT MANUAL
4 LANDING GEAR SYSTEM FAILURES

4.1 EMERGENCY LANDING GEAR EXTENSION PROCEDURE
1. Landing gear control ......................................... DOWN.
2. LG PUMP ........................................................... EMERG
Wait 1 min approximately:
3 green lights ..................................................... On.
L/G operating light.............................................. Out.
When LG PUMP light comes on:
3. LG PUMP ........................................................... NORM.
CAUTION
IF THE LANDING GEAR RETRACTS AGAIN WHEN LG PUMP SWITCH IS SET

TO NORM, THERE IS A LANDING GEAR SWITCH MALFUNCTION.
EXTEND THE LANDING GEAR JUST BEFORE LANDING AND LEAVE
LG PUMP ON EMERG UNTIL ROTOR SHUT DOWN.
NOTE 1
In cold weather, emergency landing gear extension may require more than 3 min.
NOTE 2
After emergency extension, wait at least 3 min before retracting the landing gear
(in training flights).
4.2 LANDING GEAR RETRACTION FAILURE

1st POSSIBILITY
L/G operating light does not come on
The 3 green lights remain on
2. "TOUCH AND GO" ............................................ Perform (To center the nose wheel).
3. Landing gear control ......................................... UP.
If the landing gear fails to retract:
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

2nd POSSIBILITY
L/G operating light remains on.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.3
A 14-28 Page 7
FLIGHT MANUAL
4.3 LANDING GEAR EXTENSION FAILURE

One or more green lights remain out.
NOTE
In case of green lights failure the L/G units are correctly locked if:
- The amber operating light is off.
- The L/G alarm remains off when IAS is below 55 kt (101 km/h).
In this case, apply the following procedure:

1. Landing gear control ........................................ UP.
2. Landing gear control ........................................ DOWN.
If the landing gear fails to extend:
3. Emergency landing gear extension
procedure ......................................................... Perform.
If the landing gear fails to extend in emergency mode:
- Enter low hover and attempt to achieve downlock by ground personnel pulling
on the L/G struts.
- If all 3 L/G units are normally extended, land cautiously and leave the LG
PUMP switch in EMER until final shutdown. Chock the aircraft as soon as
possible.
4.4 BELLY LANDING
CAUTION
- ORDER THE EVACUATION OF ALL PERSONS TRANSPORTED.

- BEFORE TOUCHDOWN, MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS NOBODY
IN THE AREA OF THE ROTOR.
5 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM FAILURE

A FAIL light comes on on the cockpit overhead panel.
Fire detection and therefore affected system inoperative.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.3
A 14-28 Page 8
FLIGHT MANUAL
6 SMOKE IN CABIN
1. Affected system ................................................... OFF
2. Bad-weather windows ......................................... Open
3. Heating system .................................................... OFF
If the origin of the smoke cannot be identified or if affected system switch off is
impossible
4. EMERGENCY CUT OFF ...................................... PWR OFF.
5. GEN 1 and 2 ........................................................ OFF.
SMOKE DOES NOT DISAPPEAR SMOKE DISAPPEARS
6. EMERGENCY
On breaker panel below collective pitch.
CUT OFF .......................... EMER SHED
6. Except those in first and second left
column(Yellow labels)
On breaker panel below collective pitch. All breakers..OFF
first and second left column (Yellow
labels) 7. EMERGENCY
7. One by one, breakers ..... OFF then ON CUT OFF ........................... EMER SHED
(to identify 8. One by one, breakers .......................ON
smoke origin) (to identify
smoke origin )
When the origin of the smoke is identified.
- Corresponding system .... OFF(if possible)
System OFF System without ON/OFF switch

- Emergency Cut Off ................. PWR ON - Corresponding breakers .............. OFF
- GEN 1 and 2........................... ON - All other breakers ....................... ON
- Landing gear emergency............ Down
(EMER LG PUMP switch)
LAND AS SOON The power supply is provided by the battery.
AS The flight time is 30 min with a
PRACTICABLE battery charged to 80%

APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.3
A 14-28 Page 9
FLIGHT MANUAL
7 ICING CONDITIONS
The appearance of ice on the windshield wipers is the first indication that the helicopter
has entered icing conditions.
If unexpected icing conditions are encountered, fly out of the icing zone as quickly as
possible.
Check:
1. All PITOTS ............................................................ ON.
2. Windshield deicing system (if installed) ................ ON.
8 STATIC SYSTEM FAILURE

Incorrect pitot-static indications:
1. Windows ................................................................ Closed.
2. STATIC-PRESS ..................................................... STAND BY.
CAUTION
PILOT MUST CHECK STATIC PRESSURE CORRECTIONS

ON THE PLACARD INSIDE THE COCKPIT.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
9 EMERGENCY EXIT
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.3
A 14-40 Page 10
FLIGHT MANUAL
10 EMERGENCY EVACUATION
In the event of an emergency landing, jettison the windows and the front doors (if
jettisonable) after impact.
In the event of ditching without emergency flotation gear, jettison the windows and
the front doors (if jettisonable) at low speed just prior to impact to prevent them
from striking the rotor blades.
Jettisoning should be done by pushing in the corner of the window,

especially at cold temperatures.
11 ABNORMAL VIBRATION IN FLIGHT

If a severe deterioration is noted in the vibration level:
Reduce power.
Check that the yaw control is efficient.
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE.
CAUTION
IN CASE OF DOUBT CONCERNING YAW CONTROL EFFICIENCY,

APPLY TAIL ROTOR FAILURE LANDING PROCEDURE (3.3 3).
12 ROTOR BRAKE INOPERATIVE

In high wind:
1. Aircraft....................................................INTO the WIND.
2. Cyclic stick .............................................Slightly FORWARD.
WARNING
WAIT UNTIL THE ROTOR HAS FULLY STOPPED BEFORE LEAVING THE
AIRCRAFT.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
3.3
A 14-40 Page 11
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
CONTENTS
4.1 GENERAL PAGE
1 FUNCTIONAL LIMITATIONS.................................................................................. 1
2 FLIGHT PLANNING ................................................................................................ 1
4.2 PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTIONS

1 EXTERIOR INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 1
2 INTERIOR INSPECTION ........................................................................................ 3
4.3 STARTING PROCEDURES

1 PRE-STARTING CHECKLIST................................................................................. 1
2 ENGINE STARTING ............................................................................................... 4
3 POST-STARTING CHECKLIST .............................................................................. 7
4.4 TAXIING - TAKEOFF

1 PRE-TAXIING CHECKLIST .................................................................................... 1
2 TAXIING - TAKEOFF .............................................................................................. 1
4.5 CRUISING FLIGHT

1 LEVEL FLIGHT ....................................................................................................... 1
4.6 APPROACH - LANDING

1 APPROACH - LANDING ......................................................................................... 1
4.7 ENGINE AND ROTOR SHUTDOWN

1 ENGINE SHUTDOWN ............................................................................................ 1
2 STOPPING THE ROTOR ....................................................................................... 1

4.0.P6
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
4.8 SPECIAL OPERATING PROCEDURES

1 COLD-WEATHER OPERATIONS (- 40C < OAT < 15C)...................................1
2 TAKEOFF AFTER PARKING IN FALLING SNOW .................................................1
3 TAKEOFF AND LANDING ON SLOPES.................................................................1
4.9 ENGINE POWER AND THERMAL CHECK

1 GENERAL ...............................................................................................................1
2 ON GROUND ENGINE POWER AND THERMAL CHECK ....................................2
3 IN CRUISE FLIGHT ENGINE POWER AND THERMAL CHECK............................4
4 IN OEI TRAINING LEVEL FLIGHT ENGINE POWER AND
THERMAL CHECK: REFERENCE CHECK ............................................................5

4.0.P6
A 12-16 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 4.1
GENERAL
This section contains the helicopter operating instructions and procedures from flight
planning to the safe helicopter condition after landing, going through the actual flight
conditions. These procedures assume normal and standard conditions. The appropriate
data of other sections are mentioned wherever applicable. The instructions and
procedures covered by this section are set forth for standardization purposes; they are not
applicable to all situations.
1 FUNCTIONAL LIMITATIONS
Refer to SECTION 2 for the minimum and maximum limits.
Whenever a functional limitation has been exceeded, record it in the logbook (aircraft,
engine, etc.). Record the limit exceeded, the duration of exceedance, the extreme value
reached and all the additional information necessary to define the required
maintenance action.
NOTE
FLI audio warn
IAS Time FLI value
> 10 s 8.8
> 45 kt
Immediate 9.15
> 10 s 10.1
< 45 kt
Immediate 10.3
2 FLIGHT PLANNING
Each flight must be suitably planned in order to ensure safe operation and to provide
the pilot with the information he will use during flight.
Flight planning must take into account the limitations.
Make sure that the aircraft weight and CG position are correct, by proceeding as
follows:
Refer to SECTION 6 - WEIGHT AND CENTER OF GRAVITY.
Check the fuel and oil weight, the useful load, etc.
Compute the total takeoff weight and that which can be predicted for landing.
Determine aircraft performance with respect to planned flight conditions.
Compute CG location throughout the flight duration. If a fuel transfer is foreseen,
determine the conditions in which it will be possible without exceeding CG
limitations.
CAUTION
WHEN INITIAL CG LOCATION IS FORWARD, THERE IS A RISK OF EXCEEDING

FORWARD LIMITATION DURING THE FLIGHT.
INITIAL CG LOCATION MUST BE ADAPTED ACCORDINGLY.

4.1
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

4.1
A 02-50 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 4.2
PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTIONS
1 EXTERIOR INSPECTION
NOTE
Pay particular attention to the operations marked *

Check that area is clean and clear
Remove the picketing equipment where applicable (covers, blade socks, mooring
lines etc).
Perform the following checks.
Figure 1: Exterior Inspection

STATION 1
General appearance............................. Condition - No traces of leakage.
Transparent panels .............................. Cleanliness.
Air intakes (MGB and engine) .............. Check cleanliness; clean if necessary.
On snow-covered ground, refer to
SECTION 4.8.*
Main blades and main
rotor hub............................................... Condition - General visual check from
ground level.
Pitots .................................................... Condition - No foreign object.

4.2
A 09-04 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
Radome ................................................ Condition - Closed and locked.

Nose landing gear................................. Visual examination.
Battery compartment door .................... Locked.
STATION 2
rotor hub ............................................... Condition - General visual check from
ground level.
Hydraulic reservoir................................ Level.
Engine oil tank ...................................... Level (max oil consumption: 0.2 l/h).
Cowlings (MGB and engine) ................. Closed - Locked.
Fuel tank filler caps............................... Closed - Locked. Compartment door
locked after checking caps.
L/G units ............................................... Visual examination.
Fire extinguisher ................................... Pressure correct.
Static ports............................................ Condition - No foreign object.
Luggage compartment ......................... Door closed (if installed).
Engine exhaust nozzle.......................... No foreign object.
STATION 3
Horizontal and vertical stabilizers ......... General condition.
Shrouded tail rotor ................................ No chafing of blades on
structure. Condition of blades: leading edges
and root in particular.
TGB ...................................................... Level.
Tail skid................................................. No distortion.
STATION 4
Tail gearbox cowlings ........................... Closed and locked.
Static ports............................................ Condition - No foreign object.
Engine exhaust nozzle.......................... No foreign object.
Fire extinguisher ................................... Pressure correct.(If pressure gauge fitted).
Luggage compartment ......................... Loads lashed, door closed
L/G unit ................................................. Visual examination.
Cowlings (MGB and engine) ................. Closed - Locked.
Engine oil tank ...................................... Level (max oil consumption: 0.2 l/h).
Hydraulic reservoir................................ Level.

4.2
A 12-16 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL

rotor hub............................................... Condition - General visual check from
ground level.
Ground power receptacle door ............. Locked (if starting with battery).
2 INTERIOR INSPECTION
Cabin.................................................... General check (condition, freight tied down,
seat arrangement, etc.).
Fire extinguisher and first aid kit........... In place (safety pin snap-wired).
STATIC-PRESS selector...................... NORM - Snap-wired.
Power-assisted brake accumulator ...... Pressure > 100 bar (1450 psi).
If it is less, recharge the accumulator by
means of the electric pump of the
emergency system.
NOTE
If the copilot's seat is unoccupied, check that the harness is fastened.

4.2
A 12-16 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 4.3
STARTING PROCEDURES
1 PRE-STARTING CHECKLIST
Check the following points:
1. Doors................................................................. Closed and locked.
2. Seats, Yaw pedals............................................. Adjusted.
3. Seatbelts and harnesses................................... Fastened.
4. Circuit breakers ................................................. All engaged.
5. Switches:
LG PUMP...................................................... NORM.
HYD ISOL ..................................................... NORM.
SHEDBUS..................................................... AUTO.(guarded).
RPM .............................................................. NORM.
TNG .............................................................. FLT.
NORMAL/BACKUP ....................................... NORMAL (guarded).
ENG 1 and ENG 2......................................... OFF.
Others ........................................................... All OFF.
S/B HRZ........................................................ ON - Light on.
6. BAT/ESS ........................................................... ON.
Check: BAT
Voltmeter reading.......................................... Checked 23 V.
NOTE
When a ground power unit is plugged in: BAT
Electrical power application starts the self-test of the engine computer.
Upon completion of the test, check: FADEC FAIL and GOV
NOTE
OAT value may not be available on the VEMD during self test of the system.
GOV
Upon self test completion, scroll to system status page and check the
displayed failure message:
TO.DISC A or B : Difference of more than 5 C between the two fadec thermal probes
due to sun exposure.
Continue start up procedure. Before take off check that the temperature difference is
less than 15 C, otherwise cancel take-off and refer to Maintenance Manual.
Any other message: Abort start up procedure and refer to Maintenance Manual.

4.3
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
NOTE
OEI HI usage is available on the system status page (see 4.7)
If on CAD INP FAIL + any of HYD GEN MGB AUX P
MGB P SERVO Apply appropriate maintenance before start up.
7. Brightness, PFD and ND..................... Adjusted.

8. Heating and ventilation controls .......... Off.
9. Fuel shutoff control levers ................... Forward and snap wired. Red light out.
10. Rotor brake control ............................. Released, fully forward. R
ROOTTO
ORR BBR
RKK
11. Position lights...................................... ON (if necessary).
12. Anti-collision light ................................ ON.
13. Emergency lighting system ................. Test performed, then ARM.
NOTE
For aircraft fitted with single emergency battery (after MOD 07-24C25), ARM position
supplies standby horizon from main battery.
14. Passenger ordinance lights................. ON (if passenger on board).

15. Indicator light test function .................. Test (to be performed on DAY position ONLY)
16. Instrument lighting............................... As required.
17. Vent selector ....................................... OFF.
18. Mission selector .................................. OFF.
19. Emergency locator transmitter
(if installed) .......................................... NORM.
20. Audio warning ..................................... ON. AAU
UDDIIO
OWWAAR
RNN
21. L/G PUMP........................................... TEST (Do not exceed a duration of 2 min.).
(After MOD 07-29B64 HHYYD
D )
22. Control travel / LMT ....................... Checked.
23. Controls............................................... Centered (AP ON then OFF to use centering
function if needed).
24. L/G PUMP........................................... NORM.
25. TEST SERVO ..................................... When pressing the push-button, check:
SERVO
SERVO
SSEER
RVVO
O
26. TRIM FEEL ......................................... ON
27. GEN 1, 2 and ALT (if installed) ........... ON
28. EMERGENCY CUT OFF .................... Forward and snap wired.

4.3
A 12-16 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
29. Engine fire system test ....................... Check both positions.

FIRE (overhead panel),

ENG (Red warning panel),

FIRE

red light (fuel shutoff control lever) on and WARN
(instrument panel) flashing.
FAIL (detection failure) on overhead panel.

30. Cargo fire system test ......................... Check both positions
CAR
+ OVERHEAT + FIRE
FIRE

WARN
+ flashing.
FAIL (detection failure) on overhead panel.

31. Standby magnetic compass ............... Checked.
32. Light illuminated on
Red Warning Panel............................ Check
ENG MGB FUEL

# P Q
RH + LH See NOTE item 36
33. Clock .................................................. Wound and set.
34. Altimeter ............................................. Set.
35. Gear ................................................... Down with safety pin
removed.
36. Fuel management panel:
Test................................................. Fuel level at 0 on CAD
Transfer pump ................................ Tested (green arrow +
characteristic noise).
For each booster pump .................. Check pressure 0.4 bar
All booster pumps .......................... ON
NOTE
FUEL
If feeder tank is not full, the Q QTY (feeder tank level)
+
lights may come on. They will go out only when jet pumps have filled the feeder tank.
37. Parking brake ..................................... Applied.

38. Nose wheel castoring lock.................. As required (if fitted).

4.3
A 12-16 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
2 ENGINE STARTING
CAUTION
CHECK THAT CYCLIC STICK IS IN NEUTRAL POSITION AND THE

COLLECTIVE PITCH LEVER LOCKED IN LOW PITCH POSITION. DO
NOT MOVE THE CONTROLS IF HYDRAULIC POWER IS NOT SUPPLIED
(L.G PUMP TO TEST POSITION).
If AP version permits, the following pitch centering procedure automatically centers

cyclic stick:
1. LG PUMP .................................................. TEST
2. AP.............................................................. ON
3. Cyclic ......................................................... Free
4. Centering button (upper mode release) ..... Pressed more than 2 s (cyclic moves to
neutral position)
5. AP.............................................................. OFF
6. LG PUMP .................................................. NORM
NOTE
When OAT < 0C: In case of aborted start, when TOT > 120C, perform a cranking
operation before attempting another start.
Engines may be started in any order.
For OAT < 0C start up procedure is identical as 2.1 but "FLT/IDLE/OFF" switch
must be held on "IDLE" until engine oil temperature reaches:
0C for 5 cSt oil.
-10C for 3 to 3.9 cSt oil.
Then select the "FLT/IDLE/OFF" switch to "FLT".
2.1 STARTING 1ST ENGINE
1. NORMAL/BACKUP .......................... NORMAL.
2. ENG.................................................. FLT.
Check battery voltage: if < 17 V, stop starting sequence (battery insufficiently
charged).
On engine concerned, on VEMD:
OEI .................................................. HI
START ............................. Flashes.
Monitor the TOT and N1 numerical values.
OEI select ..................................... LO then CT

4.3
A 12-16 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
3 POST-STARTING CHECKLIST
3.1 OVERALL CHECKS
1. Ground power unit ........................... Disconnected.
2. Exterior lights ................................... As required.
NOTE
In some operational circumstances (clouds, dark night or others),
the white strobe (if fitted) may disturb the pilot.
Switch to red position if needed.
3. Windshield wiper selector ................ As required.

4. Heating/Ventilation ........................... As required.
5. PITOT 1, 2 and EMER PIT ............... ON.
6. Tail rotor servocontrol
isolation test .................................... Performed.
- HYD. ISOLATE ............................ CUT OFF:
HYD LEV RH then SERVO
- HYD.ISOLATE ............................. NORM:
HYD
HYD LEV
LEV RH and SERVO
SERVO
7. SERVO test ...................................... Performed.
SERVO
-
8. Electrical parameters ....................... Checked.
9. Chip test ........................................... Performed. ENG CHIP or MGB CHIP
10. Caution Advisory Panels .................. All lights out.
11. Temperature and pressure
readings ........................................... Checked.
12. Engine and flight instruments ........... Checked.
13. Engine fuel low pressure sensor
test ................................................... Performed.
Booster pump ............................. All OFF, check PRS
PRS LH + RH.
Booster pump ............................. All ON.
NOTE
If the copilot's seat is unoccupied, switch off the left screens.

4.3
A 05-25 Page 7
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.2 SPECIAL CHECKS (FIRST FLIGHT OF THE DAY)

3.2.1 P2 Valve and Heating System automatic switch-off test
1. VENT selector ...................... HEAT.

2. Heating control ..................... Aft.
3. Check heating system .......... Off.
4. Engine associated with
the valve to be tested ........... IDLE# (TNG mode).
5. Heating control .................... Forward: check heating system on.
6. Check that the T4 temperature of the normally operating engine increases more
than 10C.
NOTE
If the T4 temperature does not increase, the P2 valve of the idling engine is probably
seized in the open position. Confirm the failure by applying the same procedure with
collective pitch increased
7. SOV CUT. ............................ Press: check heating system off + + reset
NOTE
If SOV CUT test fails, automatic heating system switch off will not operate in case of
engine failure
8. Perform the same check on the other engine.
3.2.2 Test of Autopilot

- Collective pitch .......... Unlocked.
- Hands and feet.......... off.
- BEEP TRIM .............. Check.
- AP ............................ OFF OFF .
- Test .......................... ON ON flashes.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
4.3
A 14-28 Page 8
FLIGHT MANUAL
Successive flashing of:

- On PFD strip
C YR P + AP + WARN
- On CAD: TRIM
ACTUATOR
AHRS DISC
SAS
AP
- On PFD strip
Slight movement of cyclic stick collective pitch and pedals, then
Upon completion of the test ON

ON
AP TEST OK ................................................ On CAD.

AP
AP TEST
TEST OK
OK
- AP ............................................................... ON .
- AP ............................................................... OFF (cyclic).
- SAS............................................................. ON SAS
- AP ............................................................... ON SAS
SAS
CAUTION
TAKEOFF WITH AUTOPILOT INOPERATIVE IS FORBIDDEN
3.2.3 Miscellaneous AP failures

3.2.3.1 AP degraded
- "AP Test OK" message on CAD:
Abnormal load on yaw control
On PFD ................................................. flashing.
On CAD ................................................. AP TEST OK
AP can normally be engaged. In flight, monitor yaw axis and push respective
pedal to extinguish .

4.3
A 12-16 Page 9
FLIGHT MANUAL
- No "AP Test OK" message on CAD
Yaw trim failure
TRIM
On CAD ...............................................
On PFD................................................ Y
On AP box ...........................................A trim yaw OFF
AP can normally be engaged. In flight, monitor yaw axis and push respective
pedal to extinguish
Collective trim failure

On CAD ............................................... TRIM
On PFD................................................ C
Switch off the collective button on overhead panel. AP can be engaged. The
4th axis is not operative.
Minor AP failure
On AP box ...........................................Test ON flashes.
On PFD................................................
AP can be engaged. Upper mode can not be used. Attitude hold only.
3.2.3.2 AP inoperative
No "AP Test OK" message on CAD:
Pitch or roll trim failure
TRIM
On CAD ...............................................
On PFD................................................ R or P
On AP box ...........................................A trim cyc OFF
AP must not be used(only SAS function on cyclic).
Loss of AP module AP
On AP box ...........................................Test ON steady and OFF

On PFD................................................ OFF OFF OFF
AP cannot be engaged.
AP
Loss of actuator
On AP box ...........................................Test ON steady and OFF
On CAD ............................................... ACTUATOR
+
On PFD................................................ X on relevant axis.
AP cannot be engaged.

4.3
A 12-16 Page 10
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 4.4
TAXIING - TAKEOFF
1 PRE-TAXIING CHECKLIST
1. Radioaltimeter .................................................... ON Tested DH set.
2. Radionavigation systems ................................... Set and tested.
3. Radiocommunication systems............................ Set and tested.
4. Collective pitch lever .......................................... Released.
5. Pressure and temperature readings ................... Normal.
6. Warning lights .................................................... All out.
7. Autopilot ............................................................. ON.
NOTE
If on PFD strip OFF OFF OFF
- AP / SAS................................................... RESET.
- Autopilot.................................................... ON.
8. Heating and ventilation....................................... As required.
9. Parking brake ..................................................... Released.
10. Nose wheel castoring lock.................................. Release (if necessary).
2 TAXIING - TAKEOFF
2.1 TAXIING
Increase collective pitch, then move cyclic stick forward moderately to initiate low-
speed taxiing.
Brakes, (collective pitch set to
full low pitch) ..................................................... Checked.
Attitude indicators stability................................. Checked.
Headings........................................................... Checked.
Steer the aircraft with the yaw pedals and not the wheel brakes, which are
normally used only to slow down and stop the aircraft.
CAUTION
IF LMT + GONG, RECENTER THE CYCLIC STICK.
ON GROUND, IN ORDER TO PREVENT ANY RISK OF VERTICAL
OSCILLATIONS, THE TRIM LOADS MUST BE RELEASED BY
DEPRESSING THE COLLECTIVE TRIM RELEASE TRIGGER
WHENEVER THE COLLECTIVE LEVER IS MOVED.

4.4
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
2.2 TAKEOFF AND HOVERING

Warning and caution lights ................................All out.
Engine parameters ............................................Normal.
Heating ..............................................................Switch off.
Enter hover IGE at 6 ft.
NOTE
DG may appear temporarily on the PFD
Check:
All warning and caution lights out.
Pressure and temperature readings normal.
Take off while adjusting the collective pitch so as to maintain constant height up to
30 kt (55 km/h), then allow the aircraft to climb.
Reduce power below MTOP before reaching 40 kt (74 km/h)
CAUTION
THE TAKEOFF PATH MUST REMAIN OUTSIDE THE

HEIGHT/VELOCITY DIAGRAM DEFINED IN SECTION 2.
Retract landing gear at Vy.
2.3 CLIMBING
Gear ..................................................................Retracted.
The best rate of climb speed (Vy) is 80 kt (TAS).
For practical purposes, it will be assumed here that Vy(IAS) = 80 kt (148 km/h) less 1
kt per 1000 ft of altitude (3 km/h per 500 m).
Heating ..............................................................As required.
NOTE
The climb is done with about 2 bank right.

4.4
A 12-16 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 4.5
CRUISING FLIGHT
1 LEVEL FLIGHT
1.1 CRUISING FLIGHT
Maximum range is obtained by flying at Vy (refer to para. 2.3 - section 4.4).
Balance fuel quantities in left and right tanks as soon as possible while
respecting CG limits (Transfer pump flow 280 kg/h (617 lb/h)).
1.2 MANEUVERING
Avoid sudden maneuvers causing the load factor to be reached abruptly.
At weight > 4400 kg, do not hold turns beyond 45 bank.
NOTE
AP upper mode operation envelopes.
IAS; HDG Minimum engagement speed: 3 Axis operation 60 kt

4 Axis operation 30 kt
VOR Recommended minimum interception distance: 10 NM
Minimum interception speed: 60 kt
It is recommended to set IAS bug at desired

airspeed without exceeding VH + 5 kt.

4.5
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.3 FLYING IN TURBULENCE

Reduce IAS.
1.4 HEATING - DEMISTING VENTILATION
NOTE
LH control in forward position disables individual nozzle.
(If control not fitted, individual nozzle bleeds are always available).
Center control in forward position allows recirculation and increases heating
efficiency. Prolonged use of this position on ground is not advised.
After MOD 07 21B99: closing of lower pilot and copilot diffusers increases
demisting efficiency.
1.4.1 Heating - Demisting

1. Selector button ..................................... Press.
2. Selector ................................................ HEAT.
3. LH control (if fitted) ............................... As required.
4. Center control....................................... As required.
5. RH control ............................................ As required for heating
regulation.
6. On VEMD .............................................
In case of ECS automatic shut off:

On CAD ................................................ ECS
RH control ............................................ Slightly reduced
Wait for automatic switch on
of P2 bleed ........................................... ECS +
NOTE
On engine failure, P2 bleed is automatically switched off when exceeding the OEI
continuous rating on N1. Reset the system using pushbutton on rotary selector,
if needed (for N1 rating OEI continuous).
1.4.2 Ventilation
1. Selector ................................................ VENT.
2. Controls................................................ As required.

4.5
A 12-16 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 4.6
APPROACH - LANDING
1 APPROACH LANDING
Passenger ordinance lights ....................................... ON.
Extend the landing gear and check the following:
1. Gear ...................................................................... Down and locked.
2. Light ...................................................................... As required.
3. Nose wheel castoring lock ..................................... As required.
4. Parking brake ........................................................ Released.
5. Caution, warning and instrument
readings ................................................................ Checked.
6. Heating .................................................................. Switch off.
The recommended final approach speed is 45 kt
The descent path must remain outside the risk zone specified on the height/velocity
diagram (refer to SECTION 2).
For IFR coupled approach at minima when in sight.
7. Upper mode .......................................................... Disengaged.
NOTE
AP upper mode operation envelopes.
V.O.R. interception Recommended minimum distance: 5 NM

Recommended minimum distance: 5 NM
LOC/GS interception
Recommended angle 60.
CAUTION
ON GROUND, IN ORDER TO PREVENT ANY RISK OF VERTICAL
OSCILLATIONS, THE TRIM LOADS MUST BE RELEASED BY
DEPRESSING THE COLLECTIVE TRIM RELEASE TRIGGER WHENEVER
THE COLLECTIVE LEVER IS MOVED.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
4.6
A 14-28 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 4.7
ENGINE AND ROTOR SHUTDOWN
1 ENGINE SHUTDOWN
Wait for 30 s before shutting down engines. The taxiing duration can be subtracted
from these 30 s.
1. Controls ............................................................. Centered (use AP centering
function if available).
2. AP ...................................................................... OFF.
3. Collective pitch lever .......................................... Locked.
4. Pitots - Audio warning - Landing light................. OFF.
5. VEMD system status page................................. Scroll to check OEI usage (refer
to engine maintenance manual if
necessary).
6. ENG 1 and ENG 2 ............................................. IDLE then OFF.
7. Booster pumps................................................... OFF.
NOTE
If the engine does not stop immediately (Solenoid valve failure),
the FADEC will shut down the engine 5 to 6 s later.
Do not pull the fuel shutoff control lever before 10 s have elapsed.
2 STOPPING THE ROTOR

CAUTION
ROTOR BRAKE APPLICATION IS PROHIBITED

BEFORE ENGINE SHUTDOWN.
At NR 120 rpm.
1. Rotor brake ........................................................ Applied.
2. Radio - Radio Nav.............................................. OFF.
3. S/B HRZ............................................................. OFF.
When the rotor is stopped
1. Switches ............................................................ All OFF (except HYD ISOL).
2. VEMD flight report page information .................. Check.
3. BAT/ESS............................................................ OFF.
NOTE
At shutdown, do not open the front doors before the rotor is fully stopped.

4.7
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 4.8
SPECIAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
1 COLD-WEATHER OPERATIONS (-40C < OAT < -15C)

Helicopters fitted with extreme cold weather kit (refer to 2.3 page 3) are allowed to
operate at -40C < OAT < -15C.
NOTE
IF AIRCRAFT IS PARKED AT AN -30C < OAT < -25C

1) Refer to Aircraft Maintenance Manual: applicable document 05-21-00-218
IF AIRCRAFT IS PARKED AT AN OAT < -30C
1) Refer to Aircraft Maintenance Manual: applicable document 05-21-00-218
2) Remove the battery and store it in a warm place.
3) Fuel onboard must contain anti icing additive (refer to 2.5p.5)
2 TAKEOFF AFTER PARKING IN FALLING SNOW

Before starting the engines, check (opening MGB cowlings if necessary) that there is
no snow or ice built up inside the air intake ducts.
Carefully remove any trace of snow from the grid, around the air intakes, from the
cowlings and top of fuselage
3 TAKEOFF AND LANDING ON SLOPES

3.1 TAKEOFF AND LANDING-ON-SLOPE ENVELOPE
See section 2.6 page 1
3.2 TAKEOFF
Before takeoff:
- Parking brake ..................................Applied.
- Nose wheel......................................Locked.
After takeoff:
- Parking brake ..................................Released.
- Nose wheel......................................Unlocked.
3.3 LANDING
Before landing:
- Parking brake ...................................Applied.
- Nose wheel.......................................Locked.
Before fully reducing collective pitch, move cyclic stick to neutral position
to prevent LMT light from coming on.

4.8
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 4.9
ENGINE POWER AND THERMAL CHECK
1 GENERAL
The purpose of the engine power check is to determine the available power margin and
thermal margin relative to the minimum guaranteed engine values.
The periodicity of this test must be in accordance with applicable operational regulations
and TURBOMECA documentation.
These checks can be done in three different configurations:
On ground: Power or thermal check can be done on ground, but the stability needed
is often difficult to obtain. This test has to be considered as indicative. If in doubt, a
check in flight has to be done.
In cruise flight at MCP: This is the most useful test condition. The test can be done
in normal twin-engine cruise flight at around 140 Kt.
In OEI Training level flight: This test is considered as the reference test because it is
done in single-engine condition and therefore uses high N1 and TOT. It is to be
performed to confirm a bad or questionable result obtained in the twin-engine power
or thermal check test.
The engine power and thermal check can be done:
Automatically by FADEC and VEMD by pressing SCROLL on VEMD, or
Manually by comparison with reference data, by entering the parameters recorded
on the corresponding chart.
NOTE
The result of the automatic power check is referenced to the 100% of each engine.
To compare it to manual power check result, it is necessary to divide it by two.
For the same reason in the parameters displayed by VEMD after power check, the
torque has to be divided by two.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
4.9
A 14-28 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.1 AUTOMATIC POWER AND THERMAL CHECK PROCEDURE
Press the scroll button on VEMD to start the EPC.

Positive results are satisfactory.
If any result is negative, the corresponding engine may be faulty.
NOTE
The filling of the white rectangle gives an idea of the timing.
At the end of the test the VEMD displays the results of power and thermal check or
one of the following messages:
EPC NOT VALID : Stability was not achieved with enough

accuracy. Start another EPC.
EPC NOT AVAILABLE : Failure of one parameter. Do a manual check.
1.2 MANUAL POWER CHECK

The corrected torque value is determined on the corresponding chart and has to be
compared with the recorded torque.
- If the recorded torque is higher than the corrected torque, the result is
satisfactory.
- If the recorded torque is lower than the corrected torque, the engine may be
faulty.
1.3 MANUAL THERMAL CHECK

The corrected TOT value is determined on the corresponding chart and has to be
compared with the recorded TOT.
- If the corrected TOT is higher than the recorded TOT, the result is satisfactory.
- If the corrected TOT is lower than the recorded TOT, the engine may be faulty.
2 ON GROUND ENGINE POWER AND THERMAL CHECK

NOTE
If questionable or unstable results are obtained, it is advisable to repeat the test
procedure at different N1 values.
If any result is unsatisfactory, do an in flight power check.

4.9
A 12-16 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
2.1 RECORDING CONDITIONS

To perform the check:
Head the aircraft into the wind on a clear area.
After starting both engines, set one engine to IDLE/TRAINING.
Switch off all P2 bleed air flow.
Raise the collective pitch lever to obtain the maximum available power (from the
engine which is not in IDLE TRAINING mode) at the limit of liftoff, without allowing
rotor speed to drop below 342 rpm.
Check that the bleed valve is closed and that parameter readings are stable.
For manual power check, record the following values on the engine in TRAINING
mode :
- engine torque : Tq (%).
- exhaust gas temperature : TOT (C).
- gas generator speed : N1 (%).
- rotor speed : NR (rpm ).
- pressure altitude : Hp (ft).
- outside air temperature : OAT (C).
Apply the same procedure for checking the other engine.
2.2 AUTOMATIC POWER AND THERMAL CHECK

Press the scroll button on the VEMD to start the EPC.
Positive results are satisfactory.
If any result is negative, the corresponding engine may be faulty. A check in flight
has to be performed.

The corrected torque value is determined using Figure 1 and has to be compared
with the recorded torque.
- If the recorded torque is higher than the corrected torque, the result is
satisfactory.
- If the recorded torque is lower than the corrected torque, the engine may be
faulty.
A check in flight has to be performed.

The corrected TOT is determined using Figure 2 and has to be compared with the
recorded TOT.
- If the corrected TOT is higher than the recorded TOT, the result is satisfactory.
- If the corrected TOT is lower than the recorded TOT, the engine may be faulty.
A check in flight has to be performed.

4.9
A 12-16 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
3 IN CRUISE FLIGHT ENGINE POWER AND THERMAL CHECK

P2 bleed air flow ................................... Shut off.
Stable cruise at 140 kt .......................... Maintain for three minutes.
NOTE
If the configuration does not allow level flight at 140 kt, it is possible to do this check
at 100 kt.
For manual testing, record the following values:
- engine torque : Tq (%).
- exhaust gas temperature : TOT (C).
- gas generator speed : N1 (%).
- rotor speed : NR (rpm).
- pressure altitude : Hp (ft).
- outside air temperature : OAT (C).
- aircraft airspeed : IAS (kt).

Stabilize level flight, switch off all P2 air bleed and press scroll button on VEMD to
start the EPC.
If any result is negative, the corresponding engine may be faulty. A reference check
in OEI training level flight has to be performed (4).
Determine the corrected torque value using Figure 4 (140 kt) or Figure 5 (100 kt).
If the recorded torque is higher than the corrected torque, the result is satisfactory.
If not, confirm these values by performing a reference check in OEI training level
flight (4).

Determine the corrected TOT using Figure 2 or 3.
If the corrected TOT is higher than the recorded TOT, the result is satisfactory.
If not, confirm these values by performing a reference check in OEI training level
flight (4).

4.9
A 12-16 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
4 IN OEI TRAINING LEVEL FLIGHT ENGINE POWER AND

THERMAL CHECK: REFERENCE CHECK
4.1 CHECKING PRINCIPLES
This check must be carried out if one of the previous results is not satisfactory.
The purpose of this in-flight check is to determine the margin of the engine at a
higher N1 than during the previous check.

P2 bleed air flow ...................................Shut off.
Training mode .......................................Select.
OEI rating..............................................HI.
Level flight at 100 kt .............................Maintain.
RPM > 342 rpm....................................Maintain.
NOTE
Training mode is not damaging for the engine, it can be maintained with no time limitation.

If any result is negative: refer to the Engine Maintenance Manual.

Determine the corrected torque value using Figure 5 (100 kt).
If the recorded torque is higher than the corrected torque, the result is satisfactory.
If not, refer to the Engine Maintenance Manual.

Determine the corrected TOT value using Figure 2 (100 kt).
If the corrected TOT is higher than the recorded TOT, the result is satisfactory.
If not, refer to the Engine Maintenance Manual.
CAUTION
WHEN THE REFERENCE CHECK IS DONE FOLLOWING AN

UNSATISFACTORY RESULT OF AN IN FLIGHT ENGINE POWER
CHECK, IF THE RESULT OF THE REFERENCE CHECK IS
SATISFACTORY, THE CORRESPONDING ENGINE CAN BE
KEPT IN SERVICE WITH APPROPRIATE MAINTENANCE
(REFER TO MAINTENANCE MANUAL).

4.9
A 12-16 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL

4.9
A 04-36 Page 6
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 5.1
REGULATORY PERFORMANCE DATA
1 INTRODUCTION
The performance diagrams in this section are applicable to the basic aircraft version.
Refer to individual SUPPLEMENTS if optional equipment systems are installed.
There is no influence of electrical draw on regulatory performance data.
The limits of the operating envelope are mentioned in each figure.
NOTE
The performance given in the grey area is applicable to helicopters fitted with the
extreme cold weather kit (refer to 2.3 page 3).
2 DEMONSTRATED WIND ENVELOPE

2.1 WIND ENVELOPE FOR ROTOR STARTING AND STOPPING
Refer to SECTION.2.4.
2.2 HOVER FLIGHT SIDE AND TAIL WIND ENVELOPE

Refer to Figure 2.
3 AIR DATA SYSTEM CALIBRATION

3.1 PILOT'S AND COPILOT'S AIRSPEED INDICATORS
The pilot's and copilot's airspeed indicator calibration curve is given by Figure 3.
3.2 PILOT'S AND COPILOT'S ALTIMETERS

The aircraft static port accuracy is within 1 hPa, which corresponds to a maximum
error of 30 ft (8.5 m).

5.1
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
4 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHTS IN HOVER

Refer to Figures 4 and 5 for maximum weights in twin-engine hover.
5 RATES OF CLIMB
Twin-engine and one-engine inoperative rates of climb are given in Figures 6, 7, 8 and
9.
6 TAKEOFF AND LANDING PERFORMANCE

The takeoff and landing performance data are given in Figures 10, 11 and 12.
7 TAS/CAS CORRESPONDENCE CHART

The TAS/CAS correspondence chart is given in Figure 13.

5.1
A B 02-20 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
CLIMB PERFORMANCE
To determine the R/C, reduced weights (W/) must be used.
In order to simplify the figures and not to confuse "reduced weight" and "actual weight", the
W/ parameter is converted into a dimensionless parameter known as "WEIGHT INDEX"
(W/ in kg divided by 1000).
DETERMINATION OF RATE OF CLIMB

4 curves are necessary to determine the R/C. The first two curves are used to determine
the weight factor (Figures 6A and 6B).
CAUTION
WHEN N1 OR TOT ARE THE LIMITING PARAMETERS, THE USE OF

HEATING WILL LOWER THE RESULT BY :
- 250 ft / min AEO
- 100 ft / min OEI

5.1
A 12-16 Page 11
FLIGHT MANUAL

5.1
A 04-49 Page 12
FLIGHT MANUAL
SECTION 5.2
NOISE LEVELS
The noise levels are as follows:
Measurements ICAO limits Measurements FAR 36 limits

Flight phase As per ICAO At 4920 kg As per FAR At 4920 kg
Annex 16 Part 36
Overflight
88.9 95.9 89.0 95.9
(at VH = 147 kt)
Take-off 92.2 96.9 92.2 96.9
Approach 95.7 97.9 95.7 97.9
Average 92.3 96.9 92.3 96.9

5.2
A 12-16 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155B1
SUPPLEMENT
LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS
UTILIZATION IMCOMPATIBILITY
PERFORMANCE PENALTIES
IMPORTANT NOTE
The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given in
the basic flight manual and/or supplements listed in supplement 0.
The effectivity of the supplement at the latest revision is specified on the List of
Effective Pages.

Aroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.0.P1
A 14-48 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
NOTE
Pages SUP.0.P1 page 3, SUP.0.P3 page 1 and SUP.0.P4 page 1 concern the whole of
the Supplements assigned to the helicopter mentioned on the title pages.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.0.P1
A 14-48 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
CUSTOMIZATION:
AIRCRAFT: EC 155 B1 - S/N:
LIST OF ADDITIONAL APPROVED PAGES
SECTION PAGE DATE CODE SECTION PAGE DATE CODE
THIS AIRCRAFT DOES NOT OFFER ANY PARTICULAR FEATURES REQUIRING
THE CUSTOMIZATION OF THE FLIGHT MANUAL ON GREEN PAGES.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.0.P1
A 14-48 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS
Some Supplements covering installations or procedures not used on this helicopter may
be withdrawn from this manual.
The complete list of approved Supplements appears on pages SUP.0.P2.
No. TITLE
LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS
0
UTILIZATION INCOMPATIBILITY - PERFORMANCE PENALTIES
OPERATIONAL SUPPLEMENTS
No. TITLE
1 CATEGORIE A OPERATION
2 to 5 RESERVED
6 AUTOMATIC HOVER MODE
7 to 10 RESERVED
OPTIONAL SUPPLEMENTS
No. TITLE
HOISTING INSTALLATION WITH FIXED BOOM ON RH SIDE
11
AND "LAE" VARIABLE SPEED ELECTRIC HOIST
12 to 13 RESERVED
14 EMERGENCY FLOATATION GEAR
15 TRANSPORT OF EXTERNAL LOADS
16 RESERVED
17 ADDITIONAL FUEL TANK IN CARGO COMPARTMENT
18 SKI INSTALLATION
19 SAND FILTERS INSTALLATION
20 10 KVA ALTERNATOR
21 REAR-VIEW MIRROR INSTALLATION
22 "ROSEMOUNT" ICE DETECTOR
23 FUEL HEATING SYSTEM
24 ELECTRICALLY POWERED AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
DUAL-ZONE ELECTRICALLY POWERED AIR COND CONDITIONING,
25
VENTILATION AND HEATING SYSTEM
26 RESERVED
27 LOUDSPEAKER 450 W
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.0.P2
A 14-48 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS (cont'd)
No. TITLE
28 WINDSHIELD DEICING SYSTEM
29 SPECTROLAB SX16 SEARCHLIGHT WITH IR FILTER
30 RESERVED
31 MECHANICALLY DRIVEN AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
32 ANTI STICKING PROTECTION
33 RYAN 9900 BX OR AVYDINE TAS 620 AIRBORNE COLLISION

AVOIDANCE SYSTEM (ACAS)
34 TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM (CAS 66 A)
35 AUTOMATIC VOICE ALARM DEVICE
36 ANTENNA MOUNT PANEL
37 ROTOR START AND SHUTDOWN WITH HIGH WIND
38 DOUBLE FIXED BOARDING STEPS
HELICOPTER TERRAIN AWARENESS AND WARNING SYSTEM

39 (HTAWS)
EGPWS MK XXII SOFWARE VERSION 24 OR LATER APPROVED
VERSION
40 SPECIAL COCKPIT LIGHTING
41 to 49 RESERVED
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.0.P2
A 16-25 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
SPECIAL SUPPLEMENTS
No. TITLE
50 RESERVED
51 FLIR ULTRA 7000 INSTALLATION AND VIDEO ANTENNA (if fitted)
52 "UNS-1D" NAVIGATION SYSTEM
53 AERONAV TYPE III NAVIGATION SYSTEM
54 GPS TRIMBLE 2101.I/O APPROACH PLUS
55 FLIR WESCAM 16 DS-W INSTALLATION
56 TRAINING PROCEDURES
VIP 8 PASSENGERS WITH SWING-DOORS INSTALLATION

57
AND ELECTRICALLY POWERED FOOTSTEP(S)
58 FAST ROPING OPERATION
59 "UNS-1LW" FMS SCN 1000.3 OR LATER APPROVED VERSIONS
DUAL GPS 400 W (SOFTWARE VERSIONS MAIN 4.01 GPS 3.2 OR

60
LATER APPROVED VERSIONS)
FLIR ULTRA FORCE 350 (WITH AND WITHOUT FLIR OPERATOR

61
CONSOLE)
62 DUAL GTN 750H GNSS RNAV SYSTEM
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.0.P2
A 16-25 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
The Supplements contain the following pink pages except those canceled when the
conditions are complied with.
CAUTION
INFORMATION CONCERNED BELOW, THE READER WILL HAVE TO CHANGE
THE NUMBER OF THE PINK PAGE BY HAND, SO THAT THE INFORMATION
REMAINS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PARAGRAPH CONCERNED.
N SUP. Page Date Applicable before condition is met:
0 P3 1 *RC* 15-28
RC A 56 4 *RC* 06-14 AMS 71C16 (TU 93C).
17 1 *RC* 14-04 MOD 07-39C75

RC B
23 1 *RC* 14-04 MOD 07-39C75
14 2 *RC* 14-46 MOD 07-45D24 or

RC C 365P084757.01/.04/.07/.10, and
MOD 07-45D25.
60 4 *RC* 15-05 Only applicable if MOD 07-22B70 is fitted

RC D
60 9 *RC* 15-28 Only applicable if MOD 07-22B70 is fitted
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.0.P3
A 15-28 Page 1
*RC*
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
The Supplements contain the following pink pages except those canceled when the
conditions are complied with.
CAUTION
IF A NORMAL REVISION (RN) MODIFIES THE PAGE NUMBER FOR
ANY INFORMATION CONCERNED BELOW, THE READER WILL HAVE
TO CHANGE THE NUMBER OF THE PINK PAGE BY HAND, SO THAT
THE INFORMATION REMAINS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
PARAGRAPH CONCERNED.
RC No. SUPPLEMENT Page Date code Applicable before condition is met:
NOTE
The date code includes the last two digits of the year
followed by the week number in that year.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.0.P3
A 14-48 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPOSITION
OF RUSH REVISIONS (RR)

The Supplements contains the following additional yellow page(s):
No. DATE No. DATE

SUPPLEMENT PAGE SUPPLEMENT PAGE
RR CODE RR CODE
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.0.P4
A 14-48 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
R: Revised, to be replaced
N: New, to be inserted
SUPPLEMENT PAGE DATE (1) SUPPLEMENT PAGE DATE (1)
SUP. 0 P1 1 14-48
SUP. 0 P1 2 14-48
SUP. 0 P1 3 14-48
SUP. 0 P2 1 14-48
SUP. 0 P2 2 16-25 R
SUP. 0 P2 3 16-25 R
SUP. 0 P3 1 14-48
SUP. 0 P4 1 14-48
SUP. 0 P5 1/02 16-25 R
SUP. 0 1 14-48
SUP. 0 2 14-48
SUP. 0 3 14-48
LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.0.P5
A 16-25 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
LOG OF NORMAL REVISIONS (Cont'd)
BASIC RFM REVISIONS

EASA approval No10047898 and
No10049270 on May 23, 2014
on June 25, 2015
Incorporation of new brand "Airbus Helicopters" instead "Eurocopter"
Title New log of approved normal revision - Deletion of EASA mention in footpages
New optional supplement "AUTOMATIC HOVER MODE"
Revised
SUP.0 all pages
information
Deleted
None.
information
on October 17, 2016
Main - Addition of AVYDINE TAS 620 reference in SUP.33,
points - Addition of SUP.62 DUAL GTN 750H GNSS RNAV SYSTEM.
Revised
SUP.0.P2 pages 2 and 3, SUP.0.P5 pages 1 and 2.
information
Deleted
None.
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.0.P5
A 16-25 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 UTILIZATION INCOMPATIBILITY BETWEEN OPTIONAL

EQUIPMENT ITEMS
The following list is non-exhaustive and covers only those equipment items whose
utilization is incompatible with one or more items.
Operation of the following installations : SUP Makes operation with the following
equipment items impossible :
ITEM ITEM
Electrically powered air Conditioning
1 24 2
system
2 Windshield deicing system 28 1
3 Life rafts in footstep containers 4 - 5 - 11
Non foldable seat on first passenger
4 3
row (facing aft or front)
5 Roping beam 3 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 10 - 11 - 15
6 12-Passenger seats lay out 8 - 7 - 11
7 Cargo sling 1600 kg 15 5 - 6 - 8 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14
8 Hoist on RH side 11 5 - 6 - 7 - 11 - 13 - 14
9 SPECTROLAB searchlight 29 5 - 11
10 Loudspeaker 450 W 27 5 - 11
11 Fast roping 58 3 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 10 - 13 - 14 - 15
VIP installation and retractable
12 57 7
passenger footsteps
15 Pod FLIR installation 51-55 5 - 11
61
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.0
A 14-48 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
2 PERFORMANCE PENALTIES DUE TO INSTALLATION OF AN

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ITEM
2.1 TAKEOFF WEIGHT PENALTY
Determine the required performance in the Basic Flight Manual without allowing
for the maximum aircraft weight limit.
Apply the weight penalty given by the supplement covering the optional
equipment.
Compare with the maximum aircraft weight limit and use the smaller of the two
values.
Examples :
An optional equipment item reducing the maximum takeoff weight by 80 kg.
Case 1 :
Case 2:
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.0
A 14-48 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
2.2 RATE OF CLIMB PENALTY

Apply the penalty on the Basic Flight Manual performance.
2.3 PENALTIES DUES TO SIMULTANEOUS USE OF SEVERAL ITEMS

OF OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Add together the penalties of each optional equipment item and apply the preceding
paragraphs.
2.4 AIRCRAFT FITTED WITH SAND FILTERS

The performance data with sand filters is given in the relevant Supplement.
When other optional equipment is used with the sand filters, the penalties must be
applied to the performance data applying to the sand filters.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.0
A 14-48 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
SUPPLEMENT
"CATEGORY A" OPERATION
IMPORTANT NOTE
The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given
in the basic flight manual and/or supplements listed in supplement 0.
Effective Pages.
Airbus Helicopters Direction Technique Support

APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1.P1
A 15-15 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
EASA CERTIFICATION

SUP. 1 P1 1 15-15 R SUP. 1 26 15-15 R

SUP. 1 P5 1 15-15 R SUP. 1 27 15-15 R
SUP. 1 P5 2 15-15 R SUP. 1 28 15-15 R
SUP. 1 1 15-15 R SUP. 1 29 15-15 R
SUP. 1 2 15-15 R SUP. 1 30 15-15 R
SUP. 1 3 15-15 R SUP. 1 31 15-15 R
SUP. 1 4 15-15 R SUP. 1 32 15-15 R
SUP. 1 5 15-15 R SUP. 1 33 15-15 R
SUP. 1 6 15-15 R SUP. 1 34 15-15 R
SUP. 1 7 15-15 R SUP. 1 35 15-15 R
SUP. 1 8 15-15 R SUP. 1 36 15-15 R
SUP. 1 9 15-15 R SUP. 1 37 15-15 R
SUP. 1 10 15-15 R SUP. 1 38 15-15 R
SUP. 1 11 15-15 R SUP. 1 39 15-15 R
SUP. 1 12 15-15 R SUP. 1 40 15-15 R
SUP. 1 13 15-15 R SUP. 1 41 15-15 R
SUP. 1 14 15-15 R SUP. 1 42 15-15 R
SUP. 1 15 15-15 R SUP. 1 43 15-15 R
SUP. 1 16 15-15 R SUP. 1 44 15-15 R
SUP. 1 17 15-15 R SUP. 1 45 15-15 R
SUP. 1 18 15-15 R SUP. 1 46 15-15 R
SUP. 1 19 15-15 R SUP. 1 47 15-15 R
SUP. 1 20 15-15 R SUP. 1 48 15-15 R
SUP. 1 21 15-15 R SUP. 1 49 15-15 R
SUP. 1 22 15-15 R SUP. 1 50 15-15 R
SUP. 1 23 15-15 R SUP. 1 51 15-15 R
SUP. 1 24 15-15 R SUP. 1 52 15-15 R
SUP. 1 25 15-15 R SUP. 1 53 15-15 R
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1.P5
A 15-15 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
EASA CERTIFICATION (CONTD)

SUP. 1 54 15-15 R
SUP. 1 55 15-15 R
SUP. 1 56 15-15 R
SUP. 1 57 15-15 R
SUP. 1 58 15-15 R
SUP. 1 59 15-15 R
SUP. 1 60 15-15 R
SUP. 1 61 15-15 R
SUP. 1 62 15-15 R
SUP. 1 63 15-15 R

EASA approval No R.C.03122
on October 10, 2008
on October 09, 2015
Addition of H/V limitation, incorporation of new brand "Airbus Helicopters"
Main points instead of "Eurocopter", "EASA APPROVED" is replaced by "APPROVED"
in footpages, introduction of a new Log of revision.
Revised
SUP.1.P1 page 1, SUP.1.P5 page 1 to 2, SUP.1 pages 1 to 63.
information
Deleted
None.
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1.P5
A 15-15 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
CONTENTS
PAGE
1 GENERAL INFORMATION......................................................................................... 3
1.1 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS ......................................................................... 3
2 LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................................. 4
2.1 TYPE OF OPERATIONS APPROVED ............................................................... 4
2.2 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF AND LANDING WEIGHTS .............................................. 4
2.3 APPROVED ALTITUDE/TEMPERATURE ENVELOPE...................................... 4
2.4 OPERATION IN WIND ........................................................................................ 5
2.5 PROHIBITED MANEUVRES .............................................................................. 5
3 TAKEOFF FROM CLEAR AREA ............................................................................... 5

3.1 NORMAL TWIN-ENGINE TAKEOFF .................................................................. 5
3.2 TAKEOFF WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE BEFORE OR AT THE TDP ................ 6
3.3 TAKEOFF WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE AFTER OR AT THE TDP ................... 7
3.4 TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE .............................................................................. 8
4 OPERATIONS FROM CLEAR AREA WITH INCREASED SLOPE ........................... 14

4.1 NORMAL TWIN-ENGINE TAKEOFF .................................................................. 14
4.2 TAKEOFF WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE BEFORE OR AT THE TDP ................. 15
4.3 TAKEOFF WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE AFTER OR AT THE TDP .................... 16
4.4 TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE............................................................................... 17
5 LANDING ON CLEAR AREA .................................................................................... 20

5.1 NORMAL TWIN-ENGINE LANDING ................................................................... 20
5.2 LANDING WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE ............................................................. 21
5.3 ABORTED LANDING AND OEI CLIMB .............................................................. 22
5.4 LANDING PERFORMANCE ............................................................................... 23
6 TAKEOFF FROM GROUND HELIPAD ..................................................................... 26

6.2 TAKEOFF WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE BEFORE OR AT THE TDP
(Before fuselage rotation) ................................................................................... 27
6.3 TAKEOFF WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE AFTER OR AT THE TDP
(Fuselage rotation started) .................................................................................. 28
6.4 TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE............................................................................... 29
7 LANDING ON GROUND HELIPAD ........................................................................... 31

7.2 LANDING WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE ............................................................. 32
7.3 ABORTED LANDING AND OEI CLIMB .............................................................. 33
7.4 LANDING PERFORMANCE ............................................................................... 34
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
CONTENTS (Contd)
PAGE
8 TAKEOFF FROM ELEVATED HELIPORT ............................................................... 36
8.1 NORMAL TWIN-ENGINE TAKEOFF ................................................................. 36
(Before fuselage rotation) ................................................................................... 37
(Fuselage rotation started) ................................................................................. 38
8.4 TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE .............................................................................. 39
8.5 ABORTED TAKEOFF WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE AFTER TDP
(Fuselage rotation started) ................................................................................. 39
9 LANDING ON ELEVATED HELIPORT ..................................................................... 46

9.1 DIRECT APPROACH: NORMAL TWIN-ENGINE LANDING .............................. 46
9.2 DIRECT APPROACH: LANDING WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE ........................ 47
9.3 OFFSET APPROACH: LATE LDP LANDING PROCEDURE ............................. 48
9.4 ABORTED LANDING AND OEI CLIMB.............................................................. 49
9.5 LANDING PERFORMANCE............................................................................... 50
10 CLIMBING PERFORMANCE .................................................................................... 52
11 DETERMINATION OF DISTANCES.......................................................................... 61
12 TAS-CAS CONVERSION GRAPH ............................................................................ 63
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL INFORMATION
The limitations, procedures and performance provided in this supplement apply to
CATEGORY A aircraft operations only.
This information supplements or replaces the information provided in the Basic Flight
Manual and the Supplements relating to the optional equipment fitted.
1.1 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS

VTOSS V1 TDP LDP
Takeoff Safety Critical Decision Takeoff Landing
Speed (TAS) (Refer Speed Decision Decision Point
to Figure 47 for V1 is an IAS unless Point
TAS <---> IAS otherwise indicated
conversion) (TAS) in the text.
V1 = VTOSS 5KT
5 VTOSS are The minimum V1 is This point is
IAS = 40 kt.
available: 40, 50, equal to 35 kt IAS. defined on
CLEAR AREA H1 = 100 ft.
60, 70 and 80 kt (Refer to Figure 47 figure 2 by
R/D 500
(figure 5) for TAS <---> IAS IAS = V1
ft/min
conversion)
CLEAR AREA
WITH
VTOSS = 60 KT V1 = 45 KT IAS = 45 KT
INCREASED
SLOPE
IAS = 30 kt.
H1 = 100 FT H1 = 100 ft.
GROUND
VTOSS = 40 KT + Fuselage R/D: between
HELIPAD
rotation - 400 and
- 500 ft/min
balked landing
on clear area,
clear area with
VTOSS = 60 KT
increased
slope and
ground helipad
Direct approach
H1 = 100 ft
above heliport
Offset approach
H1 = 30 FT
ELEVATED H1 = 50 to 100 ft
VTOSS = 45 KT + Fuselage
HELIPORT above heliport
rotation
V1 = 25 kt
R/D: between
- 400 and
- 500 ft/min
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
2 LIMITATIONS
Irrespective of the special limitations provided below, the limitations relating to
CATEGORY B operations, provided in SECTION 2 as well as those relating to the
optional equipment fitted (refer to SUPPLEMENTS) remain applicable.
When complying with weight limitations and procedures of this supplement, the H/V
diagram of the basic Flight Manual is not relevant.
2.1 TYPE OF OPERATIONS APPROVED

The EC 155 B1 aircraft is approved for CATEGORY A operations from clear areas,
from ground helipad with a diameter equal to or greater than 71 ft (21,6 m) and from
elevated heliport with a diameter equal to or greater than 52,5 ft (16 m), in
compliance with limitations and procedures provided in this supplement.
2.2 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF AND LANDING WEIGHTS

The maximum takeoff and landing weights according to the ambient conditions are
provided (performance in grey only if cold weather kit is fitted):
Takeoff from clear area 3.
Takeoff from clear area with increased slope 4.
Landing on clear area 5.
Takeoff from ground helipad 6.
Landing on ground helipad 7.
Takeoff from elevated heliport 8.
Landing on elevated heliport 9.
2.3 APPROVED ALTITUDE/TEMPERATURE ENVELOPE
Figure 1: Approved Altitude/Temperature envelope

A + D - Approved envelope at takeoff and landing for elevated heliport
A + B + D + E - Approved envelope at takeoff and landing for clear area, ground helipad
and increased slope (*)
(A + B + C) + (D + E + F) - Approved envelope in flight
The area D + E + F are Authorized with extreme cold weather kit (refer to section 2.3 2)
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
2.4 OPERATIONS IN WIND

Takeoff and landing with tail winds are prohibited.
For offset approach procedure on elevated Heliport arrange flight not to exceed
wind sector 90 at landing.
For performance, head wind velocity value should comply with applicable
operational regulation. If no regulation exists, take half of laminar head wind value.
2.5 PROHIBITED MANEUVERS

Elevated heliport procedure when ski or anti sticking protection are fitted.
3 TAKEOFF FROM CLEAR AREA

3.1 NORMAL TWIN-ENGINE TAKEOFF
Figure 2: Clear area normal AEO takeoff

NOTE
V1 and VTOSS on figure 2 are an example when VTOSS = 40 kt.
1. Heating system ............................................ Off.
2. Hover IGE at 6 ft .......................................... Enter.
3. At 6 ft, IAS ................................................... Increase until the translational lift.
4. Nose-down attitude ...................................... - 10.
5. Collective pitch ............................................ Increase to maintain takeoff path.
6. Climb allowing the speed to increase to Vy (IAS) following takeoff path.
7. Vy ................................................................ Maintain.
8. Landing gear................................................ Retract.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
ABORT TAKEOFF AS SOON AS ENGINE FAILURE OCCURS.
Figure 3: Clear area rejected takeoff.
When the failure occurs, simultaneously:

1. Collective pitch ............................................. Reduce to start descending.
2. Attitude......................................................... Nose-up + 20.
When closing the ground:
3. Collective pitch ............................................. Increase to control the descent.
4. Attitude......................................................... Reduce to + 10.
5. Collective pitch ............................................. Increase to cushion the landing
with nose-up attitude + 5.
After touch-down:
6. Collective pitch ............................................. Fully down.
7. Brakes.......................................................... Apply.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 6
FLIGHT MANUAL
CONTINUE THE TAKEOFF PROCEDURE
Figure 4: Clear area OEI takeoff
When the failure occurs :

1. NR ....................................................... Keep at NR > 330 rpm(above the horn).
2. IAS ....................................................... VTOSS.
At VTOSS and once trajectory is established:
3. OEI 2 min............................................. Select.
4. Collective pitch ..................................... Adjust to maintain NR > 330 rpm.
At 200 ft :
5. In level flight IAS ................................... Vy.
Before or as soon as the OEI 2 min rating indicator starts to flash:
6. OEI continuous .................................... Select.
7. Collective pitch .................................... Adjust to maintain NR > 330 rpm.
8. At Vy, landing gear .............................. Retract.
At 1000 ft:
9. Affected engine ENG # ........................ OFF.
10. Affected engine booster pumps ........... OFF.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 7
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.4 TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE

1. VTOSS .........................................................Determine (Figure 5).
NOTE
VTOSS is selected as follow:
V (Kt) : RESULT of figure 5 VTOSS (Kt)
40 V < 50 40
50 V < 60 50
60 V < 70 60
70 V < 80 70
V = 80 80
2. MTOW Determine (Figure 6, 7 and 8).

3. Obstacle clearance on takeoff path ...........Determine.
Takeoff distance D2 ............................Figure 9.
Distances D3, D4, D5 .........................Figure 46.
CAUTION
MAKE SURE THAT THE MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT MAKES IT POSSIBLE
TO CLEAR ALL OBSTACLES DURING THE CLIMB
AT OEI 2 min AT VTOSS (FIGURES 38, 39, 41, 42, 43, 44 AND 45)
IF NOT, MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT MUST BE REDUCED ACCORDINGLY.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 8
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 5
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 9
FLIGHT MANUAL
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 10
FLIGHT MANUAL
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 11
FLIGHT MANUAL
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 12
FLIGHT MANUAL
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 13
FLIGHT MANUAL
4 TAKEOFF FROM CLEAR AREA WITH INCREASED SLOPE

Figure 10: Clear area AEO takeoff with increased slope.

1. RPM switch ................................................... HIGH RPM H
2. NR increases ................................................ Check 360 rpm
3. Heating system ............................................. Off
4. Hover IGE at 6 ft ........................................... Enter
5. At 6 ft ............................................................ Nose down 5, increase IAS
until the translational lift
6. Nose-down attitude ....................................... - 5
7. TOP .............................................................. Apply
8. At 40 kt, MCP ................................................ Apply
9. Nose down 5............................................. Maintain
10. At Vy ............................................................. Maintain
11. RPM switch ................................................... NORM RPM H
12. NR decreases ............................................... Check
13. Landing gear ................................................. Retract
14. Nose-down 5 ............................................. Maintain
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 14
FLIGHT MANUAL
ABORT TAKEOFF AS SOON AS ENGINE FAILURE OCCURS.
Figure 11: Clear area rejected takeoff.
When the failure occurs, simultaneously:

1. Collective pitch ............................................ Reduce to start descending.
2. Attitude ........................................................ Nose-up + 15.
When closing the ground:
3. Collective pitch ............................................ Increase to control the descent.
4. Attitude ........................................................ Reduce to + 10.
5. Collective pitch ............................................ Increase to cushion the landing
with nose-up attitude + 5.
After touch-down:
6. Collective pitch ............................................ Fully down.
7. Brakes ......................................................... Apply.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 15
FLIGHT MANUAL
CONTINUE THE TAKEOFF PROCEDURE
Figure 12: OEI takeoff from clear area with increased slope.
When the failure occurs:
1. NR ........................................................... Keep at NR > 330 rpm(above the horn).
2. Attitude .................................................... - 5 maintain.
At VTOSS and once trajectory is established:
3. Attitude .................................................... Adjust to maintain VTOSS.
4. OEI 2 min ................................................ Select.
5. Collective pitch ........................................ Adjust to maintain NR > 330 rpm.
At 200 ft :
6. In level flight IAS ..................................... Vy.
7. OEI continuous ........................................ Select.
9. At Vy, landing gear .................................. Retract.
10. RPM switch ............................................. NORM RPM H
11. NR decreases ......................................... Check
At 1000 ft:
12. Affected engine ENG #............................ OFF
13. Affected engine booster pumps ............... OFF
NOTE
After failure a turn limited to 10 bank is authorized without change
on the distances or heights.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 16
FLIGHT MANUAL

1. Rejected takeoff distance D1 .............................................. Determine (Figure 13).
2. Maximum takeoff weight ..................................................... Determine (Figure 14).
3. Obstacle clearance on takeoff path..................................... Determine
Distances D3, D4, D5 .................................................... Figure 46.
Takeoff distance D2 see table below:
D2
TAKEOFF DISTANCE
UNFACTORED WIND DISTANCE
0 kt 475 m (1558 ft)

10 kt 333 m (1092 ft)
20 kt 217 m (712 ft)
30 kt 126 m (413 ft)
40 kt 62 m (203 ft)
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 17
FLIGHT MANUAL
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 18
FLIGHT MANUAL
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 19
FLIGHT MANUAL
5 LANDING ON CLEAR AREA

5.1 NORMAL TWIN-ENGINE LANDING
Figure 15 : Clear area normal AEO landing.
From the LDP, perform a direct approach with steady deceleration

down to 30 kt at a height of nearly 15 ft.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 20
FLIGHT MANUAL
5.2 LANDING WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE
A LANDING IS POSSIBLE IN THE EVENT OF ONE ENGINE FAILURE AT ANY
POINT DURING THE APPROACH.
LANDING IS MANDATORY IF ENGINE FAILURE OCCURS AFTER THE LDP.
Complete landing by :
1. Collective pitch ................................................... Adjust to maintain NR > 330 rpm.

2. Attitude ............................................................... Nose up + 15 max.
When the aircraft starts to sink:
3. Collective pitch ................................................... Increase.
4. Attitude ............................................................... Reduce.
5. Collective pitch ................................................... Apply to cushion landing.
After touch-down:
6. Collective pitch ................................................... Fully down.
7. Brakes ................................................................ Apply.
Figure 16 : Clear area OEI landing
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 21
FLIGHT MANUAL
5.3 ABORTED LANDING AND OEI CLIMB
GO-AROUND TO REACH THE TAKEOFF TRAJECTORY CORRESPONDING
TO VTOSS=60kt IS POSSIBLE IF ENGINE FAILURE OCCURS AT OR
BEFORE THE LDP.
Figure 17: Clear area balked landing
1. Collective pitch .........................................Increase to maintain NR > 330 rpm.

2. IAS ...........................................................VTOSS = 60 kt.
At VTOSS and once trajectory is ensured:
3. OEI 2 min .................................................Select.
4. Collective pitch .........................................Adjust to maintain NR > 330 rpm.
At 200 ft :
5. In level flight IAS ......................................Vy.
6. OEI continuous ........................................Select.
8. At Vy, landing gear ...................................Retract.
At 1000 ft :
9. Affected engine ENG # ............................OFF.
10. Affected engine booster pumps ...............OFF.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 22
FLIGHT MANUAL
5.4 LANDING PERFORMANCE

1. Max landing weight .............................................. Determine (Figure 18).
2. Landing distance D6 ............................................ Determine (Figure 19).
NOTE
The distance from LDP to the aircraft complete stop is obtained by adding
a fix value of 120 m (394 ft) to the landing distance D6.
3. Obstacle clearance on aborted landing path........ Determine.

Distance D7 .................................................... Figure 19.
Distances D3, D4, D5 ..................................... Figure 46.
CAUTION
AT OEI 2 min AT VTOSS (FIGURES 38, 39, 41, 42, 43, 44 AND 45)
IF NOT, MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT MUST BE REDUCED ACCORDINGLY.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 23
FLIGHT MANUAL
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 24
FLIGHT MANUAL
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 25
FLIGHT MANUAL
6 TAKEOFF FROM GROUND HELIPAD

Figure 20: Ground helipad normal AEO takeoff

1. Heating system .................................................... Off
2. RPM switch .......................................................... HIGH RPM H
3. NR increases ........................................................ Check 360 rpm
4. Radio altimeter DH ............................................... Set at 100 ft
5. Collective trigger................................................... Depress
6. Hover at 6 ft.......................................................... Enter
7. Collective trigger................................................... Release
8. Vertical climb at 500 ft/mn .................................... Establish through collective
effort (Pad in the front part of
the lower window of the door)
At the TDP:
9. Nose down attitude............................................... - 10
When airspeed reaches 30 kt:
10. Nose-down attitude .............................................. Reduce
11. Power ................................................................... Adjust
12. Vy ......................................................................... Establish
13. Landing gear ........................................................ Retract
As soon as the climb is established :
14. RPM switch........................................................... NORM RPM H
15. NR decreases ....................................................... Check
16. Vy ........................................................................ Keep until the desired flight
altitude is reached
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 26
FLIGHT MANUAL
(BEFORE FUSELAGE ROTATION)
ABORT THE TAKEOFF :
Figure 21: Ground helipad rejected takeoff
AS SOON AS FAILURE IS DETECTED:

1. Collective pitch ............................................. Release to cancel collective effort
2. RPM 330 ................................................... Maintain
3. Attitude......................................................... Adjust to reach the landing area
Around 50 ft:
4. Collective pitch ............................................. Apply continuously depressing
collective trigger
5. Near the ground ........................................... Apply maximum pitch if necessary
After touch-down :
6. Collective pitch ............................................. Fully lower
7. Brakes.......................................................... Apply
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 27
FLIGHT MANUAL
(FUSELAGE ROTATION STARTED)
CONTINUE THE TAKEOFF :
Figure 22: Ground helipad OEI takeoff

1. Attitude .........................................................nose-down -10
2. Collective pitch .............................................Release to maintain
NR > 330 rpm
As soon as the airspeed reaches 30 kt:
3. Nose-down attitude ......................................Reduce
4. TAS ..............................................................VTOSS = 40 kt
Once the trajectory is established:
5. OEI 2 min .....................................................Select
6. Collective pitch .............................................Adjust to maintain
NR > 330 rpm
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 28
FLIGHT MANUAL
At 200 ft
1. In level flight, IAS ......................................... Vy .
2. At Vy, landing gear ...................................... Retract.
When the OEI 2 min indication flashes:
3. OEI continuous ............................................ Select.
4. Collective pitch ............................................. Adjust to maintain.
NR > 330 rpm.
When the climb is established :
5. RPM switch .................................................. NORM RPM H
6. NR 330 rpm .............................................. Maintain.
At 1000 ft:
7. Affected engine ENG # ................................ OFF.
8. Affected engine booster pumps ................... OFF.

VTOSS = 40 kt.
1. MTOW..................................................... Determine (Figure 23).
2. Obstacle clearance on takeoff path ......... Determine.
Distance D2 ........................................ = 150 m (492 ft).
Distances D3, D4, D5 ......................... Figure 46.
CAUTION
AT OEI 2 min AT VTOSS (FIGURES 38, 39 AND 45)
IF NOT, MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT MUST BE REDUCED ACCORDINGLY
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 29
FLIGHT MANUAL
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 30
FLIGHT MANUAL
7 LANDING ON GROUND HELIPAD

7.1 NORMAL TWIN-ENGINE LANDING
HOVER : 10 ft
Figure 24: Ground helipad normal AEO landing
During the approach and for IAS 70 kt :

1. RPM switch ......................................... HIGH RPM H
2. NR increases ....................................... Check 360 rpm
3. Fly the approach to reach LDP
4. Continue the approach while continuously reducing speed and thus bring
the aircraft above the landing area at a height of about 10 ft.
5. Collective ............................................. Lower to land
After touch-down :
6. Collective pitch .................................... Fully lower
7. Brakes ................................................. Apply
8. RPM 365 switch .................................. NORM RPM H
9. NR decreases ..................................... Check
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 31
FLIGHT MANUAL
7.2 LANDING WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE

A landing is possible in the event of an engine failure at any point during the
approach.
Landing is mandatory if engine failure occurs after the LDP.
1. Continuously reduce speed to bring the aircraft above the landing point at a
height of approximately 10 ft keeping the NR 330 rpm.
Just before touchdown:
2. Attitude 8
3. Collective pitch .............................................Increase to cushion the landing
After touch-down :
4. Collective pitch .............................................Fully lower
5. Brakes ..........................................................Apply
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 32
FLIGHT MANUAL
GO-AROUND IS POSSIBLE IF THE ENGINE FAILURE OCCURS AT THE LATEST
AT THE LDP.
Figure 25: Ground helipad aborted landing and OEI climb

1. Collective pitch ........................................ Raise as necessary while maintaining
NR > 330 rpm.
2. Nose-down attitude .................................. - 5 to reach VTOSS = 60 kt.
Once the flight path is established:
3. OEI 2 min................................................. Select .
4. Climb to 200 ft keeping 330 rpm NR 340 rpm
At 200 ft:
5. In level flight IAS ...................................... Vy.
6. Landing gear............................................ Retract.
Before or as soon as the OEI 2 min starts to flash:
7. OEI continuous ........................................ Select.
9. RPM switch.............................................. NORM. RPM H
10. NR 330 rpm .......................................... Maintain.
At 1000 ft:
11. Affected engine ENG # ............................ OFF.
12. Affected engine booster pumps ............... OFF.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 33
FLIGHT MANUAL
VTOSS = 60 kt.
1. Maximum landing weight ..............................Determine (Figure 26).
2. Distances D3, D4, D5 ...................................Determine (Figure 46).
CAUTION
AT OEI 2 min AT VTOSS (FIGURES 38, 42 AND 45)
IF NOT, MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT MUST BE REDUCED ACCORDINGLY
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 34
FLIGHT MANUAL
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 35
FLIGHT MANUAL
8 TAKEOFF FROM ELEVATED HELIPORT

Figure 27: Elevated heliport normal AEO takeoff

1. Heating system .................................................. Off
2. RPM switch ........................................................ HIGH RPM H
3. NR increases ...................................................... Check 360 rpm
4. Altimeter and Radio altimeter DH ....................... adjusted
5. Parking brake ..................................................... Applied
6. Collective trigger................................................. Depress
7. Hover at 3 ft........................................................ Rotor at the edge of the elevated
heliport
8. Collective trigger................................................. Release
9. Vertical climb at positive (without
Exceeding 200 ft/min)......................................... Establish through collective effort
(heavy, use ground effect to
increase rate of climb setting)
WARNING
A POSITIVE R/C AT TDP GUARANTEES A DECK-EDGE CLEARANCE

OF MORE THAN 15 ft IN CASE OF ENGINE FAILURE AFTER TDP.
At the TDP:
10. Attitude ............................................................... Nose down - 10
11. Attitude ............................................................... Nose-down reduce
12. Power ................................................................. Reduce to MCP and collective
trim released
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 36
FLIGHT MANUAL
13. Vy ...................................................................... Establish
14. Landing gear ...................................................... Retract
15. RPM switch ........................................................ NORM RPM H
16. NR decreases .................................................... Check
17. Vy ...................................................................... Keep until the desired flight
altitude is reached
18. Parking brake ..................................................... released

ABORTED TAKEOFF:
Figure 28: Elevated heliport rejected takeoff

1. Collective pitch ............................................... Release to cancel collective effort
2. RPM 330 ..................................................... Maintain
3. Attitude ........................................................... Adjust to reach the landing area
Before touch down:
4. Collective pitch ............................................... Apply continuously depressing
collective trigger
Near the ground
5. Collective pitch ............................................... Apply maximum pitch if necessary
After touch-down:
6. Collective pitch ............................................... Fully lower
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 37
FLIGHT MANUAL

CONTINUED TAKEOFF:
Figure 29: Elevated heliport OEI takeoff

1. Attitude .........................................................Quickly nose-down - 20
As soon as low RPM audio horn appears:
2. Collective pitch .............................................Release to cancel effort (NR around
320 rpm)
As soon as the airspeed reaches 30 kt:

3. Attitude .........................................................Nose-down reduce to reach VTOSS
4. Collective pitch .............................................Adjust to maintain NR > 330 rpm
5. OEI 2 min .....................................................Select
6. Collective pitch .............................................Adjust to maintain NR > 330 rpm
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 38
FLIGHT MANUAL
At 200 ft
1. In level flight, IAS ......................................... Vy .
2. At Vy, landing gear ...................................... Retract.
3. OEI continuous ............................................ Select.
4. Collective pitch ............................................. Adjust to maintain.
NR > 330 rpm.
When the climb is established:
5. RPM switch .................................................. NORM RPM H
6. NR 330 rpm .............................................. Maintain.
7. Parking brake............................................... Released
At 1000 ft:
8. Affected engine ENG # ................................ OFF.
9. Affected engine booster pumps ................... OFF.
8.4 TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE (FIGURE 32A AND 32B)

VTOSS = 45 kt.
EXAMPLE 1 (figure 31A and 31B)
Determine the MTOW and takeoff distance as a function of OEI takeoff dropdown,
Hp, OAT and actual headwind.
MTOW is minimum between first limiting weight point A and second limiting weight
point B.
EXAMPLE 2 (figure 31A and 31B)
Choose MTOW (point C) lower than second limiting weight (point D).
Determine the OEI takeoff dropdown and takeoff distance, given by MTOW (point
C), Hp, OAT and actual headwind.
8.5 ABORTED TAKEOFF WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE AFTER TDP

If, following an engine failure after fuselage rotation (TDP), the pilot decide, for any
operational reason, to abort take off, the recommended procedure is described as
follow.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 39
FLIGHT MANUAL
WARNING
THIS PROCEDURE CAN ONLY BE USED IF THE AREA IS

SUITABLE TO A SAFE LANDING
Figure 30 Elevated heliport OEI landing or ditching
1. Attitude .........................................................Nose down 20 until the edge

of the elevated heliport
2. Collective pitch .............................................Maintain until audio horn then
released to cancel effort
3. Rotor rpm .....................................................maintain above 330 rpm
Approaching the ground:
4. Nose down attitude .......................................reduce to decrease speed
WARNING
THE DECK-EDGE MUST BE CLEARED BEFORE NOSING UP

(ABOUT 2 SEC AFTER FUSELAGE ROTATION)
5. Floatation (if fitted) .......................................Inflated for ditching
Before touch down:
6. Attitude ........................................................Nose up to cancel speed (15 if
needed)
7. Collective pitch .............................................Increased to full pitch if needed
8. Attitude .........................................................Below 8 for touch down
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 40
FLIGHT MANUAL
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 41
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 31A
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 42
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 31B
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 43
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 32A
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 44
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 32B
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 45
FLIGHT MANUAL
9 LANDING ON ELEVATED HELIPORT

9.1 DIRECT APPROACH: NORMAL TWIN-ENGINE LANDING
Figure 33: Elevated heliport normal AEO landing
NOTE
For headwind exceeding 10 kt increase V1 to keep 10 kt ground speed
During the approach and for IAS 70 kt :

1. RPM switch ..........................................HIGH RPM H
2. NR increases .......................................Check 360 rpm
3 Parking brake .......................................applied
4. Fly the approach to reach LDP
From LDP:
5. Continue the approach. At 50 ft above the landing point continuously reduce
speed and thus bring the aircraft above the landing area at a height of about
10 ft.
6. Collective .............................................Lower to land
After touch-down :
7. Collective pitch .....................................Fully lower
8. RPM switch ..........................................NORM RPM H
9. NR decreases .....................................Check
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 46
FLIGHT MANUAL
9.2 DIRECT APPROACH : LANDING WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE

A landing is possible in the event of an engine failure at any point during the
approach.
Landing is mandatory if engine failure occurs after the LDP.
Arrange flight to reach LDP with proper IAS, height, VS and NR around 360 RPM. If
NR is decreasing below this value abort landing (Refer to 9.4). Heavy and without
wind, good path is obtained with IAS and VS stabilized and power settled at OEI
2 min limit.
1 Nose wheel ..........................................Locked

2 Parking brake.......................................applied
3 RPM switch ..........................................HIGH RPM H
After LDP:
4 Speed .................................................keep 25 kt IAS up to 50 ft above deck
NOTE
For headwind exceeding 10 kt increase V1 to keep 10 kt ground speed
At 50 ft:
5. Continuously reduce speed to over fly the beginning edge of the platform at a
height around 30 ft and speed about 10 kt keeping the NR 350 rpm.
Passing the deck-edge:

6 Speed ..................................................reduce (nose up attitude 15 if necessary)
7. Collective pitch .....................................slowly increased to cancel sinking rate
Just before touchdown:

8 Attitude................................................. 8
9 Collective pitch .....................................Increase to cushion the landing
After touch-down
10 Collective pitch .....................................Fully lower
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 47
FLIGHT MANUAL
9.3 OFFSET APPROACH: LATE LDP LANDING PROCEDURE

AEO and OEI landing procedures sequences are similar to straight approaches
except for the profile after LDP which requires slight banking during speed reduction.
Figure 34: Elevated heliport late LDP landing
LDP can be postponed to any point between 100 to 50 ft above platform. The
procedure described in 9.1 & 9.2 remains applicable and is completed by the
following procedure:
1. Flight path ............................................Reach LDP, with a track offset

permitting to cross fly the platform in
case of aborted landing at LDP.
2. From LDP ............................................While reducing speed, slight bank
angle to reach the platform
CAUTION
THE LDP MUST BE CHOSEN AT LEAST 100 ft ABOVE SURROUNDING

OBSTACLES TO ENSURE THE 35 ft GROUND/SEA CLEARANCE
THE PILOT MUST HAVE THE HELIPORT ON HIS SIDE OF THE

HELICOPTER
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 48
FLIGHT MANUAL
GO-AROUND IS POSSIBLE IF THE ENGINE FAILURE OCCURS AT THE LATEST
AT THE LDP.
DIRECT APPROACH
Figure 35: Elevated heliport aborted landing and OEI climb standard profile
OFFSET APPROACH
Figure 36: Elevated heliport aborted landing and OEI climb late LDP profile
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 49
FLIGHT MANUAL
1. Collective pitch .........................................Raise as necessary while maintaining

NR > 330 rpm.
2. Nose-down attitude ..................................- 5 to reach VTOSS = 45 kt.
3. OEI 2 min .................................................Select .
At 200 ft:
5. In level flight IAS ......................................Vy.
6. Landing gear ............................................Retract.
7. OEI continuous ........................................Select.
9. RPM switch ..............................................NORM. RPM H
10. NR 330 rpm ...........................................Maintain.
11. Parking brake ...........................................Released
At 1000 ft:
12. Affected engine ENG # ............................OFF.
13. Affected engine booster pumps ...............OFF.
VTOSS = 45 kt
1. Maximum weight for landing .........................Determine (figure 37)
2. Distance D3, D4, D5.....................................Determine (figure 46)
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 50
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 37
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 51
FLIGHT MANUAL
10 CLIMBING PERFORMANCE
The determination of R/C requires the use of reduced weights (M/ ).
In order to simplify the use of the figures and in order to avoid confusion between
"density weight" and "actual weight", the M/ parameter is converted into a dimension
called the "WEIGHT INDEX" (M/ in kg divided by 1000).
DETERMINATION OF THE RATE-OF-CLIMB :
8 curves are required to determine R/C and the path slope, the first enable the weight
index to be determined (Figures 38).
FIGURES 38 FIGURES 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 and 45
FIGURES
RATE-OF-CLIMB VTOSS = 40 kt (TAS) ...................................................... 39
RATE-OF-CLIMB VTOSS = 45 kt (TAS)(ELEVATED HELIPORT) .............. 40
RATE-OF-CLIMB Vy .................................................................................... 45
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 52
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 38
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 53
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 39
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 54
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 40
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 55
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 41
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 56
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 42
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 57
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 43
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 58
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 44
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 59
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 45
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 60
FLIGHT MANUAL
11 DETERMINATION OF DISTANCES
FIGURE
DISTANCE D3-D4 AND D5 ........................................................................... 46
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 61
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 46
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 62
FLIGHT MANUAL
12 TAS-CAS CONVERSION GRAPH

In practice, use CAS = IAS.
Figure 47
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.1
A 15-15 Page 63
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
SUPPLEMENT
AUTOMATIC HOVER MODE
IMPORTANT NOTE
Approved Effective Pages.
THIS SUPPLEMENT MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN THE

EQUIPMENT MENTIONED ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.

APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.6.P1
A 14-48 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
(1) Page Revision Code:
- R: Revised, to be replaced,
- N: New, to be inserted.
SUP.6.P1 1 14-48
SUP.6.P5 1 16-10 R
SUP.6 1 14-48
SUP.6 2 14-48
SUP.6 3 16-10 R

on June 25, 2015
Title Creation of supplement "AUTOMATIC HOVER MODE"
Revised
SUP.6.P1, SUP.6.P5, SUP.6 page 1 to 3
information
Deleted
None
information
Approved on April 22, 2016
Organization Approval NEASA.21J.056.
Main points Addition of "Recommended Engagement Conditions" paragraph.
Revised
SUP.6.P5, SUP.6 page 3.
information
Deleted
None
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.6.P5
A 16-10 Page 1
1 GENERAL
The aim of the Hover mode (HOV) is to provide, under visual flight conditions in view of
the ground or of the water surface, automatic acquisition and hold of hover.
The HOV mode concerns only pitch and roll axes. It uses GPS-derived longitudinal and
lateral velocities. The HOV mode may be combined with ALT, ALT.A, VS or CR.HT
mode.
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE INSTALLATION

The HOV mode includes:
- HOV push-button on APMS.
- Cyclic stick commands.
2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the Basic Flight Manual and in the Supplements used remain
applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following limitations:
The use of the HOV mode is restricted to visual flight conditions in view of the ground
or of the water surface.
NOTE
It is recommended to avoid upper modes CRHT, Vs or ALT.A
when the HOV mode is selected below 30 kt IAS.
Engagement of a collective axis mode in conjunction with the HOV mode is
prohibited below a height of 20 ft.
Engagement of the Go Around mode below 30 kt IAS is prohibited.
Ground speed limit for the HOV mode engagement without Hover indicator:
- Longitudinal axis: 50 kt forward,
10 kt aft.
- Lateral axis: 20 kt.
3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the Basic Flight Manual and in the Supplements
used remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following emergency
procedures:
3.1 POWERPLANT FAILURES

In case of engine power loss with HOV mode, revert immediately to hands on control
and apply corresponding emergency procedure.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.6
A 14-48 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.2 AP FAILURES
In case of AHRS discrepancy, after reconfiguration, DO NOT (RE) ENGAGE HOV
MODE.
In case of one AHRS loss, DO NOT (RE) ENGAGE HOV MODE.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
On PFD 1 - Controls .................................... Hands on.
Blinking CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

Loss of HOV mode
On PFD 1 - Hover acquisition or hold .......... Monitor.

2 - Be ready for hands on reversion.
Steady
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
HOV mode
degradation
On PFD 1 - Check wind direction ................ Put aircraft nose into wind.
Steady
(with no other AP
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
alert)
Excessive Aft
airspeed detection
On PFD 1 - Controls .................................... Hands on.

2 - Second GPS ............................. Select, .
Blinking 30 s
NOTE
Failure of main If second GPS is not selected within 30 s,
source HOVER will be disengaged.
Then HOVER re-engagement may be inhibited during 6 s.
Loss of GPS
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.6
A 14-48 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the Basic Flight Manual and in the Supplements
used remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following normal
procedures:
4.1 RECOMMENDED ENGAGEMENT CONDITIONS

Recommended conditions for HOV mode engagement to ensure a gentle aircraft
behavior:
- Lateral ground speed 10 kt,
- Stabilized or slowly moving attitudes.
4.2 BEFORE HOV MODE ENGAGEMENT

Visual flight conditions, ground or water surface in view .................. Check,
Wind direction and strength ............................................................. Check,
AFCS vertical upper mode ............................................................... As required.
4.3 HOV MODE ENGAGEMENT

HOV mode ....................................................................................... Engage,
Hover acquisition ............................................................................. Monitor with
external cues.
After Hover hold:
Helicopter position hold.................................................................... Monitor with
external cues,
AFCS collective axis mode .............................................................. As required,
Helicopter motions ........................................................................... Monitor with
external cues.
NOTE
HOV mode does not provide heading hold function.
5 REGULATORY PERFORMANCE DATA

The regulatory performance data specified in the Basic Flight Manual and in the
Supplements used remain applicable.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.6
A 16-10 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
SUPPLEMENT
HOISTING INSTALLATION WITH FIXED BOOM ON RH SIDE

AND
"LAE" VARIABLE SPEED ELECTRIC HOIST
IMPORTANT NOTE
Effective Pages.


APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.11.P1
A 14-26 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP.11.P1 1 14-26 R
SUP.11.P5 1/2 14-26 R
SUP.11 1 14-26 R
SUP.11 2 14-26 R
SUP.11 3 14-26 R
SUP.11 4 14-26 R
SUP.11 5 14-26 R
SUP.11 6 14-26 R

EASA approval No. 10038481
on February 20, 2012.
Approved on 2014 Jan, 31 under the
NORMAL REVISION 3 date code 14-04 authority of EASA Design Organization
Approval No.EASA.21J.056.
Main points: Incorporation of new brand "Airbus Helicopters" instead of
Title
"Eurocopter", add new collective grip after MOD 07 39C75.
Revised
Sections SUP11.P1 page 1, SUP11.P5 page 1 and SUP.11 page 1.
information
Deleted
None
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.11.P5
A 14-26 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS (CONT'D)
Approved on 2014 Oct, 10 under the

Main points: "APPROVED" instead of "EASA APPROVED", addition of a
Title
"WARNING" in paragraph 4.1
Revised
SUP11 - All pages.
information
Deleted
None
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.11.P5
A 14-26 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
The hoist installation is designed for raising or lowering of loads, while the aircraft is
hovering.
1.1 "LUCAS AIR EQUIPEMENT" HOIST

It is a drum-type hoist driven by a variable speed electric motor with automatic speed
reduction when approaching the raised or lowered end of travel stops.
- Speed from 0 to 0.75 m/sec (0 to 150 ft/min).
- Cable length 90 m (295 ft).
NOTE
It is fitted with an emergency pyrotechnic cable cutter.
1.2 PILOT'S CONTROLS
Pre MOD 07 39C75 Post MOD 07 39C75

Figure 1 - Pilot's controls
1.3 OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

The operator's controls and indicators include:
x A control grip
Figure 2 - operator's controls grip
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.11
A 14-26 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
x A control unit which incorporates:
Figure 3 - Operator's control unit
x A hand operated cable cutter.
2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the Basic Flight Manual and in the Supplements used
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following limitations.
2.1 OPERATING LIMITATIONS

Use of the hoist is restricted to lowering or raising of loads.
2.2 LOAD ON HOIST

Maximum permissible load: 272 kg (600 lb).
2.3 MINIMUM CREW

The presence of an experienced hoist operator is mandatory for hoisting operations.
2.4 HAND CUTTER

A hand operated cable cutter must be available for the hoist operator.
2.5 HEIGHT/VELOCITY DIAGRAM

For hoisting operation the limiting height/velocity diagram is not an operating
limitation.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.11
A 14-26 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
2.6 MAXIMUM WIND
Hoisting operations envelope.
Figure 4 - Maximum wind
2.7 LATERAL CG LIMIT FOR HOISTING OPERATION
Figure 5 - Lateral CG limit
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.11
A 14-26 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
The emergency procedures specified in the Basic Flight Manual and in the
Supplements used remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the
following emergency procedures.
3.1 HOIST FAILURE

According to the load carried, the crew may either:
- Manually hoist cable in the cargo if possible, or
- cut the cable, or
- return to base, at reduced speed compatible with a slightly inclined hoist cable,
with a VNE of 70 kt.
3.2 GENERATOR DISCONNECTION

In the event of a generator disconnection:
1. Ancillary connectors ................................................. Manually disconnect
2. resent hoisting operation .......................................... Complete
3. Mission ..................................................................... Abort
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
procedures.
4.1 GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS
WARNING
TO AVOID ANY ELECTRIC SHOCK TO PERSONS (IN CONTACT

WITH ANY PART OF THE EXTERNAL INSTALLATION), A GROUND
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION IS NECESSARY BEFORE THE
EXTERNAL INSTALLATION IS TOUCHED BY THE GROUND
OPERATOR. IF AN ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE DEVICE SUCH
AS A CABLE IS USED, IT HAS TO BE REMOVED AFTER THE
HOISTING PHASE.
4.2 INTERIOR CHECKLIST

ADD:
1. Metallic stop ............................................................. Not distorted
2. Manual cable cutter .................................................. In place
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.11
A 14-26 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
4.3 POST-STARTING CHECKLIST

OVERALL CHECKS
ADD:
1 Mission selector .......................................................... WINCH
2 Correct UP and DOWN operation ............................... Check
3 Overheating detection circuit ...................................... Test
4 Mission selector .......................................................... OFF
5 Check that the load permits hoisting operations without exceeding the c.g. limits.
4.4 IN FLIGHT
4.4.1 Before hoisting

x Operator
1 Glove ................................................... On the hand which guides cable
2 Safety belt ........................................... Fastened and secured
x Pilot
1 Door opening ....................................... Order (IAS d 60 kt)
2 Mission selector ................................... WINCH
3 Heating ................................................ OFF
4.4.2 Hoisting
WARNING
IF THE HOOK COMES STRONGLY INTO CONTACT WITH THE
METALLIC STOP (FAILURE OF THE HOISTING AUTOMATIC
SPEED REDUCTION SYSTEM), ABORT THE HOISTING
MISSION.
CAUTION
TAKE ANY PRECAUTION TO PREVENT THE LOAD BEING HOISTED
FROM HITTING ANY PART OF THE HELICOPTER.
NOTE
If the red warning light flashes, terminate the hoisting operation in
progress.
Steady ignition of this red warning automatically stops the hoist.
Once the warning light has extinguished, position the mission
selector to "OFF". Then leave to cool down.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.11
A 14-26 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL

following regulatory performance data.
5.1 RATE OF CLIMB AEO/OEI

Reduce rates of climb by 60 ft/min.
5.2 TAKEOFF WEIGHT

Takeoff weight given section 5.1 "Takeoff weights permitting climb at 150 ft/min
1000 ft above ground with one engine inoperative" must be reduced by 160 kg.
5.3 PERFORMANCE IN CATEGORY A OPERATION

The maximum permissible weights on takeoff and landing on a clear area must be
reduced by 160 kg.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.11
A 14-26 Page 6
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155B1
SUPPLEMENT
EMERGENCY FLOATATION GEAR
IMPORTANTE NOTE
Effective Pages.


APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.14.P1
A 14-46 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP. 14 P1 1 14-46 R
SUP. 14 P5 1 14-46 R
SUP. 14 1 14-46 R
SUP. 14 2 14-46 R
SUP. 14 3 14-46 R
SUP. 14 4 14-46 R

on December 10, 2012
Title "Eurocopter", new log of revision, "APPROVED" instead "EASA
APPROVED", sea state 6
Revised
SUP.14.P1 page 1, SUP.14.P5 page 1 and SUP.14 all pages.
information
Deleted
None
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.14.P5
A 14-46 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
The emergency floatation gear installation consists of:
Four inflatable balloons that make two units on each side of the helicopter
(inflation time: 2.5 s).
An inflation system of each assembly comprising one cylinder equipped with a
pressure gauge visible from the outside, a two-cap electrical head and two flexible
hoses connected to the balloons.
An immersion detection system that provides the automatic percussion of the
floating when the helicopter is laid down on water:
OFF/ARM switch ............................................... ARM
This system is based on:
- When the MOD 45C05 is embodied: 1 immersion probe.
- When the MOD 45C98 or MOD 45D04 is embodied: 2 immersion probes.
In this configuration, the 2 probes should be activated to inflate the floats.
Two identical liferafts (if fitted) on the left and right under the passengers doors.
- The nominal capacity of each raft, which is 10 places, may be increased to 15
places in overload.
- Each liferaft is provided with a survival kit.
1.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
Figure1 - Controls and indicators
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.14
A 14-46 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
2 LIMITATIONS
2.1 CERTIFICATION CRITERIA
The Emergency Flotation System performance has been demonstrated for ditching
up to Sea State 6.
The helicopter is certified for ditching provided the following additional equipment is
fitted and approved in accordance with relevant airworthiness requirement:
Rear floatation container after MOD 07-45D25 (reinforced).
Life raft installation after MOD 07-45D24 or 365P084757.01/.04/.07/.10 (reinforced).
Survival type Emergency Locator Transmitter.
Life preservers.
NOTE
The above information must be accounted for when assessing the helicopter
dispatch on any sea-state conditions.
World Meteorological Organization standards describe Sea State 6 as a "Very
Rough" sea with significant wave height between 4 and 6 meters.
2.2 SPEED LIMITS

VNE with emergency floatation gear armed or inflated ........... 90 kt (166 km/h)
2.3 ALTITUDE ENVELOPE

Limit altitude for inflating .......................................................... 9800 ft (3000 m)
Limit altitude for ditching .......................................................... 4900 ft (1500 m)

The emergency floatation gear system must only be used for ditching. Normal
landing on water is prohibited
Takeoff is prohibited after ditching.
2.5 PLACARDS
With external life raft (if fitted)
- Fixed panel interior
LIFE-RAFT
OUTSIDE RELEASE HANDLE
1-JETTISON WINDOW
2-BREAK GUARD
3-PULL RELEASE HANDLE
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.14
A 14-46 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
RCC
2 LIMITATIONS
2.1 CERTIFICATION CRITERIA
The Emergency Flotation System performance has been demonstrated for ditching
up to Sea State 4.
The helicopter is certified for ditching provided the following additional equipment is
fitted and approved in accordance with relevant airworthiness requirement:
Life rafts with survival equipment
Survival type Emergency Locator Transmitter
Life preservers
NOTE
The above information must be accounted for when assessing the helicopter
dispatch on any sea-state conditions.
World Meteorological Organization standards describe Sea State 4 as a "Moderate"
sea with significant wave height between 1.25 and 2.5 meters.
2.2 SPEED LIMITS

VNE with emergency floatation gear armed or inflated ........... 90 kt (166 km/h)
2.3 ALTITUDE ENVELOPE

Limit altitude for inflating .......................................................... 9800 ft (3000 m)
Limit altitude for ditching .......................................................... 4900 ft (1500 m)

The emergency floatation gear system must only be used for ditching. Normal
landing on water is prohibited
Takeoff is prohibited after ditching.
2.5 PLACARDS
With external life raft (if fitted)
- Fixed panel interior
LIFE-RAFT
OUTSIDE RELEASE HANDLE
1-JETTISON WINDOW
2-BREAK GUARD
3-PULL RELEASE HANDLE
CAUTION: THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE REMOVED FROM THE MANUAL UNTIL MODIFICATION
MOD No. 07-45D24 or 365P084757.01/.04/.07/.10, and MOD No. 07-45D25 HAS
BEEN EMBODIED TO THE AIRCRAFT.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.14
A 14-46 Page 2
*RC*
FLIGHT MANUAL
used remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following emergency
procedures.
With OFF/ARM switch set to ARM
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1 2 Float inflation not possible.
Floatation system
failure
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Float inflation remains possible.
1 2
OR
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
1 2
3.1 DITCHING
1- IAS ........................................................................................ 90 kt (166 km/h)
2- OFF/ARM switch................................................................... ARM
3- Lighted pushbutton or pushbutton on collective grip ............. Depress
4- Apply appropriate normal or emergency landing procedures as described in
chapter 3 and 4 of the basic Flight Manual and applicable Supplements taking
into account the following precautions:
Ditching is allowed with landing gear extended or retracted.
The helicopter should be presented parallel to the swell if the wind is light. In
case of strong wind, the helicopter should be presented in a direction mid-
way between the wind direction and the swell direction, with the helicopter
facing the headwind quadrant.
Ditching should be made at the lowest possible forward speed.
AFTER DITCHING
5 - Fuel shutoff control levers ..................................................... Aft
6 - NR 120 rpm, rotor brake .................................................... Smoothly applied
7 - EMERGENCY CUT OFF ...................................................... OFF
3.2 EMERGENCY EVACUATION
Passenger's ordinance light OFF
Unfasten seatbelts
Jettison the windows according to the placard near the window and the cockpit
doors (if jettisonable) according to the door placard only after ditching.
Jettison life raft (if fitted) by pulling the control handle inside (if fitted) or outside the
helicopter (RH handles jettison RH life raft. LH handles jettison LH life raft).
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.14
A 14-46 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.3 EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
Check auto activation (if any) or activate manually in accordance with the
corresponding user manual specifications.
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
procedures:
4.1 EXTERIOR INSPECTION

ADD:
Float covers ................................................................................. Properly closed
Pressure in cylinders ................................................................... Correct
NOTE
Pressure values are indicated by two stickers: one on the bottle, the other on the
helicopter, close to the emergency floatation gear.
Protection glass of the control handles RH and LH (if fitted) ....... Check in place
4.2 INTERIOR INSPECTION

ADD:
Protection glass of the control handle
RH and LH (if fitted) ............................................. Check in place

ADD:
OFF/ARM switch .................................................. ARM 1 2
OFF/ARM switch .................................................. OFF 1 2
5 PERFORMANCE
5.1 REGULATORY PERFORMANCE DATA
Supplements used remain applicable, as the folded floatation gear does not affect the
aircraft flight performance.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.14
A 14-46 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
SUPPLEMENT
TRANSPORT OF EXTERNAL LOADS
SIREN AS21-5-7
IMPORTANT NOTE
Effective Pages.


APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.15.P1
A 15-12 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP.15.P1 1 15-12 R SUP.15 3 15-12 R

SUP.15.P5 1 15-12 R SUP.15 4 15-12 R
SUP.15 5 15-12 R
SUP.15 1 15-12 R SUP.15 6 15-12 R
SUP.15 2 15-12 R SUP.15 7 15-12 N

EASA approval No. 10038448, REV1
on February 21, 2012.
Approved on March 16, 2015
Incorporation of new brand "Airbus Helicopters" instead of "Eurocopter",
Main points "EASA APPROVED" is replaced by "APPROVED" in footpages,
introduction of new load indicator (MOD 07-45D23).
Revised
SUP.15.P1 page 1, SUP.15.P5 page 1, SUP.15 pages 1 to 7.
information
Deleted
None.
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.15.P5
A 15-12 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
The installation is intended to enable the aircraft to carry external loads.
Overhead Panel Collective Grip
Cyclic Grip
Load indicator (pre MOD 45D23) on Instrument Panel
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.15
A 15-12 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
Load indicator (post MOD 45D23) on Instrument Panel or RH door pillar
F1 key: The F1 key toggles between units of weight (kg/lb). The F1 key is also
programmable for user desired functions.
ZERO key: The ZERO key is used to zero out residual tension on the sensor.
TEST key: The TEST key launches the test procedure. The TEST key is also
programmable for user desired functions.
<--0 key: The return to Zero key restores the previous zero value. This allow the
system to restore a zero value without having to drop the load.
For the complete description of the operating modes, refer to the user guide.
1.2 STATUS OF INDICATOR LIGHTS
+ , No load hooked up.
+ , Load on.
+ , Faulty operation.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.15
A 15-12 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
2 LIMITATIONS
2.1 MAXIMUM WEIGHT

Maximum permissible slung load: 1600 kg (3530 lbs).
NOTE
The electric or mechanical release system requires a minimum pull force of 7 kg
(15 lb) on the hook. Therefore the minimum load is 7 kg (15 lb).
2.2 SPEED LIMITS

- VNE with slung load ................................................................ 90 kt (167 km/h).
NOTE
Depending upon the load, speed limit can be lower than VNE.
Pilot must determine the speed limit and the maximum bank angle depending
on the shape and weight of the load, and on the length of the sling.
2.3 WEIGHT AND BALANCE

The maximum weight with an external load is 4850 kg (10692 lb). Depending on
external conditions, this weight must not exceed the take-off weight OGE.
2.4 MINIMUM CREW

1 pilot in RH seat.
2.5 NOTICE
- In the cockpit, read:
CARRYING OF EXTERNAL LOADS

CLASS OF APPROVED AIRCRAFT / LOAD COMBINATION: B
WHEN EXTERNAL LOADS ARE CARRIED, NO PERSON MAY BE CARRIED UNLESS:
- HE IS A FLIGHT CREW MEMBER, OR
- HE IS A FLIGHT CREW MEMBER TRAINEE, OR
- HE PERFORMS AN ESSENTIAL FUNCTION IN CONNECTION WITH THE
EXTERNAL-LOAD OPERATION.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.15
A 15-12 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
- An external placard located close to the cargo hook:
2.6 HEIGHT/VELOCITY DIAGRAM

When carrying an external load the limiting height/velocity diagram is not an
operating limitation.
2.7 MINIMUM FLYING HEIGHT

With L/G retracted: 1000 ft.
3.1 ENGINE FAILURE WHEN CARRYING AN EXTERNAL LOAD

Depending upon circumstances (performance, terrain overflown) pilot may either
jettison the load or continue the flight with the load.
3.2 ELECTRICAL LOAD JETTISONING FAILURE

To jettison:
- Mechanical jettison trigger....................................................... Actuate.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.15
A 15-12 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.3 INDICATION FAILURES
- In hovering flight:
Cargo release pushbutton.............................................................. Press down.
+ +
ABORT THE MISSION CONTINUE THE MISSION
- In forward flight:
Perform a precautionary approach on the nearest helipad, then apply the "in
hovering flight" procedure.
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
procedures.
4.1 GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS

Carrying heavy loads, as well as bulky loads involving high aerodynamic drag, is a
delicate operation due to the possible reactions of the helicopter to a swinging load.
The length of the sling cable must be determined in accordance with the type of
mission. To carry a compact load, it is recommended to use the shortest possible
cable.
Ground personnel must be aware that the static electricity may be present and must
be discharged.
CAUTION
PILOT MUST NOT FLY WITH AN UNBALLASTED SLING OR EMPTY NET.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.15
A 15-12 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
For permissible load attachment ring size refer to the Operational Tips section
of this Flight Manual.
CAUTION
THE USE OF A LOAD ATTACHMENT RING WITH INCORRECT DIMENSIONS
MAY LEAD TO LOSS OR JAMMING OF THE LOAD.

4.2.1 Pre MOD 45D23
ADD
1. Load indicator................................................................RESET: Display zero,
2. Load indicator................................................................TEST:
The test sequence is started; each display last for about 3 s, followed by an
extinction period of approx. 3 s.
Display of
Display of the "calibration" value. This value should be the same as the one
engraved on the transmitter fitted between the helicopter and the hook.
Display of ZERO offset (this is the total offset which has been previously
tarred out by use of the ZERO button).
Display of two values separated by a dash: the first value, between 0 and 3,
shows the filter selected and the second value shows the logic programmed
in the computer.
4.2.2 Post MOD 45D23

ADD
On the Load indicator:
1. ZERO key......................................................................Press: zero is displayed.
2. TEST key ......................................................................Press.
The test sequence is started; each display lasts for about 1 sec.
- Progressive display of all digits and LEDs,
- Display of the active software filter,
- Display of the calibration value.
If a failure is detected, an error code will appear on the digital display.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.15
A 15-12 Page 6
FLIGHT MANUAL
4.3 TAKEOFF
ADD
1. Mission selector ...................................................................... CARGO.
2. ................................................................................ Check.
3. Weight ..................................................................................... Check.
4.4 MANEUVERS
All control movements must be made very gently, acceleration and deceleration
must be very gradual, only slightly banked turns.
4.5 LOAD RELEASE

1. CARGO RELEASE on cyclic grip ............................................ Press.
2. ................................................................................ Check.
NOTE
If the normal release system fails to operate, actuate the mechanical
jettison trigger.
After using it, rearm the system by means of the lever located in the
landing gear well.

NOTE
The climbing performance data given in the Basic Flight Manual can be
reduced depending on the nature of the load.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.15
A 15-12 Page 7
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
SUPPLEMENT
ADDITINAL FUEL TANK IN CARGO COMPARTMENT
IMPORTANT NOTE
Effective Pages.



SUP.17.P1
A 14-04 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP.17.P1 1 14-04 R
SUP.17.P5 1 14-04 R
SUP.17 1 14-04 R
SUP.17 2 09-28
SUP.17 3 04-50
SUP.17 4 04-50

on November 04, 2009.
Title
"Eurocopter", add new fuel management panel after MOD 07 39C75.
Revised
information
Deleted
None
information

SUP.17.P5
A 14-04 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
RCB
1 GENERAL
The additional fuel tank of 180 liters located in the cargo compartment is an optional
equipment which increases the aircraft range or endurance.
The additional fuel is transferred by gravity to RH main fuel tank when the
ADD TANK switch is ON.
The installation mainly includes: - A leakproof casing with drain and vent pipes,
- A flexible tank of 180 liters capacity,
- A filler neck located on the LH side of the aircraft.
- A water and fuel drain device.
- An electrovalve.

The CG is to be computed as described in section 6 of the flight manual.
NOTE
For the main fuel tank 100% represents:
1280 liters for standard tanks,
1230 liters for crash worthy tanks.

CONSOLE
ADD TANK:
ON: Transfer by gravity from

additional to RH main fuel
tank (a white arrow display
the transfer on CAD).
MOD No. 07-39C75 HAS BEEN EMBODIED TO THE AIRCRAFT.

SUP.17
A 14-04 Page 1
*RC*
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
The additional fuel tank of 180 liters located in the cargo compartment is an optional
equipment which increases the aircraft range or endurance.
The additional fuel is transferred by gravity to RH main fuel tank when the
ADD TANK switch is ON.
The installation mainly includes: - A leakproof casing with drain and vent pipes,
- A flexible tank of 180 liters capacity,
- A filler neck located on the LH side of the aircraft,
- A water and fuel drain device,
- An electrovalve.

The CG is to be computed as described in section 6 of the flight manual.
NOTE
For the main fuel tank 100% represents:
1280 liters for standard tanks,
1230 liters for crash worthy tanks.

CONSOLE
ADD TANK:
ON: Transfer by gravity from

additional to RH main
fuel tank (a white arrow
display the transfer on
CAD).

SUP.17
A 14-04 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
CAD
1.3 OPERATION
- The total fuel quantity indicated on the CAD includes all tanks: main + additional.
- The fuel quantity in the additional fuel tank is displayed by bargraph (without
numerical value).
2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the Basic Flight Manual and in the supplements used
remain applicable and are completed or modified by the following limitations:
In cargo compartment, on tank:
WITH ADDITIONAL CARGO FUEL TANK:

- MAX CARGO WEIGHT: 130KG
- LOAD LASHING IS MANDATORY
IN CARGO COMPARTMENT.

SUP.17
A 09-28 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
supplements used remain applicable.
3.1 ELECTROVALVE FAILURE
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Adjust the destination without the additional fuel.
Do not decrease
after 5 mn
Electrovalve failure
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the Basic Flight Manual and in the supplements
used remain applicable and are completed or modified by the following normal
procedures.
Before start up ADD :
- Fuel on CAD .................................................... Additionnal bargraph displayed.
NOTE
If bargraph is not displayed, reconfigure AUXILLARY TANK line in the CPDS config
menu.
In flight :
The fuel is transferred by gravity into the right tank group in approximately 30 mn.
- After 15 mn. of flight:
ADD TANK switch ......................................... ON
- 5 mn. after ADD TANK switch on:
Bargraph decrease ......................................... Checked
- At the end of transfer: (30 mn. after electrovalve opening)
ADD TANK switch ......................................... OFF
- Tank balance has to be performed by transfer pump.

SUP.17
A 04-50 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
5 PERFORMANCE
The regulatory performance in the Basic Flight Manual and in the supplements used
remain applicable.

SUP.17
A 04-50 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
SUPPLEMENT
FUEL HEATING SYSTEM
IMPORTANT NOTE
Effective Pages.



SUP.23.P1
A 14-04 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP.23.P1 1 14-04 R
SUP.23.P5 1 14-04 R
SUP.23 1 14-04 R
SUP.23 2 14-04 R
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 02-20 DGAC approval on July 31, 2002.
Main points: Update approval authority EASA instead of DGAC,
Title incorporation of new brand "Airbus Helicopters" instead of "Eurocopter",
add new fuel management panel after MOD 07 39C75.
Revised
Sections SUP23.P1 page 1, SUP23.P5 page 1 and SUP.23 pages 1 and 2.
information
Deleted
None
information

SUP.23.P5
A 14-04 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
RCB
1 GENERAL
The fuel heating system is designed to prevent the use of fuel anti-ice additive.
1.1 INDICATORS
CAD
Repeat TEMP light (RH or/and LH) of Fuel Management Panel
CONSOLE
2 LIMITATIONS
remain applicable and are completed or modified by the following limitations.
2.1 ANTI-ICING ADDITIVES

Paragraph 4.3 (Anti-icing additive) SECTION 2.5 is no longer applicable.
2.2 TEMPERATURE ENVELOPE

Max. approved temperature envelope ................................. +45C

SUP.23
A 14-04 Page 1
*RC*
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
The fuel heating system is designed to prevent the use of fuel anti-ice additive.
1.1 INDICATORS
CAD
Repeat light (RH or/and LH) of Fuel Management Panel
CONSOLE
Fuel temperature:
- Below -12C or
- Above + 50C
2 LIMITATIONS
2.1 ANTI-ICING ADDITIVES

Paragraph 4.3 (Anti-icing additive) SECTION 2.5 is no longer applicable.
2.2 TEMPERATURE ENVELOPE

Max. approved temperature envelope ................................. +45C

SUP.23
A 14-04 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
Supplements used remain applicable and are completed or modified by the following
emergency procedures.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Avoid sudden power variation and maintain the fuel flow of
affected engine above 60 kg/h.
+
NOTE
In case of a prolonged waiting period on the ground
1 or/and 2 perform a hover IGE and wait until +
on fuel before initiating forward flight.
management
panel CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Fuel NOTE
temperature:
- below - 12C or If (Fuel temperature below - 12C) apply the
- above + 50C associated procedure 3.2.3.
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
used remain applicable.
5 PERFORMANCE

SUP.23
A 14-04 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
SUPPLEMENT
RYAN 9900 BX OR AVYDINE TAS 620
AIRBORNE COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM (ACAS)
IMPORTANT NOTE
Effective Pages.


APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.33.P1
A 16-25 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP.33.P1 1 16-25 R SUP.33 5 16-25 R

SUP.33.P5 1 16-25 R SUP.33 6 16-25 R
SUP.33 7 16-25 R
SUP.33 1 16-25 R SUP.33 8 16-25 R
SUP.33 2 16-25 R SUP.33 9 16-25 R
SUP.33 3 16-25 R SUP.33 10 16-25 R
SUP.33 4 16-25 R SUP.33 11 16-25 N

NORMAL REVISION 4 date code 13-05 EASA approval No.10043723 Feb 19, 2013
on October 17, 2016
Introduction of GTN 750H to monitor and display ACAS, "Ryan 9900BX" is
replaced by "Ryan 9900BX or Avydine TAS 620", update of section
Main points Limitations, incorporation of new brand "Airbus Helicopters" instead of
"Eurocopter", "EASA APPROVED" is replaced by "APPROVED" in
footpages, and layout improvements.
Revised
SUP.33.P1 page 1, SUP.33.P5 page 1 and SUP.33 pages 1 to 11.
information
Deleted
None
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.33.P5
A 16-25 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
The Ryan 9900BX or Avydine TAS 620 Airborne Collision Avoidance Systems (ACAS)
is an independent back up - but not a substitute - to visual watch and air traffic control. It
alerts the pilot to air collision hazards and provides him with additional air traffic
information.
The ACAS interrogates airborne transponders. Answers to interrogations are processed

to determine the distance, the bearing, the altitude and the Time to Closest Point of
Approach (CPA) of the corresponding traffic.
Whenever the Time to CPA falls below a certain threshold, the ACAS provides a Traffic
Advisory (TA) to caution the pilot as to the proximity of the potential threat and to prompt
him to visually acquire the traffic and maintain separation.
As the ACAS relies upon information received from airborne transponders, it cannot
detect aircraft with unserviceable or inactive transponders or that do not carry a
transponder equipment.
The ACAS provides the altitude only for traffic transponding in C or S modes. However,
it does not rely on altitude to provide TAs. Therefore, TAs are also provided for traffic
transponding in A mode.
For detailed description of the Ryan 9900BX or Avydine TAS 620 ACAS, refer to the
Users guide provided by the manufacturer and EURONAV VII OPERATOR MANUAL
(ref: 255.003-049 (001 or later appropriate version)).
1.1 ABBREVIATIONS
ACAS : Airborne Collision Avoidance System
CPA : Closest Point of Approach
TA : Traffic Advisory
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.33
A 16-25 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.2 ACAS INSTALLATION
1.2.1 ACAS installation with dedicated Control Unit
Figure 1A: ACAS with dedicated Control Unit installation diagram

APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.33
A 16-25 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.2.2 ACAS installation with dual GTN 750H
Figure 1B: ACAS with dual GTN 750H installation diagram
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.33
A 16-25 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.3 CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS
1.3.1 Cyclic stick grip

The CAD acknowledge pushbutton can be used to mute or request an update of
Traffic Advisories audio messages. If the button is pressed once during a TA
audio message, the current and scheduled TAs are muted (a TA occurring
afterwards will not be muted). Double-pressing the button announces any current
TAs. If no TA is in effect, the double-press elicits a No advisories audio
message.
Figure 2: Cyclic stick grip
1.3.2 Overhead panel

All ACAS messages including TA messages can be muted permanently with the
AUDIO ACAS switch.
is then displayed on the CAD.
Figure 3 overhead panel
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.33
A 16-25 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.3.3 ACAS controls and displays
1.3.3.1 ACAS dedicated control and display

A prolonged press on the left rotary knob powers on/off the ACAS.
In addition to the Day-Night-NVG general lighting mode selection, fine
adjustment of the screen brightness can be performed via the left rotary knob.
Audio volume adjustment can be performed in a specific page of the display.
Figure 4: ACAS control and display

For detailed description of the ACAS display, refer to the pilots guide provided
by the manufacturer.
1.3.3.2 Dual GTN 750H

The ACAS monitoring and display functions are available from the home page
with the Traffic key , or Traffic can be superimposed on the MAP display.
Alerts are raised by means of a Pop-Up display when other than the Traffic
page is selected.
The Pop-Up provides options to close the Pop-Up or to go to the dedicated
Traffic page.
Figure 5: GTN 750H Traffic Pop-Up
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.33
A 16-25 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
NOTE
Traffic is displayed on the GTN in all map orientations.
If in Map Pan Mode, the aircraft mockup moves on the map.
The traffic is still displayed relative to the aircraft mockup.
For detailed description of the ACAS display, refer to the pilots guide provided
by the manufacturer.
1.3.3.3 EURONAV VII DMAP (if fitted) ACAS display

The traffic display of the ACAS can also be provided via the EURONAV VII
DMAP system (Multi-function display on instrument panel and control panel on
center console).
The ACAS overlay is selected via the quick access control of the DMAP.
The ACAS overlay is restricted to "Heading-up" Map modes. Within this
restriction, it can be used with TAWS, weather radar or DMAP displays.
Figure 5: ACAS display
No. FUNCTION
1 Range rings.
2 Aircraft symbol: indicates aircraft position.
Traffic Intruder Symbols - Indicates type of traffic, altitude of traffic and
3
vertical trend of traffic.
Altitude display limit - NORMAL, ABOVE, BELOW or UNRESTRICTED
4
(present only if the ACAS overlay is selected for display).
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.33
A 16-25 Page 6
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 6: "Quick Access" page
Figure 7: DMAP control unit
No. QUICK ACCESS CONTROLS

Allows access to "Quick access" page (several presses may be necessary
1( )
depending on current display mode).
4( ) From "Quick access" page, selects ACAS overlay.
5( ) From "Quick access" page, removes ACAS overlay.
No. MENU ACCESS CONTROLS

Provides access to a menu list including ACAS.
2( ) or 3 ( ) ACAS sub-menu allows access to selection of traffic altitude
display limits (NORMAL, ABOVE, BELOW,
According to version
UNRESTRICTED).
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.33
A 16-25 Page 7
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.3.3.4 ACAS symbology
DMAP GTN 750H DESCRIPTION
Traffic advisory.
Traffic advisory beyond the current display range: the

symbol is displayed at a position on the limit of the
screen that indicates the relative bearing of the traffic.
Proximity traffic.
Other traffic.
Relative altitude of the traffic (hundreds of feet): A

positive value (+05) means the traffic is above the
helicopter (500 ft above).
A positive (or null) value is displayed above the traffic
symbol to emphasize that the traffic is above.
Similarly, a negative value is displayed below the
traffic symbol.
Relative altitude is displayed in the same color as the
traffic.
Relative altitude is displayed only for altitude-reporting
traffics. Non-altitude-reporting traffics must be
considered to be at the same altitude as the
helicopter.
Vertical speed information of the traffic: It is displayed
for altitude-reporting traffic climbing (up arrow) or
descending (down arrow) faster than 500 ft/min.
Vertical speed information is displayed in the same
color as the traffic.
1.3.4 Caution Advisory Display
: ACAS audio messages are cut off.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.33
A 16-25 Page 8
FLIGHT MANUAL
2 LIMITATIONS
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following limitations:
CAUTION
- ACAS INFORMATION IS ADVISORY ONLY.
- THE ACAS IS NOT ABLE TO TRACK AND DISPLAY NONTRANSPONDER
EQUIPPED AIRCRAFT.
- NAVIGATION MUST NOT BE PREDICATED ON THE USE OF THE ACAS
DISPLAY.
- IF A TRAFFIC ADVISORY (TA) OCCURS, THE PILOT SHOULD NOT INITIATE
A MANEUVER BASED ON THE ACAS DISPLAY ALONE WITHOUT FIRST
VISUALLY ACQUIRING THE THREAT.
NOTE 1
The range at which a traffic is detected is dependent on many factors including
the transmitter and receiver performance of both the ACAS itself and the
traffics transponder, the antenna geometry between the aircraft and the traffic,
the reflectivity of the overflown surface and also the dynamics of the encounter.
As a consequence, detection range may be significantly degraded in case of
traffic equipped with a low-performance transponder, unfavorable geometries,
flights over reflective surfaces (sea, lakes), fast moving traffic or a combination
of those factors.
Detection range is also degraded in areas of high density where the ACAS will
automatically reduce its transmitting power in order to maintain the integrity of
the ATC.
NOTE 2
Very occasionally, target duplication (a target splitting into two targets at same
altitude and close to the same range) may be encountered for a few seconds.
Target duplication is generally caused by reflections on the ground, on the
water or on nearby buildings.
NOTE 3
Large external optional systems like the hoist, the FLIR or the searchlight may
temporarily shadow one of the ACAS antennae and/or cause signal
reflections.
As a consequence, traffic pop-ups, drop-offs or temporary bearing
discrepancies may be encountered in such configurations.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.33
A 16-25 Page 9
FLIGHT MANUAL
following emergency procedures:
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

ACAS audio messages
are cut off
Refer to procedure specified in basic Flight Manual.
RH + LH
The ACAS is to be added in the items that are
automatically shedded.
Cutout of both
generators
Refer to procedure specified in basic Flight Manual.
+
The ACAS is to be added in the items that are lost with
LH the LH power supply.
Short circuit on LH
primary bus
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
procedures.
4.1 PRE-STARTING CHECKLIST

ADD:
ACAS with dedicated control unit:
- ACAS Control unit ............................................ OFF.
ACAS with dual GTN 750H:

- ACAS switch (overhead panel) ........................ OFF.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.33
A 16-25 Page 10
FLIGHT MANUAL

ADD:
ACAS with dedicated control unit:
- ACAS Control unit ........................................................... ON.
- Test ................................................................................. Conduct,
vocal message
"GROUND MODE".
- Audio level ...................................................................... Check.
ACAS with dual GTN 750H:

- ACAS and ACAS AUDIO switches (overhead panel) ..... ON.
NOTE
There is no manual test function, but the GTN raises any detected failures
during the system automatic and ongoing tests.
- On GTNs ............................................................. Check if required,
- GTN Traffic page ............................................................ Set as required.
NOTE
Before departure, a quick check of the ACAS audio volume can be
performed with a double-press on the CAD acknowledge button.
4.3 OPERATING PROCEDURES

For detailed operating procedures, refer to the pilots guide provided by the
manufacturer.
NOTE
Operation of the ACAS display is not guaranteed for cabin temperatures
below - 20C.

APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.33
A 16-25 Page 11
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
SUPPLEMENT
AUTOMATIC VOICE ALARM DEVICE
IMPORTANT NOTE
Effective Pages.


APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.35.P1
A 15-28 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP. 35 P1 1 15-28 R
SUP. 35 P5 1 15-28 R
SUP. 35 1 15-28 R
SUP. 35 2 15-28 R
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 02-20 DGAC APPROVED on 31/07/2002

Approved on August 18, 2015 under the
Approval No.21J.056
Main points new Log of revision, "APPROVED" replaces "EASA APPROVED" in
footpages, adding the third alarm.
Revised
information
Deleted
None
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.35.P5
A 15-28 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
This alarm system manages a series of messages, which are designed to warn the
crew of certain critical phases during the flight. These messages are transmitted on the
ICS.
1.1 OPERATION
The AVAD unit generates three vocal alarm messages.
ONE HUNDRED FEET. This message is transmitted once as soon as the
helicopter passes into the altitude zone 100 ft above the ground.
CHECK HEIGHT. This message is transmitted twice (with 4.5-second interval
between the two transmissions) when the helicopter reaches the higher DH area
displayed on the ND.
UNDER CARRIAGE (if fitted). This message is transmitted continuously (with 5 s.
interval between transmissions) when IAS is below 55 kt (101 km/h) and landing
gear retracted.
- ACKNOWLEDGE pushbutton on the cyclic stick can be pressed to interrupt
the message UNDER CARRIAGE for 3 minutes.
OVERHEAD PANEL CAD
Automatic Voice Alarm

AVAD Device failure.
Figure 1 - Controls and indicators
2 LIMITATION
remain applicable.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.35
A 15-28 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
AVAD 1 - TEST / RESET switch .............RESET
AVAD
AVAD AVAD
Automatic Voice
Alarm Device
failure AVAD is active AVAD failure
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
procedures:

4.1.1 OVERALL CHECKS
ADD:
AVAD switch............................. TEST: "AVAD TEST" is heard through ICS
then
AVAD
AVAD switch............................. RESET

AVAD
AVAD
5 PERFORMANCE
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.35
A 15-28 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
SUPPLEMENT
HELICOPTER TERRAIN AWARENESS AND WARNING SYSTEM (HTAWS)
EGPWS MK XXII SOFTWARE VERSION 24 OR LATER APPROVED VERSION
IMPORTANT NOTE
Effective Pages.


APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39.P1
A 14-39 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP.39.P1 1 14-39 SUP.39 9 14-39

SUP.39.P5 1 14-42 R SUP.39 10 14-39
SUP.39.P5 2 14-42 N SUP.39 11 14-39
SUP.39 12 14-39
SUP.39 1 14-39 SUP.39 13 14-39
SUP.39 2 14-39 SUP.39 14 14-39
SUP.39 3 14-39 SUP.39 15 14-39
SUP.39 4 14-39 SUP.39 16 14-42 R
SUP.39 5 14-39 SUP.39 17 14-42 R
SUP.39 6 14-39 SUP.39 18 14-39
SUP.39 7 14-39 SUP.39 19 14-39
SUP.39 8 14-39 SUP.39 20 14-39

NORMAL REVISION 3 date code 13-05 EASA approval No.10043723 Feb 19, 2013
Approved on October 17, 2014
Main points "EASA APPROVED" is replaced by "APPROVED" in footpages,
introduction of V 28 software version.
Revised
SUP39.P1 page 1, SUP39.P5 page 1 and SUP.39 pages 1 to 20.
information
Deleted
None
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39.P5
A 14-42 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS (CONT'D)

on Nov 10, 2014
Incorporation of new limitation for configurations with Euronav VII and a
Main points
FLIR.
Revised
SUP39.P5 page 1 and SUP.39 pages 16 and 17.
information
Deleted
None
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39.P5
A 14-42 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL INFORMATION
This Supplement does not represent an authorization for operational use.
The coverage of this Supplement is limited to general information and operating

principles. For the complete description of the operating modes, refer to the following
pilots Guide:
- EGPWS MK XXII (ref 060-4314-200 rev.C March 2004 or later appropriate
references).
- DMAP displays:
. TRA 45A pilot's guide (ref: PG-80-5145-R002 or later appropriate references),
. KMD 550/850 TERRAIN FUNCTION (EGPWS) addendum (ref: 006-18236-0000
Rev 3 June 2004 or later appropriate references),
. EURONAV 7 OPERATOR MANUAL (ref: 255.003-049 (001 or later appropriate
references)).
The EGPWS MKXXII installation, with application software 24, or later approved
versions, associated with displays mentioned above complies with the guidance of the
AC 29 MG 18 for Helicopter Terrain Awareness and Warning System (HTAWS).
The TAWS provides the flight crew with alerts of pending collision of the helicopter
with the terrain or obstacles included in the database.
The TAWS ensures two functions:

- the Terrain function,
- the Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS) function regrouping the basic
modes.
The Terrain function uses a combination of database information, GPS localization

and helicopter data to estimate the helicopter position relative to the surrounding
terrain and obstacles included in the database. Should the projected trajectory of the
helicopter conflict with terrain or obstacles included in the database, the Terrain
function will provide the crew with timely alerts (visual and aural).
The GPWS function is essentially a non-database function that provides alerts for
excessive rate of descent, excessive terrain closure rate, inadvertent descents,
altitude loss after takeoff, excessive bank angle or pitch attitude as well as excessive
descent below and ILS Glide-Slope.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.1 TAWS SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 1 TAWS Block Diagram
NOTE
* The TAWS computer receives AHRS data only from AHRS 2 even if
the avionics system is reconfigured to AHRS 1.
** There are 2 GPS localisation configurations:

1. Embedded GPS receiver using Aircraft GPS antenna,
2. TAWS receiving GPS position from Aircraft GPS.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.2 TERRAIN FUNCTION

1.2.1 Data Inputs
The Terrain function uses:
- Position and ground speed information provided by a GPS receiver. Depending
on aircraft configuration, the GPS receiver is either:
. embedded in the TAWS,
or
. the same used for navigation.
- Data from the helicopter sensors (radio height, roll and pitch attitudes, baro-
altitude and vertical speed, IAS, OAT, heading, weight on wheels, Engine
torques),
- Terrain and obstacles information from a database contained in the TAWS
computer.
1.2.2 Geometric altitude and terrain display

The Terrain function blends barometric pressure, radio height and GPS altitude to
derive the geometric altitude of the helicopter (referenced to the same Mean Sea
Level (MSL) reference as the terrain and obstacle database) independently of the
altimeter settings.
The Terrain function provides the crew with display of the surrounding terrain and
obstacles of the TAWS database for situational awareness (refer to display
description).
1.2.3 "Look ahead" protection

The Terrain function determines the flight path of the helicopter and compares its
projection to the terrain and obstacles database information to provide a protection
envelope ahead of the helicopter.
This Look ahead protection is independent of the terrain display.
When the flight path conflicts with terrain or an obstacle included in the TAWS
database ahead of the helicopter, visual and aural alerts are given and the threat
area is displayed.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
The Look ahead protection envelope is reduced in certain conditions to reduce

nuisance alerts:
- V24 software version:
. Below 90 kt ground speed, the Look ahead protection envelope is
decreased until it is completely inhibited at 60 kt ground speed or less.
- V28 or later approved software versions:
. In Normal mode, the Look ahead protection is disabled below 70 kt (IAS),
. In Low Altitude mode, below 100 kt ground speed, the Look ahead
protection, is decreased until it is completely inhibited at 70 kt ground speed
or less.
- In descent, the look down angle of the envelope is reduced.
- The Look ahead protection envelope is significantly reduced when the Low
Altitude mode is selected.
- The Look ahead protection envelope is reduced in the vicinity of known
runways included in the TAWS database.
The selection of the Terrain inhibit mode suppresses both visual and aural alerts
of the Terrain function but the terrain display remains operational.
1.2.4 Terrain function failure

Failure of the Terrain function will result in a Terrain inoperative alert.
1.3 GPWS FUNCTION

1.3.1 Data Inputs
The GPWS function regroups the 6 basic modes that are not associated with the
database.
The GPWS function uses data from the helicopter sensors (radio height, roll and
pitch attitudes, baro-altitude and vertical speed, IAS, OAT, heading, weight on
wheels, ILS localizer and glide slope information, landing gear position, Engine
torques).
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.3.2 Basic modes

- Mode 1: excessive rate of descent,
- Mode 2: excessive terrain closure rate,
- Mode 3: altitude loss after takeoff,
- Mode 4:
. Too close to terrain (including landing gear alert),
. Landing gear alert in autorotation mode.
NOTE
"TOO LOW GEAR" vocal message is produced when landing gear
is retracted and:
- Normal mode: IAS < 100 kt, height <150 ft,
- Low Altitude mode: IAS < 60 kt, height < 100 ft,
- Autorotation mode: height < 400 ft.
- Mode 5: excessive descent below ILS glide slope,

- Mode 6:
. Autorotation: Altitude call-outs in autorotation,
. Altitude call-outs: . "One hundred feet" only (ONE HUNDRED aural
message),
. Decision height (not available with V24 software version)
(CHECK HEIGHT, CHECK HEIGHT aural message).
. Bank angle,
. Tail strike.
Mode 1 is inhibited and the warning boundaries of Mode 2, Mode 3 and Mode 4
are significantly reduced when the Low Altitude mode is selected.
1.3.3 GPWS function failure

Failure of the GPWS function will result in a GPWS inoperative alert.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.4 ALERTS
A caution indicator light and a warning indicator light are
provided on the instrument panel on both pilot and copilot sides.
TAWS alerts generate aural messages in the ICS. Most of the alerts are also visual
with either the messages coming on.
PRIORITY WARNING CONDITION VOCAL MESSAGE VISUAL ALERT
HIGHEST Mode 1: excessive descent rate PULL UP
Mode 2A: excessive terrain closure rate TERRAIN, TERRAIN
Mode 2A: excessive terrain closure rate PULL UP
Terrain awareness preface WARNING TERRAIN
Terrain awareness WARNING TERRAIN
Obstacle awareness preface WARNING OBSTACLE
Obstacle awareness WARNING OBSTACLE
Mode 2: excessive terrain closure rate TERRAIN TERRAIN
Terrain awareness caution CAUTION TERRAIN
Obstacle awareness caution CAUTION OBSTACLE
Mode 4: insufficient terrain clearance TOO LOW TERRAIN
Mode 1: excessive descent rate SINK RATE
Mode 6: Decision height call-out (not CHECK HEIGHT,

None
available with V24 software version) CHECK HEIGHT
Mode 6: 100 ft ONE HUNDRED None
Mode 4: insufficient terrain clearance TOO LOW GEAR
Mode 3: Inadvertent descent DONT SINK
Mode 5: excessive descent below G/S GLIDE SLOPE
BANK ANGLE,
Mode 6: excessive bank angle None
BANK ANGLE
LOWEST Mode 6: tail strike TAIL TOO LOW None
Table 1: TAWS visual and aural alerts
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 6
FLIGHT MANUAL
Only one message is produced at any one time. The highest priority message takes
precedence and may interrupt any lower priority message (refer to table above for
relative priority). When the highest priority message is no longer produced and if the
lower priority condition still exists then the lower priority message will be heard.
The TAWS message takes precedence over any message from the Airborne
Collision and Avoidance System (ACAS) (if fitted).
The decision height visual alert is ensured independently from the TAWS.
The decision height call out is ensured by the TAWS (not available with V24
software version).
The TAWS landing gear visual alert is completed by the dedicated L/G
annunciators (blinking when IAS is below 55 kt (101 km/h)).
The AUDIO INHIB control suppresses:
- V24 software version: all the TAWS alerts for 5 min.
- V28 or later approved software version: all the TAWS aural alerts for 5 min
except "ONE HUNDRED FEET" and "CHECK HEIGHT, CHECK HEIGHT".
Resetting the control restores aural alerts immediately.
The Terrain inhibit function suppresses all terrain awareness until the TERR INHIB
control is disengaged.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 7
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.5 TAWS CONTROL UNIT
Figure 2: TAWS control unit
No. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
TEST: Unstable position, starts the system self-test.

1 3-position switch ON: Switches on the system (switch guarded).
OFF: Switches off the system (the guard must be lifted).
Indicates a system failure.

: Failure of the GPWS function (+ on
CAD).
2 Dual annunciator
: Failure of the Terrain function (+ aural message
"BE ALERT TERRAIN INOP" + on CAD
+ TERR N/A on display).
LOW ALT ON/OFF

3 Enables (/Disables) the Low Altitude mode.
toggle pushbutton
TERR INHIB Inhibits (/Resets) all terrain awareness alert ( +

4
toggle pushbutton on CAD + TERR N/A on display).
V24 software: . Inhibits (/Resets) all vocal warning messages

for 5 minutes ( + on CAD),
AUDIO INHIB V28 software: . Inhibits (/Resets) all vocal warning messages
5
toggle pushbutton for 5 minutes except "ONE HUNDRED FEET"
and "CHECK HEIGHT, CHECK HEIGHT"
( + on CAD),
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 8
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.6 TERRAIN AND OBSTACLE DISPLAYS

Depending on the installation, the terrain and the obstacles are displayed either on
a TRA 45A dedicated display or on a KMD 850 multifunction display or on
EURONAV VII DMAP.
1.6.1 TRA 45A dedicated display
1.6.1.1 Multifunction display controls
Figure 3: TRA 45A display controls
N FUNCTION
1 Range control Up and Down.
2 Brightness Control.
3 Mode control (not used).
4 Ambient light control.
5 LCD screen.
NOTE 1
In case of terrain function failure, "NO TERRAIN" is displayed.
NOTE 2
On power up from a cold start, the range is systematically set to 40 NM.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 9
FLIGHT MANUAL
TERR Page color definition
COLOR INDICATION
Solid Red Terrain/Obstacle threat area - Warning.
Solid Yellow Terrain/Obstacle threat area - Caution.
50% Red dots Terrain/Obstacle that is more than 500 ft above aircraft altitude.
50% Yellow dots Terrain/Obstacle that is between aircraft altitude and 500 ft above.
25% Yellow dots Terrain/Obstacle that is between aircraft altitude and 250 ft below.
Show only when no Red or Yellow Terrain/Obstacle areas are

Solid green
within range on the display. Highest Terrain/Obstacle not within
(peaks only)
250 ft or aircraft altitude.
Terrain/Obstacle that is 250 ft below to 500 ft below aircraft

50% Green dots
altitude.
Terrain/Obstacle that is the middle elevation band when there is

Peaks only
no Red or Yellow terrain areas within range on the display.
16% Green dots Terrain/Obstacle that is 500 ft to 1500 ft below aircraft altitude.
Terrain/Obstacle that is the lower elevation band when there is no

Peaks only
Red or Yellow terrain areas within range on the display.
Black No significant Terrain/Obstacle.
16% Cyan Area having sea level elevation (0 ft MSL).
Unknown terrain. No terrain data in database for the Magenta area

Magenta dots
shown.
1.6.1.2 Auto range

If the range is not already set to 5 NM, when a terrain caution or a terrain
warning is triggered, the range will automatically be set to 5 NM.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 10
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.6.2 KMD 850 multifunction display

1.6.2.1 Multifunction display controls
Figure 4: KMD 850 multifunction display
N FUNCTION
1 Brightness Control.
2 Data Card.
3 Display.
4 Available Functions Legend.
5 On/Off Control.
6 Function Select Indicators.
Function Select Keys:
7 - MAP: Digital map. - TRFC: TRAFIC (ACAS). - AUX
- WX: Weather radar. - TERR: EGPWS.
8 Control knobs (Inner and Outer Knob): inoperative in TERR page
9 Key Labels
10 Soft key Labels
11 Joystick
Power Keys:
- MODE: not used.
12 - 51*51* increase or decrease range (1, 2.5, 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, 160 and 320 NM).
- VIEW: toggles between 360 and 120 views.
- OVLY: overlays storm scope, traffic and/or flight plan.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 11
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.6.2.2 TERR page
Figure 5: TERR page
No. FUNCTION
1 Display Range RNG:xx NM
Terrain Awareness State:
- EGPWS TEST: Self test active.
2 - TERR FAIL: Terrain is INOP due to a fault.
- TERR N/A: Terrain not available.
- TERR INHBT: Terrain Awareness Warnings have been manually inhibited.
3 Aircraft symbol: Indicates present position.
4 Range rings.
Peaks elevation:
5 - Upper = MSL altitude of the highest terrain within the display.
- Lower = MSL altitude of the lowest terrain within the display.
6 Flight Plan Overlay (Navigation system flight plan).
7 Display Orientation: magnetic heading-up orientation, MagxxHdg.
8 Geometric Altitude.
9 Icon bar: data available (black) and displayed (color).
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 12
FLIGHT MANUAL
COLOR INDICATION
Solid Red Terrain/Obstacle threat area Warning.
Solid Yellow Terrain/Obstacle threat area Caution.
Show only when no Red or Yellow Terrain/Obstacle areas are

Solid green
within range on the display. Highest Terrain/Obstacle not within
(peaks only)
Terrain/Obstacle that is 250 ft below to 500 ft below aircraft

50% Green dots
altitude.
Terrain/Obstacle that is the middle elevation band when there is no

Peaks only
Terrain/Obstacle that is the lower elevation band when there is no

Peaks only
Unknown terrain. No terrain data in database for the Magenta area

Magenta dots
shown.
1.6.2.3 Auto Pop-up

If the active display page is not the TERR page, when a terrain caution or a
terrain warning is triggered, the display will automatically pop-up and switch to
the TERR page.
1.6.2.4 Auto range

If the range is not already set to 5 NM (Normal mode)/2.5 NM
(Low Altitude mode), when a terrain caution or a terrain warning is triggered, the
range will automatically be set to 5 NM (Normal mode)/2.5 NM
(Low Altitude mode).
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 13
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.6.3 EURONAV VII

1.6.3.1 Controls and display
The terrain and obstacle display of the TAWS is provided via the EURONAV VII
DMAP system (Multi-function display on instrument panel and control box on
center console).
The TAWS display mode is selected via the quick access control of the DMAP.
The TAWS mode is restricted to "Heading-up" & "Border" Map mode.
The TAWS and the weather radar displays cannot be selected together.
Figure 6: TAWS display
No. FUNCTION
1 Range rings.
2 Aircraft symbol: Indicates aircraft position.
3 Selected mode.
Peaks elevation:
4 - Upper = MSL altitude of the highest terrain within the display.
- Lower = MSL altitude of the lowest terrain within the display.
5 Geometric Altitude.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 14
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 7: "Quick Access" page
Figure 8: DMAP control unit
No. CONTROLS
Allows access to "Quick Access" page (several presses may be necessary
1 (ESC)
depending on current display mode).
2 (A/R) From "Quick Access" page, selects TAWS mode.
3 (-) Zoom out (if available).
4 (+) Zoom in (if available).
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 15
FLIGHT MANUAL
COLOR INDICATION
Solid Red Terrain/Obstacle threat area - Warning.
Solid Yellow Terrain/Obstacle threat area - Caution.
Solid green Show only when no Red or Yellow Terrain/Obstacle areas are
(peaks only) within range on the display. Highest Terrain/Obstacle not within
50% Green dots Terrain/Obstacle that is 250 ft below to 500 ft below aircraft
altitude.
Peaks only Terrain/Obstacle that is the middle elevation band when there is no
Peaks only Terrain/Obstacle that is the lower elevation band when there is no
Magenta dots Unknown terrain. No terrain data in database for the Magenta area
shown.
1.6.3.2 Auto Pop-up and Auto range

If the TAWS is not selected, when a terrain caution or a terrain warning is
triggered, the terrain and obstacle display will automatically "pop-up" and the
range will automatically be (if not already) set to 5 NM (TAWS Normal
mode)/2.5 NM (Low Altitude mode).
NOTE
For configurations with EURONAV VII and a FLIR, the automatic
pop-up is visible only if the MAP page is already selected on the
Mission Display.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-42 Page 16
FLIGHT MANUAL
2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations given in the basic Flight Manual and relevant Supplements remain
applicable and are supplemented as follows:
- Navigation must not be predicated upon the use of the TAWS information.
NOTE 1
The terrain and obstacle display is intended to serve as a terrain
and obstacle awareness tool only. The display and the database
may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on which to base routine
navigation decisions and plan routes to avoid terrain or
obstacles. Terrain depiction accuracy is particularly degraded in
turn due to the low update rate of the terrain data.
- The Low Altitude mode shall not be selected when operating under IMC conditions
except as required when performing offshore platform instrument approach
procedures or other special procedures.
- For configurations with EURONAV VII and a FLIR and when Low Altitude mode is
selected, the MAP page shall be selected on the Mission Display except when
performing offshore platform instrument approach procedures or other special
procedures.
- With KMD 850 multifunction display: The Geometric Altitude on the terrain and
obstacle display shall not be used to fly ATC assigned or posted altitudes since it
may not provide adequate traffic separation. ATC assigned or posted altitudes shall
be flown according to standard barometric altimeters with a correct altimeter setting.
NOTE 2
Power lines are not included in the TAWS database. The TAWS
will not provide power line warnings.
NOTE 3
All obstacles are not included in the TAWS database. The TAWS
will provide warning only for obstacles included in the database.
- As the EGPWS uses the GPS antenna of the aircraft's GPS receiver, the latter must
be operative (the GPS antenna is then powered-on) to allow reception of the GPS
signals by the EGPWS. Otherwise, the terrain function is inoperative.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-42 Page 17
FLIGHT MANUAL
The emergency procedures specified in the Basic Flight Manual and in Supplements
used remain applicable and are supplemented by the following emergency
procedures:
NOTE
During single engine aborted takeoff or landing procedures, the
required nose-up attitude may produce TAIL TOO LOW alerts:
- Keep controlling attitude as required by the procedure.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Verify helicopter flight path and correct it if required

Instrument
panel
If in IMC or at night where visual judgment of the situation is not

assured:
Instrument
panel - Immediately roll back to horizontal,
- Simultaneously:
. apply maximum continuous power and:
If IAS > Vy pull up to climb at Vy or
if IAS < Vy maintain IAS during climb.
- Maintain climb until all visual and aural warnings cease.
x If in VMC and where visual judgment of the situation is assured:
- Evaluate helicopter flight path with respect to terrain and
obstacles,
- Take corrective action as necessary to recover safe terrain
and obstacles clearance.
3.1 RADIO ALTIMETER FAILURE

When the radio-altimeter is lost, altitude call-outs, Mode 1 and Mode 2 alerts are
inhibited although the GPWS function may not be declared inoperative.
3.2 LOSS OF EGPWS

In case of loss of the EGPWS (or when the EGPWS is switched off) the decision
height "CHECK HEIGHT, CHECK HEIGHT" (not available with V24) and 100 ft
"ONE HUNDRED" call outs are lost.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 18
FLIGHT MANUAL
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures provided in the Basic Flight Manual and in the Supplements
used remain applicable and are supplemented by the following normal procedures:
- The crew must check that the TAWS database covers the area of operations and is
up-to-date (refer to pilots guide).
NOTE 1
Glideslope nuisance alerts may be produced when flying back-course to
an ILS with the VORs tuned to that ILS (it may occur when an ILS
approach to a runway is followed by a circle to land procedure to land on
the opposite runway).
NOTE 2
Operation of the Terrain and obstacle display is not guaranteed for cockpit
temperature below -20C.
4.1 SYSTEM SELF-TEST

This self-test is designed to verify the cockpit configurations.
The self-test is inhibited if the TAWS detect an in flight condition.
AFTER ENGINES START UP
- 3 position switch .................................................. ON.
- Check the LOW ALT ON/OFF control is not engaged.
- Check status light ................................................ +
NOTE
The GPWS light will remain on as long as VOR 2 remains switched off.
- 3 position switch .................................................. TEST, for less than 2 seconds.
SELF-TEST SEQUENCE
- Status lights ......................................................... + for the
duration of self-test.
- On CAD ............................................................... .
- Aural message (in ICS) ........................................ PULL UP.
- On the Terrain and Obstacle display test pattern is shown during 12 seconds.
- Aural message (in ICS) ........................................ WARNING TERRAIN.
- On the instrument panel ...................................... Red TAWS annunciator off,
amber TAWS annunciator on
briefly.
- At the end of the self-test ..................................... + .
- On CAD ............................................................... .
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 19
FLIGHT MANUAL
4.2 SPECIFIC TAWS MODE AND INHIBITIONS

4.2.1 "Audio inhibit" function
For operations in day VFR conditions where terrain and obstacle clearance may
be assured visually and TAWS audio alerts will hamper aircrew performance, the
Audio inhibit function may be used to inhibit all audio alerts.
When the Audio inhibit is activated, is displayed on CAD.
The AUDIO INHIB control suppresses:
- V24 software version: all the TAWS alerts for 5 min.
- V28 or later approved software version: all the TAWS aural alerts for 5 min
except "ONE HUNDRED FEET" and "CHECK HEIGHT, CHECK HEIGHT".
Disengaging the AUDIO INHIB control restores aural alerts immediately.
4.2.2 "Terrain inhibit" function

For operations in day VFR conditions where terrain and obstacle clearance may
be assured visually and terrain and obstacles alerts will hamper aircrew
performance, the Terrain inhibit function may be used to inhibit all terrain and
obstacles alerts.
When the Terrain inhibit is activated, is displayed on CAD.
The TERR INHIB control suppresses all terrain and obstacle awareness alerts,
however the terrain display remains operational. The "Terrain inhibit" function
remains active until the TERR INHIB control is disengaged.
4.2.3 "Low Altitude" mode

The Low Altitude mode is intended for VFR operations below 500 ft AGL.
This mode shall be used only if visual contact with all terrain and obstacles can be
maintained at all times except as required when performing offshore platform
instrument approach procedures or other special procedures (refer to paragraph 2
LIMITATIONS).
The Low Altitude mode significantly reduces the warning boundaries of the
following modes:
- Mode 1 is inhibited,
- Modes 2, 3 and 4: reduction of warning boundaries,
- Terrain Look ahead: reduction of look down angle and warning time.
The Low Altitude mode remains active until LOW ALT ON/OFF control is
disengaged.
5 REGULATORY PERFORMANCE
The performance data specified in the basic flight manual and relevant supplements
remain applicable.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.39
A 14-39 Page 20
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
SUPPLEMENT
SPECIAL COCKPIT LIGHTING
IMPORTANT NOTE
Effective Pages.


APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.40.P1
A 14-07 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP.40.P1 1 14-07 R
SUP.40.P5 1 14-07 R
SUP.40 1 12-20
SUP.40 2 12-20
SUP.40 3 14-07 R
EASA approval No. 10039955, REV.1

on June 06, 2012.
Approved on October 16, 2014 under
NORMAL REVISION 1 date code 14-07 the authority of EASA Design
Organization Approval No.21J.056
Title
"Eurocopter", update Normal Procedures.
Revised
information
Deleted
None
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.40.P5
A 14-07 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
The information contained herein supplements the information of the basic Flight
Manual.
With this supplement it has been shown that the installation of the special cockpit
lighting system does not affect the aircraft capability for VFR day or night or for IFR.
No compliance demonstration has been performed that the installed system complies
with the applicable regulations for NVIS. No changes if any have been introduced which
may be necessary to comply with the applicable regulations.
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Power to the instrument light circuits is controlled by a three-position LIGHTING
switch (Fig.1) located on the overhead panel.
1. Day/Night/NVG switch
2. CAUT/ADVSY DIM: caution and advisory dim potentiometer (active only in NVG
mode)
3. CPLT PNL: copilot panel lighting potentiometer (active in Night and NVG modes)
4. CONSOLE: console lighting potentiometer (active in Night and NVG modes)
5. O.HEAD: overhead panel lighting potentiometer (active in Night and NVG modes)
6. PLT PNL: pilot panel lighting potentiometer (active in Night and NVG modes)
Figure 1 - Overhead panel - LIGHTING controls
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.40
A 12-20 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.2 NVG MODE
When the LIGHTING control is switched to the NVG position:
Cockpit:
Displays (PFDs, NDs, CAD, VEMD, COM/NAV) go into NVG mode (modified set
of colours, reduced brightness setting). Brightness of each display remains
adjustable,
Warning panel caption lights colour changes to NVG compatible red,
The lighting of the indicators which are not NVG compatible is automatically turned
off (RMI and possibly stand-alone DME indicator for aircraft equipped with single
pilot IFR option),
Cockpit lighting levels remain unchanged from Night mode. CPLT.PNL, O.HEAD
CONSOLE and PLT.PNL potentiometers still allow adjustment of lighting level.
The CAUT/ADVSY DIM becomes active and allows adjustment of the brightness
of the caution and advisories lights (Intrument panel: L/G indicator, NMS/GPS
caption lights; Console: AHRS, AFCS, Fuel control panel, ACAS (option) and
TAWS (option) caption lights).
Cabin:
Cabin lights are inhibited and replaced by compatible dome lights.
Smoking and Seat Belts annunciators are inhibited.
2 LIMITATIONS
CAUTION
IF NVG OPERATION ARE ENVISAGED, AN AIRWORTHINESS AND
SUBSEQUENT OPERATIONAL APPROVAL BY THE COMPETENT AUTHORITY
ARE NECESSARY.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.40
A 12-20 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
following emergency procedures:
3.1 AUTOROTATION LANDING (SECTION 3.3 1)

ITEM 1 is modified as follow:
1. Collective pitch ...................................... Quickly reduce to maintain
NR 350 rpm
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
procedures:
4.1 POST STARTING CHECKLIST

Before Engine failure training ....................... See FLM SUP.56 Training Procedures.
Night conditions: Use VEMD to check N2 is around 317 rpm (317 rpm = 91%N2).
NOTE
NR red low limit is 316 rpm on indicator
For Night VFR:

- LIGHTING switch ....................................... NIGHT or NVG as required,
- Displays ..................................................... Check brightness and adjust as
required,
- If in NVG mode:
CAUT/ADVSY DIM potentiometer ................ Check Cautions and Advisories dim
and adjust as required,
- Anti-collision light DIM mode (if fitted) ........ Do Not Select.
- Anti-collision light ....................................... ON.
5 PERFORMANCE
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.40
A 14-07 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
"UNS-1D" NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SUP.52.P1
A 02-20 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP. 52 P1 1 02-20
SUP. 52 P5 1 08-50 R
SUP. 52 1 08-50 R
SUP. 52 2 08-50 R
SUP. 52 3 08-36
SUP. 52 4 08-36
SUP. 52 5 08-50 R
LIST OF THE LATEST NORMAL NORMAL REVISION : 2

APPROVED REVISIONS DATE : 15/07/2009
No. Date No. Date

0 02-20
1 08-36 EASA approval No R.A.01636
2 08-50 on 05/07/2009

SUP.52.P5
A 08-50 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
The UNS-1D (FMS Class B2-B4) complies with the requirements of AC 20-130 and
AMJ 20X2 for:
VFR Day and Night flight as a navigation supplement.
IFR flight en-route as a supplemental navigation source.
BRNAV.
1.1 ND HSI AND SECTOR SYMBOLOGY
HLD = The holding pattern is shown with the graphic of ND
Figure 1 - ND HSI and Sector symbology

SUP.52
A 08-50 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.2 BACK-UP GPS (OPTION)

Upon FMS failure, it is possible to use the back-up GPS as NMS navigation source
on NDs. The commutation is performed through a dedicated control box on the
pedestal. An annunciator illuminates when the back-up GPS is selected. AFCS NAV
mode remains available with the back-up GPS.
NOTE
1. Selection of the back-up GPS is possible only if the FMS is switched off.
2. When the back-up GPS is selected, the corresponding GPS flight manual
supplement remains applicable.
CONSOLE INSTRUMENT PANEL
NMS
NORM B/U
NMS
B/UP
Commutation box Annunciator
Figure 2 - Commutation box and annunciator
2 LIMITATIONS
The use of the FMS for SIDs-STARs and instrument approaches is prohibited.
2.1 PLACARD
INSTRUMENT PANEL
USING FMS FOR SIDs-STARs

AND INSTRUMENT
APPROACHES IS PROHIBITED

SUP.52
A 08-50 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.1 FMS FAILURES
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Revert to back-up GPS if fitted (refer to 3.2) or use conventional

R NAV navigation instruments. In the latter case, if in B-RNAV airspace,
+ contact ATC to revert to conventional navigation.
at ND
NMS
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

Loss of power
supply
or
position
solution
invalid
At ND Revert to back-up GPS if fitted (refer to 3.2) or use conventional

navigation instruments. In the latter case, if in B-RNAV airspace,
DR
contact ATC to revert to conventional navigation.
NMS
degradation
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

SUP.52
A 08-36 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
At ND Check message on CDU and verify degraded mode
- If message at CDU RAIM check at ND :

MSG
a) IF : NMS OR NMS UNS 1D can be used
Message DME/DME VOR/DME
waiting
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
b) IF NO : Revert to back-up GPS if fitted (refer to 3.2) or use

conventional navigation instruments. In the latter case,
if in B-RNAV airspace, contact ATC to revert to
conventional navigation.
NOTE
"En-route", with only the GPS, the UNS 1D can still be used subject to
checking the navigation data by conventional equipment at least every
15 min.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
3.2 REVERSION TO BACK-UP GPS (OPTION)
NOTE
Back-up GPS is to be used when the FMS or its navigation
sensors have failed
- AFCS NAV mode .......................................Disengage
- FMS ...........................................................Switch-off NMS
- NMS selector..............................................switch to B/U B/UP
- AFCS NAV mode .......................................Re-engage as required

- Refer to the flight manual supplement of the back-up GPS for operations.

SUP.52
A 08-36 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
used remain applicable and are completed or modified by the following normal
procedure:
The flight in BRNAV space makes it necessary to ensure the RAIM prediction.
Before the start of navigation, the crew must read the CDU messages to check that
all the validities are present.
The "PILOT GUIDE" operating manual (P/N 2423SV604.2) must be up to date and
available on-board the aircraft.
The equipment in use must have software loaded (SW 604.2) which is compatible
with the above mentioned "PILOT GUIDE".
The crew must check the validity and accuracy of the data base information (28-day
validity) relative to the official documentation.
For an IFR and BRNAV flight, the facilities specified in Section 2.3 5 of the present
manual must be serviceable.
NOTE 1
The legs representative of DME arc or interception turn can be traced as a track
between fixes or represented as a blank.
NOTE 2
Use of the VHF frequencies listed below: 121.150 - 121.175 - 121.200 - 131.200 -
131.250 - 131.275 -131.300 MHz, may possible interference with operation of the GPS
receiver after 10 to 15 s of transmission time, returning to normal approximately 3 s
after the end of transmission.
5 PERFORMANCE

SUP.52
A 08-50 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
AERONAV TYPE III NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SUP.53.P1
A 02-20 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP. 53 P1 1 02-20
SUP. 53 P5 1 11-48 R
SUP. 53 1 11-48 R
SUP. 53 2 11-48 R
SUP. 53 3 11-48 R
SUP. 53 4 11-48 R
SUP. 53 5 11-48 N
SUP. 53 6 11-48 N

APPROVED REVISIONS
No. Date No. Date
0 02-20
1 05-35
2 11-48 EASA approval N 10038215
on 27.01.2012

SUP.53.P5
A 11-48 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
The use of this type of installation is subject to the agreement of the Operational
Authorities.
Configuration without APCH caption light or with APCH caption light
inactive
The AeroNav III (GPS Class A2) complies with the requirements for:
Single-pilot configuration:
VFR Day and Night flight en-route as a navigation supplement.
BRNAV.
Dual-pilot configuration:
IFR flight terminal (SIDs & STARs) as a supplemental navigation source.
Configuration with APCH caption light active

The AeroNav III (GPS Class A2) complies with the requirements for:
Single-pilot configuration:
VFR Day and Night flight en-route as a navigation supplement.
BRNAV.
Dual-pilot configuration:
IFR flight terminal (SIDs & STARs) and non-precision approach (GPS stand-
alone and GPS overlay, VOR, VOR-DME, NDB, RNAV) as a supplemental
navigation source.

SUP.53
A 11-48 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

SUP.53
A 11-48 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
2 LIMITATIONS
2.1 CONFIGURATION WITHOUT APCH CAPTION LIGHT OR WITH

APCH CAPTION LIGHT INACTIVE
The use of the AeroNav III navigation system as navigation source for instrument
terminal procedures is restricted to dual-pilot configuration.
THE USE OF THE AERONAV III NAVIGATION SYSTEM AS NAVIGATION
SOURCE FOR INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURES IS PROHIBITED.
2.1.2 Placard
INSTRUMENT PANEL
USING GPS FOR INSTRUMENT

APPROACHES IS PROHIBITED
2.2 CONFIGURATION WITH APCH CAPTION LIGHT ACTIVE

The use of the AeroNav III navigation system as navigation source for instrument
terminal and approach procedures is restricted to dual-pilot configuration.

SUP.53
A 11-48 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
R NAV Use conventional navigation instruments.
In BRNAV airspace, contact ATC to revert to conventional
+
navigation.
at ND
Configuration with APCH caption light active:
NMS During the final phase of an instrument approach using the
AERONAV III, execute a missed approach procedure except if a
Loss of power conventional navigation means approved for the approach are
supply displayed and operational.
or
position
solution
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
invalid
At ND Use conventional navigation instruments.

In BRNAV airspace, contact ATC to revert to conventional
DR
navigation.
GPS Configuration with APCH caption light active:
degradation During the final phase of an instrument approach using the
AERONAV III, execute a missed approach procedure except if a
conventional navigation means approved for the approach are
displayed and operational.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

SUP.53
A 11-48 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
On instrument Check message on CDU and verify degraded mode
panel
- If message at CDU RAIM :
MSG - Use conventional navigation instruments.
- En-route, AERONAV III navigation can still be used provided
+ position can be checked with conventional means of navigation
at least every 15 min. In BRNAV airspace, if the consistency
At ND check is impossible, contact ATC to revert to conventional
MSG navigation.
- If the helicopter is outside BRNAV airspace, it shall not enter
BRNAV airspace.
Message
waiting Configuration with APCH caption light active:
- During the final phase of an instrument approach using the
AERONAV III, execute a missed approach procedure except if
the conventional navigation means approved for the approach
are displayed and operational.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
procedure:
4.1 GENERAL
If a flight in BRNAV airspace is planned, the availability of the RAIM should be
confirmed for the intended flight (route and time).
Before the start of navigation, the crew must read the CDU messages to check
that all the validities are present.
The Aeronav III operators Manual, P/N HB-NAV-350, Rev 5, or later appropriate
revision, must be up to date and available on-board.
The Aeronav III must have CDU loaded with approved software version 1.10 or
later (SW 1.10 or later have auto-pilot coupling capability).
The crew must check the validity and accuracy of the data base information (28-
day validity) relative to the official documentation.
For an IFR and BRNAV flight, the facilities specified in Section 2.3 5 of the
present manual must be serviceable.
Use the radial from or radial to only with HSI mode.
When using the SIDs/STARs, the crew must check that the graphics shown on
the ND comply with the official documentation, particularly as regards the DME
arcs and radial intercepts. In case of no compliance, the leg considered must be
performed with the conventional means or in HSI mode.

SUP.53
A 11-48 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
NOTE 1
The legs representative of DME arc or interception turn can be traced as a track
between fixes or represented as a blank.
NOTE 2
Use of the VHF frequencies listed below: 121.150 - 121.175 - 121.200 - 131.200 -
131.250 - 131.275 -131.300 MHz, may possibly interference with operation of the
GPS receiver after 10 to 15 s of transmission time, returning to normal operation a
few seconds after the end of transmission.
4.2 INSTRUMENT APPROACHES (FOR CONFIGURATION WITH APCH

CAPTION LIGHT ACTIVE)
Instrument approaches performed with the AERONAV III must be accomplished in
accordance with approved instrument approach procedures that are retrieved from
the navigation database.
Accomplishment of ILS, LOC, LOC-BC, LDA, SDF and MLS approaches with this
system is not authorized.
Unless GPS approaches are approved for alternate airports by applicable
operating rules, airports selected as alternates must be served by an approach
based on other than GPS navigation. The aircraft must have operational
equipment capable of using that navigation aid, and the required navigation aid
must be operational.
Before starting an IFR navigation ending with a GPS instrument approach, check
(through the predictive RAIM function of the AERONAV III and/or GNSS NOTAMs)
that integrity monitoring is predicted to be available within 15 minutes of the
estimated time of arrival.
Instrument approaches must be conducted in the approach mode (APCH) and
GPS integrity monitoring (RAIM) must be available at the Final Approach Fix
(FAF).
NOTE
For certain approach procedures, including for example a racetrack procedure, the
AERONAV III may not present a guidance between the IAF and the final approach
segment. In these cases, other means must be used to fly the prescribed track
between the IAF and the final.
5 PERFORMANCE

SUP.53
A 11-48 Page 6
FLIGHT MANUAL
2.3 MAXIMUM WEIGHT FOR TRAINING PROCEDURES: CAT. B

OPERATIONS
PAGES
AIRCRAFT FITTED WITH AIR INTAKE SCREENS
Training CAT. B at aborted takeoff, landing or in cruise 300 ft above ground....15
AIRCRAFT FITTED WITH SAND FILTERS (SAND FILTERS INACTIVE)
Training CAT. B at aborted takeoff, landing or in cruise 300 ft above ground....23
NOTE
At that weight, practice of continued takeoff in CAT. B is prohibited below 300 ft AGL
(refer to CAT. A performance for this type of training)
Normal operation can be obtained at any time by selecting the "IDL1-FLT-IDL2" switch
to "FLT.
3.1 ACTUAL ENGINE FAILURE DURING TRAINING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Failure of engine 1. Automatic inhibition of the TRAINING function:
supplying the
power or engine VEMD
running at
training idle
T LO Actual OEI 2 min rating armed.
The remaining
engine delivers
the required NOTE
power according
to demand up to TRAINING switch shall be returned to FLT after landing.
the actual OEI
2 min rating

SUP.56
A 06-02 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.2 FADEC FAILURE DURING TRAINING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1. Automatic inhibition of the training function:
FADEC FAIL
+ VEMD
red light on
cockpit
overhead panel
T LO Actual OEI 2 min rating armed.
+
LO
+
FF + END 2. FADEC FAIL Procedure .....................................Apply.
Major governor
failure
NOTE
Metering unit NOTE
frozen at fuel flow
value upon failure Training switch shall be returned to FLT after landing.
1. Automatic inhibition of the training function:

GOV
VEMD
Minor governor
failure T LO Actual OEI 2 min rating armed.
2. GOV Procedure .....................................Apply.
NOTE
Training switch shall be returned to FLT after landing.

SUP.56
A 06-14 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
VIP WITH SWING-DOOR(S) INSTALLATION

AND ELECTRICALLY POWERED FOOTSTEP(S)

SUP.57.P1
A 06-37 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP. 57 P1 1 06-37
SUP. 57 P5 1 10-29 R
SUP. 57 1 06-37
SUP. 57 2 10-29 R
SUP. 57 3 10-29 R
SUP. 57 4 10-29 R

APPROVED REVISIONS DATE :
No. Date No. Date
0 02-20
1 02-40
3 10-29 on November 16, 2010

SUP.57.P5
A 10-29 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
The VIP installation incorporates specific seats and accommodation.
1.1 PILOT'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OVERHEAD PANEL CAD
STEP : Relevant step not closed
RH or LH
Figure 1 controls and indicators
1.2 OPERATION
STEP switch position :
OPEN : Open The footstep(s).
CLOSE : Close The footstep(s).

SUP.57
A 06-37 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
2 LIMITATIONS

Doors-open flights and in-flight door actuation is prohibited.
Opening footstep(s) in flight is prohibited.
2.2 MINIMUM FLIGHT CREW / MAXIMUM PERSONNEL TRANSPORT

CAPABILITY
Minimum flight crew :
One pilot in right-hand seat.
Maximum number of seats (including flight-crew): 10.
2.3 EMERGENCY EXIT

FLAPING DOORS WINDOWS
1 PULL COVER
2 PULL TAPE TO REMOVE SEAL
3 PUSH WINDOW IN CORNER

SUP.57
A 10-29 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.1 FAILURES INDICATED BY A WARNING LIGHTS
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
STEP 1 - IAS.......................................... < 90 kt
RH or/and LH 2 - STEP ...................................... CLOSE
Step(s) not
correctly closed
STEP STEP
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT - VNE .............................. 90 kt
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
3.2 EMERGENCY EVACUATION

In the event of an emergency landing or ditching, jettison the windows and the
cockpit doors after impact.

SUP.57
A 10-29 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
procedure.

ADD:
For each occupied seat ................check the presence of head rest and safety belt
4.2 PRE-TAXIING CHECKLIST

ADD:
9 (bis) - Step(s) ........................................ Close.
4.3 APPROACH-LANDING
When on ground:
7 - Step(s) ................................................ Open.
5 PERFORMANCE

SUP.57
A 10-29 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
"UNS-1LW" FMS
SCN 1000.3 OR LATER APPROVED VERSIONS

SUP.59.P1
A 10-12 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP. 59 P1 1 10-12
SUP. 59 P5 1 10-28 R
SUP. 59 1 10-12
SUP. 59 2 10-12
SUP. 59 3 10-12
SUP. 59 4 10-28 R
SUP. 59 5 10-12
SUP. 59 6 10-28 R
SUP. 59 7 10-28 R
SUP. 59 8 10-28 R
SUP. 59 9 10-28 R
SUP. 59 10 10-28 R

APPROVED REVISIONS DATE :
No. Date No. Date

0 10-12
on September, 2010

SUP.59.P5
A 10-28 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
The UNS-1LW FMS multi-sensor navigation system installation complies with the
requirements for the following navigation modes and operations:
1) GPS navigation mode:

- VFR day and night as a navigation supplement.
- IFR en-route, terminal (SIDs & STARs) and non-precision approach (GPS stand-
alone and GPS overlay VOR, VOR-DME, NDB, RNAV) as a supplemental
navigation source.
- B-RNAV.
- P-RNAV.
2) DME-DME (automatic tuning) navigation mode:
- IFR en-route as a supplemental navigation source.
- B-RNAV.
3) VOR-DME (manual tuning) navigation mode:
- IFR en-route as a supplemental navigation source.
- B-RNAV.
The FMS receives data from the different navigation sensors.
It outputs the different navigation data to its CDU and to the FDS display units.
The FMS manages flight plans including the following patterns and procedures:
- Direct to.
- Holding patterns
- Route and route discontinuity.
- Fly over / fly by guidance.
- SIDs & STARs procedures.
- Non-precision approaches.
The FMS provides following guidance data to the autopilot and/or to the FDS displays:
- XTK - Cross track deviation.
- TKE - Track error.
- DA - Drift angle.
- DTK - Desired track.
- Bearing, time to go, distance to go to next waypoint.
- TO-FROM indication.
- Track change alert, end of route, annunciation.
- Roll steering (with limited speed and maximum value).
- Validity information (RNAV and DR)

SUP.59
A 10-12 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
The self-contained navigation system is made up of:
- A FMS computer, with an embedded GPS SBAS receiver and with its control and
display unit (CDU). (In normal operation the computer controls all the navigation
functions).
- Various peripheral sensors and equipment items.
The FMS computer is connected to the following equipments:
- VOR 2 (manual tuning).

- DME.
- ADC 2.
- AHRS 2.
- MFDs.
- A landing gear contactor.
- A Portable Data Transfer Unit (PDTU).
Abbreviations used:
AHRS:..... Attitude and Heading Reference System.

B-RNAV: . Basic RNAV.
CDU:....... Control and Display Unit.
DR: ......... Dead reckoning.
FAF:........ Final Approach Fix.
FMS: ....... Flight Management System.
GPS: ....... Global Positioning System.
LDA: ....... Localizer type Directional Aid.
PDTU:..... Portable Data Transfer Unit.
P-RNAV: . Precision RNAV.
SDF: ....... Simplified Directional Facility.
SID: ........ Standard Instrument Departure.
STAR: ..... Standard Arrival Route.

SUP.59
A 10-12 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL

FMS navigation FMS message annunciation
mode FMS dead reckoning
mode annunciation
DTK
Blinks upon Track
Change Alert Lateral full scale
deviation in NM
1.3 APPROACH ANNUNCIATORS (INSTRUMENT PANEL)
APCH Illuminates when the FMS is in approach mode

SUP.59
A 10-12 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.4 BACK-UP GPS (OPTION)
Upon FMS failure, it is possible to use the back-up GPS as NMS navigation source
on NDs. The commutation is performed through a dedicated control box on the
pedestal. An annunciator illuminates when the back-up GPS is selected. AFCS NAV
mode remains available with the back-up GPS.
NOTE
1. Selection of the back-up GPS is possible only if the FMS is switched off.
2. When the back-up GPS is selected, the corresponding GPS flight manual
supplement remains applicable.
CONSOLE INSTRUMENT PANEL
NMS
NORM B/UP
NMS
B/UP
Commutation box Annunciator
Figure 2 - Commutation box and annunciator
2 LIMITATIONS
- The database is not guaranteed.
- LP (V) approaches are prohibited. As a consequence, LP (V) approaches are
disabled per configuration and shall remain so.
- Accomplishment of ILS, LOC, LOC-BC, LDA, SDF and MLS approaches with this
system is not authorized.
- The use of the GPS SBAS sensor is restricted to GPS mode. As a consequence,
SBAS modes (WAAS, EGNOS, MSAS, GAGAN) are disabled per configuration and
shall remain so.
- The use of the DME-DME and the VOR-DME navigation modes of the FMS are
restricted to En Route.
- The use of the Selected Cross track-Parallel Course mode (SXTK) is prohibited in
IFR.

SUP.59
A 10-28 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
3 EMERGENCY AND ABNORMAL PROCEDURES

3.2 ABNORMAL PROCEDURES
3.2.1 General
The xR NAVx caution light on the Caution and Advisory Display (CAD) and the
xNMSx and xMSGx annunciators on the NDs appear when failures related to the
FMS occur.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
R NAV - Refer to 3.2.2
+
on ND
NMS
FMS failure
on ND - Refer to the FMS CDU in order to analyze the messages displayed

by the FMS.
MSG
Message waiting

SUP.59
A 10-12 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.2.2 FMS failures
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
R NAV - En route, revert to back-up GPS if fitted (refer to 3.3) or use

conventional navigation instruments. In the latter case, if in
+ B-RNAV airspace, contact ATC to revert to conventional
navigation.
on ND
- In Terminal area, revert to conventional navigation. If in P-RNAV
NMS procedure, contact ATC to revert to conventional navigation.
- During the final phase of an instrument approach using the FMS,
execute a missed approach procedure except if the other
navigation means approved for the approach are displayed and
operational.
Revert to conventional navigation for the missed approach.
FMS major failure
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
3.2.3 Navigation modes failures
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
on ND
- En route, use the FMS if in DME-DME or VOR-DME mode or
MSG revert to back-up GPS if fitted (refer to 3.3) or revert to
conventional navigation. In the latter case, if in B-RNAV airspace,
+
MSG
FMS annunciator procedure, contact ATC to revert to conventional navigation.
+ - During the final phase of an instrument approach using the FMS,
XWAAS1 FAILEDX execute a missed approach procedure except if the other
or navigation means approved for the approach are displayed and
xWAAS1 NOT NAVx operational.
on FMS
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Loss of GPS
navigation

SUP.59
A 10-28 Page 6
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
on ND
- En route, GPS navigation can still be used provided the position can
MSG be checked with the DME-DME or the VOR-DME mode or with the
other means of navigation at least every 15 min. If the consistency
+
check is impossible, revert to back-up GPS if fitted (refer to 3.3) or
MSG revert to conventional navigation. In the latter case, if in B-RNAV
FMS annunciator airspace, contact ATC to revert to conventional navigation.
+ - In Terminal area, revert to conventional navigation. If in P-RNAV
XNO SATTELITEX procedure, contact ATC to revert to conventional navigation.
XINTEGRITYX - During the final phase of an instrument approach using the FMS,
execute a missed approach procedure except if the other navigation
on FMS means approved for the approach are displayed and operational.
GPS autonomous
integrity CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
monitoring is not
available for the
current phase of
flight.
on ND
- En route, use the FMS in DME-DME or VOR-DME mode (after GPS
MSG deselection) or revert to back-up GPS if fitted (refer to 3.3) or revert
to conventional navigation. In the latter case, if in B-RNAV airspace,
+
XPOSX + MSGx
FMS annunciator procedure, contact ATC to revert to conventional navigation.
+ - During the final phase of an instrument approach using the FMS,
SATELLITEXPOSI execute a missed approach procedure except if the other navigation
XALARMX means approved for the approach are displayed and operational.
on FMS
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

The GPS error
exceeds the
maximum error
allowed for the
current phase of
flight.

SUP.59
A 10-28 Page 7
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
on ND
- En route, revert to back-up GPS if fitted (refer to 3.3) or revert to
MSG conventional navigation. In the latter case, if in B-RNAV airspace,
+
XPOSX + MSGx
procedure, contact ATC to revert to conventional navigation.
FMS annunciator
+ execute a missed approach procedure except if the other navigation
XPOSITIONX means approved for the approach are displayed and operational.
XUNCERTAINX Revert to conventional navigation for the missed approach.
on FMS
The FMS Actual

CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Navigation
Performance
(ANP) value
exceeds the
Required
Navigation
Performance
(RNP).
on ND
- En route, revert to back-up GPS if fitted (refer to 3.3) or revert to
MSG + DR conventional navigation. In the latter case, if in B-RNAV airspace,
+ contact ATC to revert to conventional navigation.
XPOSX + MSGx - In Terminal area, revert to conventional navigation. If in P-RNAV

procedure, contact ATC to revert to conventional navigation.
FMS annunciator
+ execute a missed approach procedure except if the other navigation
XDEADX means approved for the approach are displayed and operational.
XRECKONINGX
XMODEX
on FMS
The FMS is in CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

Dead Reckoning
navigation mode.

SUP.59
A 10-28 Page 8
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.3 REVERSION TO BACK-UP GPS (OPTION)
NOTE
Back-up GPS is to be used when the FMS or its navigation
sensors have failed
- AFCS NAV mode ........................................... Disengage
- FMS ............................................................... Switch-off NMS
- NMS selector ................................................. switch to B/UP B/UP
- AFCS NAV mode ........................................... Re-engage as required

- Refer to the flight manual supplement of the back-up GPS for operations.
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
procedures:
4.1 GENERAL
- Before starting navigation, check that all validities are present by reading the FMS
messages.
- The FMS must be in software version SCN 1000.3 or later approved versions.
- The FMS operator's manual (P/N 2423sv1000/1100 or later appropriate versions)
must be up to date and readily available on-board the aircraft.
- The crew must ensure that the information in the data base is up to date (every 28
days) and check it against the official documentation.
- If a flight in B-RNAV airspace is planned, the availability of the RAIM should be
NOTE
1. Using the VHF frequencies listed below:
- 121.150 - 121.175 - 121.200 - 131.200 - 131.250 - 131.275 - 131.300
MHz, may impair the GPS receiver performance after approximately 10 to
15 s in transmit mode, the receiver reverting to normal operation a few
seconds after transmission.
- The GPS performance is not guaranteed at cabin temperatures below
20 C.
2. The FMS Vertical NAVigation (VNAV) function is not interfaced to the
displays neither to the AFCS.
3. In some cases (end of a flight plan, direct to the last waypoint of a flight plan),
there is no message indicating that the last waypoint of the flight plan is
reached and that the current leg is extended.

SUP.59
A 10-28 Page 9
FLIGHT MANUAL
4.2 TERMINAL AREA OPERATIONS

- For SIDs or STARs procedures, the crew must check that the displayed procedure
is compliant with the official documentation, particularly as regards the DME arcs
and radial intercepts. In case of non-compliance, the leg considered must be
performed with the conventional means of navigation or, in HSI mode.
- Holding patterns, being not displayed in sector mode, must be performed in HSI
mode.
- P-RNAV procedures must be conducted with the GPS navigation mode and the
availability of GPS integrity monitoring should be confirmed for the intended flight
(procedure and time).
4.3 INSTRUMENT APPROACHES

- Instrument approaches performed with this system must be accomplished in
accordance with approved instrument approach procedures that are retrieved from
the navigation database.
- Instrument approaches must be conducted in the approach mode with the GPS
navigation mode, the ND in HSI mode and GPS integrity monitoring must be
available at the Final Approach Fix (FAF).
- When an alternate airport is required:
. this airport must be served by an approach based on a navigation aid other
than GPS navigation.
. the aircraft must have operational equipment capable of using that navigation
aid.
. the required navigation aid must be operational.
NOTE
1. For certain approach procedures, including for example a racetrack
procedure, the FMS may not present a guidance between the IAF and the
final approach segment. In these cases, other means of navigation must be
used to fly the prescribed track between the IAF and the final.
2. When pressing the FAF, the HSI lateral deviation scale switches to an
angular scaling equivalent to that of an ILS Localizer. The full-scale deviation
readout in NM displayed on the HSI then decreases continuously. During
Missed Approach, the deviation scaling remains angular until the End Off
Approach (EOA) is sequenced. After sequencing the EOA, the scaling
transitions back to linear.
3. If it is planed to proceed directly to a SID upon the missed approach, the SID
can be prepared in advance only if the airport where the approach is
performed is also selected as departure airport in the active flight plan.
5 PERFORMANCE

SUP.59
A 10-28 Page 10
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
SUPPLEMENT
DUAL GPS 400 W
(SOFTWARE VERSIONS MAIN 4.01 GPS 3.2 OR LATER APPROVED VERSIONS)
IMPORTANT NOTE
Effective Pages.


APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60.P1
A 15-05 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP.60.P1 1 15-05 SUP.60 5 15-05

SUP.60.P5 1-2 15-28 R SUP.60 6 15-05
SUP.60 7 15-05
SUP.60 1 15-05 SUP.60 8 15-28 R
SUP.60 2 15-05 SUP.60 9 15-28 R
SUP.60 3 15-05 SUP.60 10 15-05
SUP.60 4 15-05

on May 25, 2011.
authority of EASA DOA NEASA.21J.056.
Main points
update Normal Procedures.
Revised
information
Deleted
None
information
EASA approved No 10053045
on April 22, 2015
Cancellation of "GPS switch off and restart" Caution and "GPS POWER-
Main points
ON" procedure, layout improvement.
Revised
SUP.60.P1 page 1, SUP.60.P5 page 1, SUP.60 pages 2 to 10.
information
Deleted "GPS switch off and restart" Caution and "GPS POWER-ON" procedure
information (introduced with NR 1) are deleted.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60.P5
A 15-28 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

Approval No.21J.056
Main points Adding a NOTE for versions of software
Revised
SUP.60.P5 page 1 and SUP.60 pages 8 and 9
information
Deleted
None
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60.P5
A 15-28 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
1.1 OPERATIONS
The dual GPS 400 W navigation system installation complies with the requirements
for the following operations:
- VFR day and night as navigation supplement.
- IFR en-route, terminal (SIDs & STARs) and non-precision approach (GPS stand-
alone and GPS overlay VOR, VOR-DME, NDB, RNAV) as a supplemental
navigation source.
- B-RNAV.
- P-RNAV.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
1.2.1 Cross fill
The dual GPS 400 W navigation system works in a synchronised manner provided
both GPS are configured to AUTOMATIC CROSSFILL (refer to 2).
A change of flight plan or a Direct To carried out on one unit will be automatically
reflected on the other. An exception is the OBS mode which is not cross filled
(refer to 4).
1.2.2 Installation
Each GPS 400 W has its own antenna on the top of the tail fin.
Power supply GPS 1: 28V SHED BUS 1, GPS 2: 28V PRIMARY BUS 2 and 28V
ESSENTIAL BUS 2
1.2.3 Interface
Both GPS 400 W are interfaced to the avionic system via the display system but
only one can be used as a navigation source at a time and coupled to the AFCS
based on the selection via the pushbutton.
The primary displays of the GPS navigation are the navigation displays (ND) on
both pilot and co-pilot side. When the NMS pushbutton is set to NMS1 (2) then
NMS1 (2) is the only GPS navigation source accessible on each ND.
The primary displays are completed by:
- an "NMS1/NMS2 - INTG/MSG - APR - OBS SUSP" annunciator on the
instrument panel on both pilot and co-pilot sides,
- the integrated displays on both GPS 400 W which can be used in a
complementary way.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60
A 15-05 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
Block diagram
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60
A 15-05 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
Abbreviations used:
ADC: ....... Air Data Computer. GPS: ....... Global Positioning System.
AFCS: ..... Automatic Flight LDA: ........ Localizer type Directional Aid.
Control System. ND: .......... Navigation Display.
B-RNAV: . Basic RNAV. PFD: ........ Primary Flight Display.
FAF: ........ Final Approach Fix. P-RNAV: . Precision RNAV.
FDS: ........ Flight Display System. RAIM: ...... Receiver Autonomous Integrity
GLS: ........ GNSS Landing System. Monitoring.
GNSS: ..... Global Navigation SID: ......... Standard Instrument Departure.
Satellite System. STAR: ..... Standard Arrival Route.
2 LIMITATIONS
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following limitations:
- The use of any SBAS mode (WAAS, EGNOS...) is prohibited. All available SBAS
modes shall be disabled,
- The use of the terrain function is prohibited. The terrain function shall be disabled,
- Both GPS 400 Ws shall be configured to AUTOMATIC CROSSFILL,
- The database is not guaranteed,
- Accomplishment of ILS, LOC, LOC-BC, LDA, SDF and MLS approaches with the
GPS function of this system is not authorized,
- The use of the OBS mode is restricted to the selected GPS,
- AFCS Nav coupling is prohibited in OBS mode,
- VNAV information provided by the GPS 400 W may be used for advisory
information only.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60
A 15-05 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
3 EMERGENCY AND ABNORMAL PROCEDURES

Supplements used remain.

3.2.1 General
The annunciator on the NDs or or on instrument

panel annunciator appear when failures related to the selected GPS occur.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
- Refer to 3.2.2.
on ND
Selected GPS
failure
- Refer to the MSG page of the selected GPS ( 3.2.3).

or
on instrument
panel annunciator
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60
A 15-05 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
RCD
The following Caution is added in paragraph 3.2.1:

3.2.1 General
CAUTION
IF ONE OR BOTH GPS 400 W ARE SHEDDED, SWITCH OFF THE
CORRESPONDING GPS 400 W AND RESTART ACCORDING TO
NORMAL PROCEDURE (SEE 4.2.)
CAUTION: THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE REMOVED FROM THE MANUAL IF MODIFICATION
MOD No. 07-22B70 IS FITTED TO THE AIRCRAFT.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60
A 15-05 Page 4
*RC*
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.2.2 GPS 400 Failure
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
- Select the other GPS.

on ND
Selected GPS CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
failure
3.2.3 GPS navigation Failure
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1. GPS navigation is lost only on selected GPS.

on instrument
panel annunciator 2. GPS navigation is lost on both GPS.
+ - Use conventional navigation instruments,
- In B-RNAV airspace or P-RNAV procedure, contact
ATC to revert to conventional navigation,
on GPS - During the final phase of an instrument approach based
on GPS, execute a missed approach procedure except
+ if other navigation means approved for the approach
"Loss of GPS are displayed and operational.
Navigation" Revert to conventional navigation for the missed
In MSG page approach.
Loss of GPS
navigation CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60
A 15-05 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1. only on selected GPS.

+ - Select the other GPS.
2. on both GPS.
on instrument - En route, GPS navigation can still be used provided the
panel annunciator position can be checked with the other means of
+ navigation at least every 15 min. If the consistency
check is impossible, revert to conventional navigation.
In that case, if in B-RNAV airspace, contact ATC to
revert to conventional navigation,
on GPS - In terminal area, revert to conventional navigation. If in
+ P-RNAV airspace, contact ATC to revert to conventional
navigation,
"Loss of
- During the final phase of an instrument approach based
integrity"
on GPS, execute a missed approach procedure except if
in MSG page other navigation means approved for the approach are
displayed and operational.
GPS autonomous Revert to conventional navigation for the missed
integrity monitoring approach.
is not available for
the current phase CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
of flight

on instrument
panel annunciator
+
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

on GPS
+
"MAIN processor
requires service"
in MSG page
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60
A 15-05 Page 6
FLIGHT MANUAL
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
- Use conventional navigation instruments.
on instrument - En route, GPS navigation can still be used provided the
panel annunciator position can be checked with the other means of navigation
at least every 15 min. If the consistency check is impossible,
+ revert to conventional navigation. In that case, if in B-RNAV
airspace, contact ATC to revert to conventional navigation.
- In terminal area, revert to conventional navigation. If in P-
on GPS RNAV airspace, contact ATC to revert to conventional
navigation.
+
- During the final phase of an instrument approach based on
"RAIM position
GPS, execute a missed approach procedure except if other
warning"
navigation means approved for the approach are displayed
in MSG page and operational.
GPS position error
may exceed the
limits for current CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
phase of flight
1. only on selected GPS.

on instrument - Select the other GPS.
panel annunciator
+ 2. on both GPS.
- Execute a missed approach procedure except if other
navigation means approved for the approach are
on GPS displayed and operational.
Revert to conventional navigation for the missed
+ approach.
"ABORT
APPROACH
- Loss of
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
Navigation"
in MSG page
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60
A 15-05 Page 7
FLIGHT MANUAL
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
procedures.
4.1 GENERAL
- Before starting navigation, check that all validities are present by reading the
GPS messages.
- Both GPS: the MAIN software must be in version 4.01 or later approved versions.
- Both GPS: the GPS software must be in version 3.2 or later approved versions.
- The GPS pilot's guide (190-0356-00 Rev. G or later appropriate references)
must readily available on-board the aircraft.
- The crew must ensure that the information in the data base is up to date (28
days update cycle) and check it against the official documentation.
- If a flight in B-RNAV airspace is planned, the availability of the RAIM should be
- The MAG VAR function shall be configured to MAG on both GPS. The
True/Mag selection is managed through the dedicated switch of the FDS.
NOTE
1. Using the VHF frequencies listed below:
121.150 - 121.175 - 121.200 - 131.200 - 131.250 - 131.275 - 131.300
MHz, may impair the GPS receiver performance after approximately
10 to 15 s in transmit mode, the receiver reverting to normal operation
a few seconds after transmission.
2. The GPS performance is not guaranteed at cabin temperatures below
- 20 C.
3. The GPS normally provides automatic waypoint sequencing in
selected IFR procedures but in some cases, automatic sequencing is
suspended (the "OBS SUSP" annunciator then comes on). In this
case, sequencing to next leg must be done manually by pressing the
OBS key on one of the GPS.
NOTE
The software versions of the two GPS 400W must be identical.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60
A 15-28 Page 8
FLIGHT MANUAL
RCD
The following procedures are added in paragraph 4:
4.2 (RE-) POWER-ON GPS ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT

(AP SOFTWARE N9_72 Post MOD 22B70)
CAUTION
BEFORE (RE-) POWERING-ON A GPS, CHECK THAT IT IS NOT SELECTED FOR
NAVIGATION (ie BEFORE POWERING-ON GPS 1, VERIFY THAT NMS 2 IS
SELECTED (NMS 2 CAPTION LIGHT ON)). CHECK THAT THE GPS IS READY
FOR NAVIGATION (STATUS: 3D NAV IN SATELLITE STATUS PAGE) BEFORE
(RE-) SELECTING IT FOR NAVIGATION. NOT RESPECTING THIS PROCEDURE
WILL LEAD TO MALFUNCTIONS OF THE AFCS LOC UPPER MODE.
- NMS 1/2 selector ...................................................... Select NMS 1

- NMS 1 caption light................................................... Check On
- GPS 2 ....................................................................... Power On
- GPS 2/ Database confirmation page/ OK? ............... Check Database validity
then press ENT
- GPS 2/ Instrument panel self-test/ OK? .................... Press ENT
- GPS 2: Satellite Status Page is displayed ................ Check Status
Once Status= 3D NAV on GPS2/ Satellite Status Page,

- GPS 1 ....................................................................... Power On
then press ENT
- NMS 1/2 selector ...................................................... As required
4.3 Pre-taxiing checklist
- Autopilot .................................................................... OFF
- AP ............................................................................. RESET
- Autopilot .................................................................... ON
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60
A 15-05 Page 9
*RC*
FLIGHT MANUAL
RCD
The following procedures are added in paragraph 4:
4.3 (RE-) POWER-ON GPS ON GROUND OR IN FLIGHT

(AP SOFTWARE N9_72 Post MOD 22B70)
CAUTION
BEFORE (RE-) POWERING-ON A GPS, CHECK THAT IT IS NOT SELECTED FOR
NAVIGATION (ie BEFORE POWERING-ON GPS 1, VERIFY THAT NMS 2 IS
SELECTED (NMS 2 CAPTION LIGHT ON)). CHECK THAT THE GPS IS READY
FOR NAVIGATION (STATUS: 3D NAV IN SATELLITE STATUS PAGE) BEFORE
(RE-) SELECTING IT FOR NAVIGATION. NOT RESPECTING THIS PROCEDURE
WILL LEAD TO MALFUNCTIONS OF THE AFCS LOC UPPER MODE.

- GPS 2 ....................................................................... Power On
then press ENT

- GPS 1 ....................................................................... Power On
then press ENT
- NMS 1/2 selector ...................................................... As required
4.4 Pre-taxiing checklist
- Autopilot .................................................................... OFF
- AP ............................................................................. RESET
- Autopilot .................................................................... ON
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60
A 15-28 Page 9
*RC*
FLIGHT MANUAL
4.3 TERMINAL AREA OPERATIONS

- DME arcs, radial intercepts and holding patterns must be performed with the
HSI format on the ND.
- For P-RNAV procedures, the availability of the RAIM should be confirmed for
the intended flight (procedure and time).
- To perform holding patterns which are not already programmed in the selected
procedure, use the OBS mode on the selected GPS and select the HSI format
on the ND.
Inbound Course selection is carried out directly on the GPS.
The holding pattern has then to be flown manually as with a conventional
navaid.
NOTE
Activating the OBS mode stops automatic waypoint sequencing. The
"OBS SUSP" annunciator remains on as long as the OBS mode is
active. Canceling the OBS mode reengages automatic waypoint
sequencing.
4.4 INSTRUMENT APPROACHES

- Instrument approaches must be accomplished in accordance with approved
instrument approach procedures that are retrieved from the navigation
database.
- The availability of the RAIM should be confirmed for the intended approach
(procedure and time).
- Instrument approaches must be conducted in the approach mode (APR
annunciators on instrument panel, LNAV displayed on GPS).
- When an alternate airport is required:
. this airport must be served by an approach based on a navigation aid other
than GPS navigation,
. the aircraft must have operational equipment capable of using that navigation
aid.
. the required navigation aid must be operational.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60
A 15-28 Page 9
FLIGHT MANUAL
NOTE 1
To initiate a missed approach before the missed approach point
(MAP), the approach final segment should be followed above MDA
until the MAP is reached. Upon passing the MAP, the "OBS SUSP"
annunciator comes on. Pressing the OBS key will then activate the
missed approach procedure on the GPS.
NOTE 2
The GPS may not provide correct initial missed approach guidance
until established on a defined leg. It is reminded that it is the pilots
responsibility to verify that the guidance is in accordance with the
published procedure. Using GPS guidance in missed approach may
have to be differed until it is in accordance with the published
procedure.
5 PERFORMANCE

APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.60
A 15-05 Page 10
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155B1
SPECIAL SUPPLEMENT
FLIR ULTRA FORCE 350

(WITH AND WITHOUT FLIR OPERATOR CONSOLE)
IMPORTANTE NOTE
Effective Pages.

EUROCOPTER Direction Technique Support


SUP.61.P1
A 13-09 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

EASA CERTIFICATION
R : Revised, to be replaced
N : New, to be inserted
SUP. 61 P1 1 13-09
SUP. 61 P5 1/01 13-09
SUP. 61 1 13-09
SUP. 61 2 13-09
SUP. 61 3 13-09
SUP. 61 4 13-09
SUP. 61 5 13-09

APPROVED REVISIONS
No. Date No. Date
0 13-09
EASA approval No10047898 and

No10049270 on May 23, 2014

SUP.61.P5
A 13-09 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
The FLIR "ULTRA FORCE 350" system provides surveillance, detection, acquisition,
recognition and many other applications.
The system includes:
Turret Camera Unit (TCU)
Hand Controller Unit (HCU)
FLIR operator console (if fitted)
1.1 POD INSTALLATION
The turret, fitted on the RH side of the aircraft, is a three-axis design, gyro stabilized
in outer azimuth, inner azimuth, and elevation.
The Field-of-Regard (FOR) for the system is +50 to 120 in elevation and a
continuous 360 in azimuth from the look-ahead position.
Refer to the Operators Manual for a complete description of the FLIR system.

SUP.61
A 13-09 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

1.2.1 System Control Unit
The following control items are implemented on the HCU:

Power On/Off DRIFT EI level/iris
Cage stow ZOOM
INV Auto focus focus ( F)
FLT-FRZ TRACK (T)
Ch enter Track Mode- Track Gate (G)
POL < PA > E-ZOOM
DRIFT AZ span/gain

SUP.61
A 13-09 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
2 LIMITATIONS
2.1 AIRSPEED LIMIT

Power-on flight
The decrease law shown in the Basic Flight Manual remains applicable but is
limited to:
- Absolute VNE ...................................................... 150 kt (278 km/h).
2.2 FLIR OPERATOR CONSOLE (IF FITTED)
When the FLIR operator console is installed (RH or LH):
1- Rear seats : Forbidden.

2- Lateral seat : Mandatory (Evacuation purpose).
3- Forward seat: At operator discretion.

SUP.61
A 13-09 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
used remain applicable.
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
procedures:
CAUTION
STARTING THE ENGINES WITH THE FLIR SYSTEM SET TO ON

MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE FLIR SYSTEM.
4.1 EXTERIOR INSPECTION

ADD:
STATION 1:
System cables ............................................................ securely attached
Optics windows .......................................................... clean and undamaged

ADD:
FLIR system ................................................................... OFF
until both engines have been started and while disconnection of the ground power
unit.

ADD:
FLIR system ................................................................... as required
4.4 ENGINE SHUTDOWN

ADD:
FLIR system ................................................................... OFF
prior to engine shutdown or while connection of a ground power unit.
4.5 OPERATING PROCEDURES

To operate the system, refer to:
- "ULTRA FORCE OWNERS MANUAL".

SUP.61
A 13-09 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL

Supplements used remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following
regulatory performance data:
5.1 RATE OF CLIMB AEO/OEI

Reduce rates of climb by 60 ft/min.
5.2 TAKEOFF WEIGHT

Takeoff weight given in SECTION 5.1 Takeoff weights permitting climb at
150 ft/min 1000 ft above ground with one engine inoperative must be reduced by
160 kg (353 lb).
5.3 PERFORMANCE DATA IN CATEGORY A

Takeoff weight in CATEGORY A operation on a clear area must be reduced by
160 kg (353 lb).

SUP.61
A 13-09 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
SUPPLEMENT
DUAL GTN 750H GNSS RNAV SYSTEM
IMPORTANT NOTE
Effective Pages.


APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62.P1
A 16-25 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL

EASA CERTIFICATION
SUP.62.P1 1 16-25 N SUP.62 9 16-25 N

SUP.62.P5 1 16-25 N SUP.62 10 16-25 N
SUP.62 11 16-25 N
SUP.62 1 16-25 N SUP.62 12 16-25 N
SUP.62 2 16-25 N SUP.62 13 16-25 N
SUP.62 3 16-25 N SUP.62 14 16-25 N
SUP.62 4 16-25 N SUP.62 15 16-25 N
SUP.62 5 16-25 N SUP.62 16 16-25 N
SUP.62 6 16-25 N SUP.62 17 16-25 N
SUP.62 7 16-25 N SUP.62 18 16-25 N
SUP.62 8 16-25 N

on October 17, 2016
Main points Creation of Supplement No.62
Revised
SUP.62.P1 page 1, SUP.62.P5 page 1 and SUP.62 pages 1 to 18.
information
Deleted
None
information
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62.P5
A 16-25 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1 GENERAL
The coverage of this Supplement is limited to general information and operating
principles. For the complete description of the operating modes, refer to the following
pilots Guides: Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide or Cockpit Reference Guide.
This supplement does not represent an authorization for operational use.
This supplement focuses on GNSS/GPS topics.
The GPS cannot be operated as long as the GTN 750H display is unavailable.
At very low cabin temperatures, the display of the GTN 750H may need 30 minutes
after the device is powered-up to become operational.
1.1 NAVIGATION MODES AND OPERATIONS

The dual GTN 750H GNSS RNAV system complies with the AMC 20-4, AMC 20-5,
TGL-10 and AMC 20-27 requirements for the following navigation modes and
operations:
GPS navigation mode (GNSS):
- Day and night VFR as a navigation supplement,
- IFR:
. RNAV 2 (En Route),
. RNP 1 excluding Radius to Fix (RF) leg capability (SIDs, STARs, initial and
missed approaches),
. RNP APCH (intermediate and final approaches without vertical guidance
(LNAV)).
NOTE
RNAV 2 covers RNAV 5 (B-RNAV) requirements,
RNP 1 covers RNAV 1 (P-RNAV) requirements.
1.2 EQUIPMENT AND CAPABILITIES (ICAO 2012 FLIGHT PLAN FORM)
1.2.1 Equipment (Field 10-a)

The dual GTN 750H GNSS RNAV system corresponds to the following equipment
to be included in field 10-a of ICAO 2012 Flight Plan form:
INDICATOR EQUIPMENT
G GNSS
R PBN
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.2.2 PBN (Field 18)

The dual GTN 750H GNSS RNAV system provides the following Performance-
Based Navigation (PBN) capabilities to be identified in field 18 of ICAO 2012 Flight
Plan form:
INDICATOR PBN / RNAV
B1 RNAV 5 GNSS
C1 RNAV 2 GNSS
D2 RNAV 1 GNSS
INDICATOR PBN / RNP

O2 RNP 1 GNSS
S1 RNP APCH
1.3 DESCRIPTION
1.3.1 General
The dual GTN 750H GNSS RNAV system is composed of the 2 GTN 750H units,
each linked to a GPS antenna, and additional external pushbuttons and
annunciators.
The GTNs output the different navigation data to their CDU, the FCDS and the
DMAP.
The GTNs manage flight plans including the following patterns and procedures:
- Direct To Intercept,
- Holding patterns,
- Parallel track (offset),
- SIDs & STARs procedures,
- RNP approaches without vertical guidance,
- SAR patterns (if fitted) (expanding square, parallel track (ladder), sector and
orbit).
The GTNs provide the following guidance data to the autopilot and/or to the FCDS
displays:
- XTK - Cross track deviation,
- TKE - Track error,
- DA - Drift angle,
- DTK - Desired track,
- Bearing, time to go, distance to go to next waypoint,
- TO-FROM indication,
- Track change alert, end of route annunciators,
- Roll steering,
- Validity information (Integrity and DR).
The dual GTN 750H GNSS RNAV system includes the VHF1, VHF2, VOR/ILS1,
VOR/ILS2 and Transponder functions.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 2
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.3.2 GTN synchronization

The two GTNs operate in a synchronised manner with only the selected NMS
providing navigation and guidance data to the avionics system. The selected NMS
can be changed using the NMS1/2 selector. The active navigation is only
synchronised if both units are set to Crossfill. The Pilot Guide provides further
information on crossfilled data.
1.3.3 RNAV (GNSS) approach LNAV minima

RNAV (GNSS) approach procedures accessible with this system are those related
to LNAV minima.
The IAC LNAV minima correspond to an RNAV (GNSS) approach without vertical
guidance.
Only lateral guidance is provided. It is based on GNSS positioning.
Vertical flight management is exactly the same as for VOR-DME-based or NDB-
based non-precision approaches.
RNAV (GNSS) final approach procedures are preceded by initial/intermediate
approaches with transition waypoints or vector to final procedures (radar
guidance).
1.3.4 Abbreviations used
ATC: ........ Air Traffic Control. LDA: ........ Localizer type Directional Aid.
ADC: ........ Air Data Computer. LNAV: ...... Lateral Navigation.
AFCS: ...... Automatic Flight LOI:.......... Loss Of Integrity.
Control System. ND: .......... Navigation Display.
APCH: ..... Approach. OBS: ........ Omni Bearing Selector.
B-RNAV: .. Basic RNAV. PFD: ........ Primary Flight Display.
CDI: ......... Course Deviation P-RNAV: .. Precision RNAV.
Indicator. RAIM: ...... Receiver Autonomous Integrity
DR: .......... Dead Reckoning. Monitoring.
FAF: ........ Final Approach Fix. RF............ Radius to Fix.
FCDS: ..... Flight Control RNAV: ..... Area Navigation.
Display System. RNP: ........ Required Navigation
GLS: ........ GNSS Landing System. Performance
GNSS: ..... Global Navigation RoD: ........ Rate of Descent.
Satellite System. SID: ......... Standard Instrument Departure.
HSI: ......... Horizontal Situation
STAR: ...... Standard Arrival Route.
Indicator.
VTF: ......... Vectors to Final.
IAC: ......... Instrument Approach
Chart.
GPS:........ Global Positioning
System.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.4 ARCHITECTURE
The dual GTN 750H GNSS RNAV system interfaces to other equipment as follows:
- Flight Control Display System to display flight plan and navigation information,
- AFCS APM 2000 for coupling to Navigation and Hover modes,
- DMAP EURONAV VII.
Figure 1: Dual GTN 750H GNSS RNAV system simplified diagram
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 4
FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 2: Dual GTN 750H GNSS RNAV system simplified integration diagram
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
1.5 CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS
Figure 3: Dual GTN 750H GNSS RNAV system controls and displays
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 6
FLIGHT MANUAL
Annunciator Function
GTN 1 (copilot's side) is selected.
GTN 2 (pilot's side) is selected.
GPS receiver detects a position error, or is unable to calculate the
integrity of the position.
Status message is available on the selected GTN. In case of new
message, the annunciator flashes.
Approach mode is active.
GPS "suspend" mode of operation (i.e. flight plan automatic
sequencing stopped).
GPS OBS mode of operation. When the OBS mode is engaged, the
automatic flight plan sequencing is suspended, as indicated by the
SUSP annunciator.
Pushbutton Function
Select the navigation source (GTN 1 or GTN 2) for FCDS and

AFCS.
and Switches On/Off GTN 1 or GTN 2.
2 LIMITATIONS
2.1 GENERAL
RNP APCH is restricted to LNAV minima (without vertical guidance).
The use of any SBAS mode (WAAS, EGNOS...) is prohibited. All available SBAS
modes shall be disabled (LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches are automatically not
available when SBAS is deselected).
LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches are prohibited.
RNP 1 Radius to Fix legs are not authorized.
Maximum interception angle using Vectors to Final ............................................ 90.
Both GTN 750H shall be configured to Crossfill.
Accomplishment of ILS, LOC, LOC-BC, LDA, SDF and MLS approaches with the
GPS function of this system is not authorized,
The Gloves Qualification Procedure in the Pilot's Guide must be completed prior to
glove used: The procedure is specific to pilot / glove / GTN combination.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 7
FLIGHT MANUAL
following procedures:

The annunciator on the NDs and the and indicators on
the Instrument Panel Vertical Strip annunciators appear when failures related to the
selected GTN/GPS occur.
INDICATION CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
on ND - selector .......................... Press to select the other GTN.
If problem continues:
- pushbutton .... Press to select alternate navigation source.

Selected GTN
failure CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
1. GPS navigation is lost only on selected GTN.
+ - selector...................... Press to select the other GTN.
- AFCS coupling ...................................... recouple as required.

on GTN
If problem continues:
(GPS
NAVIGATION
LOST) - pushbutton .... Press to select alternate navigation source.
and 2. GPS navigation is lost on both GTN.

- Use conventional navigation instruments,
- In RNAV 2 airspace or RNP 1 procedure, contact ATC to revert
+ to conventional navigation,
- During the final phase of an instrument approach based on
on Vertical Strip GPS, execute a missed approach procedure except if other
operational.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 8
FLIGHT MANUAL
1. only on selected GTN.
+
- selector ..................... Press to select the other GTN.
on GTN 2. on both GTN.

(LOSS OF - En Route, GPS navigation can still be used provided the
INTEGRITY) position can be checked with the other means of navigation at
and least every 15 min. If the consistency check is impossible,
revert to conventional navigation.
In that case, if in RNAV 2 airspace, contact ATC to revert to
conventional navigation,
+
- In terminal area, revert to conventional navigation. If in RNP 1
airspace, contact ATC to revert to conventional navigation,
on Vertical Strip - During the final phase of an instrument approach based on
GPS, execute a missed approach procedure except if other
operational.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
1. Continue flight using selected GTN.

on non-selected
GTN CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
GPS
NAVIGATION
LOST
or
LOSS OF
INTEGRITY
on non-selected
GTN
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 9
FLIGHT MANUAL
1. If on selected GTN only:

+
- selector..................... Press to select the other GTN.
on GTN 2. If on both GTNs:

and
- pushbutton .... Press to select alternate navigation source.
+
on ND
NOTE
Dead Reckoning is only allowed in En Route and Oceanic
phases of flight. During Dead Reckoning, course guidance
will be removed from the CDI.
- Use conventional navigation instruments.

The GTN is in - En Route, GPS navigation can still be used provided the
Dead Reckoning position can be checked with the other means of navigation at
navigation mode. least every 15 min. If the consistency check is impossible,
revert to conventional navigation.
In that case, if in RNAV 2 airspace, contact ATC to revert to
conventional navigation.
NOTE
If in Terminal or Approach phase of flight when Dead
Reckoning takes place; "No GPS Position" replaces the
Dead Reckoning indications: (Use alternate Abnormal
Procedure.)
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 10
FLIGHT MANUAL
Loss of non- 1. Continue flight using selected GTN.

selected GTN
and CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
on selected GTN
(CROSSFILL
ERROR)
and
on Vertical Strip
1. GTN ................................................. Refer to the Message page.
on selected GTN 2. GTN Procedure...........................................Conduct as required.

and CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
on Vertical Strip
and
on ND
or
on non-selected
GTN
Partial or full loss 1. If the problem is on selected GTN:

of GTN function
(for example - selector ............. Press to select the other GTN as
frozen touch required to maintain GPS information.
function)
2. Affected GTN ........ Reset using or On/Off pushbutton.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 11
FLIGHT MANUAL
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
procedures.
4.1 GENERAL
NOTE
The GTN performance is not guaranteed
at cabin temperatures below - 20C.
- Refer to the Pilot Guides for the complete operating modes of the system.
- Both GTN must have GPS version 5.0 and software version 6.11 or later approved
versions.
- The crew must ensure that the information in the data base is up to date (28 days
update cycle) and check it against the official documentation.
NOTE
Both GTN must contain the same databases to operate
correctly in synchronized mode.
- On GTN startup, verify and adjust the backlighting as required.
NOTE 1
- The GTN screen brightness is adjusted using the system/backlighting
menu. During the day, the brightness is controlled by the photocell and
the backlighting. In Night lighting mode, the GTN screen is adjusted with
the Console integrated lighting control and the backlighting.
- It is recommended to set the backlighting to 0 to 5 % during the night.
NOTE 2
The following configuration of glareshield is recommended for night flight:
Single pilot: left half of glareshield: first detent; right half: second detent
Two pilots: left and right halves: second detent.
NOTE 3
Wearing of glasses having polarized lenses could jeopardise
the readability of the GTN display.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 12
FLIGHT MANUAL
4.1.1 Navigation General

- Before starting navigation, check that all validities are present by reading the
GTN messages.
- For En Route or terminal RNAV in GPS navigation mode, the availability of the
RAIM should be confirmed for the intended flight (route and time).
Display
NOTE
Curved elements of navigation procedures and routes (for example: leg to
a MAP, holding pattern, orbit search pattern), are not displayed on the ND
or the Mission Display, but only on the GTN.
Waypoint Sequencing
The GTN will automatically sequence the waypoints in a navigation route. It is
possible that the GTN will sequence past the initially selected waypoint. In this
case, reset the waypoint using Activate Leg, or perform a Direct To the desired
point. Always verify that the navigation is to the desired waypoint.
NOTE
The GTN normally provides automatic sequencing of selected route / IFR
procedure.
When automatic sequencing is not available the key will appear above
the indication on the GTN and the annunciator will be

displayed on the Vertical Strip. Upon reaching the desired waypoint the pilot
must manually sequence to the next leg by touching the key on the GTN.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 13
FLIGHT MANUAL
4.1.2 Coupled navigation
NOTE
At high ground speed (at or above approximately 160 kt) during coupled
navigation, overshoots of the trajectory during turns are possible.
End of Route / Direct To

NOTE
At the end of a route, the GTN continues to provide heading. The AFCS
remains in NAV mode, and is guided on constant heading whilst the ND
will have the needle pointing to the rear.
Steep Turn
NOTE
The GTN messages include "Steep Turn" (Aircraft may overshoot course
during turn). The Pilot Guide indicates "No action is necessary; message
is informational only. If desired, slow the aircraft to shallow the turn.".
However, navigation may be unexpected if the aircraft speed is not
reduced to enable the AFCS to follow the guidance.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 14
FLIGHT MANUAL
4.1.3 OBS Function
The OBS function retains the current "active to" waypoint as the navigation
reference even after passing the waypoint (i.e., prevents sequencing to the next
waypoint). Touching the OBS key again returns to automatic sequencing of
waypoints.
When OBS mode is selected, the desired course To/From a waypoint is set using
the pop-up window on the GTN. The annunciator is displayed on the
Vertical Strip.
For leg types that do not support OBS, this key will be shown as a SUSP key. This
key will then also function as an Unsuspend key for legs that auto-suspend, such
as holds, missed approaches, etc.
NOTE
With dual GTN 750H GNSS RNAV system with crossfill on, the OBS
course will only be updated real time on the GTN that is receiving the
new OBS course. The course will be transferred to the other GTN when
OBS is exited.
When the AFCS is coupled to NAV, on passing the OBS waypoint, the aircraft
remains on the heading, with ND indications being provided back towards the OBS
waypoint.
NOTE
The Navigation source annunciator on the NDs is not related to
the GTN OBS function (it is for an Obstacle Detector if installed).

ADD:
- GTN screens..................................................................................... Ensure clean,
- GTN 2 ............................................................................................................... On,
- GTN 2 database currency is correct during start ......................................... Check.

ADD:
- GTN 1 ............................................................................................................... On,
- GTN 1 database currency is correct during start ......................................... Check.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 15
FLIGHT MANUAL
4.4 IFR OPERATING PROCEDURES
4.4.1 Terminal area RNAV procedures

- Terminal area RNAV procedures performed with this system must be
accomplished with procedures that are retrieved from the GTN navigation
database and checked against the official Terminal Charts before starting the
procedure.
- The terminal RNAV procedures must be conducted with the NMS navigation
source selected on the ND,
Holding Pattern
Holding patterns can be flown as part of a procedure, or can be added to a
waypoint within a route. If added to a route waypoint, the axis of the holding
pattern should be set to be in the direction of travel. If not, the guidance provided
when leaving the pattern may be unexpected (Steep Turn or S-Turn). If this
occurs, either fly the exit manually, or perform a Direct To the next waypoint.
When in the holding pattern, is displayed on the GTN and on
the Vertical Strip. The aircraft will remain in the holding pattern until the
on the GTN is selected.
The holding pattern is only displayed on the GTN Map page.
4.4.2 RNAV (GNSS) approaches
4.4.2.1 General
- RNAV(GNSS) approaches performed with this system must be accomplished
with approach procedures that are retrieved from the GTN navigation
database and checked against the official Instrument Approach Charts before
starting the approach.
- RNAV (GNSS) approaches must be conducted:
. With the NMS navigation source selected on the ND,
. According to the LNAV minima.
- The availability of GPS integrity monitoring (RAIM) should be confirmed for the
intended approach (procedure and time).
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 16
FLIGHT MANUAL
4.4.2.2 AFCS-coupled intermediate approach using a transition

waypoint
Prior to IF
- Check:
. NMS navigation source selected on the ND,
. AFCS NAV mode engaged,
. HSI selected on the ND,
. NMS navigation datafields displayed on the ND are correct.
After IF
- Check:
. Horizontal deviation scale displayed,
. Approach parameters in NMS navigation datafields are consistent with IAC.
- Monitor AFCS NAV mode tracking of approach axis.
Prior to FAF:
- Adjust RoD as required,
- Prepare vertical flight profile management as for VOR-DME-based or NDB-
4.4.2.3 AFCS-coupled intermediate approach using

Vector To Final (VTF)
NOTE
Following radar vectoring, ATC clearance to the FAF can be handled
via the VTF function which allows direct-to navigation to intercept the
extended final approach segment.
When coupled to an approach using VTF, the HDG mode should be used as
necessary, or the aircraft flown manually, until the aircraft is in an appropriate
position to resume NAV. The GTN will provide guidance to join the approach
prior to the FAF, but the aircraft may align on the axis very close to the FAF
point.
It is recommended to use a maximum intercept angle of 45 degrees at a
minimum of 5 nm from the FAF, to minimize any overshoots.
APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 17
FLIGHT MANUAL
During radar vectoring:

- Disengage AFCS NAV mode,
- Use, if desired, AFCS HDG mode as instructed by ATC,
- Select VTF,
- Check:
. LNAV minima on IAC,
. Horizontal scale displayed,
On intercept course to extended final approach segment:

- Engage AFCS NAV mode
- Monitor:
. Interception of final axis,
. NMS navigation datafields displayed on ND.
Before FAF:
- Adjust RoD as required,
- Prepare vertical flight profile management as for VOR-DME-based or NDB-
4.4.2.4 AFCS-coupled final approach

- Vertical Strip..................................................... Confirm at the FAF,
- Else ......................................................................... Perform missed approach,
- AFCS mode tracking of approach axis................................................. Monitor,
- RoD..................................................................................... Adjust as required.
4.4.2.5 Missed approach
NOTE
A missed approach can be activated via the GTN once past the MAP
or via the Go Around pushbutton on the cyclic stick during the final
approach or once past the MAP.
- No later than MAP, activate Go-Around,
- Check NMS sequencing to missed approach pattern.

APPROVED EC 155 B1
SUP.62
A 16-25 Page 18
COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
IMPORTANT NOTE
by the operator.
Pages.

EC 155 B1
0.0.P1
14-04 Page 1
REVISION TO AIRCRAFT PUBLICATION : EC 155 B1
PUBLICATION CONCERNED: FLIGHT MANUAL COMPLEMENTARY PART
Volume 2 REVISION No. 15 DATE-CODE: 16-12 CERTIFICATION: /

. Update guide (pages to be deleted/inserted),
. Main points of the revision,
. Check that pages in each section and those specified in the list of effective pages,
. Return the acknowledgment card,
. This list of amended pages may be filed (apart from the manual).
UPDATE GUIDE
SRD - 1 27/01/2016 - 1 16/06/2016
0.0.P5 1 to 6 14-48 0.0.P5 1 to 6 16-12
0.0 1 14-04 0.0 1 14-04

0.0 2 14-15 0.0 2 16-12
9.0.P6 1 13-29 9.0.P6 1 13-29

9.0.P6 2 13-51 9.0.P6 2 16-12
Normal
Revision / / / 9.37 1 to 3 16-12
EC 155 B1
UPDATE GUIDE
16-24 Page 1/2
MAIN POINTS OF THE REVISION SECTIONS PAGES
FLIGHT MANUAL Complementary part, Normal Revision No.15 date code 16-12
- List of effective pages and log of Normal Revisions are updated, 0.0.P5 1 to 6
- The "List of modifications mentioned in the flight manual" is 0.0 2
updated,
- Section 9.37 "Camera VISION 1000" added, 9.0.P6 2
- Creation of section "Camera VISION 1000". 9.37 1 to 3
EC 155 B1
UPDATE GUIDE
16-24 Page 2/2
COMPOSITION
This Manual assigned to the helicopter mentioned on the title page, contains the following
pink pages except those cancelled when the conditions are complied with.
CAUTION
0.0.P3 1 *RC* 14-48 MOD 07-39C75

7.4 2 *RC* 14-04 MOD 07-39C75
7.4 8 *RC* 14-04 MOD 07-39C75
7.5 3 *RC* 14-04 MOD 07-39C75
7.5 5 *RC* 14-04 MOD 07-39C75
RCA 7.7 2 *RC* 14-04 MOD 07-39C75
7.13-A 5 *RC* 14-48 MOD 07-39C75
7.13-B 5 *RC* 14-48 MOD 07-39C75
7.13-C 5 *RC* 14-48 MOD 07-39C75
9.33 1 *RC* 14-04 MOD 07-39C75
EC 155 B1
0.0.P3
14-48 Page 1
*RC*

R: Revised, to be replaced,
0.0 P1 1 14-04 7.2 1 02-20

0.0 P1 2 02-20 7.2 2 02-20
0.0 P1 3 02-20 7.2 3 02-20
0.0 P2 1 02-20 7.2 4 02-20
0.0 P3 1 02-20 7.2 5 02-20
0.0 P4 1 02-20 7.2 6 02-20
0.0 P5 1-7 16-25 R
0.0 1 14-04 7.3 P6 1 02-43
0.0 2 16-12 7.3 P6 2 02-43
6.0 P6 1 10-40 7.3 1 02-43

7.3 2 02-43
6.1 1 02-20 7.3 3 02-43
6.1 2 10-40 7.3 4 08-26
6.1 3 10-40 7.3 5 06-06
6.1 4 10-40 7.3 6 02-43
6.1 5 10-40 7.3 7 08-26
6.1 6 10-40 7.3 8 02-43
7.3 9 02-43
6.2 1 02-20 7.3 10 02-43
6.2 2 02-20 7.3 11 02-43
6.2 3 02-20 7.3 12 02-43
6.2 4 08-26 7.3 13 02-43
6.2 5 02-20 7.3 14 02-43
6.2 6 02-20 7.3 15 02-43
6.2 7 02-41 7.3 16 02-43
6.2 8 02-41 7.3 17 02-43
6.2 9 02-20 7.3 18 02-43
6.2 10 10-40 7.3 19 02-43
6.2 11 13-44 7.3 20 02-43
7.3 21 02-43
6.3 1 02-20 7.3 22 02-43
6.3 2 02-20 7.3 23 02-43
6.3 3 02-20 7.3 24 02-43
6.3 4 06-06 7.3 25 02-43
7.3 26 02-43
7.0 P6 1 14-48 7.3 27 13-44
7.3 28 02-43
7.1 1 06-06 7.3 29 02-43
7.1 2 02-20 7.3 30 02-43
EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
16-25 Page 1
7.3 31 02-43 7.10 3 02-43
7.4 1 08-26 7.11 1 02-43

7.4 2 14-04 7.11 2 02-43
7.4 3 06-06
7.4 4 02-43 7.12 1 14-04
7.4 5 06-06 7.12 2 02-43
7.4 6 02-43 7.12 3 08-26
7.4 7 02-43
7.4 8 14-04 7.13-A 1 14-48
7.4 9 06-06 7.13-A 2 14-48
7.4 10 06-06 7.13-A 3 14-48
7.4 11 02-43 7.13-A 4 14-48
7.13-A 5 14-48
7.5 1 02-43 7.13-A 6 14-48
7.5 2 02-43 7.13-A 7 14-48
7.5 3 14-04 7.13-A 8 14-48
7.5 4 02-43 7.13-A 9 14-48
7.5 5 14-04 7.13-A 10 14-48
7.13-A 11 14-48
7.6 1 02-43 7.13-A 12 14-48
7.6 2 02-43 7.13-A 13 14-48
7.6 3 02-43 7.13-A 14 14-48
7.6 4 02-43 7.13-A 15 14-48
7.6 5 02-43 7.13-A 16 14-48
7.6 6 02-43 7.13-A 17 14-48
7.6 7 02-43 7.13-A 18 14-48
7.13-A 19 14-48
7.7 1 14-04 7.13-A 20 14-48
7.7 2 14-04 7.13-A 21 14-48
7.13-A 22 14-48
7.8 1 02-43 7.13-A 23 14-48
7.8 2 02-43
7.8 3 02-43 7.13-B 1 14-48
7.8 4 02-43 7.13-B 2 14-48
7.8 5 02-43 7.13-B 3 14-48
7.8 6 02-43 7.13-B 4 14-48
7.13-B 5 14-48
7.9 1 02-43 7.13-B 6 14-48
7.9 2 02-43 7.13-B 7 14-48
7.9 3 02-43 7.13-B 8 14-48
7.9 4 02-43 7.13-B 9 14-48
7.9 5 02-43 7.13-B 10 14-48
7.9 6 08-26 7.13-B 11 14-48
7.13-B 12 14-48
7.10 1 02-43 7.13-B 13 14-48
7.10 2 02-43 7.13-B 14 14-48
EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
16-25 Page 2

7.13-B 15 14-48 8.1 1 06-06
7.13-B 16 14-48 8.1 2 02-20
7.13-B 17 14-48
7.13-B 18 14-48 8.2 1 06-06
7.13-B 19 14-48 8.2 2 06-06
7.13-B 20 14-48
7.13-B 21 14-48 8.3 1 06-06
7.13-B 22 14-48 8.3 2 08-26
8.3 3 06-06
7.13-C 1 14-48 8.3 4 06-06
7.13-C 2 14-48 8.3 5 06-06
7.13-C 3 14-48 8.3 6 06-06
7.13-C 4 14-48 8.3 7 06-06
7.13-C 5 14-48 8.3 8 06-06
7.13-C 6 14-48 8.3 9 06-06
7.13-C 7 14-48 8.3 10 06-06
7.13-C 8 14-48 8.3 11 06-06
7.13-C 9 14-48 8.3 12 06-06
7.13-C 10 14-48 8.3 13 06-06
7.13-C 11 14-48 8.3 14 10-40
7.13-C 12 14-48 8.3 15 10-40
7.13-C 13 14-48 8.3 16 06-06
7.13-C 14 14-48 8.3 17 06-06
7.13-C 15 14-48 8.3 18 06-06
7.13-C 16 14-48 8.3 19 06-06
7.13-C 17 14-48 8.3 20 06-06
7.13-C 18 14-48 8.3 21 06-06
7.13-C 19 14-48 8.3 22 06-06
7.13-C 20 14-48 8.3 23 06-06
7.13-C 21 14-48 8.3 24 06-06
7.13-C 22 14-48 8.3 25 08-26
7.13-C 23 14-48 8.3 26 06-06
7.13-C 24 14-48 8.3 27 06-06
7.13-C 25 14-48 8.3 28 06-06
8.3 29 13-44
7.14 1 08-26 8.3 30 08-26
7.14 2 02-43
7.14 3 02-43 9.0 P6 1 13-29
7.14 4 02-43 9.0 P6 2 16-25 R
7.15 1 02-43 9.1 1 06-06

7.15 2 02-43 9.1 2 09-23
7.15 3 02-43 9.1 3 09-23
7.15 4 02-43
7.15 5 02-43 9.20 1 13-44
7.15 6 02-43 9.20 2 13-44
9.20 3 13-29
8.0 P6 1 09-23
EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
16-25 Page 3

9.20 4 13-29 9.31 10 16-25 N
9.20 5 13-29 9.31 11 16-25 N
9.20 6 13-29 9.31 12 16-25 N
9.20 7 13-29 9.31 13 16-25 N
9.24 1 06-06 9.32 1 13-11

9.24 2 06-06 9.32 2 13-44
9.24 3 06-06 9.32 3 13-11
9.25 1 06-06 9.33 1 14-04

9.25 2 06-06 9.33 2 02-20
9.26 1 08-26 9.37 1 16-12

9.26 2 14-26 9.37 2 16-12
9.26 3 08-26 9.37 3 16-12
9.27 1 02-20 10.0 P6 1 08-26

9.27 2 02-20
9.27 3 02-20 10.1 1 02-20
9.27 4 02-20 10.1 2 02-20
9.27 5 09-23
9.27 6 09-23 10.2 1 06-06
9.27 7 09-23 10.2 2 06-06
9.27 8 14-15 10.2 3 06-06
9.27 9 14-15
10.3 1 08-26
9.28 1 13-11 10.3 2 08-26
9.28 2 13-11 10.3 3 08-26
10.3 4 08-26
9.29 1 13-11 10.3 5 08-26
9.29 2 13-11 10.3 6 08-26
9.29 3 13-11 10.3 7 08-26
9.29 4 13-11 10.3 8 08-26
10.3 9 08-26
9.30 1 13-51 10.3 10 08-26
9.30 2 13-51 10.3 11 08-26
9.30 3 13-11 10.3 12 08-26
10.3 13 08-26
9.31 1 16-25 N 10.3 14 08-26
9.31 2 16-25 N 10.3 15 08-26
9.31 3 16-25 N 10.3 16 08-26
9.31 4 16-25 N 10.3 17 08-26
9.31 5 16-25 N 10.3 18 08-26
9.31 6 16-25 N 10.3 19 08-26
9.31 7 16-25 N 10.3 20 08-26
9.31 8 16-25 N 10.3 21 08-26
9.31 9 16-25 N 10.3 22 08-26
EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
16-25 Page 4

10.3 23 08-26 10.4 1 06-06
10.3 24 08-26 10.4 2 06-06
10.3 25 08-26 10.4 3 06-06
10.3 26 08-26 10.4 4 06-06
10.3 27 08-26
10.3 28 08-26
10.3 29 08-26
10.3 30 08-26
10.3 31 08-26
10.3 32 08-26
LOG OF NORMAL REVISIONS
BASIC RFM REVISIONS

Title New ballast and customer request
Revised 0.0.P5, 0.0 p.2, 6.2 p.11, 7.3 p.27, 7.13 p.13, 8.3 p.29, 9.20 p.1 & 2, 9.26 p.2,
information 9.32 p.2
Deleted
None.
information
EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
16-25 Page 5
BASIC RFM REVISIONS (Cont'd)
Title New KANNAD AP INTEGRA Emergency Locator Transmitter

Revised
0.0.P5, 9.0.P6 page 2 and 9.30 pages 1 and 2
information
Deleted
None.
information
Main points:
- Incorporation of new brand "Airbus Helicopters" instead of "Eurocopter",
- Incorporation of MOD 07-39C75: new fuel management panel, new collective
Title
grip,
- Addition of Conditional Revision A (RC A): fuel management panel and
collective grip before MOD 07-39C75.
0.0.P1 page 1, 0.0.P3 page 1 *RC*, 0.0.P5 pages 1 to 5, 0.0 pages 1 and 2, 7.4
Revised
pages 2 and 8, 7.5 pages 3 and 5, 7.7 pages 1 and 2, 7.12 page 1, 7.13 page 5
information
and 9.33 page 1.
Deleted
None.
information
Update of list of modifications mentioned in the Flight Manual

Title Incorporation of MOD 07-31B74: replacement of CVFDR Honeywell by CVFDR
L3-Com
Revised
0.0.P5 pages 1 to 6, 0.0 page 1, 9.27 pages 8 & 9
information
Deleted
None.
information
Title Activation of deployable ELTs.
Revised
0.0.P5 pages 1 to 6, 9.26 page 2.
information
Deleted
None.
information
EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
16-25 Page 6
Incorporation of new Automatic Pilot software Section 7.13 is now in 3 versions,

Main points
according to AP software versions
Revised 0.0.P5 pages 1 to 6, 7.0.P6 page 1, 7.13-A pages 1 to 23, 7.13-B pages 1 to 22,
information 7.13-C pages 1 to 25
Deleted
None.
information
Main points Creation of section 9.37 "Camera VISION 1000"
Revised
0.0.P5 pages 1 to 6, 0.0 page 2; 9.0.P6 pages 2, 9.37 pages 1 to 3
information
Deleted
None.
information
Creation of section 9.31 "COMMUNICATION, RADIO NAVIGATION AND

Main points
NAVIGATION INSTALLATION WITH THE DUAL GTN 750H"
Revised
0.0.P5 pages 1 to 7, 9.0.P6 page 2, 9.31 pages 1 to 13
information
Deleted
None.
information
EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
16-25 Page 7
LIST OF MODIFICATIONS MENTIONED

IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL
This list includes all modifications that are or have been referenced to in the Flight Manual,
except TU modifications.
MODIFICATION SUBJECT FITTED

07-11B62 Tag for new procedure to eject windows
07-22B42 4-Axis autopilot installation
07-22B43 Provision for 4-Axis autopilot
07-22B47 Shelf modified for AHRS. Replacement of AHRS support platform
for 4-Axis AP and Category A certification
07-22B49 Category A barometric Vz APIRS
07-22B52 4-Axis autopilot modification, version N8 software
07-22B55 Improved reliability of autopilot at low temperatures
07-25C13 Flexible waterproof linings for cargo compartment
07-29B62 Connection of accumulator to LH rear main servo-control for 40C
07-29B64 S.A.S. 125-bar hydraulic manifold
07-39B78 CPDS software
07-39B79 Additional FCDS software for IFR compatibility
07-39B96 Incorporation of FAA requirements to circuit-breaker panels,
overhead panels and cargo compartment overheat alarm
07-39C01 Provisions for Category A 355 rpm rotor speed control
07-39C30 Inhibiting of servo-control seizure alarm (testable during ground
07-39C37 maintenance)
07-39C36 Cap protection on starting selector
07-52C08 Modification of attachment of top roller on sliding door fitting
07-53C20 Local modification of sliding door top rail
07-53C49 Closing of UPPER/MID REINFORCEMENT rails of rolling
assemblies
07-62C14 Upgraded coning stop flyweights
07-62C17 Increased torque tightness of MRH top fairing, colt weather
extension
07-62C32 Extending high wind envelope to 55 kt
07-63C22 MGB oil level
07-67B55 Flight control misalignment, Roll channel
07-67B62 Reduced collective low pitch range, -25C envelope
07-71B85 FADEC software modification, TU 50C
07-71B91 Adaptation, FADEC software engine control, TU 50C
07-71B95 Emergency back-up
07-71C09 Additional engine emergency control
07-71C14 ARRIEL 2C1 TU 98C FADEC software (Back-up)
07-71C16 FADEC software modification TU 93C
07-21B99 Improvement heating effectiveness
07-24C25 Suppression second spare battery
07-31B62 Evolutions UMS/HUMS
EC 155 B1
0.0
14-04 Page 1


Cargo compartment fire extinguishing and FADEC
OP-26B17
ventilation
OP-45C14 Electrical rear-view mirrors (Removable parts)
OP-45C15 Mechanical rear-view mirrors (Removable parts)
OP-54B31 Ballast
OP-62B80 Coning stops
OP-79B31 Engine oil particle burner
07-45C05 Emergency floatation gear installation
Improvement of automatic emergency floatation percussion
07-45C98
with CVFDR optional
07-45D04
without CVFDR optional
07-54B39 Ballast
EC155B1 standardization with new fuel management panel
07-39C75
and new collective grip.
07-31B74 Replacement of CVFDR Honeywell by CVFDR L3-Com
07-45D23 Substitution of cargo hook load indicator due to its
obsolescence
OP-31B86 Camera VISION 1000
EC 155 B1
0.0
16-12 Page 2
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
CONTENTS
6.1 GENERAL - DEFINITIONS PAGES
1. WEIGHTS - CONVENTIONAL TERMS ................................................................. 1
2. CENTRE-OF-GRAVITY - CONVENTIONAL TERMS ............................................ 2
3. WEIGHING ............................................................................................................ 3
4. CALCULATING LONGITUDINAL C.G. LOCATION ............................................... 6
6.2 LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF VARIABLE LOADS

1. CREW .................................................................................................................... 1
2. PASSENGERS ...................................................................................................... 2
3. TRANSPORT OF INTERNAL FREIGHT................................................................ 4
4. TRANSPORT OF SLUNG LOADS......................................................................... 5
5. TRANSPORT OF HOISTED LOADS ..................................................................... 6
6. FUEL...................................................................................................................... 7
7. WEIGHT AND LONGITUDINAL MOMENT OF EQUIPMENT ITEMS.................. 10
8. BALLAST ............................................................................................................. 11
6.3 LATERAL LOCATION OF VARIABLE LOADS

1. CREW .................................................................................................................... 1
2. PASSENGERS ...................................................................................................... 2
4. WEIGHT AND LATERAL MOMENT OF EQUIPMENT ITEMS .............................. 4
EC 155 B1
6.0.P6
10-40 Page 1
SECTION 6.1
GENERAL - DEFINITIONS
1 WEIGHT - CONVENTIONAL ITEMS

1.1 MAXIMUM WEIGHT
The maximum authorized weight for takeoff, as specified in Section 2 (or in the
Supplements) of this manual.
In no case shall the maximum weight be exceeded.
1.2 EMPTY WEIGHT (EW)

The total weight of :
the structure (rotors, fuselage, cowlings, landing gear, flight controls)
the power plant and transmission assemblies
the basic furnishings and systems that are an integral part of a particular aircraft
version
the fluids, contained in closed systems, required for normal operation of the
aircraft and systems
the non-drainable fuel
the drainable unusable fuel
1.3 EQUIPED EMPTY WEIGHT (EEW)

The sum of the aircraft empty weight (EW) plus the weight of the mission-related
equipment (standard or specific optional items, radio-navigation systems).
1.4 OPERATIONAL EMPTY WEIGHT (OEW)

The sum of equipped empty weight (OEW) plus the weight of the crew members.
1.5 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT (MTOW)

The sum of operational empty weight and useful load.
The useful load includes the payload and usable fuel.
The payload comprises revenue and nonrevenue loads.
EC 155 B1
6.1
02-20 Page 1
2 CENTRE OF GRAVITY - CONVENTIONAL TERMS

2.1 DFINITION OF THE DATUM TRIHEDRAL
The centre of gravity figures are dimensions measured perpendicularly to the faces
of the datum trihedral. The trihedral is formed by the following planes:
A horizontal plane, parallel to the cabin floor datum are located 3 m (118.1 in.)
above this datum. This is the Z datum plane. (The cabin floor datum is
materialized by the surface of the cabin floor).
A vertical plane perpendicular to the cabin floor datum. This is the Y datum plane,
the aircraft plane of symmetry, from which lateral c.g. dimensions are measured:
these dimensions are positive to the right of this plane (starboard) and negative to
the left (port).
A vertical plane, perpendicular to the two planes mentioned above, situated 4 m
(157.5 in) approx. forward of the centre of the main rotor head. This is the X
datum plane from which the longitudinal reference stations are measured.
2.2 C.G. LOCATION LIMITS

C.G. location limits are never to be exceeded (Refer to SECTION 2.2 para. 2 and the
"LIMITATIONS" paragraph of some Supplements).
CAUTION
A C.G. LOCATION WHICH IS CORRECT ON TAKEOFF MAY

CHANGE IN THE COURSE OF THE MISSION, DUE TO FUEL
WEIGHT REDUCTION OR LOADING VARIATION AND SO
EXCEED ACCEPTABLE LIMITS.
Longitudinal C.G. must be the more closely watched.

Lateral C.G. need be considered only in very dissymetric loading configurations.
EC 155 B1
6.1
10-40 Page 2
3 WEIGHING
Weighing is the only reliable way of obtaining:
Equipped empty weight (EEW)
Aircraft centre of gravity (CG) location.
The aircraft must be weighed:
On leaving the works
Following any major modification.
3.1 PRELIMINARY STEPS

The weighing operation must be carried out by avoiding the errors caused by the
wind.
Clean the aircraft carefully before weighing.
Should the weighing operation be used to determine C.G. location, level the aircraft
before weighing.
In principle, all equipment items included in the aircraft's empty weight must be
installed. Make an inventory of those equipment items and include it in the weighing
record.
All weighing instruments must be checked for correct "zero" setting before use. It is
important that the weighing instruments rest on suitable leveled ground for correct
measurement.
Unless otherwise specified, the fuels cells must be drained.
The quantities of oil and fuel remaining in the tanks, lines, etc...are called "residual",
and are normally included in the aircraft's empty weight.
The brakes must be released for jacking up the aircraft.
3.2 WEIGHING PROCEDURE

Aircraft weighing and C.G. location determination are as follow:
After the inventory has been made and the checks have been performed, level the
aircraft by means of the appropriate markings and using a clinometer, with the
landing gear off the ground.
Check that the fuel cells are drained.
The distances of the jacking points are defined by the manufacturer when the
aircraft is assembled on the jig.
Record the value of the weight measured at each jacking point.
Compute the moment by multiplying the weight value by the distance of the
corresponding jacking point.
Make the sum of the moments.
Divide the total moment by the weight to obtain the aircraft C.G. location.
EC 155 B1
6.1
10-40 Page 3
EC 155 B1
6.1
10-40 Page 4
INVENTORY AT TIME OF AIRCRAFT WEIGHING
MISCELLANEOUS RADIO COMMUNICATION

Aircraft tool kit.................................... RADIO NAVIGATION
First aid kit ......................................... AVIONICS
Flight Manual .....................................
Fire extinguisher ................................ VHF/AM ............................................
Storage net ........................................ UHF/AM ............................................
VHF/UHF/AM ....................................
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT VHF/UHF, AM/FM.............................
2nd landing light ................................ HF/SSB.............................................
Hover flight flood light ........................
LOCATOR searchlight ....................... ICS installation
SPECTROLAB light ........................... Headset ............................................
Illuminating flares............................... Recorder ...........................................
Blind flying screens............................ Emergency locator transmitter ..........
Tinted transparent panels ..................
De-iced transparent panels................ Encoding altimeter ............................
Ice detector........................................ Radio-altimeter .................................
Fuel warn-up system ......................... ADF...................................................
Air conditioner....................................
Baggage compartment ventilation ..... IFF ....................................................
Emergency floatation gear................. TACAN..............................................
Sand filters......................................... DME..................................................
Blade folding system ......................... VOR/ILS - GLIDE - MARKER ...........
Sling .................................................. HOMING system...............................
Hoist ..................................................
Drip tray ............................................. NADIR...............................................
Hailer installation ............................... DOPPLER radar ...............................
Ferry fuel tank.................................... Weather / navigation radar................
Auxiliary fuel tank .............................. GPS ..................................................
Pressure refueling system .................
Fuel flowmeter ................................... FLIR ..................................................
Fuel jettison system........................... Coupler .............................................
Crash-resistant fuel tank....................
Reinforced protection of main rotor
blades ................................................
Alternator ...........................................
"De luxe" trimming .............................
12-seat installation.............................
Ambulance duty installation ...............
Nose wheel castor lock......................
43-Ah battery .....................................
EC 155 B1
6.1
10-40 Page 5
4 CALCULATING LONGITUDINAL CG LOCATION

4.1 METHOD
The distance from the centre of gravity of the aircraft to the datum plane is found by
means of the following formula :
Sum of moments
= C.G. location
Sum of weights
Determine the equipped empty weight.
Referring to the tables of SECTION 6.2, note then totalize the weights and
moments.
Check that the total weight is lower than the maximum permissible takeoff weight.
Determine the C.G. location and check that is falls within permissible limits.
4.2 EXAMPLE OF CALCULATION

Weight C.G. location Moment
Equipped empty weight 2668 kg 4.11 m 10965.5 m.kg
Crew
1 pilot + 1 copilot 150 kg 258 m.kg
12-seat layout
4 passengers at front 320 kg 877 m.kg
4 passengers at middle 320 kg 1139 m.kg
4 passengers at rear 320 kg 1376 m.kg
Fuel (standard tanks)
Tank 1 (380 l) 300 kg 879 m.kg
Tank 2 (380 l) 300 kg 1428 m.kg
Load in cargo compartment 100 kg 553 m.kg
TOTAL : 4478 kg 17475.5 m.kg
17475.5
i.e. a CG location of = 3.90
4478
within the permissible limits. (Refer to SECTION 2.2).
EC 155 B1
6.1
10-40 Page 6
METRIC SYSTEM
WEIGHT MOMENT (m.kg)
(kg) D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
70 192 250 301 178 234 243 300
80 219 285 344 203 268 278 343
90 247 320 387 229 302 312 386
100 274 356 430 254 335 347 429
120 329 427 516 305 402 416 515
140 384 498 602 356 486 601
160 438 570 688 406 555 686
180 493 641 774 457 625 772
200 548 712 860 508 694 858
220 603 783 946 559 763 944
240 658 854 1032 610 833 1030
260 712 926 1118 660 902 1115
280 767 997 1204 711 972 1201
300 822 1068 1290 762 1041 1287
320 877 1139 1376 813 1110 1373
340 932 1210 1462 864 1180 1459
360 986 1282 1548 914 1249 1544
ANGLO SAXON SYSTEM

WEIGHT MOMENT (in.lb)
(lb) D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
150 16180 21024 25395 15030 19795 20485 25353
180 19417 25229 30474 18036 23755 24583 30424
200 21574 28032 33860 20040 26394 27314 33804
220 23731 30835 37246 22044 29033 30045 37184
260 28046 36442 44018 26052 34312 35508 43945
300 32361 42048 50790 30060 39591 40971 50706
350 37754 49056 59255 35070 47800 59157
400 43148 56064 67720 40080 54628 67608
440 47463 61670 74492 44088 60091 74369
490 52856 68678 82957 49098 66919 82820
530 57171 74285 89729 53106 72382 89581
570 61486 79891 96501 57114 77845 96341
620 66879 86899 104966 62124 84673 104792
660 71194 92506 111738 66132 90136 111553
700 75509 98112 118510 70140 95599 118314
750 80902 105120 126975 75150 102427 126765
800 86296 112128 135440 80160 109256 135216
EC 155 B1
6.2
02-20 Page 3
3 TRANSPORT OF INTERNAL FREIGHT
Figure 3: Internal freight
METRIC SYSTEM ANGLO SAXON SYSTEM
WEIGHT MOMENT (m.kg) WEIGHT MOMENT (in.lb)
(kg) B1 B2 B3 (lb) B1 B2 B3
50 120 192 276 100 9450 15120 21780
100 240 384 553 200 18900 30240 43560
150 360 576 829 300 28350 45360 65340
200 480 768 1106 400 37800 60480 87120
250 600 960 1382 500 47250 75600 108900
300 720 1152 1659 600 56700 90720 130680
350 840 1344 700 66150 105840
400 960 1536 800 75600 120960
450 1080 1728 900 85050 136080
500 1200 1920 1000 94500 151200
550 1320 2112 1100 103950 166320
600 1440 2304 1200 113400 181440
1323 125023 200038
Max. weight per sq.ft: refer to SECTION 2.7.
EC 155 B1
6.2
08-26 Page 4
6.3 FUEL IN CARGO HOLD TANK
Figure 7 : Fuel - Cargo hold tank
METRIC SYSTEM ANGLO-SAXON SYSTEM
QUANTITY MOMENT QUANTITY MOMENT
kg l (m.kg) lb US gal (in.lb)
50 63 320 100 15.2 24650

75 95 476 150 22.8 36975
100 127 630 200 30.3 49300
125 158 782 250 37.9 61625
142 180 885 313 47.5 77155
EC 155 B1
6.2
02-20 Page 9
7 WEIGHT AND LONGITUDINAL MOMENT OF EQUIPMENT

ITEMS
The following list covers the optional equipment items. It gives the approximate weight
and longitudinal moment of the removable components.
WEIGHT MOMENT
EQUIPMENT (kg) (lb) (m.kg) (in.lb)
HOIST COMPLETE WITH ARM 63 138.9 206.5 17932
- Hoist equiped 49 108
- Boom, strut, belt fairing 14 30.9
SX 16 WITH IR FILTER 41.9 92.4 104.4 9058
- Support and attachments 2.4 5.3
- SX 16 39.5 87.1
FLIR WESCAM 16DS-W 45.5 100.3 116.85 10140.5
- Support and attachment 5.5 12.1
- FLIR 40 88.2
SLING 19.85 43.8 80.8 7018.5
REAR-VIEW MIRROR 4.4 9.7 0.044 3.9
LOUD SPEAKER NAT 4.8 10.58 21 1827.2
FLIR FSI ULTRA 7000
- Console 55.3 121.91 168.67 14637.7
- Operator's seat 30.5 67.24 105.23 9133.2
- Turret with support 20.3 44.75 48.72 4228.4
- Video antenna 7.9 17.42 36.58 3175.3
LOUDSPEAKER 450 W (2x2) 10.9 24.03 45.5 3945
DRIP TUB 15 33.07 54.75 4752.2
FAST ROPING ARM ASSEMBLY (two arms) 39.2 86.42 164.6 14289.5
POLICE ANTENNEA 8 17.64 28.2 2444.6
TWO SINGLE-SEAT (back to back) 37.2 82.01 128.5 11151.7
2 TWO SEAT BENCH (Aft) 32.6 71.87 82.8 7187
2 TWO SEAT BENCH (Forward) 31.4 69.22 135 11718.3
1 LIFE RAFT 34 74.9 133.3 11534.6
SKI INSTALLATION 62 136.69 222.4 19303.4
- With standard cylinder 59.26 130.64 229.6 19922.6
- With carbon cylinder 54.06 119.18 212.8 18460.9
- Neutralization kit 5.14 11.33 22.4 1944.2
EC 155 B1
6.2
10-40 Page 10
WEIGHT MOMENT
VIP INSTALLATION
6 FISHER VIP SEATS
365 V82 0022
- Forward seats 47 103.6 137.71 11950.3
- Rear seats 46 101.4 189.98 16487.6
8 BALLAST
A removing ballast fitted inside the tail allows to adjust the center of gravity of the
helicopter of the current mission.

WEIGHT MOMENT WEIGHT MOMENT
BALLAST
(kg) (m.kg) (lb) (in.lb)
Removable
7.35 87.08 16.20 7555.95
support
After MOD
OP54B31
1.64 19.43 3.62 1688.43
One removable
plate (max. 13)
Before MOD
OP54B31
1.48 17.53 3.26 1520.52
One removable
plate (max. 16)
After MOD 07-54B39:

BALLAST
Removable
4.51 53.43 9.94 4636.18
support
One removable
1.64 19.43 3.62 1688.43
plate (max. 15)
One modified
removable plate 1.58 18.72 3.48 1623.13
(max. 1)
EC 155 B1
6.2
13-44 Page 11
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION AND SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
7.1 MAIN DIMENSIONS - OVERALL DIMENSIONS

7.2 COCKPIT
7.3 AVIONICS
7.4 POWER PLANT
7.5 FUEL SYSTEM
7.6 ROTORS AND TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLIES
7.7 FLIGHT CONTROLS
7.8 HYDRAULIC POWER SYSTEMS
7.9 ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS
7.10 AIR DATA SYSTEM
7.11 VENTILATION, HEATING AND DEMISTING
7.12 LIGHTING
7.13-A AUTOPILOT SOFT N8-37
7.13-B AUTOPILOT SOFT N9-72
7.13-C AUTOPILOT SOFT N9-72 OR N9-79 (WITH HOV MODE)
7.14 LANDING GEAR
7.15 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
EC 155 B1
7.0.P6
14-48 Page 1
Figure 2: FCDS architecture
EC 155 B1
7.3
02-43 Page 3
2.2 CONTROLS
2.2.1 Instrument control panel
Figure 2: Instrument control panel
EC 155 B1
7.3
08-26 Page 4
RADIO-HEIGHT ZERO
Accordingly with the radio-height, the brown zone gives information of the actual
ground position on the baro altimeter.
BARO SETTING
The baro setting correction is displayed between 750 and 1050 hPa with an
increment of 1 hPa. The unit (hPa) blinks during evolution of the baro setting. If
the pilot requires a standard setting (1013.25 hPa) by pushing the STD control
on the ICP, the message "STD" is displayed in place of the digital value.
DH FLAG/UPPER LIMIT (optional) FLAG
DH flag: this symbol associated to an audio alarm warns the pilot when the
radio-height is smaller than the decision height. If decision height is reset to
zero, the DH flag is suppressed (in order to avoid the alarm on ground, before
the taking off). It blinks ten seconds and then remains steadily. It disappears as
soon as the radio-height is above the decision height value.
UL flag (optional): this symbol associated to an audio alarm warns the pilot
when the radio-height is higher than the upper limit. It blinks ten seconds and
then remains steadily. It disappears as soon as the radio-height is lower than
the upper limit value.
RADIO-HEIGHT
A digital copy of radio-height (the main data is displayed on the ND) is displayed
on the PFD with the following rules:
- Radio-height < 500 ft ------> Information always displayed
- Radio-height > 500 ft:
- Radio-height < decision height + 500 ft ------> information displayed
- Radio-height > decision height + 500 ft ------> information not displayed
And with the following increment:
- 1 ft by 1ft for radio-height < 30 ft
- 5 ft by 5 ft for radio-height < 300 ft
- 25 ft by 25 ft for radio-height > 300 ft
AIRSPEED
The airspeed is displayed between 20 and 300 kt with a graduation every 5 kt.
A digital value is associated to the graduation every 20 kt. If the airspeed is
lower than 20 kt, nor precise graduation neither digital value are given.
VNE LIMIT
Both VNE with and without power are computed and displayed at the same
time.
AIRSPEED TREND
This indicator gives the airspeed foreseen to be reached after 5 seconds if the
acceleration remains constant.
EC 155 B1
7.3
08-26 Page 7
2.3.2 PFD AFCS status
Figure 5 - PFD: AFCS status symbology

x The displayed reference bug can be moved by the beep trim or by the control
box. When the change occurs the bug is blinking in white and engaged mode is
underlined white blinking.
x When a mode is engaged or disengaged, or in case of color change, a flashing
box is displayed around the related mode for 10 s.
EC 155 B1
7.3
02-43 Page 8
3.4 CAD
Figure 19 - CAD: CAU/FUEL pages
NOTE
In the event of failure of both VEMD screen,
the N1 page replace the FUEL page.
The quantity of fuel available in a fuel tank group is displayed in two forms:
. A blue band the height of which is proportional to the quantity of fuel present in the
fuel tank. The right group indicator is longer than the left one because it holds more
fuel.
. A figure which indicates the percentage of fuel in the group (percentage of 1000 kg).
The endurance is calculated from the fuel flow rate and the remaining fuel quantity
available. This time is displayed in hour(s) and minute(s).
The horizontal band graph is shown when the additional 180-liter fuel tank is installed.
The arrows flash when the solenoid valve is energized.
The "FUEL" message, comes into view when any of the following sensors in the engine
compartment trips:
. PRS 1 and/or 2 (light on the Fuel Management Panel comes on).
. FILT 1 and/or 2 (light on the Fuel Management panel comes on).
EC 155 B1
7.3
13-44 Page 27
3.4.1 CAU page

This page displays all amber warnings and the advisories for the helicopter in 3
columns (Left warnings, miscellaneous advisories, Right warnings).
The amber warnings are displayed from the top to the bottom of the page while
the advisories are displayed in green in the center column, below the amber
messages.
3.4.1.1 START mode
The following procedure is automatically done, but is inhibited in case of CPDS
power on in flight. During the power on phase of the system, the CPDS checks
the availability of some cautions. If some cautions are failed or if a subsystem is
detected as failed during this phase a caution linked to this event will be
displayed. Under normal conditions, because the engines are not started or
because external power unit is linked to the helicopter, some cautions are
normally active. According to a specific list, this cautions are automatically
acknowledged. If one of them is missing a white message INP FAIL is
activated on the CAD.
3.4.1.2 CAUTION display
When one or more cautions are displayed :
. All alarms already acknowledged are cleared, leaving the three columns
blank.
. The new cautions are displayed in their respective columns.
. Two thick yellow line blink on top and at the bottom of the screen.
. Cautions are displayed in the order of occurrence.
. If a fault disappears, the corresponding caution is cleared after 5 s and the
warnings displayed underneath are moved up one line.
. The crew Acknowledge the warnings by pressing a button on cyclic stick or
on CAD (CAD SELECT key, VEMD SELECT key if the CAD is not available
and VEMD presents caution back up page).
. Once the warnings are acknowledged, they are classified by order of their
arrival in their respective columns.
. The blinking lines disappear.
. When the column is full, a 1 OF 2 message appears on top the middle
column, indicating that a second page has been started.
EC 155 B1
7.3
02-43 Page 28
SECTION 7.4
POWER PLANT
1 DESCRIPTION
The helicopter is fitted with two TURBOMECA ARRIEL 2C2 free turbines, places side
by side, aft of the MGB.
2 MINIMUM PERFORMANCE DATA

2.1 SERVICE RATINGS (TEST BENCH ENGINE)
POWER (KW)
RATING MAXIMUM TIME
HP = 0 ISA
30-second OEI 30s 789
2-minute OEI 2 min 714
Continuous OEI Unlimited 688
Take-off 5 min 697
Maximum continuous Unlimited 636
EC 155 B1
7.4
08-26 Page 1
3 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

3.1 OVERHEAD PANEL
Figure 1: Overhead panel
3.2 COLLECTIVE PITCH LEVER HANDLE
Figure 2: Collective pitch lever handle

EC 155 B1
7.4
14-04 Page 2
RCA
3.1 OVERHEAD PANEL
EC 155 B1
7.4
14-04 Page 2
*RC*
4 ENGINE OIL SYSTEM
Figure 10: Engine oil system
EC 155 B1
7.4
02-43 Page 7
5 ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM
Figure 11: Engine fuel system
EC 155 B1
7.4
14-04 Page 8
RCA
FUEL SYSTEM
(See section 7.5)
EC 155 B1
7.4
14-04 Page 8
*RC*
RCA
2.1 FUEL MANAGEMENT PANEL
Figure 2: Fuel Management Panel
2.2 CAUTION ADVISORY PANEL
Figure 3: Caution Advisory Panel
EC 155 B1
7.5
14-04 Page 3
*RC*

EC 155 B1
7.5
14-04 Page 3
2.3 CAD (CAU + FUEL)
Figure 4: CAD (CAU + FUEL)
NOTE
In the event of a CAD display failure:
The quantities of fuel remaining in the fuel tanks are displayed on the VEMD.
The fuel pressure values are no longer displayed.
EC 155 B1
7.5
02-43 Page 4
RCA
3 FUEL SYSTEM
Figure 5: Fuel system
EC 155 B1
7.5
14-04 Page 5
*RC*
3 FUEL SYSTEM
EC 155 B1
7.5
14-04 Page 5
SECTION 7.7
FLIGHT CONTROLS
1 GENERAL
The flight controls comprise:
- Two cyclic pitch control sticks controlling the inclination of the swash plates.
- Two collective pitch levers controlling the vertical displacement of the swash plates.
- Two pairs of pedals controlling the angle of attack of the fenestron blades. The
pedals also feature assisted differential brakes acting on the main landing gear
wheels.
- The pedal assembly is adjustable to the pilot's size.
2 CONTROLS ON CYCLIC PITCH STICK GRIP
1 Spare 7 SAS mode ON

2 Spare 8 ICS Push To Talk button
3 Cargo sling release (if fitted) 9 Caution aknowledge
4 AFCS mode OFF or SAS 10 Upper modes release
5 Spare 11 Trim release
6 Automatic Pilot beep trim
EC 155 B1
7.7
14-04 Page 1
3 CONTROLS ON COLLECTIVE PITCH LEVER GRIP
1 Spare 7 Emergency Floatation (if fitted)

2 Hoist cable cutter (if fitted) 8 OEI HI/LO
3 Landing light On / Off / Retract 9 Collective Trim release
4 Landing light controls 10 OEI CONT
5 Collective beep trim 11 Windshield wiper
6 Spare 12 Go-Around
The ramp of the collective pitch lever is fitted with:

- A friction locking device.
EC 155 B1
7.7
14-04 Page 2
RCA

6 Emergency Floatation

EC 155 B1
7.7
14-04 Page 2
*RC*
3.3 INDICATORS
The red alarm appears on the Caution advisory panel.
- The red "BAT TEMP" light comes on when the battery temperature reaches 71 C
2.8 C.
The failure messages are shown on the CAD:
- BAT" message:
This message appears in the center column when the battery is not charging.
- "ESS BUS" message:
This message appears in the center column when at least one of the two essential
bus bars is not powered.
- "GEN" message:
This message appears in the right or left column when the corresponding
generator has not cut into the power system.
- "BUS TIE" message:
This message appears in the center column when the left and/or the right power
systems is/are no longer coupled to the "BUS TIE".
The measurement values and messages are shown on the VEMD.

- The "SELECT button of the VEMD is used to select the source to be measured
and the + and - keys are used to select the display of this source sequentially.
The possible choices are:
. "GEN 1".
. "GEN 2".
. "SELECTOR".
A current flow and a voltage value appear under the messages.
- When the "SELECTOR" message is shown, the current flow and the voltage
displayed are those of the source selected on overhead panel. ("BAT" or "GEN1"
or "GEN2").
EC 155 B1
7.9
02-43 Page 5
4 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELS
Figure 4: Circuit Breaker Panels 3 Alpha, 4 Alpha and 5 Alpha
EC 155 B1
7.9
08-26 Page 6
SECTION 7.12
LIGHTING
1 EXTERNAL LIGHTS
The external lighting systems provide power to:
Position Lights
- The green light is on the right side of the helicopter.
- The red light is on the left side of the helicopter.
- The white light is in the center of the tail cone.
The POS LTS switch on the overhead panel controls these lights.
Anti-collision and Strobe lights
- The anti-collision light is installed on the tip of the fin (on the tip fairing).
- The strobe light (if fitted) is installed under the bottom structure.
Both are controlled with the "ANTI COL" selector on the overhead panel.
"ANTI COL" Conventional LED anti-collision
Strobe light
selector position anti-collision light light
OFF Off Off Off
WHT Flashing white Flashing red/white Flashing white
RED Flashing red Flashing red Off
Landing Lights
- A retractable, swiveling landing light.
- A second optional retractable, swiveling landing light.
The two landing lights are mounted at the front on the lower left and right fairings
under the cockpit floor.
The landing lights controls consist of:
- A SRCH LTS selector on overhead panel
- A three-position switch and a four-position switch, located on the pilot's and
copilot's collective lever grips.
EC 155 B1
7.12
14-04 Page 1
2 INTERNAL LIGHTS
2.1 INSTRUMENT AND ZONE LIGHTING
All the instruments and control panels, including the circuit-breaker panels, are
lighted.
The following controls are located on then overhead panel:
A master lighting switch "LIGHTING",
Four potentiometers to adjust the lighting brightness of:
- The copilot's instrument panel by the "PNL.CPLT" potentiometer,
- The overhead panel and the console by two concentric potentiometers
"O.HEAD" and "CONSOLE" respectively,
- The pilot's instrument panel by the "PNL.PLT" potentiometer.
2.2 CREW LIGHTING

Each the crew member has at his disposal a portable utility light that is mounted on
the cabin ceiling. Both the utility lights are located on the cabin overhead panel, one
on the right and one on the left.
The portable utility lights are powered directly by the battery. They can be used with
the emergency lighting system. Red or white light can be selected by pivoting a filter.
An integrated potentiometer is used to switch on the utility lights and to adjust their
brightness.
2.3 CABIN LIGHTING

The cabin dome light is fitted with three bulbs and it lights the forward row of seats. It
is controlled by means of an ON / OFF switch on the overhead panel. An
emergency battery power supply automatically lights the dome light.
Two sets of five fluorescent tubes complete the lighting provided by the dome light
and ensure the lighting of the aft seats. The cabin dome light control switch is used to
switch on the fluorescent tubes.
2.4 LIGHTED SIGNS PANEL

The lighted signs panel is located above the forward seats and is fitted with nine
bulbs. A switch that is located on the overhead panel controls the lighted signs.
NOTE
Should the normal on-board power system fail, all the cabin lighting and the lighted
signs are powered by a standby battery.
EC 155 B1
7.12
02-43 Page 2
2.5 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHTING

The cargo compartment is lighted by a dome light which is turned on manually by
means of a switch in the doorframe and turned off automatically when closing the
door (or manually before closing the door).
2.6 STORM LIGHT (IF FITTED)

A floodlight located at the upper part of the center aisle and controlled by means of
the STORM LT switch illuminates one section of the instrument panel to reduce the
contrast due to the flashes of lightning.
2.7 HELICOPTER EMERGENCY EGRESS LIGHTING H.E.E.L (If installed)

The H.E.E.L makes it easier to locate the emergency exits and cockpit door jettison
handles in the event of ditching, a crash landing or failure of the direct current
electrical power system.
- The main system, supplies 17 window lights and 6 jettison handle lights.
- The power supply units are connected to the flight data recorder inertia and
immersion sensors
- The H.E.E.L. is controlled by the EMER LT switch located on the overhead panel.
OFF : inhibits any activation of the H.E.E.L
ARMED : the system is activated automatically in the

event of immersion, a crash landing or failure of
the dc electrical power system.
ON : activates the H.E.E.L
- The sliding door window H.E.E.L. is supplied by:

the main system for the front and upper lights
the battery and stand-alone converter, not recharged by the aircraft electrical
power system, for the rear and lower lights
- These lights come on automatically, only in the event of immersion.
- This system is autonomous for 20 minutes at a depth of 50 ft.
- The H.E.E.L must be checked daily, before the first flight, by moving the switch to
the test position.
NOTE
The sliding door emergency exit lighting is autonomous and can be
activated only by immersion detection.
EC 155 B1
7.12
08-26 Page 3
SECTION 7.13 - A
AUTOPILOT (Soft N8-37)
1 GENERAL
The autopilot is designed to provide attitude hold, turn co-ordination and upper modes.
It allows the pilot full fly-through capability.
Several functions of the autopilot are subject to the version of software which is
installed. The main differences are listed in the following table:
FUNCTIONS Before MOD 22B55 After MOD 22B55
OAT envelope Above 15C Above 40C
Improvement of yaw Trim
check during AP test ( Not available Available
blinking)
Above 80 ft (Radio height)
Power management in automatic reduction of
Not available
basic stabilization power when authorized
limit is exceeded
Available on ground by
pressing the upper mode
Stick re-centering function Not available
disengagement button on
cyclic stick more than 1s

The AP includes the following components:
An APM 2000 (Automatic Pilot Module) which acquires data, then computes and
transmits the correcting signals to the actuators,
An APMS (Automatic Pilot Mode Selector) used to engage of the various modes,
A CYCLIC TRIM FEEL and a COLLECTIVE TRIM FEEL selector (ON/OFF
control), on overhead panel, used to release cyclic or collective force trim,
A SEMA actuator (Smart Electro-Mechanical-type flight control Actuator) in the yaw
axis,
A SEMA actuator in the pitch axis contributing also to the collective axis,
Two SEMA actuators in the roll axis contributing also to the collective axis,
A trim actuator in pitch, roll, yaw and collective axes,
Yaw pedal position transmitters,
Collective stick position transmitters.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 1
1.2 OVERALL SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
Figure 1: Auto Pilot general block diagram.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 2
1.3 COMMANDS
Figure 2: APMS
AP Push-button Engages and disengages the automatic pilot.

OFF AP disengaged
AP engaged
A.TRIM push-buttons Engage and disengage the yaw and cyclic auto-
trim functions.
OFF Auto-trim disengaged
Auto-trim engaged
TEST push-button Engages the AP Pre-flight test.

ON Flashing during the test
ALT.A knob Offers the possibility of adjusting pre-selected

altitude. Press this knob and the ALTITUDE
ACQUISITION mode engages. The green
engagement indicator light for this function
comes on.
NAV push-button Arms / engages and disengages NAV (FMS)
and VOR modes.
A mode armed
C mode captured
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 3
HDG knob Used to change the heading. Press this knob

and the heading mode navigation is engaged.
The green engagement indicator light for this
function comes on.
APP push-button Arms / engages and disengages the localizer
(LOC) and VOR Approach modes.
A mode armed
C mode captured.
CR.HT knob Offers the possibility of adjusting a flying height.

Press this knob and the CRUISE HEIGHT
mode engages. The green engagement
indicator light for this function comes on.
BC push-button Disabled.
GS push-button Engages and disengages the GLIDE SLOPE

mode.
A mode armed
C mode captured.
VS push-button Engages and disengages the Vertical Speed

mode.
A VS armed.
C VS captured
IAS push-button Engages and disengages the Airspeed hold

navigation mode.
IAS engaged
ALT push-button Engages and disengages the Altitude hold

navigation mode.
ALT engaged
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 4
RCA
CYCLIC STICK COLLECTIVE PITCH

Figure 3: Cyclic and collective
SAS push-button. Allows the engagement of the back-up SAS when AP is off
CYCLIC BEEP TRIM With no upper mode engaged:
- attitude reference change on pitch or roll axis
With upper modes engaged:
- Up: increase IAS / Down: decrease IAS.
- Heading left / Heading right.
CYCLIC TRIM RELEASE Allows the temporarily declutching of the trim actuators
from the cyclic axes.
UPPER MODE-OFF Allows the rapid disengagement of all engaged upper
modes.
SAS/AFCS fast cut-off Disengages either AFCS or back-up SAS.
COLLECTIVE BEEP TRIM Control the collective beep trim.
With vertical upper mode engaged: Forward down,
Backward up
GO-AROUND Engages and disengages the Go-Around mode.
COLLECTIVE RELEASE Controls the collective trim release.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 5
*RC*
SAS push-button. Allows the engagement of the back-up SAS when AP is

off.
CYCLIC TRIM RELEASE Allows the temporary declutching of the trim actuators
modes
COLLECTIVE BEEP TRIM Controls the collective beep trim.
Backward up
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 5
CYCLIC
TRIM FEEL
COLLECTIVE
TRIM FEEL
AP RESET
SAS RESET
1.4 ANNUNCIATION
1.4.1 Upper Modes
On PFD Mode On control box
IAS ALT HDG VS
XXX + on relevant scale CR.HT
or
XXX + on relevant scale NAV VOR VOR A LOC

GS active

XXX NAV VOR VOR A LOC
GS armed
VS + on VS scale ALT.A
ALT A
GA GA + GA
on
then relevant Then after 10s
scale
VS IAS + VS and IAS
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 6
NOTE
On PFD, upper modes are displayed in the column corresponding
to the controlled axis:
Left side = Collective
Middle = Roll/Yaw
Right side = Pitch
1.4.2 Specific Display
Colors Definition
Immediate pilot attention or manual recovery
RED required.
Blinking: AP mode not able to perform its
intended function and about to disengage,
AMBER Blinking amber-green: pilot override action
detected.
Upper modes engaged or captured, not
GREEN requiring pilot attention.
Blinking: AP mode about to automatically
CYAN disarm,
Steady: armed AP mode.
XXX Box is displayed for 10 s

Mode lost in a non-critical phase.
and then disappears
(Flashing)
Engaged mode degraded.
Changing the reference value
Excessive deviation.
Warning or disengagement with

Flashes for 10 s, then MANDATORY manual control recovery.
CR.HT engaged and deviation over

FLY-UP
excessive threshold.
NOTE
Every mode or color change is associated with an attention getting rectangle

for 10 s.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 7
2 OPERATING MODES
2.1 BASIC STABILIZATION
By default, the AP performs an attitude hold on pitch and roll axes and either heading
hold or turn coordination on yaw axis.
The natural cross coupling existing between the helicopter axes is automatically
corrected. When the AP is disengaged:
"AP" on APMS + OFF OFF OFF on PFD
2.1.1 Long term attitude hold (ATT)

The ATT mode is engaged by default following AP engagement. The AP reverts to
ATT mode after upper modes disengagement.
Several fly-through modes are available:
- Hover follow-up: When in the hover (i.e. below 30 kt with a hysteresis up to 40
kt), a longitudinal or lateral pilot action against the spring induces an attitude
reference synchronization to the current attitude together with a follow-up trim
command. During maneuvers above 2 deg/s the trim follow-up is momentarily
stopped.
- Beep-trim: Using the 4-way switch located on the cyclic grip, the pilot can
change attitude reference on pitch (beep speed 2 deg/s) and roll axis (beep
speed 4 deg/s).
- Override against the spring loads (IAS > 40kt): The pilot can override the hold
functions. The trim actuators control is automatically disabled and the AP
automatically commutes into a hands-on dedicated mode called CSAS, on the
relevant axis. After fly-through action, the helicopter returns to the original
attitude.
- Stick + beep: the pilot uses the 4-way switch located on the cyclic grip, and
simultaneously overrides the spring loads. The attitude reference slowly joins the
current attitude. The trim is commanded to follow-up the stick.
- Trim release: When the pilot presses the Force Trim Release pushbutton
located on the cyclic grip, cyclic trim actuators are declutched (efforts are
cancelled) and the AP switches into CSAS mode. After fly-through action, the AP
holds the new pitch and roll attitude references.
When above the IGE radar height (typically 30 ft), the collective trim is commanded
to decrease the power to the power limit.
2.1.2 Stability Augmentation Sub-mode (digital SAS)
When the auto-trim function is deactivated the AP reverts to the Sub-mode (digital
SAS): it provides stability augmentation on pitch and roll axes using series
actuators while the yaw axis remains unaffected. For training purpose this mode
can be engaged by the pilot by pressing the "CYC" A.TRIM push-button located on
APMS.
"CYC" on APMS + TRIM on CAD + R SPS on PFD
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 8
2.1.3 SAS
In case of AP failure, pilot engages the SAS mode (cyclic SAS pushbutton)
iSASi. It provides augmentation stability on roll and yaw axis via FOG.
2.2 LATERAL UPPER MODES
2.2.1 General
- For all lateral modes, except HDG, engagement is inhibited below 35 kt.
- For HDG, engagement is inhibited below 26 kt.
- For all lateral modes, engagement is inhibited when aircraft is on ground.
2.2.2 Heading select (HDG)
The HDG mode maintains the current heading upon engagement or acquires
and holds a pre-selected heading.
The HDG mode is engaged/disengaged by pressing the HDG rotary knob on
APMS.
When the HDG mode is engaged iHDGi label is displayed on AFCS strip.
Conditions that force the HDG mode disengagement:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
- loss of roll axis (loss of cyclic auto-trim or cyclic trim feel permanent release),
- upper modes disengagement via coupler release push-button on either cyclic
grip,
- complete loss of heading for at least 30 s,
- anomaly detected by the monitoring of the data sent to the FDS for display to
the pilot,
- Upon action on the rotary button when HDG is engaged, the mode
commands a turn in the direction of the button rotation, even if heading
difference happens to exceed 180 degrees,
- Maximum bank angle corresponds to the standard rate of turn limited to 21.
The engagement of the NAV, VOR or LOC modes disengages the HDG mode.
2.2.3 VOR navigation mode (VOR)
The VOR mode acquires and holds a pre-selected VOR course. Coupling can
be done on ND display type.
To arm or engage VOR interception and hold:
- Select appropriate VOR frequency,
- Set the master navigation source to "VOR #",
- Select the desired VOR radial through the CRS button on ICP,
- Adopt a heading compatible with the interception,
- Press the "NAV" push-button on the APMS.
It presents four possible different phases:
- armament when the VOR deviation is valid but too large, the pilot has to
select a heading that will enable the aircraft to intercept the desired VOR
course within a recommended range of 90 degrees,
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 9
- depending on the deviation closing rate, the mode will first align the aircraft
(capture phase), and then, again depending on the closing rate, will
complete the alignment on the selected course (tracking phase),
- loss of bearing validity or rapid deviation change: the VOR reception can
be lost for significant periods of time; also when flying above the VOR
beacon, the VOR bearing exhibits fast and large amplitude variations.
Therefore, upon detection of this phenomenon for at least 10 s, the mode
holds a heading that aligns the aircrafts ground speed on the course, until
the VOR signal is stabilized with a confirmation time of 10 s and resumes
the tracking. During that phase iiVORii label is displayed on AFCS strip.
a) Armament/disarmament
On ND display once the navigation source is set to the VOR/ILS and tuned
to the frequency of the relevant beacon, the mode is armed/disarmed by
pressing the NAV pushbutton on APMS if the capture conditions are not
satisfied:
- iVORi label is displayed on the armament line of the AFCS strip.
Conditions that force the VOR mode disarmament:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
- loss of roll axis (loss of cyclic auto-trim or roll trim failure or cyclic trim
feel permanent release),
- upper modes disengagement via coupler release push-button on either
cyclic grip,
- navigation source change for at least 30 s,
- loss of VOR bearing for at least 60 s,
- change of VOR/ILS receiver frequency for at least 30 s,
- anomaly detected by the monitoring of the data sent to the FDS for
display to the pilot.
The engagement of the GA mode disarms the VOR mode.
b) Engagement/disengagement
to the frequency of the relevant beacon, the mode is engaged/disengaged
by pressing the NAV pushbutton on APMS if the capture or tracking
conditions are satisfied. If previously armed, the mode automatically
engages in the same conditions:
- iVORi label is displayed on AFCS strip.
Conditions that force the VOR mode disengagement:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 10

The engagement of the HDG, NAV or GA modes disengages the VOR
mode.
NOTE 1
It is possible to align the helicopter on the selected radial before engaging
the mode. When this is done, the helicopter passes directly into the
captured VOR mode.
NOTE 2
In case of signal alteration (i.e.: proximity of the station). The VOR
annunciation revert to amber. The flight control law changes, the helicopter
will follow the heading corresponding to the course set corrected by the
computed drift.
2.2.4 VOR A Mode

To arm or engage VOR A interception and hold:
Select appropriate VOR frequency,
Set the master navigation source to VOR # ,
Select the desired VOR radial through the CRS button on ICP,
Adopt a heading compatible with the interception of the radial,
Press the APP push-button on the APMS.
1st case: Course Deviation greater than 30.

When the lateral deviation drops below 2 dots (one dot represents 5), the VOR A
mode automatically switches to capture phase.
The HDG mode disappears (if it was active).
The helicopter turns to adopt a 30 interception heading until the lateral deviation
detected is less than 0.8 dot.
The mode then aligns on the selected radial.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 11
2nd case: Course Deviation less than 30.

The capture starts when the lateral deviation drops below 0.8 dot.
NOTE 1
the mode. When this is done, the helicopter switches directly to the
captured VOR A mode.
NOTE 2
In case of signal alteration (i.e.: proximity of the station). The VOR A
annunciation reverts to amber. The flight control law changes, the helicopter
computed drift.
2.2.5 Navigation mode (NAV)

The NAV mode enables the helicopter to follow a selected path via a
commanded roll attitude output from a navigation management system
(NMS).
To arm or engage NAV interception and hold:
- Set the master navigation source to NMS,
- Check NMS active route,
- Press the "NAV" push-button on the APMS,
- iNAVi label is displayed on AFCS strip.
Conditions that force the NAV mode disengagement:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
- loss of roll axis (loss of cyclic auto-trim or cyclic trim feel permanent
release),
cyclic grip,
- loss of commanded roll attitude for at least 30 s,
- navigation source selection different from NAV for at least 30 s,
The engagement of the HDG or GA modes disengages the NAV mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 12
2.2.6 Localizer mode (LOC)
The LOC mode aligns the aircraft along a localizer signal in order to make
an ILS approach to an airport. Coupling can be done on ND HSI mode.
To arm or engage LOC interception and hold:
- Select appropriate ILS frequency,
- Set the navigation source on ILS,
- Select the runway approach axis on the ND,
- Determine and set the interception heading,
- Press the "APP" push-button on the APMS.
NOTE
The modes currently in operation continue to control the flight until the
capture of the localizer is initialized.
It presents two possible phases:

- Armament, when the LOC deviation is valid but too large, the pilot has to
select a heading that will enable the aircraft to intercept the preset LOC
course,
- Capture, to allow any capture, the localizer deviation must be valid and
lower than 2.5 dots for at least 2 s. Then if the heading difference with
respect to the selected course is higher than 25 degrees the mode aligns
the aircraft on the localizer beam if the LOC deviation is below 2.1 dots. If
the heading difference is less than 25 degrees then the capture occurs at
1 dot.
Figure 6: LOC mode.
NOTE 1
For low angles of interception (lower than 25 degrees), capture condition
is 1 dot. However a maximum time of 30 s is introduced when the mode
is armed and the deviation below 2.1 dots to capture the localizer even if
the deviation still exceeds 1 dot.
NOTE 2
Arming the LOC will automatically arm the G/S mode (refer to paragraph
2.3.5 for G/S mode description).
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 13
On ND display, once the selected VOR/ILS receiver is tuned to a LOC
frequency, the mode is armed/disarmed by pressing the NAV push-
button on APMS if the capture conditions are not satisfied.
- iLOCi label is displayed on AFCS strip.
Conditions that force the LOC mode disarmament:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
- upper modes disengagement via coupler release push-button on
either cyclic grip,
- change of ILS frequency for at least 30 s,
- loss of LOC signal for at least 10 s,
Conditions that inhibit the LOC mode armament:
- aircraft on the ground,
- airspeed below 35 kt.
The engagement of the GA mode disarms the LOC mode.
On ND display once the navigation source is set to the VOR/ILS,
regardless of VOR/ILS receiver selected, and tuned to the frequency of
the relevant beacon, the mode is engaged/disengaged by pressing the
NAV pushbutton on APMS if the capture conditions are satisfied. If
previously armed the mode automatically engages in the same
conditions:
- iLOCi label is displayed on the AFCS strip.
Conditions that force the LOC mode disengagement:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
The engagement of the HDG, NAV or GA mode disengages the LOC
mode
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 14
2.3 VERTICAL AND LONGITUDINAL UPPER MODES
2.3.1 General
- In three axes coupled mode (ALT or VS):
. VNE cannot be exceeded.
. In case of insufficient collective pitch to meet the vertical mode reference,
helicopter speed decreases and if the 60 kt threshold is crossed, IAS
mode will self-engage shifting the vertical mode to the collective axis.
. In case of engine failure with a vertical mode engaged, an automatic
reversion to 4 axis is done.
- When both IAS and a vertical mode are held, or in CR.HT (with or without
IAS engaged) the following priorities apply, if the required power is more than
the available power:
. the power is maintained at maximum according to the figure below,
AEO OEI
FLI FLI
TOP 30 s
MCP continuous
IAS(kt) IAS(kt)
25 40 30 40
. vertical mode reference is held for airspeeds over Vy,

. below Vy present airspeed is maintained.
- During descent or deceleration, the minimum torque obtained is 2 x 5% in
AEO or 10% in OEI.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 15
2.3.2 Altitude hold (ALT)

The ALT mode maintains the current barometric altitude upon engagement:
- below 60 kt the altitude is controlled through collective axis, however the
mode shifts to the pitch axis if the airspeed exceeds 65 kt for at least 5 s,
- above 60 kt, the altitude is controlled through cyclic axis (3 axes
operation), or through collective axis when IAS is engaged (4 axes
operation),
- adjustment of altitude reference is always obtained through the trim
located on collective stick,
- altitude reference cannot be beeped below an altitude figure
corresponding to a radio height of 30 ft,
- during acquisition of the new reference, upon beep action the aircrafts
commanded vertical speed is limited to 500 ft/min.
NOTE
ALT engagement with a high vertical speed will result in an overshoot,
and possibility in excessive deviation annunciation.
When the ALT mode is engaged, iALTi label is displayed on AFCS strip.
Action/events to engage the ALT mode:
- pressing on the ALT pushbutton on APMS,
- reversion from the ALT.A mode to the ALT mode when the final
reference becomes visible on the altitude scale or near the ground (if R/A
is available),
- reversion from the VS mode to the ALT mode near the ground (if R/A is
available),
- reversion from the G/S mode to the ALT mode near the ground (if R/A is
available).
Conditions that force the ALT mode disengagement:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
- loss of pitch axis (loss of cyclic auto-trim or cyclic trim feel permanent
release) and loss of collective axis (loss of any cyclic series actuator or
collective trim failure or collective trim feel permanent release),
cyclic grip,
- complete loss of barometric altitude for at least 10 s,
- complete loss of airspeed for at least 10 s if the collective axis is not
available.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 16
Conditions that inhibit the ALT mode engagement:

- aircraft on ground,
- airspeed below 55 kt if the collective trim is unavailable,
display to the pilot but ground proximity level-off activation. It is indicated
by three amber lines across the AFCS strip.
The mode is disengaged specifically by pressing on the ALT pushbutton
on APMS while it is engaged.
The engagement of the ALT.A, VS, G/S, CRHT or GA mode disengages the
ALT mode.
The engagement of IAS mode shifts ALT mode to the collective axis if it is
available or replaces it if not.
2.3.3 Vertical speed hold (VS)
The VS mode maintains the current vertical speed upon engagement:
- Below 60 kt the vertical speed is controlled through collective axis,
however the mode shifts to the pitch axis if the airspeed exceeds 65 kt
for at least 5 s,
- Above 60 kt the vertical speed is controlled through cyclic axis (3 axes
operation) or through collective axis when IAS is engaged (4 axes
operation),
- Under 3 axes (VS mode), a device switches to 4 axes (IAS mode) in
case of insufficient power setting.
Consequently IAS mode is set to a bottom limit around 70 kt,
- Under 3 axes (VS mode) a device restricts IAS to VNE,
- Adjustment of vertical speed reference is obtained through the beep trim
- When approaching the ground the mode automatically reverts to ALT in
order to hold an altitude corresponding to a radio height of 150 ft,
- A safety device prevents the vertical speed reference from exceeding a
safety value according to airspeed (see following figure).
When the VS mode is engaged iVSi label is displayed on AFCS strip.

The mode is engaged/disengaged by pressing the VS pushbutton on APMS
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 17
The conditions that force the VS mode disengagement are the same
conditions as for the ALT mode.
The engagement of the ALT, G/S, CRHT or GA mode disengages the VS
mode.
The engagement of the IAS mode shifts the VS mode to the collective axis
if it is available or replaces it, if not.
2.3.4 Altitude acquisition mode (ALT.A)

The ALT.A mode acquires and holds a pre-selected altitude.
Turning ALT.A rotary knob on APMS presets a reference altitude
(step = 100 ft above 5000 ft and 50 ft below).
Pressing ALT.A rotary knob on APMS results first in selection of VS mode
(climb or descent) with a default vertical speed according to table below, or
current VS if higher, until the difference between actual altitude and
reference altitude becomes less than 300 ft. At this time ALT mode is
automatically engaged.
- When an altitude is pre-selected and ALT.A is not engaged, the blue

reference figure blinks to alert the pilot when the difference between the
pre-selected altitude and present altitude is less than 300 ft.
- When approaching the ground, the mode automatically reverts to ALT in
order to hold an altitude corresponding to a radio height of 150 ft.
The iVSi label is displayed while the iALT.Ai label underneath on AFCS
strip.
The conditions that force the ALT.A mode disengagement are the same
The mode is disengaged specifically by pressing any ALT.A rotary knob on
APMS while it is engaged.
The engagement/capture of the ALT, VS, G/S, CRHT or GA modes
disengages the ALT.A mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 18
2.3.5 Glide slope mode (G/S)
The GS mode acquires and holds the selected glide slope in order to make
an ILS approach to an airport. When approaching the ground based on
radio altimeter information, the AP automatically reverts to ALT to perform a
level flight below 100 ft, depending on terrain profile. It requires a VOR/LOC
receiver to be tuned to an ILS frequency and the navigation source set to
this receiver. Coupling can be done on ND HSI mode.
The mode presents two different phases:
- Armament occurs if the LOC mode is armed or engaged and the capture
conditions are not yet met. The formerly engaged mode (for example
ALT) remains active until G/S capture,
- Capture: the mode is allowed to capture if the deviation is valid and
lower than 2.2 dots (glide index at the bottom of the scale) for at least 1 s
and higher than 0.7 dot (glide index above the center) for at least 3 s,
then the capture itself takes place if the LOC mode is captured and if the
deviation is lower than 2.05 dots and higher than -0.3 dot (threshold
depending on the flight conditions).
To arm or engage Glide interception:
- Set the navigation source to "VOR/ILS#",
- Press "GS" push-button on APMS.
On ND display, once the selected VOR/ILS receptor is tuned to a LOC
frequency, the mode is armed by pressing the NAV pushbutton on
APMS if the capture conditions are not satisfied. iGSi label is displayed
on AFCS strip.
Conditions that force the G/S mode disarmament:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
- loss of airspeed and ground speed for at least 30 s if LOC is armed
(10 s if LOC is engaged),
- loss of barometric altitude for at least 30 s if LOC is armed (10 s if
LOC is engaged),
- navigation source change for at least 30 s if LOC is armed (10 s if
LOC is engaged),
- change of ILS frequency for at least 30 s if LOC is armed (10 s if LOC
is engaged),
- loss of GS signal for at least 30 s if LOC is armed (10 s if LOC is
engaged),
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 19
Conditions that inhibit the GS mode armament:

The engagement of the GA mode on the pitch axis disarm the GS mode.
regardless of the VOR/ILS receiver selected, and tuned to the frequency
of the relevant beacon, the mode is engaged by pressing the NAV
pushbutton on APMS if the capture conditions are satisfied. If previously
armed the mode also automatically engages in the same conditions. iGSi
label is displayed on AFCS strip.
Conditions that force the GS mode disengagement:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
- loss of GS signal for at least 10 s,
- loss of airspeed and ground speed for at least 10 s,
- loss of barometric altitude for at least 10 s.
Conditions that inhibit the G/S mode engagement:
- anomaly detected by the monitoring of the data sent to the FDS, for
display to the pilot,
- airspeed below 35 kt,
- LOC mode not engaged,
- GA mode engaged.
The engagement of the ALT.A, VS, ALT, CRHT or GA mode disengages
the G/S mode.
The engagement of the IAS mode shifts the G/S mode to the collective
axis if it is available or replaces it, if not.
NOTE
Before GS mode engagement, it is possible to use the ALT.A mode even
if the GS mode is armed. The GS mode will have priority for
engagement.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 20
2.3.6 Indicated airspeed (IAS)

The IAS mode maintains the current indicated airspeed upon engagement
or acquires and holds a pre-selected indicated airspeed, always through
pitch axis.
Adjustment of IAS reference is obtained through the cyclic beep trim.
- When approaching the ground, ALT mode is automatically engaged in
- In 3 and 4 axes, a device limits the IAS mode from a bottom limit of 30 kt
and to VNE.
When the IAS mode is engaged, iIASi label is displayed on AFCS strip.
Action/events to engage the IAS mode:
- pressing the IAS pushbutton on APMS,
- reversion from the GA mode to the IAS mode after 15 s,
- when bottom airspeed limit of 60 kt is reached with any vertical mode
(ALT, ALT.A, VS or GS) engaged on pitch axis and the collective axis is
available,
- loss of one engine in three axes operation (i.e. with a vertical mode
engaged on pitch axis).
Conditions that force the IAS mode disengagement:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
release),
cyclic grip,
- complete loss of airspeed for at least 10 s.
Conditions that inhibit the IAS mode engagement:
display to the pilot except for the OEI reversion case.
The mode is disengaged specifically by pressing the IAS pushbutton on
The GA mode disengages the IAS mode.
When the collective axis is not available (3-axes operation) the engagement
of the ALT, ALT.A, VS or GS mode disengages the IAS mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 21
2.3.7 Go around (GA)

The GA mode is used in case of a missed approach or during takeoff (as
soon as IAS > 30 kt) and holds a pre-defined vertical speed of 1 000 ft/min
or the current vertical speed (whichever is the highest) and Vy or the current
airspeed (whichever is the highest).
In case of engine failure below Vy, VTOSS is acquired or the current
airspeed is held if between VTOSS and Vy.
The GA mode is engaged by pressing the GA push-button located on
collective stick: iGAi label is displayed on AFCS strip.
- Adjustment of the airspeed reference is available via the cyclic beep
like in IAS mode.
- Adjustment of the vertical speed reference is available via the collective
beep like in VS mode.
- The mode automatically reverts to VS and IAS after 15 s.
Conditions that force the GA mode disengagement:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
- loss of collective axis (loss of any cyclic series actuator or collective trim
failure or collective trim feel permanent release), leading to a reversion to
VS on pitch,
release), leading to a reversion to VS,
cyclic grip,
- complete loss of barometric altitude for at least 10 s.
Condition that inhibits the GA mode engagement:
- Aircraft on ground.
The mode is disengaged by pressing either the VS or IAS push-button
on APMS, or GA push-button.
The engagement of ALT.A, ALT or CRHT mode also disengages the GA
mode. GS does not disengage GA.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 22
2.3.8 Capture and hold of radio height mode (CR.HT)
The CR.HT mode acquires and holds a pre-selected radio height.
Turning CR.HT rotary knob on APMS presets a reference height (step =
10 ft).
The reference height can be adjusted either by the rotary knob on APMS or
by the trim located on collective stick. It cannot exceed 2450 ft and is
downward limited to the highest decision height (DH).
When flying below a safety limit (the lowest value between 200 ft and
CR.HT 30 ft) the iFLY-UPi label replaces iCR.HTi in the collective axis
column and the collective pitch increases until the helicopter is back on the
reference CR.HT value.
The collective pitch may increase up to MTOP below 30 kt and up to MCP
above 45 kt.
Pressing the CR.HT rotary knob on APMS engages/disengages the CR.HT
mode.
Pushing CR.HT button on APMS results in automatic acquisition of the
lowest vertical speed (according to the following figure), then in holding of
reference height.
VS (ft/min) VS (ft/min)
+ 500 + 500
+ 350
+ 300
IAS(kt) + 50
Z (ft)
30 50 100 210
When the CR.HT mode is engaged: iCR.HTi label is displayed on AFCS

strip
Conditions that force the CR.HT mode disengagement:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
failure or collective trim feel permanent release),
cyclic grip,
- complete loss of radio height for at least 10 s.
Conditions that inhibit the CR.HT mode engagement:
The engagement of the ALT, VS, ALT.A or GS mode disengages the
CR.HT mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 23
SECTION 7.13 - B
1 GENERAL
installed.

axis,
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 1
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 2
1.3 COMMANDS
Figure 2: APMS

OFF AP disengaged
AP engaged
trim functions.
Auto-trim engaged


comes on.
and VOR modes.
A mode armed
C mode captured
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 3

function comes on.
A mode armed
C mode captured.


mode.
A mode armed
C mode captured.

mode.
A VS armed.
C VS captured

navigation mode.
IAS engaged

navigation mode.
ALT engaged
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 4
RCA

modes.
On ground stick re-centering function by pressing more
than 1s.
Backward up
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 5
*RC*

off.
- attitude reference change on pitch or roll axis.
modes.
than 1 s.
Backward up
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 5
CYCLIC
TRIM FEEL
COLLECTIVE
TRIM FEEL
AP RESET
SAS RESET
Figure 4: Overhead pane
1.4 ANNUNCIATION
1.4.1 Upper Modes
IAS ALT HDG VS
or
XXX + on relevant scale NAV VOR LOC GS

active

XXX NAV VOR LOC GS
armed
ALT A
GA GA + GA
on
scale
VS IAS + VS and IAS
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 6
NOTE
Middle = Roll/Yaw
Right side = Pitch
Colors Definition
RED required.
detected.

CYAN disarm,

and then disappears
(Flashing)


FLY-UP
NOTE

for 10 s.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 7
2 OPERATING MODES

stopped.
speed 4 deg/s).
attitude.
APMS.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 8
2.1.3 SAS
2.2.1 General
APMS.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
grip,
the pilot,
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 9
satisfied:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 10

- complete loss of heading for at least 30 s.
mode.
NOTE 1
captured VOR mode.
NOTE 2
computed drift.
NOTE 3
The VOR A mode is a subpart of the VOR mode. The VOR A mode is
available from the NAV button (APMS).

The NAV mode enables the helicopter to follow a selected path via a commanded
roll attitude output from a navigation management system (NMS).
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
grip,
- anomaly detected by the monitoring of the data sent to the FDS for display to the
pilot.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 11
NOTE

course,
1 dot.
Figure 6: LOC mode.
NOTE 1
For low angles of interception (lower than 25 degrees), capture
condition is 1 dot. However a maximum time of 30 s is introduced
when the mode is armed and the deviation below 2.1 dots to capture
the localizer even if the deviation still exceeds 1 dot.
NOTE 2
Arming the LOC will automatically arm the G/S mode (refer to
paragraph 2.3.5 for G/S mode description).
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 12
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
conditions:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 13
2.3.1 General
AEO OEI
FLI FLI
TOP 30 s
MCP continuous
IAS(kt) IAS(kt)
25 40 30 40

AEO or 10% in OEI.
- Power management in basic stabilization: above 80 ft (Radio height)
automatic reduction of power when authorized limit is exceeded.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 14

operation),
NOTE
is available),
available),
available).
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
available.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 15

ALT mode.
for at least 5 s,
operation),

EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 16
mode.


strip.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 17
ALT) remains active until G/S capture.
on AFCS strip.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
LOC is engaged),
LOC is engaged),
is engaged),
engaged),
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 18

- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
- GA mode engaged.
the G/S mode.
NOTE
Before GS mode engagement, it is possible to use the ALT.A mode
even if the GS mode is armed. The GS mode will have priority for
engagement.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 19

pitch axis.
and to VNE.
available,
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
release),
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 20

like in IAS mode.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
VS on pitch,
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 21
10 ft).
above 45 kt.
mode.
reference height.
+ 500 + 500
+ 350
+ 300
IAS(kt) + 50
Z (ft)
30 50 100 210

strip
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
CR.HT mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 22
SECTION 7.13 - C
AUTOPILOT (Soft N9-72 or N9-79 with HOV mode)
1 GENERAL
installed.

transmits the correcting signals to the actuators.
An APMS (Automatic Pilot Mode Selector) used to engage of the various modes.
control), on overhead panel, used to release cyclic or collective force trim.
axis.
A SEMA actuator in the pitch axis contributing also to the collective axis.
Two SEMA actuators in the roll axis contributing also to the collective axis.
A trim actuator in pitch, roll, yaw and collective axes.
Yaw pedal position transmitters.
With hover mode, a GPS is connected directly to APM.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 1
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 2
1.3 COMMANDS
Figure 2: APMS

OFF AP disengaged
AP engaged
trim functions.
Auto-trim engaged


comes on.
NAV push-button Arms / engages and disengages NAV (FMS),
VOR and VOR Approach modes.
A mode armed
C mode captured.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 3

function comes on.
mode (LOC).
A mode armed
C mode captured.

HOV push-button Engages and disengages the Hover mode
HOV engaged

mode.
A mode armed
C mode captured.

mode.
A VS armed.
C VS captured.

navigation mode.
IAS engaged

navigation mode.
ALT engaged
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 4
RCA

and engagement/disengagement of the hover mode when
AP is ON.
modes.
than 1s.
Backward up
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 5
*RC*
AP is ON.
modes.
than 1s.
Backward up
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 5
CYCLIC
TRIM FEEL
COLLECTIVE
TRIM FEEL
AP RESET
SAS RESET
1.4 ANNUNCIATION
1.4.1 Upper Modes
IAS ALT HDG VS
or

active

XXX NAV VOR LOC GS
armed
ALT A
GA GA + GA
on
scale
VS IAS + VS and IAS
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 6
NOTE
Middle = Roll/Yaw
Right side = Pitch
Colors Definition
RED required.
detected.

CYAN disarm,

and then disappears
(Flashing)


FLY-UP
NOTE

for 10 s.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 7
2 OPERATING MODES

stopped.
speed 4 deg/s).
attitude.
APMS.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 8
2.1.3 SAS
2.2.1 General
APMS.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
grip,
the pilot,
The engagement of the NAV, VOR, LOC or HOV modes disengages the HDG
mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 9
satisfied:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 10

The engagement of the HDG, NAV, GA or HOV modes disengages the
VOR mode.
NOTE 1
captured VOR mode.
NOTE 2
computed drift.
NOTE 3

- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
grip,
pilot.
The engagement of the HDG, GA or HOV modes disengages the NAV mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 11
NOTE

course,
1 dot.
Figure 5: LOC mode.
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 12
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
conditions:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
The engagement of the HDG, NAV, GA or HOV mode disengages the
LOC mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 13
2.3.1 General
IAS engaged) the following priorities apply, if the required power is more
than the available power:
AEO OEI
FLI FLI
TOP 30 s
MCP continuous
IAS(kt) IAS(kt)
25 40 30 40

- During descent or deceleration, the minimum torque obtained is 2 x 5%
in AEO or 10% in OEI.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 14

The ALT mode maintains the current barometric altitude upon engagement.
mode shifts to the pitch axis if the airspeed exceeds 65 kt for at least 5 s.
operation),
NOTE
is available),
available),
available).
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
available.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 15

ALT mode.
The engagement of IAS or HOV modes shifts ALT mode to the collective
axis if it is available or replaces it if not.
The VS mode maintains the current vertical speed upon engagement.
for at least 5 s.
operation).
Consequently IAS mode is set to a bottom limit around 70 kt.
- Under 3 axes (VS mode) a device restricts IAS to VNE
located on collective stick.

EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 16
mode.
The engagement of the IAS or HOV modes shifts the VS mode to the
collective axis if it is available or replaces it, if not.


strip.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 17
on AFCS strip.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
LOC is engaged),
LOC is engaged),
is engaged),
engaged),
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 18

- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
- GA mode engaged.
the G/S mode.
NOTE
engagement.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 19

pitch axis.
and to VNE.
available,
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
release),
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 20

like in IAS mode.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
VS on pitch,
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 21
10 ft).
above 45 kt.
mode.
reference height.
+ 500 + 500
+ 350
+ 300
IAS(kt) + 50
Z (ft)
30 50 100 210

strip
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
CR.HT mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 22
2.4 HORIZONTAL MODES
2.4.1 Hover mode

The HOV mode acquires and holds a pre-selected ground speed reference set by
pilot thumb-wheels. Action to engage / disengage the HOV mode:
- Pressing the "HOV" pushbutton on APMS.
- Pressing the SAS / HOV pushbutton on any cyclic stick.
When the HOV mode is engaged, the "HOVER" label is displayed on the AFCS
strip in the pitch and lateral columns.
The HOV mode is a horizontal upper mode only (no collective upper mode is
engaged).
Conditions that force the HOV mode disengagement:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
- Pilot pressing the upper modes disconnect button on any cyclic grip,
- Loss of pitch axis (series actuator or trim override information failure or cyclic
trim feel permanent release),
- Loss of roll axis (any of roll series actuator or trim override information failure
or cyclic trim feel permanent release),
- Complete loss of ground speed for at least 30 s.
The engagement of IAS, GA, HDG, NAV, VOR or LOC modes disengages HOV
mode.
Once in the hover:
- The cyclic beep commands a 5 kt speed change in the direction of the beep,
- When ground speed references are equal to zero, a position hold is activated
and a beep pulse commands a motion of 1 meter in the relevant direction.
The cyclic lateral beep modifies the track during deceleration.
Every reference change is associated to white blinking underlining of the mode's
label.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 23
2.4.2 HOVER indicator (if optional fitted)

The hover indicator is a cross needle indicator displaying longitudinal
(Horizontal needle) and lateral (Vertical needle) velocities used by the
AFCS Hover mode.
It shall be used only as a supplement to external visual cues which remain
the primary cues.
The hoist annunciator comes on whenever the hoist operator joystick is not
centered.
The current GPS ground speeds are displayed on the GI106 equipment:
Figure 6: Hover indicator (Gi 106)
NOTE 1
Both flags are always raised together.
NOTE 2
When a velocity is above 25 kt, the corresponding needle remains visible
and blocked at 25 kt.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 24
2.4.3 Thumbwheels (if optional fitted)

The thumbwheels are used to adjust the HOV mode commanded velocity on one or
both axes.
Authority
Longitudinal axis:
20 kt Forward
10 kt Aft
Lateral axis:
20 kt
Figure 7: Thumbwheels
2.4.4 Hoist operator joystick (if optional fitted)

The hoist operator joystick allows the hoist operator to adjust helicopter position in
HOV mode through adjustable commanded velocity inputs on one or both axes.
Authority: 10 kt
on each axis
Figure 8: Hoist operator joystick
2.4.5 Simultaneous commanded velocity inputs (if optional fitted)

In the presence of simultaneous inputs from the 3 different controls (beep trim,
thumbwheels and joystick), the resulting commanded speed on each axis is the
algebraic sum of the inputs within the following limits:
- Longitudinal axis: 20 kt forward
10 kt aft
- Lateral axis: 20 kt
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 25
SECTION 7.14
LANDING GEAR
1 GENERAL
The landing gear is used to land the helicopter, to steer it when taxiing on an airfield and
to stop it. In flight, the landing gear can be retracted. The helicopter can be towed by a
tractor.
2 DESCRIPTION
The landing gear includes:
- Two main landing gear units made up of a leg (a two-chamber oleo shock strut),
hydraulically controlled disc brakes and a wheel,
- A nose landing gear unit made up of a leg (single-chamber oleo shock strut) that
rotates through 360 , a shimmy damper, an automatic wheel centering system, a
nose wheel locking system controlled from the cockpit and twin wheels,
- A control switch,
- An electric landing gear retraction inhibiting circuit (helicopter on the ground),
- An emergency hydraulic system test system,
- Indicators (landing gear sequence of operation, "landing gear not locked down"
indicator).
The normal landing gear extension and retraction maneuvers are ensured by the
auxiliary hydraulic system. The emergency hydraulic power system ensures the landing
gear extension in an emergency.

3.1 INSTRUMENT PANEL
Figure 1: Instrument Panel
EC 155 B1
7.14
08-26 Page 1
4 OPERATION
Figure 2: Operation Landing Gear
EC 155 B1
7.14
02-43 Page 2
SECTION 8
SERVICING
CONTENTS
8.1 HANDLING PAGES
1. TOWING ................................................................................................................ 1
8.2 MAINTENANCE DATA

1. REFUELING .......................................................................................................... 1
2. REFUELING ROTOR TURNING, AIRCRAFT ON THE GROUND ........................ 2
8.3 TEST SCHEDULE

1. GENERAL.............................................................................................................. 1
2. TEST SHEETS....................................................................................................... 2
EC 155 B1
8.0.P6
09-23 Page 1
e
io
o
2
J-
Z ~
Z
W
~
o W
~
UJ
W ~
o
U
<t:
W
o Z
"'"
o e e
J-
Z <C
_J
z o,
_J
o,
w
~ w (j) UJ ~ CV')
w ~ J- ~ (5
e
et: w
w
_J
C\I e e
w W ~ :l
o o
o <c W UJ o z
oe:!: _j ~
_j a.. I
(j) W (j) o,
r- co o:: """""
o e e
J- z o:: x
~ 2
W woO C98
W ~ J- co Z O
o:::
o
-
Wf-
I W
o::
tV
LJ... ~z
(j)

~ o...W_
_j-Z J-
oe:!:Z 00 W
>
~2U
Z a..<cw
_jJ-
oOOr-
z oWW
00 e
...J::5lt
a w~~
o:: I W
o::<CI
J- ~ <.9
~
tu O
~ 0...--
f-W
(jO:::
J- wet: Z_j_j (j)u cs
_jw o<cu. u
o :lJ-_j Uz W <t: t::~
tu oa..a..I-t_tV
o<cwZrLJ...o .....J r- oZZ
o, -=::::oo::w~J-z ::J
w:lW
r-CJ~
(j)
~~r-~~w<{ O o
(f)zW
e e
a
::]-0
z J~
ow_J
O>-ZLLj~ UJ ~a..WW
U- ~ ::J ::i z o:: ::J ~ ~ ~~
a wwJ-a..Ooo
o:: ~ (3
J-
(j)
O ::J :J W
U.WZIOOZ
10::
00
oe:!: a o, o::: Z
_r-
tV
L.L <.9 a UJ
al wW
~
Z
wu.a:O:::J-oe:!:o W o z~
_W
e e e e
.....J Z 101-0:: I Z J-
GO
z
w_J
IO:::WZ en
(9ICOc:awzo C9 ~ o,
W
zO::<.9<.9Q.wl- ~
w~~J-O<.9(f) Z ~
~ o:: o:: o:: o:: o:: o:: CI) ~
W I
U Z
Owwwwwwz
r-J-r-J-J-J-ww
........
w_J~
0
o...u.U.U.U.U.U.o..I z<C
->_J
w<Coe:!:<C<c~u GO_J
Z~
e e
O::CI)CI)CI)CI)CI)CI)O~ WW~
J-~~~~~~w Cl::C/)
IOU:_J- ~
c.9wwwwww_j(fJ
_jIIIIIIw>- ~ ~ --=:t: LI:! ~ ~ o Cf:! f'.: Cl:!
u.(fJ(fJ """"" """"" W
"""""
'r"'"" """""
'r"'""
'r"'"" 'r"'"" 'r"'""
I :2:
~

w
W
o :r: z
o :2:
~
W
>
o,
zz
00
::::::
z
o
:::
o I ~ a... ~o:::: o ...J ::J
~ cs
o O n, (9 o,
o ~~ z
::J 2 ui
I-
~ ~ O o
Q)
~ z ::J :r: o I-
o:::(
m o::~~ o
o::
(O
o o ~ ro w a.. www
o
U)
N -.::::t LO CD l'- (j)
= Ct')
~ w
LU _J u m CJ >00
O O O O O O O O O ~(J) ~ z oow z
zzzzzzzzz
io _J
l!)
r- ~ = Il) :2 O W Io:::(O W
u
w
~
LL
EC 155 81
8.3
08-26 Page 2
EC 155 B1
8.3
06-06 Page 13
EC 155 B1
8.3
10-40 Page 14
EC 155 B1
8.3
10-40 Page 15
EC 155 B1
8.3
06-06 Page 16
EC 155 B1
8.3
08-26 Page 25
EC 155 B1
8.3
06-06 Page 26
EC 155 B1
8.3
13-44 Page 29
EC 155 B1
8.3
08-26 Page 30
SECTION 9
OPERATIONAL INFORMATION
CONTENTS
PAGES
9.1 GUIDANCE FOR CARGO SLING OPERATIONS
PERSONNAL TRAINING - IMPERATIVE PRE-OPERATIONAL CHECKS ............ 1
AIRBORNE LOADS - FLIGHT PRECAUTIONS ..................................................... 2
CARGO RING SIZE RULE ..................................................................................... 3
9.2 to 9.19 PENDING
9.20 1 - HONEYWELL RDR-2000 WEATHER RADAR .................................... 1
2 - TELEPHONICS 1600 RADAR .................................................................. 5
9.21 to 9.23 PENDING
9.24 ADELT CPT 609 DISTRESS BEACON INSTALLATION

GENERAL - DESCRIPTION ................................................................................... 1
OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 2
OPERATING PROCEDURE ................................................................................... 3
9.25 KANNAD 406 AF EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER

OPERATION - OPERATING PROCEDURE ........................................................... 2
9.26 SMITH 503 DISTRESS BEACON INSTALLATION

9.27 MARMS
GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
LIMITATIONS - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ..................................................... 3
NORMAL PROCEDURES ...................................................................................... 4
9.28 PRO LINE 21 CNS
9.29 DIGITAL AUDIO CONTROL SYSTEM

EC 155 B1
9.0.P6
13-29 Page 1
PAGES
9.30 KANNAD 406 AP AND KANNAD AP INTEGRA

EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
OPERATION - OPERATING PROCEDURE .......................................................... 2
9.31 COMMUNICATION, RADIO NAVIGATION AND NAVIGATION

INSTALLATION WITH THE DUAL GTN 750H
SYSTEM ................................................................................................................. 3
9.32 DMAP EURONAV

OPERATIONAL INFORMATION ............................................................................ 3
9.33 SECOND SEARCH LIGHT

GENERAL - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ........................................................ 1
OPERATION .......................................................................................................... 2
9.37 CAMERA VISION 1000

GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 1
DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................... 2
OPERATIONS ........................................................................................................ 3
EC 155 B1
9.0.P6
16-25 Page 2
SECTION 9.1
GUIDANCE FOR CARGO SLING OPERATIONS

1 PERSONNEL TRAINING
Cargo sling operations may only be conducted by pilots who already have considerable
experience with their aircraft. No pilot may perform solo cargo-carrying flights without
first having accomplished such operation in the company of an instructor. Mechanics on
ground duty must be fully informed by the pilot before each new operation, in particular
as regards:
their position on the ground considering the proposed flight path,
the direction in which to move away,
the hook-up operation,
hand signals to be used or radio instructions,
protective equipment : helmets, gloves, glasses (if applicable),
the number of round trips between replenishments,
the manner of retrieving slings and nets.
2 IMPERATIVE PRE-OPERATIONAL CHECKS

2.1 HELICOPTER CONDITION
In addition to the usual examination of the helicopter, the release unit must be
carefully examined and the mechanism checked for correct release operation.
2.2 CONDITION OF SLING EQUIPMENT
The nets, strops and sling must be examined thoroughly. Any worn or frayed
components are to be discarded. The cables, strops and shackles must be capable
of carrying three times the maximum anticipated load.
2.3 PREPARATION OF LOADS
Check the weight of the loads and the method of suspension.
2.4 CONDITION OF LOADING AND UNLOADING AREAS
Remove or tie down all that might be displaced by the rotor downwash.
2.5 TOTAL WEIGHT OF HELICOPTER WITH LOAD
Define maximum acceptable load compatible with terrain configuration and
atmospheric conditions. Unless the platforms are in clear surroundings and fairly
large, consider as maximum weight that which can be held in hover OGE calm air
over the higher of the two platforms (takeoff or landing).
EC 155 B1
9.1
06-06 Page 1
3 AIRBORNE LOADS
Heavy loads, such as bags of cement or drums of kerosene, which are carried in a net,
present no particular problem.
Special precautions must be taken in the case of bulky loads, which have a tendency to
oscillate and even to "float" during transport on the sling.
Permeability to air can have a stabilizing effect on a bulky load: for example, a cable car
should be carried with both its doors open.
Never carry an airfoil alone: there is a great risk of the airfoil flying up into the tail rotor.
If several cables are used to sling the load, they must be long enough to form an angle
of less than 45 between cables at the point of suspension under the helicopter;
experience shows that oscillation of the load is thus less likely to occur.
On the other hand, if the load is slung on a single sling cable, it is preferable that a fairly
short cable be used as there is then less risk of the load swinging, and it is easier to
judge the height of the load during approach.
For the retrieval of crashed helicopters it is generally possible to use a lifting ring on the
rotor shaft.
Airplanes are carried using straps passing under the fuselage or under the wings. The
cables must be attached in such a way that the airplane is slightly nose down when the
helicopter is hovering.
4 FLIGHT PRECAUTIONS
After hooking on the load the ground mechanic is to check the position of sling cables
then move away. The pilot must then make sure that the mechanic has moved away
and has given the hand-signal for takeoff.
Power must be applied slowly enough to allow the helicopter to center itself above the
load.
A vertical takeoff must be made, avoiding dragging the load along the ground or striking
any obstacle.
If the load starts to swing, reduce speed.
Approach must be made head into the wind with gradual reduction in airspeed, and
transition into hover high enough above the ground to eliminate the risk of dragging the
load.
Set the load down, then reduce collective pitch sufficiently to slacken the cables before
opening the release unit hook; this also allows the pilot to ensure that the load is
deposited. If the cables are long enough, move sideways a little before opening the
hook, to prevent the sliding items from falling onto the freight.
Even after the mechanic has signaled that the load is released, move away as if it were
not; this is an advisable precaution against possible misinterpretation of signals.
CAUTION
NEVER FLY AWAY WITH AN EMPTY NET OR AN UNBALLASTED SLING.
EC 155 B1
9.1
09-23 Page 2
5 CARGO RING SIZE RULE

Extreme care must be exercised when rigging a load to the Cargo Hook.
It is the responsibility of the operator to assure the cargo hook will function properly
with each rigging.
A placard located on both sided of the A/C illustrates the following:

Cables, straps, ropemust not be used directly on the cargo hook load beam.
Only one primary ring linked to a unique secondary ring shall be attached to
the hook load beam.
Cargo hook rigging shall respect the following rules:
Cargo hook Cargo hook

A B C E
Supplier Supplier P/N
Indraero SIREN AS 21-5-7* 110mm-40mm 16mm-20mm > 40mm < 110mm
* double keeper cargo hook
EC 155 B1
9.1
09-23 Page 3
SECTION 9.20
1 - HONEYWELL RDR-2000 WEATHER RADAR

THE PILOT'S GUIDE PUBLISHED BY THE MANUFACTURED MUST BE USED FOR
THE COMPLETE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.
1 GENERAL
The Honeywell RDR-2000 weather radar is a color radar system used primarily to
visually display weather information to aid the pilot in avoiding thunderstorms and
associated turbulences.
2 CONTROL AND DISPLAYS

2.1 DISPLAYS
The Weather radar information are displayed on SMD 45 (in Radar mode, on
Navigation Display (ND) only) and on the mission display 10.4" (*) (refer to
section 9.32 - DMAP EURONAV (*)).
NOTE
For configuration with mission display:
- The weather picture is displayed in sector or heading up mode. The range
data from ARINC453 output is controlled by the ND pilot or copilot.
- The zoom level data from DMAP control panel is not available.
- To be available on the mission screen, the radar picture must be displayed
on at least one ND.
(*) If fitted
EC 155 B1
9.20
13-44 Page 1
2.2 CONTROL UNIT
No. Description Function
- OFF: parks the antenna and cuts-off radar system power

supply.
Radar selector - STBY: system fully energized, no radar transmission,
1 antenna parked (0 azimuth, 30 tilt down).
switch
- TST: multicoloured arc display test pattern.
- ON: radar normal conditions of operation.
2 WX mode button Weather mode selection.
3 WXA mode button Weather alert mode (Magenta areas flashing) selection.
4 GND MAP Ground mapping mode selection
5 GAIN control Adjusts the radar gain from 0 to -20 dB (MAP mode)
6 VP Vertical Profile mode selection
7 TRK Yellow track centerline for Vertical Profile mode
8 TILT control Manual adjustment of antenna tilt (+/- 15 ).
EC 155 B1
9.20
13-44 Page 2
3 OPERATION
Refer to the Pilot's guide for more detailed information.
CAUTION
DO NOT TURN THE RADAR ON WITHIN 25 ft OF GROUND PERSONNEL OR
CONTAINERS HOLDING FLAMMABLE OR EXPLOSIVE MATERIAL. THE RADAR
SHOULD NEVER BE OPERATED DURING REFUELING OPERATIONS.
WHENEVER THE RADAR MODE SELECTOR SWITCH IS IN ANY POSITION
EXCEPT OFF-STBY-TEST, RF ENERGY IS RADIATED FROM THE ANTENNA.
DO NOT ALLOW PERSONNEL WITHIN 25 ft OF THE ANTENNA WHILE IT IS
RADIATING. TESTS INVOLVING THE RADIATION OF RF ENERGY MUST NOT
BE MADE IN THE VICINITY OF REFUELING OPERATIONS. USE ONLY STBY
OR TEST POSITIONS IN SUCH CASES.
NOTE
The weather RADAR is automatically forced to stand-by when radio-altimeter

height is below 80 ft.
EC 155 B1
9.20
13-29 Page 3
EC 155 B1
9.20
13-29 Page 4
SECTION 9.20
2 - TELEPHONICS 1600 RADAR

1 GENERAL
The Telephonics 1600 radar is a multi-mode system.
It includes a digital color display indicator to display the information received and
provision for navigation data overlay.
The system provides three types of primary operating modes:
Search mode (SRCH) capable of displaying targets on land or at sea despite
unfavorable weather conditions.
Weather mode (Wx, WxA) can supply continuous weather displaying.
Beacon mode (BCN) is capable of interrogating and receiving coded replies from
one or more beacons.
EC 155 B1
9.20
13-29 Page 5
2 CONTROL UNIT

supply.
- STBY: system fully energized, no radar transmission, no
display.
Radar selector
1 - TST: multicoloured arc display test pattern, no radar
switch
transmission.
- 60: directs the antenna to sector scan 60 about the
boresight of the aircraft.
2 Wx mode button Weather mode selection.
3 WxA mode button Weather alert mode (Magenta areas flashing) selection.
Selects Beacon only mode (if in mix mode BCN+SRCH or

4 BCN ONLY
BCN+Wx) or back to mix mode (if in Beacon only mode).
6 BCN FMT Sequentially selects Beacon format (Standard, DO172, OFF).
EC 155 B1
9.20
13-29 Page 6
BCN GAIN - Rotary function: adjusts the gain of the radar receiver in
7 Beacon mode.
CODE - Pushbutton function: sequentially selects Beacon codes.
8 SRCH Sequentially selects search modes.

9 SRCH GAIN Adjusts the gain of the radar receiver in Search mode.
3 OPERATION
Refer to the equipment manufacturers technical publications for more detailed
information.
CAUTION
CONTAINERS HOLDING FLAMMABLE OR EXPLOSIVE MATERIAL. THE
RADAR SHOULD NEVER BE OPERATED DURING REFUELING
OPERATIONS.
EXCEPT OFF-STBY-TEST, RF ENERGY IS RADIATED FROM THE
ANTENNA. DO NOT ALLOW PERSONNEL WITHIN 25 ft OF THE ANTENNA
WHILE IT IS RADIATING. TESTS INVOLVING THE RADIATION OF RF
ENERGY MUST NOT BE MADE IN THE VICINITY OF REFUELING
OPERATIONS. USE ONLY STBY OR TEST POSITIONS IN SUCH CASES.
NOTE
EC 155 B1
9.20
13-29 Page 7
SECTION 9.26
SMITH 503 DISTRESS BEACON INSTALLATION
1 GENERAL
Designed for guiding offshore search and rescue operations, the emergency locator
transmitter transmits a signal on the international distress frequencies (121.5 MHZ and
406.025 MHz).
The beacon switches on as soon as it is ejected from the aircraft, after using the control
unit or automatically using different detectors (frangible or hydrostatic switches).
CAUTION
THE OPERATING TIME OF THE SMITH 503 EMERGENCY LOCATOR
TRANSMITTER IS REDUCED AT TEMPERATURES BELOW -20C.
IF THE TRANSMITTER IS DEPLOYED ON HARD GROUND, IT MAY BE
DAMAGED AND NOT OPERATE.
2 DESCRIPTION
The emergency locator transmitter system is composed of:
- A cockpit control panel and indicator.
- A configuration unit.
- A system interface unit.
- A beacon release unit.
- A water activated switch.
- A beacon.
1. Distress signal transmit light.

2. Switch: Self test function, or reset.
3. Deployed indicator light (beacon is transmitting).
4. Activation of beacon deploy.
5. Activation of transmit.
EC 155 B1
9.26
08-26 Page 1
3 OPERATION
The beacon may be deployed upon ditching automatically or manually when decided by
the crew.
3.1 PRE-FLIGHT CHECK

- On system interface unit:
x ARM/OFF Switch ............................... ARM (Guarded)
- Control panel:
x DEPLOY and TRANSMIT switches ... Guarded.
NOTE
Activation of deployable ELTs should be performed only shortly before ground
contact and not at high altitudes.
3.2 POST-FLIGHT CHECK

x ARM/OFF Switch ............................... OFF
4 OPERATING PROCEDURE
Deploy switch (4) .............................................. A c t i v a t i o n o f b e a c o n d e p l o y .
Deployment of the beacon will
cause TX/TEST and BEACON
GONE annunciators to illuminate
together, with an audible tone.
Transmit switch (5) ........................................... Activation of Transmit. This initiates
beacon transmissions and causes
the TX/TEST annunciator to
illuminate together with an audible
tone.
EC 155 B1
9.26
14-26 Page 2
Transmit annunciator(1) ..................................... Illuminated. This indicates that

beacon is transmitting a distress
signal.
Beacon gone annunciator(3) .............................. Illuminated. This indicates that
beacon has been deployed and is
transmitting a distress signal.
RESET pushbutton(2) ........................................ Should "Transmit" be selected,
switches off all beacon transmission
and resets the system. This function
will not work if the beacon has been
deployed.
EC 155 B1
9.26
08-26 Page 3
4.3 DOWNLOADING WITH ROTOR SPINNING (POST MOD 07 31B62)

The TRANSFER menu can be activated in the following HUMS operating phase:
- Helicopter on the ground.
- Both engine running: Engine 1 N1 and engine 2 N1 > 5%.
- Rotor spinning.
BACK pushbutton.............................. Press............... FLIGHT DATA
DATA TRANSFER
pushbutton.................................... Press............... FLIGHT DATA
DATA TRANSFER
ENTER pushbutton ........................... Press............... TRANSFER RUN
.......................................................... Check..............
TRANSFER DONE
NOTE
In case of TRANSFER FAIL at the end of download, the transfer may

be manually restarted during one minute. If not, a new session starts.
Pressing BACK pushbutton directly initiates a new session.
EC 155 B1
9.27
09-23 Page 5
4.4 ROTOR SHUTDOWN

When the rotor is stopped, add before switching off power:
On display screen:
TRANSFER RUN
TRANSFER DONE .....................................Check
NOTE
In case of TRANSFER FAIL
In scratch pad zone:
NO CARD ..................................................Insert card in DTU
FULL CARD ...............................................Card is full, insert new card in DTU
In order to restart transfer manually, before power cut off:

BACK pushbutton .................Press ............... FLIGHT DATA
DATA TRANSFER
pushbutton........................Press ............... FLIGHT DATA
DATA TRANSFER
ENTER pushbutton ...............Press ............... TRANSFER RUN
..............................................Check .............. TRANSFER DONE
Usage data collected during flight can be validated either on board or later on ground
station.
To validate data immediately:
ENTER key provides management of option type (Y/N)
key acknowledges value displayed and switches to next item
EC 155 B1
9.27
09-23 Page 6
Data which can be validated are :

Airborne time and number of landings
N1 and N2 cycles for engine 1
OAT at take off
NR exceedances
Torque exceedances
Engine exceedances
ACTION DISPLAY SCREEN RESULT
Press BACK FLIGHT DATA Select flight data validation mode
Press ENTER AIRBORNE 2H10 Y Enter flight data validation mode
LANDING 1 Y
Press AIRBORNE 2H10 Y Validates 2H10 as airborne time
LANDING 1 Y
Press ENTER AIRBORNE 2H10 Y Contests 1 as number of landing
LANDING 1 N
Press N11 CYCLE 1 Y Acknowledges number of landing

is wrong
N21 CYCLE 0.8 Y
Process as before
until last page
Press ENTER ACKNOWLEDGE RUN Confirms acknowledgement
Check ACKNOWLEDGE DONE
EC 155 B1
9.27
09-23 Page 7

When TEST pushbutton is pressed:
Equipment Time < 10s Time > 10 s Conclusion

and Normal
remains off functioning
Honeywell will lit

Refer to
If and/or maintenance
remains illuminated manual
Normal
and remains off functioning
L3COM Refer to
If and/or remains illuminated maintenance
manual
4.6 ROTOR TUNING

4.6.1 General
MARMS allows measurement of vibration level to establish main or tail rotor
tuning diagnostic.
key switches from one field to another.
ENTER key activates the acquisition.
Main rotor tuning is performed in 4 configurations:
MAIN.R-FPOG : on ground, rotor turning, flat pitch.
MAIN.R-HOVER : in hover, ZRA < 50 ft.
MAIN.R-100KT : level flight, IAS between 90 and 110 kt.
MAIN.R-MCP : level flight, IAS > 130 kt.
Tail rotor tuning is performed in one configuration:
TAIL.R-FPOG : on ground, rotor turning, flat pitch.
EC 155 B1
9.27
14-15 Page 8
4.6.2 Operation
Join selected aircraft configuration
From main menu:
Press twice .............. ROTOR TUNING access to rotor tuning menu
Press ENTER ............. MAIN.R-FPOG
MAIN.R-HOVER
Press as required .... MAIN.R-MCP select needed configuration
Press ENTER ............. MAIN.R-MCP RUN acquisition activated
Check.......................... MAIN.R-MCP DONE acquisition ended
In case of FAIL, check aircraft configuration, try again.

In case of another failure, abort and apply maintenance procedures on ground.
EC 155 B1
9.27
14-15 Page 9
SECTION 9.28
PRO LINE 21 CNS
SMD45 Copilot SMD45 Pilot
PFD no.1 PFD no.2
ND no.1 ND no.2
FCDM no.1 Reconfiguration Unit FCDM no.2
28V ESS2
28V SB2
28V PB2
28V SB1
28V SB1
28V DB
CTL 4000 CTL 4000 X-TALK CTL 4000
Dual COM/NAV Dual COM/NAV FMS CTL4000
ADF XPDR
functions (optional) functions (optional)
functions copilot pilot functions
28V ESS2
28V PB2
28V PB2
28V PB2
28V SB1
28V DB
VHF VHF
VOR/ILS/MB/ADF no.1 DME VOR/ILS/MB no.2 XPDR
no.1 no.2
NAV-4000 DME-4000 NAV-4500 TDR-94D
VHF-4000 VHF-4000
XPDR
ADF VHF no.1 DME VHF no.2
Antennas
antenna antenna antenna antenna
MB VOR VHF DME DME VHF VOR MB

no.1 no.1 ADF no.1 CH1 CH2 no.2 no.2 no.2
ICS
Couplers
: RX / TX CTL-4000 with Transceivers

Pro Line 21 ARINC 429 : RX Transceivers to PFD/ND VOR/LOC antenna
Audio / Micro : RX / TX Transceiver with ICS
Power supplies ESS: Essential Bus PB: Primary Bus MB antenna

DB: Direct Battery SB: Shedding Bus
GPS antenna
Pro Line 21 CNS Block diagram
EC 155 B1
9.28
13-11 Page 1
NOTE 1
HF transmission on a sub-harmonic of VHF 1 or VHF 2 active frequency
may generate interferences.
NOTE 2
Transmission on HF may interfere with the VOR receiver (particularly on the
sub-harmonics frequencies of VOR-ILS) leading to possible temporary loss
of VOR-ILS indications. It is therefore advised to avoid transmitting on HF
during instrument departure, arrival or approach based on VOR or on ILS.
EC 155 B1
9.28
13-11 Page 2
SECTION 9.29
DIGITAL AUDIO CONTROL SYSTEM
1 GENERAL
The intercommunication system enables:
- Use of the radio communication systems,
- Use of the radio navigation systems,
- Telephone communication between the crew members and passengers,
- Priority calls, which are received on all the system units, irrespective of the selector
switch settings,
- Audio alarms to be transmitted to the headsets.
2 DESCRIPTION
- An Audio Management Unit (AMU),
- A Passenger Intercom Amplifier,
- Two Electronic Relay Units (ERU) to manage back-up and emergency modes for
cabin passengers (if fitted),
- Two Audio Control Panels (ACP) are installed in the cockpit (pilot and copilot) and
one or two Audio Control Panels (ACP) (if fitted) are installed in the cabin.
Each ACP enables operation of:
- the radio communication transmitter-receivers,
- the radio navigation receivers,
- the non-adjustable audio channels,
- the intercommunication system with call provision.
- Push-to-talk controls:
- a two-position push-to-talk switch on each cyclic stick enables:
in first position: ICS communication.
in second position: radio transmission.
- a push-to-talk switch is also located on the ACPs.
- An external connector, to be used by a ground mechanic.
EC 155 B1
9.29
13-11 Page 1
2.1 AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
Figure 1
NOTE
Labels ITEM 1 and 7 given for example
Each control has a push-on/push-off action to allow

individual selection of the required transceivers:
- In the on position, the control knob is extended; the
volume of the associated transceiver can be adjusted
by rotating the knob. If backlighting is on, the
illumination of the triangular arrow will be at its
Radio maximum level.
1 communication - In the off position, the knob is retracted (pressed in),
potentiometers the volume is cut excepted when the rotary selector
(11) is pointed at the associated transceiver (refer to
item 11). If backlighting is on, the arrow illumination is
at its minimum level.
A Transmit access indicator located above the control
illuminates in green color when the associated
transceiver is selected.
EC 155 B1
9.29
13-11 Page 2
Selects a transmitter-receiver or a receiver and set a

preset minimum audio level when the associated
2 Rotary selector
potentiometer (1) is pushed in. This preset audio level
allows a safety monitoring of radio transmissions.
- TX: Radio PTT switch.

ICS/TX unstable
3 - ICS: ICS PTT switch.
push-to-talk switch
- NEUTRAL: Stick PTT switch.
Illuminates on all ACPs when the ISO CALL pushbutton is

4 ISO indicator
active on one of the crew's ACP.
5 ICS potentiometer ICS volume adjustment.
Flashes on all ACPs when the ISO CALL pushbutton is

6 CALL indicator active on one of the passenger's ACP (a tone is
transmitted in the ICS).

individual selection of the required receivers:
volume of the associated transceiver can be adjusted by
Radio navigation
7 rotating the knob. If backlighting is on, the illumination of
potentiometers
the triangular arrow will be at its maximum level.
- In the off position, the knob is retracted (pressed in), the
volume is cut. If backlighting is on, the arrow illumination
is at its minimum level.
Two functions:
ISO CALL
8 - Isolation/activation switch on the crews ACP.
pushbutton
- Call switch on the passenger's ACP.
Selection of ICS automatic PTT threshold:

- Set to the full clockwise position (PTT) the microphone
becomes active when the ICS/TX switch is on ICS
position.
VOX - Set to another position than (PTT), voice activated: the
ICS automatic PTT control allows the ICS automatic PTT threshold
9
threshold adjustment:
rotary control . Manual adjustment: from the full counterclockwise
position slowly rotate the control until no intercom
audio can be heard.
. PRESET position, the ICS automatic PTT threshold
is at a preset level.
EC 155 B1
9.29
13-11 Page 3
- NORM: Normal operation of the intercom system.

- BK-UP: The pilot and copilot ACPs maintain all
their functionalities. The cabin crew ACP
functions are disabled. Intercom with pilot
and co-pilot and transmission on the
radios selected by pilot (for ACP4) or
Pilot's and copilot's copilot (for ACP3) remain possible for the
ACPs cabin crew via the corresponding ERU.
(ACP1 and 2) - EMER: In emergency mode, the transmission
10
selection is automatically set to VHF1 for
EMER / BK-UP / NORM the copilot and VHF2 for the pilot. All
locking toggle switch audio will be at a fixed preset level.
Intercom with pilot and copilot and
transmission on the radios selected by
pilot (for ACP4) or copilot (for ACP3)
remain possible for the cabin crew via the
corresponding ERU. The Vox function is
disabled (intercom with ICS PTT).
11 TX indicator Illuminates when the TX PTT key line is active.
EC 155 B1
9.29
13-11 Page 4
SECTION 9.30
KANNAD 406 AP AND KANNAD AP INTEGRA

1 GENERAL
1.1 KANNAD AP INTEGRA
The KANNAD AP INTEGRA emergency locator transmits radio beacon signals
simultaneously on the international distress frequencies 121.5 MHz and 406.025
MHz to aid search and rescue operations.
It can be activated manually or automatically in case of a crash.
The INTEGRA ELT has a built-in GPS and is able to transmit the position of the
aircraft.
As an option, the ELT can be connected to the FMS/GPS. In this case the priority is
given to the data from the built-in GPS (if valid position is acquired) to transmit the
position of the aircraft.
1.2 KANNAD 406 AP

The KANNAD 406 AP emergency locator transmits radio beacon signals
simultaneously on the international distress frequencies 121.5 MHz, 243.0 MHz and
406.025 MHz to aid search and rescue operations.
As an option, the emergency locator KANNAD 406 AP can be connected to the
FMS/GPS. In this case the emergency locator will transmit the position of the
aircraft.
EC 155 B1
9.30
13-51 Page 1
2 DESCRIPTION
The both ELT consist essentially of the following:
a transmitter located in the cargo hold RH side,
an omni-directional antenna mounted on top of the cargo hold LH side,
a remote control panel located on the instrument panel.

- ON: Transmission is effective.
- TEST mode:
1 Amber light . One long flash indicates good test.
. A series of short flashes indicates bad test.
. A short flash indicates beginning of the test.
The transmitter switch is set to "ARM":

- ON: Beacon is activated.
- ARMED: Arms the shock sensor circuit.
3-position switch
(Automatic activation in case of a crash)
2 (ON/ARMED/
RESET & TEST) - RESET & TEST:
. Self-test mode.
. In case of activation, switching to "RESET & TEST"
can reset the ELT.
3 OPERATION
3.1 PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS
On the transmitter: check that ARM/OFF/ON switch is set to ARM.
In the cockpit: check that the remote control switch is set to ARMED.
EC 155 B1
9.30
13-51 Page 2
3.2 OPERATION TESTING
NOTE
Test procedure is to be conducted once per month
The self-test mode is a temporary mode.

This mode is selected either:
when switching from OFF to ARM the switch on the transmitter.
when switching to RESET & TEST on the remote control panel (provided that
the switch on the transmitter is set to ARM).
The buzzer operates during the self-test procedure.

After landing, set the VHF receiver to 121.5 MHz to check that the emergency
locator transmitter has not been activated accidentally.
NOTE
It is strictly prohibited to test the ELT by transmitting.
4.1 AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The transmitter is activated automatically in the event of an impact assuming the
switches are set to ARMED.
NOTE
The RESET & TEST position stops the locator transmission and resets the
impact detector.
4.2 MANUAL OPERATION

The unit may be activated manually by setting the transmitter switch to ON or, the
switch on transmitter being set to ARM, by setting the switch on the remote control
panel to ON.
4.3 PORTABLE OPERATION

The transmitter may be used autonomously on the ground as follows:
disconnect the coax from the aircraft antenna,
remove the transmitter from its mounting bracket,
select an unobstructed area,
extend the built-in tape antenna,
place the unit upright with the antenna on top,
switch on the transmitter by setting the ARM/OFF/ON switch to ON.
EC 155 B1
9.30
13-11 Page 3
SECTION 9.31
COMMUNICATION, RADIO NAVIGATION AND

NAVIGATION INSTALLATION WITH THE
DUAL GTN 750H
THE PILOT'S GUIDE PUBLISHED BY THE MANUFACTURE MUST BE USED FOR THE
COMPLETE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.
1 GENERAL
This system provides radio communication, transponder control and radio navigation
(See SUP.62 for navigation functions).
2 DESCRIPTION
The Garmin GTN 750H is a panel-mounted Global Navigation System with a 6.9 in
diagonal LCD touchscreen display providing the following functions:
- Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS),
- VHF/AM radio-communication,
- VOR radio-navigation,
- Localizer and Glideslope Instrument Landing Systems,
- Remote transponder control.
The GTN750H incorporates an internal base map database, which includes basic
ground-based references such as roads + water.
Two database options are available:

- A Garmin worldwide coverage database with low level terrain detail,
- A regional database including accurate terrain height detail (this option is required
for the HTAWS function (if installed)).
The installation also incorporates the following equipment:

- HF/SSB 9000 radio (if installed),
- DME 4000,
- Marker,
- ADF 4000.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 1
2.1 ARCHITECTURE
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 2
3 SYSTEM
3.1 COMMUNICATION
3.1.1 VHF
- Volume: Turn knob for volume control.
NOTE
Volume should be set to 90% on the GTN, to maximum on
Volume / Squelch headsets (if applicable), and then radio volume managed
1 Emergency through the DACS.
Frequency
- Squelch: To override the automatic squelch, press the
knob momentarily.
- Emergency Frequency selection: Press and hold for
approximately 2 sec to select 121.5 as the active
frequency.
Active The upper row displays the active frequency.

2 Touching the active frequency swaps the active and
COM-Frequency standby frequencies.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 3
The COM Standby window is displayed by touching the

standby frequency, and allows the following functions:
- Entering of a new frequency using the keypad (and as
required Backspace key),
- Find: Search for a frequency (Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan
Display-COM or User frequency),
3
Standby - Monitor: Allows simultaneous monitoring of the Standby
and Active frequencies,
- XFER: Touching the XFER key will place the selected
frequency directly into the Active field (2),
- Enter: Touching the Enter key places the selected
frequency into the Standby field (5).
The large and small knobs can be used to modify the

standby frequency.
COM-Frequency Short press - changes between the COM and NAV windows
4
change NAV as being active.
Long press - exchanges the active and standby frequency
(in the active COM or NAV window).
The lower row displays the standby frequency.

Standby Touching the standby frequency opens the COM Standby
5
COM-Frequency window (3) which allows modification of the standby
frequency.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 4
VHF2 Emergency Pushbutton functions
The pushbutton is located on the pedestal between the two GTN 750H and
provides emergency control of the VHF2 in case of GTN control failure.

The pushbutton can be used to change the active and standby frequencies or select
the emergency frequency.
Item Function
- Less than 2 sec press ................. Toggle between Active and Standby
frequencies,
- More than 2 sec press................. Enter Emergency mode by setting
121.5 MHz as active frequency.
Short /Long press sequence examples:
Normal mode Normal mode
-
Short press
Normal mode Emergency mode
-
Long press
Then:
Emergency mode Emergency mode
(no change)
Short press
Or:
Emergency mode Normal mode
(return to initial
Normal mode
frequencies,
Long press but inversed)
NOTE
When in Emergency Radio mode, the "Less than 2 sec
press" function is inhibited. A more than 2 sec press is
necessary to exit to emergency mode.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 5
3.1.2 HF 9000 (if installed)

The cursor is positioned under the function/number to be
1 Cursor
changed (using the CURSOR control (7)).
Three alphanumeric characters display the emission mode
2 OPR
selected by the VALUE knob (6).
Two alphanumeric characters display the emission mode
3 MODE
FREQ/CHAN Numeric characters display frequency or channel number for
4
(numeric character) normal operation.
PWR Three level bar indicator for selectable output power level.
5
(level bar)
Turn to increment or decrement the function selected by the
6 VALUE (selector)
cursor.
Turn to move the cursor left or right to select the function to
7 CURSOR (selector)
be changed.
FREQ/LD Depress to load desired receive-transmit emission mode,
8
(pushbutton) frequency.
Turn to select maritime, emergency and user programmed
9 CHAN (selector)
preset channels.
DSBL
10 Depressing this button disables the squelch.
(pushbutton)
11 SQL Squelch control.
12 VOL Volume control.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 6
3.2 Transponder GTX 33H

The GTX 33H ES is controlled via the touchscreen display of the GTN 750H.
The transponder status and commands are crossfilled between the two GTN 750H
units.
Overhead Panel
The transponder receives weight-on-wheels information to allow automatic

selection of the transponder mode of operation.
NOTE 1
The Transponder passes automatically to ALT mode above 30 kt ground speed.
NOTE 2
Even if ALT mode is selected / displayed, the transponder will not transmit
information until the RadAlt is > 25 ft and the wheels are off ground.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 7
Touch the IDENT key once to reply with an identifying

1 Ident key squawk code. The IDENT key will show a green ID in the
top right corner of the key to indicate active Ident.
Code and mode display.

Transponder
2 R - Reply annunciator.
Settings
Touch to open the transponder control page.
VFR Squawk Code

3 Touch the VFR key to set the VFR squawk code (1200).
(1200) Key
Squawk Code
4 Code can be changed using the touch keypad.
Window
Transponder Green Bar indicates Standby, On or Altitude Reporting

5
Operation Mode Mode selection.
6 Flight ID Displays the Flight ID. Touch to change the ID.
Context Sensitive Instructions For Rotary Knob.

7 Context
Rotary knob can be used to change the code.
Enable ES
8 Touch to toggle extended squitter (ADSB-Out).
(if installed)
It is recommended to select the XPDR to ON once the GPS position is stable to

avoid automatic transition to ALT mode.
NOTE 1
In case of dual GTN 750H failure, the transponder continues to operate.
NOTE 2
The transponder function may be impacted by a lighting strike.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 8
3.3 RADIO NAVIGATION
3.3.1 VOR / ILS
When the NAV window is active,

- Volume: Turn knob for ident volume control.
NOTE
1 Volume / IDent Volume should be set to 90% on the GTN, to maximum on
headsets (if applicable), and then radio volume managed
through the DACS.
- IDent: Press to enable beacon identifier to be heard.
The upper row displays the active frequency.

Active
2 Touching the active frequency swaps the active and standby
NAV-Frequency
frequencies.

Standby NAV- Touching the standby frequency opens the NAV Standby
3
Frequency window (4) which allows modification of the standby
frequency.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 9
The NAV Standby window is displayed by touching the

4 Display
or User frequency),
Short press to activate the NAV window (NAV window

remains active for 30 seconds if no action, and defaults back
COM-Frequency to the COM window as active).
5
change NAV When the NAV window is active, the large and small knobs
can be used to modify the standby frequency.
Long press exchanges the active and standby frequencies.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 10
3.3.2 DME
The DME 4000 is integrated with the GTN750, with DME information displayed on
the IND-5000 indicator on the instrument panel (figure 1) and on the MFDs
associated with the respective VOR/ILS data.
Figure 1: DME indicator on instrument panel
1 DIST Distance.
2 G/S Ground Speed.
3 DIM The DIM control adjusts the display brightness.
4 CHAN Displays Channel selected (1 or 2) for display.
5 TTS Time To Station.
Test - Illuminates the indicators.

6 TEST / NVG
NVG - Dims the display for night vision levels.
The DME channel selector (figure 2) is used to turn on/off the IND-5000 and
display either channel 1 or channel 2 information on the indicator.
Figure 2: DME channel selector
The HOLD function is activated with dedicated HOLD pushbuttons for each DME
channel located on the center pedestal (figure 3).
Figure 3
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 11
3.3.3 Marker receiver and indicator

The Honeywell KR21 is a standalone indicator providing Airway, Outer, and Middle
marker visual and audio information. It is located on the instrument panel.
TLH / SENS T: Test - illuminates the indicators.

1 3 position L: Low Sensitivity.
selector H: High Sensitivity.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 12
3.3.4 ADF-4000
1 Display Displays the active and standby frequencies and

main modes.
- Inner knob: Tunes least significant digits of

preset frequency.
2 Right Rotary Knob - Outer knob: Tunes most significant digits of
preset frequency.
- Press to swap active preset frequency.
- Inner knob: Brightness control.

- Outer knob: Mode selection.
3 Left Rotary Knob
- Short Press: Beacon identifier on/off.
- Long press: OFF.
NOTE
Pressing the left and right pushbuttons at the same time for more than 2 sec will
display the Radio Parameter Page (RADIO PARM) used for radio parameter
modification. Right button, to select and modify parameters.
The page times out to return to the normal display.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page13
SECTION 9.32
DMAP EURONAV
THE PILOTS GUIDE PUBLISHED BY THE MANUFACTURER MUST BE USED FOR
1 GENERAL
The EURONAV is a digital map integrating miscellaneous data and overlays.
EC 155 B1
9.32
13-11 Page 1
2 DESCRIPTION
2.1 DMAP SWITCH
Figure 1: D MAP switch
The DMAP switch is located on the console.

OFF: The digital map is OFF
ON : The digital map is ON
RST: Allows resetting of the Digital MAP
2.2 DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT

The display control unit is located on the instrument panel.
Figure 2: Display Control Unit
1 SRC pushbutton: Scroll to the different video sources.

2 PIP pushbutton: Superimpose a sub picture on the main picture (Picture In
Picture).
3 PBP pushbutton: Split the screen in two windows (Picture By Picture).
4 SWAP pushbutton: Swap the PIP or PBP window sources.
5 FRZ pushbutton: Freeze any MAIN HD, RGB, Y/C, COMP picture.
6 ZOOM pushbuttons: Zoom in/out the MAIN picture, picture or resize a PIP
window.
7 Joystick: Browse within menu and move the centre of the frozen or
the zoomed image.
8 Rotary Knob: Provides push ON push OFF capability and dimming of the
screen brightness.
EC 155 B1
9.32
13-44 Page 2
2.3 DIGITAL MAP CONTROL UNIT
Figure 3 - Digital Map Control Unit
The digital map control unit is located on the console

EVT Marker Menu
SRC Search Menu
MEN Main Menu
ESC Escape Function
ENT Enter Function (access to macro-controls)
- Zoom Out
+ Zoom In
EMG Emergency Menu
A/R Rose Menu
MAP Maps and Labels Menu
The 4 arrow keys are used for map, menu and text window navigation.
3 OPERATIONAL INFORMATION
The DMAP is to be used only for situational awareness and complementary information.
CAUTION
NOT TO BE USED AS PRIMARY DISPLAY FOR NAVIGATION OR
WEATHER RADAR
NOTE
- RDR-2000: Weather radar display available only for range from 10 to 240 Nm.
EC 155 B1
9.32
13-11 Page 3
RCA
SECTION 9.33
SECOND SEARCH LIGHT
1 GENERAL
An additional search light, controllable in elevation and azimuth, can be mounted in the
nose area, on the LH side of the lower fairing symmetrically to the basic landing light.
Figure 1: Controls and indicators
EC 155 B1
9.33
14-04 Page 1
*RC*
SECTION 9.33
SECOND SEARCH LIGHT
1 GENERAL

EC 155 B1
9.33
14-04 Page 1
3 OPERATION
A selector switch on the overhead panel is used by the pilot to select the light he wants
(RH and LH search light). The copilot can control the light not selected by the pilot.
Each light is turned on by setting the switch on the pilot's and copilot's collective pitch
lever to ON.
The four-way pushbutton on the collective pitch lever controls the elevation and
azimuth for the light.
The green LAND LT indicator light on the CAD indicates that the landing light switch is
ON.
To retract the light, pulse the switch on the collective pitch lever with the switch set to
RTRCT.
EC 155 B1
9.33
02-20 Page 2
SECTION 9.37
COCKPIT CAMERA VISION 1000
1 GENERAL
The VISION 1000 installation is a cockpit imaging device.
The camera can be used to replay flights.
The system records:
Aircraft position by GPS data,

Flight attitudes,
Cockpit imagery (instrument panel, controls and outside environments as visible
through the windshield,
Ambient audio.
The cockpit camera operates automatically as soon as the helicopter is powered on.
EC 155 B1
9.37
16-12 Page 1
2 DESCRIPTION
The installation is composed of:
- A camera located on the cabin ceiling,
- A GPS antenna located in the instrument panel.
Item Description
1 GPS connection linked to the GPS antenna
2 Camera
3 Access door for SD card
4 SD memory card
5 Status indicator LED
6 Power port (28 VDC)
Ethernet port (for external communications with a
7
ground station)
EC 155 B1
9.37
16-12 Page 2
3 OPERATIONS
The cockpit camera does not require any flight crew attention during aircraft operation.
For correct operation, an SD memory card must be inserted in the camera.
The end of the recording is automatically done as soon as the helicopter is
powered OFF.
Status indicator (LED):
LED status Description

Red Failure
Blue Start sequence
Green Normal operation

- SD card not inserted
Yellow - Non-formatted SD card
- GPS position not received
No LED illuminated Equipment not functioning
NOTE
The recorded data are automatically overwritten when the memory

of the SD card is full. (Possibility of 4 hours recording).
EC 155 B1
9.37
16-12 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL APPENDIX
EC 155 B1
PROCEDURE GUIDE FOR OFFSHORE OR SIMILAR
ELEVATED HELIDECK - PC2 DLE
IMPORTANTE NOTE
The effectivity of the appendix at the latest revision is specified on the

List of Effective Pages.

EC 155 B1
APP.9.1.P1
12-08 Page 1

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
Without indication............... Applicable to all aircraft.
Indicated ............................ Specific to indicated civilian Airworthiness Authority.
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:

XXX.................................... Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX.
(3) GROUP OF AIRCRAFT EFFECTIVITY:

PC2 DLE ........................... Specific to aircraft authorized to use PC2 DLE
procedures
DATE
APPENDIX PAGES (1) (2) (3)
CODE
APP.9.1.P1 1 12-08
APP.9.1.P5 1 to 2 12-08 PC2 DLE
APP.9.1 1 to 28 12-08
EC 155 B1 APP.9.1.P5
PC2 DLE 12-08 Page 1
BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2)
NORMAL REVISION 0 DATE CODE 11-08 NOT ISSUED
NORMAL REVISION 1 DATE CODE 12-08

Title Incorporation of hot conditions (ISA+10 < OAT < ISA +30) performance
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information
CUSTOMIZED RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (3) PC2 DLE

Title Creation of the Appendix dealing with PC2 DLE performance.
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information
Title Distribution of PC2DLE procedure guide enlarges to all aircraft.
Revised
APP.9.1.P5
information
Deleted
None
information
EC 155 B1 APP.9.1.P5
APPENDIX 9.1
1 GENERAL
This section provides additional procedure and performance: PC2 DLE (PC2 Defined
Limited Exposure) in order to operate over OFFSHORE or similar elevated helideck
environment.
It is the operator duty to check that there is no objection from their National Aviation
Authority of using PC2DLE procedures
The principle of PC2 DLE is to determine the optimized take-off and landing weight for
the mission taking into account the best safety compromise between:
- Risks induced by helideck environment (AEO)

- Risks induced by exposure time after an engine failure (OEI)
- Risks induced by potential additional flights.
Depending of the needs, 2 ways are offered:
- Either calculation of the take-off and landing weight versus the wished (defined) Total
Theoretical Exposure Time (TTET) and Hp, OAT, available drop down, factorized
headwind.
- Or calculation of the defined TTET versus the wished take-off and landing weight and
Hp, OAT, available drop down, factorized headwind.
Observations:
The Total Theoretical Exposure Time (TTET) is calculated with factored Headwind (see
definition) for a total and sudden engine failure and with the remaining engine without
power margin.
In many case the real exposure time should be lower due to positive effect of actual
headwind, engine failure profile and available engine power margins.
Performances dealing with the PC2 DLE operation given in this section are based on
the following standard takeoff and landing procedures.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 1
1.1 DEFINITIONS
ITEM DEFINITION
CAT. A
CAT.A performance: climb at VTOSS, OEI 2 min from 35 ft to 200 ft.
1st segment
CAT. A CAT.A performance: climb at Vy, OEI CONTINUOUS from 200 ft to
2d segment 1000 ft.
Committal Point. The committal point is defined as the point in the
approach at which the pilot flying decides that, in the event of an engine
CP
failure being recognised, the safest option is to continue to the deck.
CP < 40 ft.
Defined Point After Takeoff. The point within the takeoff and initial
DPATO climbing phase before which the helicopters ability to continue the flight
safely with OEI is not assured and a forced landing may be required.
Defined Point Before Landing (VLSS and -200 ft/min < R/D < 0 ft/min).
The point within the approach and landing phase after which the
DPBL
helicopters ability to continue the flight safely with OEI is not assured
and a forced landing may be required.
Drop down Height loss below the elevated helideck surface.
The actual period during which the OEI performance of the helicopter in
Exposure
still air does not guarantee a safe forced landing or the safe
time
continuation of the flight.
Factored
Headwind after factoring.
wind
PC2 DLE Performance Class 2 Defined Limited Exposure.
RP Rotation Point. The rotation point is defined as the point at which a
cyclic input is made to initiate a nose-down attitude change during the
takeoff flight path when reaching a height of 15 ft with the rotor at the
edge of the elevated helideck.
TTET Total Theoretical Exposure Time.
V1 Decision speed: V1 = VTOSS - 10 kt
VLSS Minimum groundspeed 40 ft above the helideck at which the drop down
is possible.
VTOSS Takeoff Safety Speed is determined for:
Tempered condition ISA - 10 OAT ISA + 10: VTOSS is 50 kt IAS.
Hot condition ISA + 10 < OAT ISA + 30: VTOSS is 55 kt IAS.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 2
2 OPERATING FLIGHT ENVELOPE LIMITS

The performance given in this appendix is only applicable within the following operative
flight envelope:
- 1000 ft Hp + 1000 ft
ISA - 10 OAT ISA + 30
NOTE
For ISA - 10 OAT ISA + 10 (A - tempered conditions) or ISA + 10 < OAT ISA +
30 (B - hot conditions) use the appropriate set of graph.
B
A
3 TAKEOFF PROCEDURES
3.1 NORMAL TWIN-ENGINE TAKE-OFF FROM ELEVATED HELIDECK
kt
Figure 1: Elevated helideck normal AEO takeoff

EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 3
1. Heating system..................................................... Off

3. NR increases........................................................ Check 360 rpm
4. Altimeter and Radio altimeter DH ......................... adjusted
5. Parking brake ....................................................... Applied
6. Hover at 3 ft.......................................................... Rotor at the edge of the elevated
helideck
7. Collective pitch position ........................................ Memorized (use trigger depress
if fitted)
NOTE
Hover 3 ft collective pitch position can be memorized as a predetermined

reference to adjust 330 rpm following an engine failure.
8. Apply MTP............................................................ Establish through collective effort

At the RP:
9. Pitch Attitude change by 15 ................................ Nose down
10. Attitude ................................................................. Nose-down reduce
11. Power ................................................................... Reduce to MCP and collective
trim released
12. Vy ......................................................................... Establish
altitude is reached
17. Parking brake ....................................................... released
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 4
3.2 TAKEOFF WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE BEFORE OR AT THE RP

A safe force landing on the deck is enabled Aircraft is operating outside the
exposure time
RP
15 ft
Figure 2: Elevated helideck rejected takeoff
AS SOON AS FAILURE IS DETECTED: ABORTED TAKEOFF

1. Collective pitch............................................... Slightly decrease around pitch
position memorized at hover 3 ft
(use trim release if fitted)
2. NR 330........................................................ Maintain
3. Attitude........................................................... Adjust to reach the landing area
Before touch down:
4. Collective pitch............................................... Apply continuously depressing
collective trigger
Near the ground
5. Collective pitch............................................... Apply maximum pitch if necessary
After touch-down:
6. Collective pitch............................................... Fully lower
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 5
3.3 TAKEOFF WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE AT OR AFTER DPATO:

The aircraft is capable of continuing the flight. Aircraft is operating outside the
exposure time
3ft
Figure 3: Elevated helideck OEI at or after DPATO
AS SOON AS FAILURE IS DETECTED: CONTINUED TAKEOFF

1. Pitch Attitude set ............................................Quickly nose-down - 15
2. Collective pitch ...............................................Maintain until audio horn then lower
to maintain NR above 320 rpm
At V1:
3. Pitch attitude...................................................Nose-on the horizon
4. Collective pitch ...............................................Adjust to maintain NR > 330 rpm
5. OEI 2 min .......................................................Select
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 6
At 200 ft
7. In level flight, IAS................................... Vy.
8. At Vy, landing gear ................................ Retract.
9. OEI continuous ...................................... Select.
10. Collective pitch ...................................... Adjust to maintain.
NR > 330 rpm.
11. RPM switch ........................................... NORM RPM H
12. NR 330 rpm ........................................ Maintain.
13. Parking brake ........................................ Released
At 1000 ft:
14. Affected engine ENG #.......................... OFF.
15. Affected engine booster pumps ............. OFF.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 7
3.4 TAKEOFF WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE BETWEEN THE RP

(FUSELAGE ROTATION STARTED) AND BEFORE DPATO
A safe forced landing is not assured - Aircraft is operating inside exposure time.
3ft
Figure 4 Elevated helideck OEI landing or ditching

1. Pitch Attitude set ..........................................Nose down 15 until the edge
of the elevated heliport is cleared
Approaching the surface:
4. Nose down attitude.......................................reduce to decrease rate of descent
If the rate of descent is stopped after the nose down attitude is reduced, the flight
might be continued.
ELSE
5. IAS ...............................................................Reduce for touch down
6. Floatation (if fitted) ......................................Inflated for ditching
7. Control attitude and cushion touch down
NOTE
The Total Theoretical Exposure Time (TTET) is calculated with factored wind
and with the remaining engine without power margin (see 4).
In many case the real exposure time should be lower due to positive effect of:
- Actual wind (see 4 example 1, 2): with the wind correction the real exposure
time could be estimated - Headwind 10 kt (respectively 20 kt ...) greater than
the factored wind reduced the exposure time by 1.5 s (respectively 3 s ...).
- Engine failure profile.
- Available engine power margins.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 8
4 INFORMATION ON PERFORMANCE WITH AN ENGINE

FAILURE UPON ELEVATED HELIDECK TAKEOFF
The takeoff weight of this section guarantees at least the CATEGORY A 1st and 2d
segments climbing performance and the twin-engine hover performance OGE.
For each OAT Range (Temperate conditions ISA - 10 OAT ISA + 10 (refer to figure
6) and Hot conditions ISA + 10 < OAT ISA + 30 (refer to figure 7)), the Takeoff
performance is presented through two charts and a correction table to take account of
wind, Hp and OAT.
- The upper chart (refer to example figure 5) gives the maximum weight which at least
guarantees to respect the CATEGORY A 1st and 2d segments climbing performance
and the twin-engine hover performance OGE depending on Hp and ISA (or ISA +20).
- The lower chart (refer to example figure 5) gives the Total Theoretical Exposure Time
(wind 0 kt, SL, ISA or ISA + 20) depending on the takeoff weight and the available
drop down (helideck height minus wished margin).
- The correction table (for each OAT range) gives the corrections to be applied to the
Total Theoretical Exposure Time given by the second chart (wind 0 kt, SL, ISA (or
ISA + 20)) due to the factored wind, actual Hp and ISA conditions.
Charts and table enable determining:

- Either the TTET depending on Hp, OAT, factored wind, available drop down and
wished takeoff weight (see example 1 figure 5).
- Or the takeoff weight depending on HP, OAT, factored wind, available drop down and
wished TTET (see example 2 figure 5).
NOTE
1) TTET begins at the Rotation Point. It includes:

- The theoretical exposure time to deck edge (around 0.5 s up to ISA+10)
corresponding to the hatched blue zone on the TTET graph determination.
- The theoretical exposure time when deck edge is cleared (drop down).
2) TTET is calculated with factored wind and with the remaining engine without
power margin.
In many cases the real exposure time should be lower due to positive effect of
actual headwind, engine failure profile and available engine power margins.
With the wind correction the effect on the real exposure time could be
estimated - see example 1
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 9
TOTAL THEORETICAL EXPOSURE TIME CORRECTION (Minimum TTET 0.5 s)

(Factored) wind effect Pressure altitude effect ISA effect
+10 ktdecrease TTET by 1.5s
+1000 ftincrease TTET by 0.5s +10Cincrease TTET by 1.0s
-1000 ftsame TTET -10C same TTET
CONDITIONS
PC2DLE MAXIMUM
- NR=360 rpm SL/ISA TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE
- AIR INTAKES SCREENS
Figure 5 Example
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 10
Example 1 (refer to figure 5): TTET determination depending on Wished

takeoff weight = 4700 kg for:
- Hp= 500 ft
- OAT= 19C (ISA+5) (see graph)
- Actual headwind = 20 kt factored wind 10 kt
- Available drop down = 50 ft
A) Ensure that the operating flight envelope limits are observed (refer to 2) OK.
B) Use the appropriate set of OAT range
C) The upper chart gives a Maximum weight = 4820 kg (above wished takeoff weight
OK).
D) The lower chart gives (for a weight of 4700 kg) a TTET = 2.3 s
(without wind, sea level, ISA).
E) The table gives the following corrections for TTET determination:
- Factored wind correction -1.5 s,
- Hp correction +0.25 s
- ISA correction +0.5 s
TTET = 2.3 (TTET without wind) - 1.5 (wind correction effect) + 0.25 (Hp correction) +
0.5 (ISA correction) = 1.55 s.
Observation: Due to the wind factorisation, the real exposure time should be lower.
With a headwind 10 kt (respectively 20 kt, ...) greater than the factored
wind, the exposure time is reduced by 1.5 s (respectively 3.0 s, ...).
For example 1: Actual headwind = 20 kt factored wind 10 kt. So actual headwind 10 kt

greater than the factored wind, real TTET should be = 1.55 - 1.5 0.5 s.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 11
Example 2 (refer to figure 5): Takeoff weight determination depending on

Wished total theoretical exposure time = 1 s for:
- Hp= -500 ft
- OAT= 16C (ISA) (see graph)
- Actual wind = 20 kt Factored wind 10 kt
C) The table gives the following corrections to be applied to TTET to determine the total
theoretical exposure time without wind at sea level and ISA:
- Factored wind correction +1.5 s
- Hp correction 0 s.
- ISA correction 0 s.
TTET without wind at sea level and ISA (to be used for weight determination) = 1
(Wished total theoretical exposure time)+ 1.5 (Factored wind correction) 2.5 s.
D) The lower chart gives (for a TTET of 2.5 s) a weight = 4740 kg.
E) The upper chart gives maximum weight which at least guaranties to respect the
CATEGORY A 1st and 2d segments climbing performance = 4920 kg.
F) The maximum takeoff weight is the minimum value between 4740 kg and 4920 kg
Maximum takeoff weight 4740 kg.

greater than the factored wind, real TTET should be = 1 - 1.5 0.5 s.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 12
5 TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE
5.1 SL/ISA

CONDITIONS
PC2DLE MAXIMUM
Figure 6
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 13
5.2 SL/ISA + 20

(Factored) wind effect Pressure altitude effect ISA + 20 effect
-1000 ftsame TTET -10C decrease TTET by 0.5s
CONDITIONS
PC2DLE MAXIMUM
- NR=360 rpm SL/ISA + 20 TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE
Figure 7
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 14
6 LANDING PROCEDURES
6.1 NORMAL TWIN ENGINE LANDING ON ELEVATED HELIDECK
Figure 14 Flat offset approach
Figure 8 Normal AEO landing
CAUTION
THE PILOT MUST HAVE THE HELIDECK ON HIS SIDE OF THE HELICOPTER.
NOTE
VLSS is the minimum ground speed, 40 ft above the deck at which drop down is
possible.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 15
1. Compute VLSS and TTET (refer to landing performance 8).
2. RPM switch.................................................................... HIGH RPM H
3. NR increases ................................................................. Check 360 rpm

4. Parking brake ................................................................ Applied
5. Carry out a shallow approach aiming to achieve VLSS with a rate of descent lower
than 200 ft/min
6. Reduce speed from VLSS to 10 kt of groundspeed at a rate of approximately 2kt/s.
7. From the committal point drift to the helideck while reducing speed.
Proceed with normal landing:
8. Touch down vertically.
CAUTION
NOSE-UP ATTITUDE MUST NOT EXCEED 10 NEAR GROUND LEVEL TO

PREVENT TAIL ROTOR GUARD FROM STRIKING THE GROUND.
9. Cyclic stick..................................................................... Centered.

After touch-down:
10. Collective pitch lever.................................................... Low-pitch stop.
Depress trim feels release
control on collective lever.
11. RPM switch ................................................................. NORM RPM H
12. NR decreases.............................................................. Check
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 16
6.2 ENGINE FAILURE BEFORE OR AT DPBL - ABORTED LANDING

AND OEI CLIMB
Go around is mandatory Aircraft is operating outside the exposure time
- 5
Figure 9: Aborted landing and OEI climb
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 17
AS SOON AS THE FAILURE IS DETECTED: GO AROUND

1. Collective pitch.......................................Raise as necessary while maintaining
NR > 330 rpm.
2. Pitch Attitude..........................................Set - 5 within approx. 1,5 seconds
to accelerate to VTOSS (50 or 55 kt
depending on OAT). Maintain
collective position to adjust 330 rpm.

3. OEI 2 min...............................................Select.
At 200 ft:
5. In level flight IAS ....................................Vy.
6. Landing gear ..........................................Retract.
7. OEI continuous ......................................Select.
8. Collective pitch.......................................Adjust to maintain NR > 330 rpm.
As soon as the climb is established:
9. RPM switch ............................................NORM. RPM H
10. NR 330 rpm ......................................Maintain.
11. Parking brake.......................................Released
At 1000 ft:
12. Affected engine ENG # ........................OFF.
13. Affected engine booster pumps ...........OFF.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 18
6.3 LANDING WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE AT OR AFTER THE CP

Landing is mandatory.
Figure 10: Landing with an engine failure at or after the CP
AS SOON AS THE FAILURE IS DETECTED:

1. Continue drift to the helideck without pausing for hover IGE.
2. Control NR.
As aircraft approaches the helideck surface:
3. Control attitude and cushion touchdown.
4. On the helideck, reduce collective pitch to minimum.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 19
6.4 LANDING WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE AFTER DPBL AND BEFORE CP

A safe forced landing is not assured. Aircraft is operating within the exposure time.
Attitude
Change - 20
Figure 11: Landing with an engine failure after DPBL and before CP
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 20

1. Pitch Attitude set .......................................... Nose down 20
2. Collective pitch ............................................. Maintain until audio horn then
3. Rotor rpm ..................................................... maintain above 330 rpm
4. Nose down attitude ...................................... reduce to decrease rate of descent
might be continued.
ELSE
5. IAS ............................................................... Reduce for touch down
6. Floatation (if fitted) ...................................... Inflated for ditching
NOTE
the factored wind reduced the exposure time by 4 s (respectively 8 s ...).
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 21

FAILURE - LANDING ON ELEVATED HELIDECK
The landing weight of this section guarantees at least the CATEGORY A 1st and 2d
segments climbing performance in case of go-around and the twin-engine hover
performance OGE.
14) and Hot conditions ISA + 10 < OAT ISA + 30 (refer to figure 15)), the Landing
performance is presented through two charts and correction table to take account of
wind, Hp and OAT.
- The lower chart (refer to example figure 13) gives the Total Theoretical Exposure
Time and the VLSS (wind 0 kt, SL, ISA or ISA + 20) depending on the landing
weight and the available drop down (helideck height minus wished margin).
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 22

- Either the TTET and VLSS depending on Hp, OAT, factored wind, available drop
down and wished landing weight (see example 1 figure 13).
- Or the landing weight depending on HP, OAT, factored wind, available drop down
and wished TTET (see example 2 figure 13).
NOTE
1) The TTET consists of:
- The exposure time which begins at the DPBL and ends at CP (drop down) -
cf. ZONE A.
- Only for heavy weights and ISA + 20, it could include an exposure time to
deck which begins at CP - cf. ZONE B (refer to figure 12).
power margin.
Figure 12
With the wind correction the effect on the real exposure time could be estimated
- see example 1
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 23
TOTAL THEORETICAL EXPOSURE TIME CORRECTION

CONDITIONS
PC2DLE MAXIMUM
- NR=360 rpm SL/ISA LANDING PERFORMANCE
Figure 13 Example
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 24
Example 1 (refer to figure 13): TTET and VLSS determination depending on

Wished takeoff weight = 4600 kg for:
- Hp= 500 ft
C) The upper chart gives a Maximum weight = 4820 kg (above wished landing weight
OK).
D) The lower chart gives (for a weight of 4600 kg) a TTET = 5.35 s (without wind, sea
level, ISA) and a VLSS 20.5 kt.
- Factored wind correction -4 s,
TTET = 5.35 (TTET without wind) - 4 (wind correction effect) + 0.5 (Hp correction) +
With a headwind 10 kt (respectively 20 kt ...) greater than the factored
wind, the exposure time is reduced by 4 s (respectively 8 s ...).
For example 1: Actual headwind = 20 kt factored wind 10 kt. So actual headwind
10 kt greater than the factored wind, real TTET should be = 2.6 - 4 0 s.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 25
Example 2 (refer to figure 13): Landing weight determination depending on

- Hp= -500 ft
- Factored wind correction +4 s
(Wished total theoretical exposure time) + 4 (Factored wind correction) 5 s.
D) The lower chart gives (for a TTET of 5 s) a weight = 4570 kg and a VLSS 19.5 kt.
F) The maximum landing weight is the minimum value between 4240 kg and 4920 kg
Maximum landing weight 4570 kg.
10 kt greater than the factored wind, real TTET should be = 1 - 4 0 s.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 26
8 LANDING PERFORMANCE
8.1 SL/ISA

CONDITIONS
PC2DLE MAXIMUM
Figure 14
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 27
8.1 SL/ISA

-1000 ft decrease TTET by 1.0s -10C decrease TTET by 1.5s
CONDITIONS
PC2DLE MAXIMUM
- NR=360 rpm SL/ISA + 20 LANDING PERFORMANCE
Figure 15
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 28
SECTION 10
ADDITIONAL PERFORMANCE
CONTENTS
10.1 CORRESPONDENCE CHARTS PAGES
PRESSURE ALTITUDE/DENSITY ALTITUDE .......................................................1

TAS/CAS.................................................................................................................2
10.2 SERVICE CEILING
TWIN ENGINE: MAX CONTINUOUS RATING.......................................................1

OEI: 2 min POWER RATING ..................................................................................2
OEI: CONTINUOUS POWER RATING...................................................................3
10.3 LEVEL FLIGHT PERFORMANCE

SINGLE AND TWIN-ENGINE LEVEL FLIGHT SPEED AND HOURLY FUEL
CONSUMPTION CHARTS .....................................................................................1
PERFORMANCE CHARTS WITH AIR INTAKE SCREENS ...................................1
PERFORMANCE CHARTS WITH SAND FILTERS INACTIVE ............................17
10.4 HOVER FLIGHT PERFORMANCE

TWIN ENGINE: IGE AT MAX CONTINUOUS RATING ........................................... 1
TWIN ENGINE: OGE AT MAX CONTINUOUS RATING .........................................2
OEI: IGE AT 30 s RATING.......................................................................................3
OEI: OGE AT 30 s RATING .....................................................................................4
EC 155 B1
10.0.P6
08-26 Page 1
SECTION 10.3
LEVEL FLIGHT PERFORMANCE
1 SINGLE AND TWIN-ENGINE LEVEL FLIGHT SPEED AND

HOURLY FUEL CONSUMPTION CHARTS
Choose the altitude / O.A.T. combination nearest to flight conditions.
Interpolate if necessary.
1.1 TORQUE SCALE

Dotted lines:
- AEO TAKEOFF: indicates the torque at takeoff on two engines, which can deliver
the minimum guaranteed power.
- AEO MAX CONT: indicates the torque with two engines at max. continuous power,
which can deliver the maximum guaranteed power.
- OEI MAX CONT: indicates the torque with one engine at max. continuous power,
which can deliver the minimum guaranteed power.
1.2 MAXIMUM ENDURANCE SPEED

This is given by dotted line E.
2 LIST OF FIGURES
2.1 PERFORMANCE CHARTS WITH AIR INTAKE SCREENS
Figure 1: Hp=0 ft OAT= -5C (ISA -20)
Figure 2: Hp=0 ft OAT= 15C (ISA)
Figure 3: Hp=0 ft OAT= 35C (ISA +20)
Figure 7: Hp=5000 ft OAT= 25C (ISA+20)
Figure 10: Hp=10000 ft OAT= -5C (ISA)
Figure 11: HP=10000 ft OAT= 15C (ISA +20)
Figure 13: Hp=15000 ft OAT= -35C (ISA 20)
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 1
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 2
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 3
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 4
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 5
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 6
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 7
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 8
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 9
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 10
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page11
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 12
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 13
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 14
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 15
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 16
2.2 PERFORMANCE CHARTS WITH SAND FILTERS INACTIVE

EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 17
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 18
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 19
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 20
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 21
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 22
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 23
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 24
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 25
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 26
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 27
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 28
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 29
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 30
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 31
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 32
COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 155 B1
IMPORTANT NOTE
by the operator.
Pages.

EC 155 B1
0.0.P1
14-04 Page 1
REVISION TO AIRCRAFT PUBLICATION : EC 155 B1
PUBLICATION CONCERNED: FLIGHT MANUAL COMPLEMENTARY PART
Volume 2 REVISION No. 15 DATE-CODE: 16-12 CERTIFICATION: /

. Update guide (pages to be deleted/inserted),
. Main points of the revision,
. Check that pages in each section and those specified in the list of effective pages,
. Return the acknowledgment card,
. This list of amended pages may be filed (apart from the manual).
UPDATE GUIDE
SRD - 1 27/01/2016 - 1 16/06/2016
0.0.P5 1 to 6 14-48 0.0.P5 1 to 6 16-12
0.0 1 14-04 0.0 1 14-04

0.0 2 14-15 0.0 2 16-12
9.0.P6 1 13-29 9.0.P6 1 13-29

9.0.P6 2 13-51 9.0.P6 2 16-12
Normal
Revision / / / 9.37 1 to 3 16-12
EC 155 B1
UPDATE GUIDE
16-24 Page 1/2
MAIN POINTS OF THE REVISION SECTIONS PAGES
FLIGHT MANUAL Complementary part, Normal Revision No.15 date code 16-12
- List of effective pages and log of Normal Revisions are updated, 0.0.P5 1 to 6
- The "List of modifications mentioned in the flight manual" is 0.0 2
updated,
- Section 9.37 "Camera VISION 1000" added, 9.0.P6 2
- Creation of section "Camera VISION 1000". 9.37 1 to 3
EC 155 B1
UPDATE GUIDE
16-24 Page 2/2
COMPOSITION
This Manual assigned to the helicopter mentioned on the title page, contains the following
pink pages except those cancelled when the conditions are complied with.
CAUTION
0.0.P3 1 *RC* 14-48 MOD 07-39C75

7.4 2 *RC* 14-04 MOD 07-39C75
7.4 8 *RC* 14-04 MOD 07-39C75
7.5 3 *RC* 14-04 MOD 07-39C75
7.5 5 *RC* 14-04 MOD 07-39C75
RCA 7.7 2 *RC* 14-04 MOD 07-39C75
7.13-A 5 *RC* 14-48 MOD 07-39C75
7.13-B 5 *RC* 14-48 MOD 07-39C75
7.13-C 5 *RC* 14-48 MOD 07-39C75
9.33 1 *RC* 14-04 MOD 07-39C75
EC 155 B1
0.0.P3
14-48 Page 1
*RC*

R: Revised, to be replaced,
0.0 P1 1 14-04 7.2 1 02-20

0.0 P1 2 02-20 7.2 2 02-20
0.0 P1 3 02-20 7.2 3 02-20
0.0 P2 1 02-20 7.2 4 02-20
0.0 P3 1 02-20 7.2 5 02-20
0.0 P4 1 02-20 7.2 6 02-20
0.0 P5 1-7 16-25 R
0.0 1 14-04 7.3 P6 1 02-43
0.0 2 16-12 7.3 P6 2 02-43
6.0 P6 1 10-40 7.3 1 02-43

7.3 2 02-43
6.1 1 02-20 7.3 3 02-43
6.1 2 10-40 7.3 4 08-26
6.1 3 10-40 7.3 5 06-06
6.1 4 10-40 7.3 6 02-43
6.1 5 10-40 7.3 7 08-26
6.1 6 10-40 7.3 8 02-43
7.3 9 02-43
6.2 1 02-20 7.3 10 02-43
6.2 2 02-20 7.3 11 02-43
6.2 3 02-20 7.3 12 02-43
6.2 4 08-26 7.3 13 02-43
6.2 5 02-20 7.3 14 02-43
6.2 6 02-20 7.3 15 02-43
6.2 7 02-41 7.3 16 02-43
6.2 8 02-41 7.3 17 02-43
6.2 9 02-20 7.3 18 02-43
6.2 10 10-40 7.3 19 02-43
6.2 11 13-44 7.3 20 02-43
7.3 21 02-43
6.3 1 02-20 7.3 22 02-43
6.3 2 02-20 7.3 23 02-43
6.3 3 02-20 7.3 24 02-43
6.3 4 06-06 7.3 25 02-43
7.3 26 02-43
7.0 P6 1 14-48 7.3 27 13-44
7.3 28 02-43
7.1 1 06-06 7.3 29 02-43
7.1 2 02-20 7.3 30 02-43
EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
16-25 Page 1
7.3 31 02-43 7.10 3 02-43
7.4 1 08-26 7.11 1 02-43

7.4 2 14-04 7.11 2 02-43
7.4 3 06-06
7.4 4 02-43 7.12 1 14-04
7.4 5 06-06 7.12 2 02-43
7.4 6 02-43 7.12 3 08-26
7.4 7 02-43
7.4 8 14-04 7.13-A 1 14-48
7.4 9 06-06 7.13-A 2 14-48
7.4 10 06-06 7.13-A 3 14-48
7.4 11 02-43 7.13-A 4 14-48
7.13-A 5 14-48
7.5 1 02-43 7.13-A 6 14-48
7.5 2 02-43 7.13-A 7 14-48
7.5 3 14-04 7.13-A 8 14-48
7.5 4 02-43 7.13-A 9 14-48
7.5 5 14-04 7.13-A 10 14-48
7.13-A 11 14-48
7.6 1 02-43 7.13-A 12 14-48
7.6 2 02-43 7.13-A 13 14-48
7.6 3 02-43 7.13-A 14 14-48
7.6 4 02-43 7.13-A 15 14-48
7.6 5 02-43 7.13-A 16 14-48
7.6 6 02-43 7.13-A 17 14-48
7.6 7 02-43 7.13-A 18 14-48
7.13-A 19 14-48
7.7 1 14-04 7.13-A 20 14-48
7.7 2 14-04 7.13-A 21 14-48
7.13-A 22 14-48
7.8 1 02-43 7.13-A 23 14-48
7.8 2 02-43
7.8 3 02-43 7.13-B 1 14-48
7.8 4 02-43 7.13-B 2 14-48
7.8 5 02-43 7.13-B 3 14-48
7.8 6 02-43 7.13-B 4 14-48
7.13-B 5 14-48
7.9 1 02-43 7.13-B 6 14-48
7.9 2 02-43 7.13-B 7 14-48
7.9 3 02-43 7.13-B 8 14-48
7.9 4 02-43 7.13-B 9 14-48
7.9 5 02-43 7.13-B 10 14-48
7.9 6 08-26 7.13-B 11 14-48
7.13-B 12 14-48
7.10 1 02-43 7.13-B 13 14-48
7.10 2 02-43 7.13-B 14 14-48
EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
16-25 Page 2

7.13-B 15 14-48 8.1 1 06-06
7.13-B 16 14-48 8.1 2 02-20
7.13-B 17 14-48
7.13-B 18 14-48 8.2 1 06-06
7.13-B 19 14-48 8.2 2 06-06
7.13-B 20 14-48
7.13-B 21 14-48 8.3 1 06-06
7.13-B 22 14-48 8.3 2 08-26
8.3 3 06-06
7.13-C 1 14-48 8.3 4 06-06
7.13-C 2 14-48 8.3 5 06-06
7.13-C 3 14-48 8.3 6 06-06
7.13-C 4 14-48 8.3 7 06-06
7.13-C 5 14-48 8.3 8 06-06
7.13-C 6 14-48 8.3 9 06-06
7.13-C 7 14-48 8.3 10 06-06
7.13-C 8 14-48 8.3 11 06-06
7.13-C 9 14-48 8.3 12 06-06
7.13-C 10 14-48 8.3 13 06-06
7.13-C 11 14-48 8.3 14 10-40
7.13-C 12 14-48 8.3 15 10-40
7.13-C 13 14-48 8.3 16 06-06
7.13-C 14 14-48 8.3 17 06-06
7.13-C 15 14-48 8.3 18 06-06
7.13-C 16 14-48 8.3 19 06-06
7.13-C 17 14-48 8.3 20 06-06
7.13-C 18 14-48 8.3 21 06-06
7.13-C 19 14-48 8.3 22 06-06
7.13-C 20 14-48 8.3 23 06-06
7.13-C 21 14-48 8.3 24 06-06
7.13-C 22 14-48 8.3 25 08-26
7.13-C 23 14-48 8.3 26 06-06
7.13-C 24 14-48 8.3 27 06-06
7.13-C 25 14-48 8.3 28 06-06
8.3 29 13-44
7.14 1 08-26 8.3 30 08-26
7.14 2 02-43
7.14 3 02-43 9.0 P6 1 13-29
7.14 4 02-43 9.0 P6 2 16-25 R
7.15 1 02-43 9.1 1 06-06

7.15 2 02-43 9.1 2 09-23
7.15 3 02-43 9.1 3 09-23
7.15 4 02-43
7.15 5 02-43 9.20 1 13-44
7.15 6 02-43 9.20 2 13-44
9.20 3 13-29
8.0 P6 1 09-23
EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
16-25 Page 3

9.20 4 13-29 9.31 10 16-25 N
9.20 5 13-29 9.31 11 16-25 N
9.20 6 13-29 9.31 12 16-25 N
9.20 7 13-29 9.31 13 16-25 N
9.24 1 06-06 9.32 1 13-11

9.24 2 06-06 9.32 2 13-44
9.24 3 06-06 9.32 3 13-11
9.25 1 06-06 9.33 1 14-04

9.25 2 06-06 9.33 2 02-20
9.26 1 08-26 9.37 1 16-12

9.26 2 14-26 9.37 2 16-12
9.26 3 08-26 9.37 3 16-12
9.27 1 02-20 10.0 P6 1 08-26

9.27 2 02-20
9.27 3 02-20 10.1 1 02-20
9.27 4 02-20 10.1 2 02-20
9.27 5 09-23
9.27 6 09-23 10.2 1 06-06
9.27 7 09-23 10.2 2 06-06
9.27 8 14-15 10.2 3 06-06
9.27 9 14-15
10.3 1 08-26
9.28 1 13-11 10.3 2 08-26
9.28 2 13-11 10.3 3 08-26
10.3 4 08-26
9.29 1 13-11 10.3 5 08-26
9.29 2 13-11 10.3 6 08-26
9.29 3 13-11 10.3 7 08-26
9.29 4 13-11 10.3 8 08-26
10.3 9 08-26
9.30 1 13-51 10.3 10 08-26
9.30 2 13-51 10.3 11 08-26
9.30 3 13-11 10.3 12 08-26
10.3 13 08-26
9.31 1 16-25 N 10.3 14 08-26
9.31 2 16-25 N 10.3 15 08-26
9.31 3 16-25 N 10.3 16 08-26
9.31 4 16-25 N 10.3 17 08-26
9.31 5 16-25 N 10.3 18 08-26
9.31 6 16-25 N 10.3 19 08-26
9.31 7 16-25 N 10.3 20 08-26
9.31 8 16-25 N 10.3 21 08-26
9.31 9 16-25 N 10.3 22 08-26
EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
16-25 Page 4

10.3 23 08-26 10.4 1 06-06
10.3 24 08-26 10.4 2 06-06
10.3 25 08-26 10.4 3 06-06
10.3 26 08-26 10.4 4 06-06
10.3 27 08-26
10.3 28 08-26
10.3 29 08-26
10.3 30 08-26
10.3 31 08-26
10.3 32 08-26
BASIC RFM REVISIONS

Title New ballast and customer request
Revised 0.0.P5, 0.0 p.2, 6.2 p.11, 7.3 p.27, 7.13 p.13, 8.3 p.29, 9.20 p.1 & 2, 9.26 p.2,
information 9.32 p.2
Deleted
None.
information
EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
16-25 Page 5
Title New KANNAD AP INTEGRA Emergency Locator Transmitter

Revised
0.0.P5, 9.0.P6 page 2 and 9.30 pages 1 and 2
information
Deleted
None.
information
Main points:
- Incorporation of new brand "Airbus Helicopters" instead of "Eurocopter",
- Incorporation of MOD 07-39C75: new fuel management panel, new collective
Title
grip,
- Addition of Conditional Revision A (RC A): fuel management panel and
collective grip before MOD 07-39C75.
0.0.P1 page 1, 0.0.P3 page 1 *RC*, 0.0.P5 pages 1 to 5, 0.0 pages 1 and 2, 7.4
Revised
pages 2 and 8, 7.5 pages 3 and 5, 7.7 pages 1 and 2, 7.12 page 1, 7.13 page 5
information
and 9.33 page 1.
Deleted
None.
information
Update of list of modifications mentioned in the Flight Manual

Title Incorporation of MOD 07-31B74: replacement of CVFDR Honeywell by CVFDR
L3-Com
Revised
0.0.P5 pages 1 to 6, 0.0 page 1, 9.27 pages 8 & 9
information
Deleted
None.
information
Title Activation of deployable ELTs.
Revised
0.0.P5 pages 1 to 6, 9.26 page 2.
information
Deleted
None.
information
EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
16-25 Page 6
Incorporation of new Automatic Pilot software Section 7.13 is now in 3 versions,

Main points
according to AP software versions
Revised 0.0.P5 pages 1 to 6, 7.0.P6 page 1, 7.13-A pages 1 to 23, 7.13-B pages 1 to 22,
information 7.13-C pages 1 to 25
Deleted
None.
information
Main points Creation of section 9.37 "Camera VISION 1000"
Revised
0.0.P5 pages 1 to 6, 0.0 page 2; 9.0.P6 pages 2, 9.37 pages 1 to 3
information
Deleted
None.
information
Creation of section 9.31 "COMMUNICATION, RADIO NAVIGATION AND

Main points
NAVIGATION INSTALLATION WITH THE DUAL GTN 750H"
Revised
0.0.P5 pages 1 to 7, 9.0.P6 page 2, 9.31 pages 1 to 13
information
Deleted
None.
information
EC 155 B1
0.0.P5
16-25 Page 7


07-11B62 Tag for new procedure to eject windows
07-22B42 4-Axis autopilot installation
07-22B43 Provision for 4-Axis autopilot
07-22B47 Shelf modified for AHRS. Replacement of AHRS support platform
for 4-Axis AP and Category A certification
07-22B49 Category A barometric Vz APIRS
07-22B52 4-Axis autopilot modification, version N8 software
07-22B55 Improved reliability of autopilot at low temperatures
07-25C13 Flexible waterproof linings for cargo compartment
07-29B62 Connection of accumulator to LH rear main servo-control for 40C
07-29B64 S.A.S. 125-bar hydraulic manifold
07-39B78 CPDS software
07-39B79 Additional FCDS software for IFR compatibility
07-39B96 Incorporation of FAA requirements to circuit-breaker panels,
overhead panels and cargo compartment overheat alarm
07-39C01 Provisions for Category A 355 rpm rotor speed control
07-39C30 Inhibiting of servo-control seizure alarm (testable during ground
07-39C37 maintenance)
07-39C36 Cap protection on starting selector
07-52C08 Modification of attachment of top roller on sliding door fitting
07-53C20 Local modification of sliding door top rail
07-53C49 Closing of UPPER/MID REINFORCEMENT rails of rolling
assemblies
07-62C14 Upgraded coning stop flyweights
07-62C17 Increased torque tightness of MRH top fairing, colt weather
extension
07-62C32 Extending high wind envelope to 55 kt
07-63C22 MGB oil level
07-67B55 Flight control misalignment, Roll channel
07-67B62 Reduced collective low pitch range, -25C envelope
07-71B85 FADEC software modification, TU 50C
07-71B91 Adaptation, FADEC software engine control, TU 50C
07-71B95 Emergency back-up
07-71C09 Additional engine emergency control
07-71C14 ARRIEL 2C1 TU 98C FADEC software (Back-up)
07-71C16 FADEC software modification TU 93C
07-21B99 Improvement heating effectiveness
07-24C25 Suppression second spare battery
07-31B62 Evolutions UMS/HUMS
EC 155 B1
0.0
14-04 Page 1


Cargo compartment fire extinguishing and FADEC
OP-26B17
ventilation
OP-45C14 Electrical rear-view mirrors (Removable parts)
OP-45C15 Mechanical rear-view mirrors (Removable parts)
OP-54B31 Ballast
OP-62B80 Coning stops
OP-79B31 Engine oil particle burner
07-45C05 Emergency floatation gear installation
07-45C98
with CVFDR optional
07-45D04
without CVFDR optional
07-54B39 Ballast
EC155B1 standardization with new fuel management panel
07-39C75
and new collective grip.
07-31B74 Replacement of CVFDR Honeywell by CVFDR L3-Com
07-45D23 Substitution of cargo hook load indicator due to its
obsolescence
OP-31B86 Camera VISION 1000
EC 155 B1
0.0
16-12 Page 2
SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
CONTENTS
6.1 GENERAL - DEFINITIONS PAGES
1. WEIGHTS - CONVENTIONAL TERMS ................................................................. 1
2. CENTRE-OF-GRAVITY - CONVENTIONAL TERMS ............................................ 2
3. WEIGHING ............................................................................................................ 3
4. CALCULATING LONGITUDINAL C.G. LOCATION ............................................... 6
6.2 LONGITUDINAL LOCATION OF VARIABLE LOADS

1. CREW .................................................................................................................... 1
2. PASSENGERS ...................................................................................................... 2
3. TRANSPORT OF INTERNAL FREIGHT................................................................ 4
4. TRANSPORT OF SLUNG LOADS......................................................................... 5
6. FUEL...................................................................................................................... 7
7. WEIGHT AND LONGITUDINAL MOMENT OF EQUIPMENT ITEMS.................. 10
8. BALLAST ............................................................................................................. 11
6.3 LATERAL LOCATION OF VARIABLE LOADS

1. CREW .................................................................................................................... 1
2. PASSENGERS ...................................................................................................... 2
4. WEIGHT AND LATERAL MOMENT OF EQUIPMENT ITEMS .............................. 4
EC 155 B1
6.0.P6
10-40 Page 1
SECTION 6.1
GENERAL - DEFINITIONS
1 WEIGHT - CONVENTIONAL ITEMS

1.1 MAXIMUM WEIGHT
The maximum authorized weight for takeoff, as specified in Section 2 (or in the
Supplements) of this manual.
In no case shall the maximum weight be exceeded.
1.2 EMPTY WEIGHT (EW)

The total weight of :
the structure (rotors, fuselage, cowlings, landing gear, flight controls)
the power plant and transmission assemblies
the basic furnishings and systems that are an integral part of a particular aircraft
version
the fluids, contained in closed systems, required for normal operation of the
aircraft and systems
the non-drainable fuel
the drainable unusable fuel
1.3 EQUIPED EMPTY WEIGHT (EEW)

The sum of the aircraft empty weight (EW) plus the weight of the mission-related
equipment (standard or specific optional items, radio-navigation systems).
1.4 OPERATIONAL EMPTY WEIGHT (OEW)

The sum of equipped empty weight (OEW) plus the weight of the crew members.
1.5 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT (MTOW)

The sum of operational empty weight and useful load.
The useful load includes the payload and usable fuel.
The payload comprises revenue and nonrevenue loads.
EC 155 B1
6.1
02-20 Page 1
2 CENTRE OF GRAVITY - CONVENTIONAL TERMS

2.1 DFINITION OF THE DATUM TRIHEDRAL
The centre of gravity figures are dimensions measured perpendicularly to the faces
of the datum trihedral. The trihedral is formed by the following planes:
A horizontal plane, parallel to the cabin floor datum are located 3 m (118.1 in.)
above this datum. This is the Z datum plane. (The cabin floor datum is
materialized by the surface of the cabin floor).
A vertical plane perpendicular to the cabin floor datum. This is the Y datum plane,
the aircraft plane of symmetry, from which lateral c.g. dimensions are measured:
these dimensions are positive to the right of this plane (starboard) and negative to
the left (port).
A vertical plane, perpendicular to the two planes mentioned above, situated 4 m
(157.5 in) approx. forward of the centre of the main rotor head. This is the X
datum plane from which the longitudinal reference stations are measured.
2.2 C.G. LOCATION LIMITS

C.G. location limits are never to be exceeded (Refer to SECTION 2.2 para. 2 and the
"LIMITATIONS" paragraph of some Supplements).
CAUTION
A C.G. LOCATION WHICH IS CORRECT ON TAKEOFF MAY

CHANGE IN THE COURSE OF THE MISSION, DUE TO FUEL
WEIGHT REDUCTION OR LOADING VARIATION AND SO
EXCEED ACCEPTABLE LIMITS.
Longitudinal C.G. must be the more closely watched.

Lateral C.G. need be considered only in very dissymetric loading configurations.
EC 155 B1
6.1
10-40 Page 2
3 WEIGHING
Weighing is the only reliable way of obtaining:
Equipped empty weight (EEW)
Aircraft centre of gravity (CG) location.
The aircraft must be weighed:
On leaving the works
Following any major modification.
3.1 PRELIMINARY STEPS

The weighing operation must be carried out by avoiding the errors caused by the
wind.
Clean the aircraft carefully before weighing.
Should the weighing operation be used to determine C.G. location, level the aircraft
before weighing.
In principle, all equipment items included in the aircraft's empty weight must be
installed. Make an inventory of those equipment items and include it in the weighing
record.
All weighing instruments must be checked for correct "zero" setting before use. It is
important that the weighing instruments rest on suitable leveled ground for correct
measurement.
Unless otherwise specified, the fuels cells must be drained.
The quantities of oil and fuel remaining in the tanks, lines, etc...are called "residual",
and are normally included in the aircraft's empty weight.
The brakes must be released for jacking up the aircraft.
3.2 WEIGHING PROCEDURE

Aircraft weighing and C.G. location determination are as follow:
After the inventory has been made and the checks have been performed, level the
aircraft by means of the appropriate markings and using a clinometer, with the
landing gear off the ground.
Check that the fuel cells are drained.
The distances of the jacking points are defined by the manufacturer when the
aircraft is assembled on the jig.
Record the value of the weight measured at each jacking point.
Compute the moment by multiplying the weight value by the distance of the
corresponding jacking point.
Make the sum of the moments.
Divide the total moment by the weight to obtain the aircraft C.G. location.
EC 155 B1
6.1
10-40 Page 3
EC 155 B1
6.1
10-40 Page 4
INVENTORY AT TIME OF AIRCRAFT WEIGHING
MISCELLANEOUS RADIO COMMUNICATION

Aircraft tool kit.................................... RADIO NAVIGATION
First aid kit ......................................... AVIONICS
Flight Manual .....................................
Fire extinguisher ................................ VHF/AM ............................................
Storage net ........................................ UHF/AM ............................................
VHF/UHF/AM ....................................
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT VHF/UHF, AM/FM.............................
2nd landing light ................................ HF/SSB.............................................
Hover flight flood light ........................
LOCATOR searchlight ....................... ICS installation
SPECTROLAB light ........................... Headset ............................................
Illuminating flares............................... Recorder ...........................................
Blind flying screens............................ Emergency locator transmitter ..........
Tinted transparent panels ..................
De-iced transparent panels................ Encoding altimeter ............................
Ice detector........................................ Radio-altimeter .................................
Fuel warn-up system ......................... ADF...................................................
Air conditioner....................................
Baggage compartment ventilation ..... IFF ....................................................
Emergency floatation gear................. TACAN..............................................
Sand filters......................................... DME..................................................
Blade folding system ......................... VOR/ILS - GLIDE - MARKER ...........
Sling .................................................. HOMING system...............................
Hoist ..................................................
Drip tray ............................................. NADIR...............................................
Hailer installation ............................... DOPPLER radar ...............................
Ferry fuel tank.................................... Weather / navigation radar................
Auxiliary fuel tank .............................. GPS ..................................................
Pressure refueling system .................
Fuel flowmeter ................................... FLIR ..................................................
Fuel jettison system........................... Coupler .............................................
Crash-resistant fuel tank....................
Reinforced protection of main rotor
blades ................................................
Alternator ...........................................
"De luxe" trimming .............................
Ambulance duty installation ...............
Nose wheel castor lock......................
43-Ah battery .....................................
EC 155 B1
6.1
10-40 Page 5
4 CALCULATING LONGITUDINAL CG LOCATION

4.1 METHOD
The distance from the centre of gravity of the aircraft to the datum plane is found by
means of the following formula :
Sum of moments
= C.G. location
Sum of weights
Determine the equipped empty weight.
Referring to the tables of SECTION 6.2, note then totalize the weights and
moments.
Check that the total weight is lower than the maximum permissible takeoff weight.
Determine the C.G. location and check that is falls within permissible limits.
4.2 EXAMPLE OF CALCULATION

Weight C.G. location Moment
Equipped empty weight 2668 kg 4.11 m 10965.5 m.kg
Crew
1 pilot + 1 copilot 150 kg 258 m.kg
12-seat layout
4 passengers at front 320 kg 877 m.kg
4 passengers at middle 320 kg 1139 m.kg
4 passengers at rear 320 kg 1376 m.kg
Fuel (standard tanks)
Tank 1 (380 l) 300 kg 879 m.kg
Tank 2 (380 l) 300 kg 1428 m.kg
Load in cargo compartment 100 kg 553 m.kg
TOTAL : 4478 kg 17475.5 m.kg
17475.5
i.e. a CG location of = 3.90
4478
within the permissible limits. (Refer to SECTION 2.2).
EC 155 B1
6.1
10-40 Page 6
METRIC SYSTEM
WEIGHT MOMENT (m.kg)
(kg) D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
70 192 250 301 178 234 243 300
80 219 285 344 203 268 278 343
90 247 320 387 229 302 312 386
100 274 356 430 254 335 347 429
120 329 427 516 305 402 416 515
140 384 498 602 356 486 601
160 438 570 688 406 555 686
180 493 641 774 457 625 772
200 548 712 860 508 694 858
220 603 783 946 559 763 944
240 658 854 1032 610 833 1030
260 712 926 1118 660 902 1115
280 767 997 1204 711 972 1201
300 822 1068 1290 762 1041 1287
320 877 1139 1376 813 1110 1373
340 932 1210 1462 864 1180 1459
360 986 1282 1548 914 1249 1544
ANGLO SAXON SYSTEM

WEIGHT MOMENT (in.lb)
(lb) D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
150 16180 21024 25395 15030 19795 20485 25353
180 19417 25229 30474 18036 23755 24583 30424
200 21574 28032 33860 20040 26394 27314 33804
220 23731 30835 37246 22044 29033 30045 37184
260 28046 36442 44018 26052 34312 35508 43945
300 32361 42048 50790 30060 39591 40971 50706
350 37754 49056 59255 35070 47800 59157
400 43148 56064 67720 40080 54628 67608
440 47463 61670 74492 44088 60091 74369
490 52856 68678 82957 49098 66919 82820
530 57171 74285 89729 53106 72382 89581
570 61486 79891 96501 57114 77845 96341
620 66879 86899 104966 62124 84673 104792
660 71194 92506 111738 66132 90136 111553
700 75509 98112 118510 70140 95599 118314
750 80902 105120 126975 75150 102427 126765
800 86296 112128 135440 80160 109256 135216
EC 155 B1
6.2
02-20 Page 3
3 TRANSPORT OF INTERNAL FREIGHT
Figure 3: Internal freight
WEIGHT MOMENT (m.kg) WEIGHT MOMENT (in.lb)
(kg) B1 B2 B3 (lb) B1 B2 B3
50 120 192 276 100 9450 15120 21780
100 240 384 553 200 18900 30240 43560
150 360 576 829 300 28350 45360 65340
200 480 768 1106 400 37800 60480 87120
250 600 960 1382 500 47250 75600 108900
300 720 1152 1659 600 56700 90720 130680
350 840 1344 700 66150 105840
400 960 1536 800 75600 120960
450 1080 1728 900 85050 136080
500 1200 1920 1000 94500 151200
550 1320 2112 1100 103950 166320
600 1440 2304 1200 113400 181440
1323 125023 200038
Max. weight per sq.ft: refer to SECTION 2.7.
EC 155 B1
6.2
08-26 Page 4
6.3 FUEL IN CARGO HOLD TANK
Figure 7 : Fuel - Cargo hold tank
METRIC SYSTEM ANGLO-SAXON SYSTEM
QUANTITY MOMENT QUANTITY MOMENT
kg l (m.kg) lb US gal (in.lb)
50 63 320 100 15.2 24650

75 95 476 150 22.8 36975
100 127 630 200 30.3 49300
125 158 782 250 37.9 61625
142 180 885 313 47.5 77155
EC 155 B1
6.2
02-20 Page 9
7 WEIGHT AND LONGITUDINAL MOMENT OF EQUIPMENT

ITEMS
The following list covers the optional equipment items. It gives the approximate weight
and longitudinal moment of the removable components.
WEIGHT MOMENT
HOIST COMPLETE WITH ARM 63 138.9 206.5 17932
- Hoist equiped 49 108
- Boom, strut, belt fairing 14 30.9
SX 16 WITH IR FILTER 41.9 92.4 104.4 9058
- Support and attachments 2.4 5.3
- SX 16 39.5 87.1
FLIR WESCAM 16DS-W 45.5 100.3 116.85 10140.5
- Support and attachment 5.5 12.1
- FLIR 40 88.2
SLING 19.85 43.8 80.8 7018.5
REAR-VIEW MIRROR 4.4 9.7 0.044 3.9
LOUD SPEAKER NAT 4.8 10.58 21 1827.2
FLIR FSI ULTRA 7000
- Console 55.3 121.91 168.67 14637.7
- Operator's seat 30.5 67.24 105.23 9133.2
- Turret with support 20.3 44.75 48.72 4228.4
- Video antenna 7.9 17.42 36.58 3175.3
LOUDSPEAKER 450 W (2x2) 10.9 24.03 45.5 3945
DRIP TUB 15 33.07 54.75 4752.2
FAST ROPING ARM ASSEMBLY (two arms) 39.2 86.42 164.6 14289.5
POLICE ANTENNEA 8 17.64 28.2 2444.6
TWO SINGLE-SEAT (back to back) 37.2 82.01 128.5 11151.7
2 TWO SEAT BENCH (Aft) 32.6 71.87 82.8 7187
2 TWO SEAT BENCH (Forward) 31.4 69.22 135 11718.3
1 LIFE RAFT 34 74.9 133.3 11534.6
SKI INSTALLATION 62 136.69 222.4 19303.4
- With standard cylinder 59.26 130.64 229.6 19922.6
- With carbon cylinder 54.06 119.18 212.8 18460.9
- Neutralization kit 5.14 11.33 22.4 1944.2
EC 155 B1
6.2
10-40 Page 10
WEIGHT MOMENT
VIP INSTALLATION
6 FISHER VIP SEATS
365 V82 0022
- Forward seats 47 103.6 137.71 11950.3
- Rear seats 46 101.4 189.98 16487.6
8 BALLAST
A removing ballast fitted inside the tail allows to adjust the center of gravity of the
helicopter of the current mission.

BALLAST
Removable
7.35 87.08 16.20 7555.95
support
After MOD
OP54B31
1.64 19.43 3.62 1688.43
One removable
plate (max. 13)
Before MOD
OP54B31
1.48 17.53 3.26 1520.52
One removable
plate (max. 16)
After MOD 07-54B39:

BALLAST
Removable
4.51 53.43 9.94 4636.18
support
One removable
1.64 19.43 3.62 1688.43
plate (max. 15)
One modified
removable plate 1.58 18.72 3.48 1623.13
(max. 1)
EC 155 B1
6.2
13-44 Page 11
SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION AND SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
7.1 MAIN DIMENSIONS - OVERALL DIMENSIONS

7.2 COCKPIT
7.3 AVIONICS
7.4 POWER PLANT
7.5 FUEL SYSTEM
7.6 ROTORS AND TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLIES
7.7 FLIGHT CONTROLS
7.8 HYDRAULIC POWER SYSTEMS
7.9 ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS
7.10 AIR DATA SYSTEM
7.11 VENTILATION, HEATING AND DEMISTING
7.12 LIGHTING
7.13-A AUTOPILOT SOFT N8-37
7.13-B AUTOPILOT SOFT N9-72
7.13-C AUTOPILOT SOFT N9-72 OR N9-79 (WITH HOV MODE)
7.14 LANDING GEAR
7.15 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
EC 155 B1
7.0.P6
14-48 Page 1
Figure 2: FCDS architecture
EC 155 B1
7.3
02-43 Page 3
2.2 CONTROLS
2.2.1 Instrument control panel
Figure 2: Instrument control panel
EC 155 B1
7.3
08-26 Page 4
RADIO-HEIGHT ZERO
Accordingly with the radio-height, the brown zone gives information of the actual
ground position on the baro altimeter.
BARO SETTING
The baro setting correction is displayed between 750 and 1050 hPa with an
increment of 1 hPa. The unit (hPa) blinks during evolution of the baro setting. If
the pilot requires a standard setting (1013.25 hPa) by pushing the STD control
on the ICP, the message "STD" is displayed in place of the digital value.
DH FLAG/UPPER LIMIT (optional) FLAG
DH flag: this symbol associated to an audio alarm warns the pilot when the
radio-height is smaller than the decision height. If decision height is reset to
zero, the DH flag is suppressed (in order to avoid the alarm on ground, before
the taking off). It blinks ten seconds and then remains steadily. It disappears as
soon as the radio-height is above the decision height value.
UL flag (optional): this symbol associated to an audio alarm warns the pilot
when the radio-height is higher than the upper limit. It blinks ten seconds and
then remains steadily. It disappears as soon as the radio-height is lower than
the upper limit value.
RADIO-HEIGHT
A digital copy of radio-height (the main data is displayed on the ND) is displayed
on the PFD with the following rules:
- Radio-height < 500 ft ------> Information always displayed
- Radio-height > 500 ft:
- Radio-height < decision height + 500 ft ------> information displayed
- Radio-height > decision height + 500 ft ------> information not displayed
And with the following increment:
- 1 ft by 1ft for radio-height < 30 ft
- 5 ft by 5 ft for radio-height < 300 ft
- 25 ft by 25 ft for radio-height > 300 ft
AIRSPEED
The airspeed is displayed between 20 and 300 kt with a graduation every 5 kt.
A digital value is associated to the graduation every 20 kt. If the airspeed is
lower than 20 kt, nor precise graduation neither digital value are given.
VNE LIMIT
Both VNE with and without power are computed and displayed at the same
time.
AIRSPEED TREND
This indicator gives the airspeed foreseen to be reached after 5 seconds if the
acceleration remains constant.
EC 155 B1
7.3
08-26 Page 7
2.3.2 PFD AFCS status
Figure 5 - PFD: AFCS status symbology

x The displayed reference bug can be moved by the beep trim or by the control
box. When the change occurs the bug is blinking in white and engaged mode is
underlined white blinking.
x When a mode is engaged or disengaged, or in case of color change, a flashing
box is displayed around the related mode for 10 s.
EC 155 B1
7.3
02-43 Page 8
3.4 CAD
Figure 19 - CAD: CAU/FUEL pages
NOTE
In the event of failure of both VEMD screen,
the N1 page replace the FUEL page.
The quantity of fuel available in a fuel tank group is displayed in two forms:
. A blue band the height of which is proportional to the quantity of fuel present in the
fuel tank. The right group indicator is longer than the left one because it holds more
fuel.
. A figure which indicates the percentage of fuel in the group (percentage of 1000 kg).
The endurance is calculated from the fuel flow rate and the remaining fuel quantity
available. This time is displayed in hour(s) and minute(s).
The horizontal band graph is shown when the additional 180-liter fuel tank is installed.
The arrows flash when the solenoid valve is energized.
The "FUEL" message, comes into view when any of the following sensors in the engine
compartment trips:
. PRS 1 and/or 2 (light on the Fuel Management Panel comes on).
. FILT 1 and/or 2 (light on the Fuel Management panel comes on).
EC 155 B1
7.3
13-44 Page 27
3.4.1 CAU page

This page displays all amber warnings and the advisories for the helicopter in 3
columns (Left warnings, miscellaneous advisories, Right warnings).
The amber warnings are displayed from the top to the bottom of the page while
the advisories are displayed in green in the center column, below the amber
messages.
3.4.1.1 START mode
The following procedure is automatically done, but is inhibited in case of CPDS
power on in flight. During the power on phase of the system, the CPDS checks
the availability of some cautions. If some cautions are failed or if a subsystem is
detected as failed during this phase a caution linked to this event will be
displayed. Under normal conditions, because the engines are not started or
because external power unit is linked to the helicopter, some cautions are
normally active. According to a specific list, this cautions are automatically
acknowledged. If one of them is missing a white message INP FAIL is
activated on the CAD.
3.4.1.2 CAUTION display
When one or more cautions are displayed :
. All alarms already acknowledged are cleared, leaving the three columns
blank.
. The new cautions are displayed in their respective columns.
. Two thick yellow line blink on top and at the bottom of the screen.
. Cautions are displayed in the order of occurrence.
. If a fault disappears, the corresponding caution is cleared after 5 s and the
warnings displayed underneath are moved up one line.
. The crew Acknowledge the warnings by pressing a button on cyclic stick or
on CAD (CAD SELECT key, VEMD SELECT key if the CAD is not available
and VEMD presents caution back up page).
. Once the warnings are acknowledged, they are classified by order of their
arrival in their respective columns.
. The blinking lines disappear.
. When the column is full, a 1 OF 2 message appears on top the middle
column, indicating that a second page has been started.
EC 155 B1
7.3
02-43 Page 28
SECTION 7.4
POWER PLANT
1 DESCRIPTION
The helicopter is fitted with two TURBOMECA ARRIEL 2C2 free turbines, places side
by side, aft of the MGB.
2 MINIMUM PERFORMANCE DATA

2.1 SERVICE RATINGS (TEST BENCH ENGINE)
POWER (KW)
RATING MAXIMUM TIME
HP = 0 ISA
30-second OEI 30s 789
2-minute OEI 2 min 714
Continuous OEI Unlimited 688
Take-off 5 min 697
Maximum continuous Unlimited 636
EC 155 B1
7.4
08-26 Page 1

3.1 OVERHEAD PANEL

EC 155 B1
7.4
14-04 Page 2
RCA
3.1 OVERHEAD PANEL
EC 155 B1
7.4
14-04 Page 2
*RC*
4 ENGINE OIL SYSTEM
Figure 10: Engine oil system
EC 155 B1
7.4
02-43 Page 7
EC 155 B1
7.4
14-04 Page 8
RCA
FUEL SYSTEM
(See section 7.5)
EC 155 B1
7.4
14-04 Page 8
*RC*
RCA
EC 155 B1
7.5
14-04 Page 3
*RC*

EC 155 B1
7.5
14-04 Page 3
2.3 CAD (CAU + FUEL)
Figure 4: CAD (CAU + FUEL)
NOTE
In the event of a CAD display failure:
The quantities of fuel remaining in the fuel tanks are displayed on the VEMD.
The fuel pressure values are no longer displayed.
EC 155 B1
7.5
02-43 Page 4
RCA
3 FUEL SYSTEM
EC 155 B1
7.5
14-04 Page 5
*RC*
3 FUEL SYSTEM
EC 155 B1
7.5
14-04 Page 5
SECTION 7.7
FLIGHT CONTROLS
1 GENERAL
The flight controls comprise:
- Two cyclic pitch control sticks controlling the inclination of the swash plates.
- Two collective pitch levers controlling the vertical displacement of the swash plates.
- Two pairs of pedals controlling the angle of attack of the fenestron blades. The
pedals also feature assisted differential brakes acting on the main landing gear
wheels.
- The pedal assembly is adjustable to the pilot's size.
2 CONTROLS ON CYCLIC PITCH STICK GRIP
1 Spare 7 SAS mode ON

2 Spare 8 ICS Push To Talk button
3 Cargo sling release (if fitted) 9 Caution aknowledge
4 AFCS mode OFF or SAS 10 Upper modes release
5 Spare 11 Trim release
6 Automatic Pilot beep trim
EC 155 B1
7.7
14-04 Page 1
1 Spare 7 Emergency Floatation (if fitted)


EC 155 B1
7.7
14-04 Page 2
RCA

6 Emergency Floatation

EC 155 B1
7.7
14-04 Page 2
*RC*
3.3 INDICATORS
The red alarm appears on the Caution advisory panel.
- The red "BAT TEMP" light comes on when the battery temperature reaches 71 C
2.8 C.
The failure messages are shown on the CAD:
- BAT" message:
This message appears in the center column when the battery is not charging.
- "ESS BUS" message:
This message appears in the center column when at least one of the two essential
bus bars is not powered.
- "GEN" message:
This message appears in the right or left column when the corresponding
generator has not cut into the power system.
- "BUS TIE" message:
This message appears in the center column when the left and/or the right power
systems is/are no longer coupled to the "BUS TIE".
The measurement values and messages are shown on the VEMD.

- The "SELECT button of the VEMD is used to select the source to be measured
and the + and - keys are used to select the display of this source sequentially.
The possible choices are:
. "GEN 1".
. "GEN 2".
. "SELECTOR".
A current flow and a voltage value appear under the messages.
- When the "SELECTOR" message is shown, the current flow and the voltage
displayed are those of the source selected on overhead panel. ("BAT" or "GEN1"
or "GEN2").
EC 155 B1
7.9
02-43 Page 5
4 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELS
Figure 4: Circuit Breaker Panels 3 Alpha, 4 Alpha and 5 Alpha
EC 155 B1
7.9
08-26 Page 6
SECTION 7.12
LIGHTING
1 EXTERNAL LIGHTS
The external lighting systems provide power to:
Position Lights
- The green light is on the right side of the helicopter.
- The red light is on the left side of the helicopter.
- The white light is in the center of the tail cone.
The POS LTS switch on the overhead panel controls these lights.
Anti-collision and Strobe lights
- The anti-collision light is installed on the tip of the fin (on the tip fairing).
- The strobe light (if fitted) is installed under the bottom structure.
Both are controlled with the "ANTI COL" selector on the overhead panel.
"ANTI COL" Conventional LED anti-collision
Strobe light
selector position anti-collision light light
OFF Off Off Off
WHT Flashing white Flashing red/white Flashing white
RED Flashing red Flashing red Off
Landing Lights
- A retractable, swiveling landing light.
- A second optional retractable, swiveling landing light.
The two landing lights are mounted at the front on the lower left and right fairings
under the cockpit floor.
The landing lights controls consist of:
- A SRCH LTS selector on overhead panel
- A three-position switch and a four-position switch, located on the pilot's and
copilot's collective lever grips.
EC 155 B1
7.12
14-04 Page 1
2 INTERNAL LIGHTS
2.1 INSTRUMENT AND ZONE LIGHTING
All the instruments and control panels, including the circuit-breaker panels, are
lighted.
The following controls are located on then overhead panel:
A master lighting switch "LIGHTING",
Four potentiometers to adjust the lighting brightness of:
- The copilot's instrument panel by the "PNL.CPLT" potentiometer,
- The overhead panel and the console by two concentric potentiometers
"O.HEAD" and "CONSOLE" respectively,
- The pilot's instrument panel by the "PNL.PLT" potentiometer.
2.2 CREW LIGHTING

Each the crew member has at his disposal a portable utility light that is mounted on
the cabin ceiling. Both the utility lights are located on the cabin overhead panel, one
on the right and one on the left.
The portable utility lights are powered directly by the battery. They can be used with
the emergency lighting system. Red or white light can be selected by pivoting a filter.
An integrated potentiometer is used to switch on the utility lights and to adjust their
brightness.
2.3 CABIN LIGHTING

The cabin dome light is fitted with three bulbs and it lights the forward row of seats. It
is controlled by means of an ON / OFF switch on the overhead panel. An
emergency battery power supply automatically lights the dome light.
Two sets of five fluorescent tubes complete the lighting provided by the dome light
and ensure the lighting of the aft seats. The cabin dome light control switch is used to
switch on the fluorescent tubes.
2.4 LIGHTED SIGNS PANEL

The lighted signs panel is located above the forward seats and is fitted with nine
bulbs. A switch that is located on the overhead panel controls the lighted signs.
NOTE
Should the normal on-board power system fail, all the cabin lighting and the lighted
signs are powered by a standby battery.
EC 155 B1
7.12
02-43 Page 2
2.5 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHTING

The cargo compartment is lighted by a dome light which is turned on manually by
means of a switch in the doorframe and turned off automatically when closing the
door (or manually before closing the door).
2.6 STORM LIGHT (IF FITTED)

A floodlight located at the upper part of the center aisle and controlled by means of
the STORM LT switch illuminates one section of the instrument panel to reduce the
contrast due to the flashes of lightning.
2.7 HELICOPTER EMERGENCY EGRESS LIGHTING H.E.E.L (If installed)

The H.E.E.L makes it easier to locate the emergency exits and cockpit door jettison
handles in the event of ditching, a crash landing or failure of the direct current
electrical power system.
- The main system, supplies 17 window lights and 6 jettison handle lights.
- The power supply units are connected to the flight data recorder inertia and
immersion sensors
- The H.E.E.L. is controlled by the EMER LT switch located on the overhead panel.
OFF : inhibits any activation of the H.E.E.L
ARMED : the system is activated automatically in the

event of immersion, a crash landing or failure of
the dc electrical power system.
ON : activates the H.E.E.L
- The sliding door window H.E.E.L. is supplied by:

the main system for the front and upper lights
the battery and stand-alone converter, not recharged by the aircraft electrical
power system, for the rear and lower lights
- These lights come on automatically, only in the event of immersion.
- This system is autonomous for 20 minutes at a depth of 50 ft.
- The H.E.E.L must be checked daily, before the first flight, by moving the switch to
the test position.
NOTE
The sliding door emergency exit lighting is autonomous and can be
activated only by immersion detection.
EC 155 B1
7.12
08-26 Page 3
SECTION 7.13 - A
1 GENERAL
installed. The main differences are listed in the following table:
FUNCTIONS Before MOD 22B55 After MOD 22B55
OAT envelope Above 15C Above 40C
Improvement of yaw Trim
check during AP test ( Not available Available
blinking)
Above 80 ft (Radio height)
Power management in automatic reduction of
Not available
basic stabilization power when authorized
limit is exceeded
Available on ground by
pressing the upper mode
Stick re-centering function Not available
disengagement button on
cyclic stick more than 1s

axis,
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 1
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 2
1.3 COMMANDS
Figure 2: APMS

OFF AP disengaged
AP engaged
trim functions.
Auto-trim engaged


comes on.
and VOR modes.
A mode armed
C mode captured
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 3

function comes on.
A mode armed
C mode captured.


mode.
A mode armed
C mode captured.

mode.
A VS armed.
C VS captured

navigation mode.
IAS engaged

navigation mode.
ALT engaged
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 4
RCA

modes.
Backward up
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 5
*RC*

off.
modes
Backward up
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 5
CYCLIC
TRIM FEEL
COLLECTIVE
TRIM FEEL
AP RESET
SAS RESET
1.4 ANNUNCIATION
1.4.1 Upper Modes
IAS ALT HDG VS
or
XXX + on relevant scale NAV VOR VOR A LOC

GS active

XXX NAV VOR VOR A LOC
GS armed
ALT A
GA GA + GA
on
scale
VS IAS + VS and IAS
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 6
NOTE
Middle = Roll/Yaw
Right side = Pitch
Colors Definition
RED required.
detected.
CYAN disarm,

and then disappears
(Flashing)


FLY-UP
NOTE

for 10 s.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 7
2 OPERATING MODES

stopped.
speed 4 deg/s).
attitude.
APMS.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 8
2.1.3 SAS
2.2.1 General
APMS.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
grip,
the pilot,
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 9
satisfied:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 10

mode.
NOTE 1
captured VOR mode.
NOTE 2
computed drift.
2.2.4 VOR A Mode

To arm or engage VOR A interception and hold:
Select appropriate VOR frequency,
Set the master navigation source to VOR # ,
Select the desired VOR radial through the CRS button on ICP,
Adopt a heading compatible with the interception of the radial,
Press the APP push-button on the APMS.
1st case: Course Deviation greater than 30.

When the lateral deviation drops below 2 dots (one dot represents 5), the VOR A
mode automatically switches to capture phase.
The HDG mode disappears (if it was active).
The helicopter turns to adopt a 30 interception heading until the lateral deviation
detected is less than 0.8 dot.
The mode then aligns on the selected radial.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 11
2nd case: Course Deviation less than 30.

The capture starts when the lateral deviation drops below 0.8 dot.
NOTE 1
the mode. When this is done, the helicopter switches directly to the
captured VOR A mode.
NOTE 2
In case of signal alteration (i.e.: proximity of the station). The VOR A
annunciation reverts to amber. The flight control law changes, the helicopter
computed drift.

The NAV mode enables the helicopter to follow a selected path via a
commanded roll attitude output from a navigation management system
(NMS).
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
- loss of roll axis (loss of cyclic auto-trim or cyclic trim feel permanent
release),
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 12
NOTE

course,
1 dot.
Figure 6: LOC mode.
NOTE 1
For low angles of interception (lower than 25 degrees), capture condition
is 1 dot. However a maximum time of 30 s is introduced when the mode
is armed and the deviation below 2.1 dots to capture the localizer even if
the deviation still exceeds 1 dot.
NOTE 2
Arming the LOC will automatically arm the G/S mode (refer to paragraph
2.3.5 for G/S mode description).
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 13
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
conditions:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
mode
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 14
2.3.1 General
AEO OEI
FLI FLI
TOP 30 s
MCP continuous
IAS(kt) IAS(kt)
25 40 30 40

AEO or 10% in OEI.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 15

operation),
NOTE
is available),
available),
available).
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
available.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 16

ALT mode.
for at least 5 s,
operation),

EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 17
mode.


strip.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 18
ALT) remains active until G/S capture,
on AFCS strip.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
LOC is engaged),
LOC is engaged),
is engaged),
engaged),
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 19

- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
- GA mode engaged.
the G/S mode.
NOTE
Before GS mode engagement, it is possible to use the ALT.A mode even
if the GS mode is armed. The GS mode will have priority for
engagement.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 20

pitch axis.
and to VNE.
available,
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
release),
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 21

like in IAS mode.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
VS on pitch,
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 22
10 ft).
above 45 kt.
mode.
reference height.
+ 500 + 500
+ 350
+ 300
IAS(kt) + 50
Z (ft)
30 50 100 210

strip
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
CR.HT mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-A
14-48 Page 23
SECTION 7.13 - B
1 GENERAL
installed.

axis,
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 1
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 2
1.3 COMMANDS
Figure 2: APMS

OFF AP disengaged
AP engaged
trim functions.
Auto-trim engaged


comes on.
and VOR modes.
A mode armed
C mode captured
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 3

function comes on.
A mode armed
C mode captured.


mode.
A mode armed
C mode captured.

mode.
A VS armed.
C VS captured

navigation mode.
IAS engaged

navigation mode.
ALT engaged
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 4
RCA

modes.
than 1s.
Backward up
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 5
*RC*

off.
- attitude reference change on pitch or roll axis.
modes.
than 1 s.
Backward up
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 5
CYCLIC
TRIM FEEL
COLLECTIVE
TRIM FEEL
AP RESET
SAS RESET
1.4 ANNUNCIATION
1.4.1 Upper Modes
IAS ALT HDG VS
or

active

XXX NAV VOR LOC GS
armed
ALT A
GA GA + GA
on
scale
VS IAS + VS and IAS
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 6
NOTE
Middle = Roll/Yaw
Right side = Pitch
Colors Definition
RED required.
detected.

CYAN disarm,

and then disappears
(Flashing)


FLY-UP
NOTE

for 10 s.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 7
2 OPERATING MODES

stopped.
speed 4 deg/s).
attitude.
APMS.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 8
2.1.3 SAS
2.2.1 General
APMS.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
grip,
the pilot,
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 9
satisfied:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 10

mode.
NOTE 1
captured VOR mode.
NOTE 2
computed drift.
NOTE 3

- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
grip,
pilot.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 11
NOTE

course,
1 dot.
Figure 6: LOC mode.
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 12
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
conditions:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 13
2.3.1 General
AEO OEI
FLI FLI
TOP 30 s
MCP continuous
IAS(kt) IAS(kt)
25 40 30 40

AEO or 10% in OEI.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 14

operation),
NOTE
is available),
available),
available).
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
available.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 15

ALT mode.
for at least 5 s,
operation),

EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 16
mode.


strip.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 17
on AFCS strip.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
LOC is engaged),
LOC is engaged),
is engaged),
engaged),
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 18

- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
- GA mode engaged.
the G/S mode.
NOTE
engagement.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 19

pitch axis.
and to VNE.
available,
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
release),
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 20

like in IAS mode.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
VS on pitch,
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 21
10 ft).
above 45 kt.
mode.
reference height.
+ 500 + 500
+ 350
+ 300
IAS(kt) + 50
Z (ft)
30 50 100 210

strip
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
CR.HT mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-B
14-48 Page 22
SECTION 7.13 - C
AUTOPILOT (Soft N9-72 or N9-79 with HOV mode)
1 GENERAL
installed.

transmits the correcting signals to the actuators.
An APMS (Automatic Pilot Mode Selector) used to engage of the various modes.
control), on overhead panel, used to release cyclic or collective force trim.
axis.
A SEMA actuator in the pitch axis contributing also to the collective axis.
Two SEMA actuators in the roll axis contributing also to the collective axis.
A trim actuator in pitch, roll, yaw and collective axes.
Yaw pedal position transmitters.
With hover mode, a GPS is connected directly to APM.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 1
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 2
1.3 COMMANDS
Figure 2: APMS

OFF AP disengaged
AP engaged
trim functions.
Auto-trim engaged


comes on.
NAV push-button Arms / engages and disengages NAV (FMS),
VOR and VOR Approach modes.
A mode armed
C mode captured.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 3

function comes on.
mode (LOC).
A mode armed
C mode captured.

HOV push-button Engages and disengages the Hover mode
HOV engaged

mode.
A mode armed
C mode captured.

mode.
A VS armed.
C VS captured.

navigation mode.
IAS engaged

navigation mode.
ALT engaged
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 4
RCA

AP is ON.
modes.
than 1s.
Backward up
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 5
*RC*
AP is ON.
modes.
than 1s.
Backward up
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 5
CYCLIC
TRIM FEEL
COLLECTIVE
TRIM FEEL
AP RESET
SAS RESET
1.4 ANNUNCIATION
1.4.1 Upper Modes
IAS ALT HDG VS
or

active

XXX NAV VOR LOC GS
armed
ALT A
GA GA + GA
on
scale
VS IAS + VS and IAS
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 6
NOTE
Middle = Roll/Yaw
Right side = Pitch
Colors Definition
RED required.
detected.

CYAN disarm,

and then disappears
(Flashing)


FLY-UP
NOTE

for 10 s.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 7
2 OPERATING MODES

stopped.
speed 4 deg/s).
attitude.
APMS.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 8
2.1.3 SAS
2.2.1 General
APMS.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
grip,
the pilot,
The engagement of the NAV, VOR, LOC or HOV modes disengages the HDG
mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 9
satisfied:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 10

The engagement of the HDG, NAV, GA or HOV modes disengages the
VOR mode.
NOTE 1
captured VOR mode.
NOTE 2
computed drift.
NOTE 3

- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
grip,
pilot.
The engagement of the HDG, GA or HOV modes disengages the NAV mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 11
NOTE

course,
1 dot.
Figure 5: LOC mode.
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 12
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
conditions:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
The engagement of the HDG, NAV, GA or HOV mode disengages the
LOC mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 13
2.3.1 General
IAS engaged) the following priorities apply, if the required power is more
than the available power:
AEO OEI
FLI FLI
TOP 30 s
MCP continuous
IAS(kt) IAS(kt)
25 40 30 40

- During descent or deceleration, the minimum torque obtained is 2 x 5%
in AEO or 10% in OEI.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 14

The ALT mode maintains the current barometric altitude upon engagement.
mode shifts to the pitch axis if the airspeed exceeds 65 kt for at least 5 s.
operation),
NOTE
is available),
available),
available).
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
available.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 15

ALT mode.
The engagement of IAS or HOV modes shifts ALT mode to the collective
axis if it is available or replaces it if not.
The VS mode maintains the current vertical speed upon engagement.
for at least 5 s.
operation).
Consequently IAS mode is set to a bottom limit around 70 kt.
- Under 3 axes (VS mode) a device restricts IAS to VNE
located on collective stick.

EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 16
mode.
The engagement of the IAS or HOV modes shifts the VS mode to the
collective axis if it is available or replaces it, if not.


strip.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 17
on AFCS strip.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
LOC is engaged),
LOC is engaged),
is engaged),
engaged),
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 18

- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
either cyclic grip,
- GA mode engaged.
the G/S mode.
NOTE
engagement.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 19

pitch axis.
and to VNE.
available,
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
release),
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 20

like in IAS mode.
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
VS on pitch,
cyclic grip,
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 21
10 ft).
above 45 kt.
mode.
reference height.
+ 500 + 500
+ 350
+ 300
IAS(kt) + 50
Z (ft)
30 50 100 210

strip
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
cyclic grip,
CR.HT mode.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 22
2.4 HORIZONTAL MODES
2.4.1 Hover mode

The HOV mode acquires and holds a pre-selected ground speed reference set by
pilot thumb-wheels. Action to engage / disengage the HOV mode:
- Pressing the "HOV" pushbutton on APMS.
- Pressing the SAS / HOV pushbutton on any cyclic stick.
When the HOV mode is engaged, the "HOVER" label is displayed on the AFCS
strip in the pitch and lateral columns.
The HOV mode is a horizontal upper mode only (no collective upper mode is
engaged).
Conditions that force the HOV mode disengagement:
- AP disengagement,
- AHRS discrepancy,
- Pilot pressing the upper modes disconnect button on any cyclic grip,
- Loss of pitch axis (series actuator or trim override information failure or cyclic
trim feel permanent release),
- Loss of roll axis (any of roll series actuator or trim override information failure
or cyclic trim feel permanent release),
- Complete loss of ground speed for at least 30 s.
The engagement of IAS, GA, HDG, NAV, VOR or LOC modes disengages HOV
mode.
Once in the hover:
- The cyclic beep commands a 5 kt speed change in the direction of the beep,
- When ground speed references are equal to zero, a position hold is activated
and a beep pulse commands a motion of 1 meter in the relevant direction.
The cyclic lateral beep modifies the track during deceleration.
Every reference change is associated to white blinking underlining of the mode's
label.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 23
2.4.2 HOVER indicator (if optional fitted)

The hover indicator is a cross needle indicator displaying longitudinal
(Horizontal needle) and lateral (Vertical needle) velocities used by the
AFCS Hover mode.
It shall be used only as a supplement to external visual cues which remain
the primary cues.
The hoist annunciator comes on whenever the hoist operator joystick is not
centered.
The current GPS ground speeds are displayed on the GI106 equipment:
Figure 6: Hover indicator (Gi 106)
NOTE 1
Both flags are always raised together.
NOTE 2
When a velocity is above 25 kt, the corresponding needle remains visible
and blocked at 25 kt.
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 24
2.4.3 Thumbwheels (if optional fitted)

The thumbwheels are used to adjust the HOV mode commanded velocity on one or
both axes.
Authority
Longitudinal axis:
20 kt Forward
10 kt Aft
Lateral axis:
20 kt
Figure 7: Thumbwheels
2.4.4 Hoist operator joystick (if optional fitted)

The hoist operator joystick allows the hoist operator to adjust helicopter position in
HOV mode through adjustable commanded velocity inputs on one or both axes.
Authority: 10 kt
on each axis
Figure 8: Hoist operator joystick
2.4.5 Simultaneous commanded velocity inputs (if optional fitted)

In the presence of simultaneous inputs from the 3 different controls (beep trim,
thumbwheels and joystick), the resulting commanded speed on each axis is the
algebraic sum of the inputs within the following limits:
- Longitudinal axis: 20 kt forward
10 kt aft
- Lateral axis: 20 kt
EC 155 B1
7.13-C
14-48 Page 25
SECTION 7.14
LANDING GEAR
1 GENERAL
The landing gear is used to land the helicopter, to steer it when taxiing on an airfield and
to stop it. In flight, the landing gear can be retracted. The helicopter can be towed by a
tractor.
2 DESCRIPTION
The landing gear includes:
- Two main landing gear units made up of a leg (a two-chamber oleo shock strut),
hydraulically controlled disc brakes and a wheel,
- A nose landing gear unit made up of a leg (single-chamber oleo shock strut) that
rotates through 360 , a shimmy damper, an automatic wheel centering system, a
nose wheel locking system controlled from the cockpit and twin wheels,
- A control switch,
- An electric landing gear retraction inhibiting circuit (helicopter on the ground),
- An emergency hydraulic system test system,
- Indicators (landing gear sequence of operation, "landing gear not locked down"
indicator).
The normal landing gear extension and retraction maneuvers are ensured by the
auxiliary hydraulic system. The emergency hydraulic power system ensures the landing
gear extension in an emergency.

3.1 INSTRUMENT PANEL
Figure 1: Instrument Panel
EC 155 B1
7.14
08-26 Page 1
4 OPERATION
Figure 2: Operation Landing Gear
EC 155 B1
7.14
02-43 Page 2
SECTION 8
SERVICING
CONTENTS
8.1 HANDLING PAGES
1. TOWING ................................................................................................................ 1
8.2 MAINTENANCE DATA

1. REFUELING .......................................................................................................... 1
2. REFUELING ROTOR TURNING, AIRCRAFT ON THE GROUND ........................ 2
8.3 TEST SCHEDULE

1. GENERAL.............................................................................................................. 1
2. TEST SHEETS....................................................................................................... 2
EC 155 B1
8.0.P6
09-23 Page 1
e
io
o
2
J-
Z ~
Z
W
~
o W
~
UJ
W ~
o
U
<t:
W
o Z
"'"
o e e
J-
Z <C
_J
z o,
_J
o,
w
~ w (j) UJ ~ CV')
w ~ J- ~ (5
e
et: w
w
_J
C\I e e
w W ~ :l
o o
o <c W UJ o z
oe:!: _j ~
_j a.. I
(j) W (j) o,
r- co o:: """""
o e e
J- z o:: x
~ 2
W woO C98
W ~ J- co Z O
o:::
o
-
Wf-
I W
o::
tV
LJ... ~z
(j)

~ o...W_
_j-Z J-
oe:!:Z 00 W
>
~2U
Z a..<cw
_jJ-
oOOr-
z oWW
00 e
...J::5lt
a w~~
o:: I W
o::<CI
J- ~ <.9
~
tu O
~ 0...--
f-W
(jO:::
J- wet: Z_j_j (j)u cs
_jw o<cu. u
o :lJ-_j Uz W <t: t::~
tu oa..a..I-t_tV
o<cwZrLJ...o .....J r- oZZ
o, -=::::oo::w~J-z ::J
w:lW
r-CJ~
(j)
~~r-~~w<{ O o
(f)zW
e e
a
::]-0
z J~
ow_J
O>-ZLLj~ UJ ~a..WW
U- ~ ::J ::i z o:: ::J ~ ~ ~~
a wwJ-a..Ooo
o:: ~ (3
J-
(j)
O ::J :J W
U.WZIOOZ
10::
00
oe:!: a o, o::: Z
_r-
tV
L.L <.9 a UJ
al wW
~
Z
wu.a:O:::J-oe:!:o W o z~
_W
e e e e
.....J Z 101-0:: I Z J-
GO
z
w_J
IO:::WZ en
(9ICOc:awzo C9 ~ o,
W
zO::<.9<.9Q.wl- ~
w~~J-O<.9(f) Z ~
~ o:: o:: o:: o:: o:: o:: CI) ~
W I
U Z
Owwwwwwz
r-J-r-J-J-J-ww
........
w_J~
0
o...u.U.U.U.U.U.o..I z<C
->_J
w<Coe:!:<C<c~u GO_J
Z~
e e
O::CI)CI)CI)CI)CI)CI)O~ WW~
J-~~~~~~w Cl::C/)
IOU:_J- ~
c.9wwwwww_j(fJ
_jIIIIIIw>- ~ ~ --=:t: LI:! ~ ~ o Cf:! f'.: Cl:!
u.(fJ(fJ """"" """"" W
"""""
'r"'"" """""
'r"'""
'r"'"" 'r"'"" 'r"'""
I :2:
~

w
W
o :r: z
o :2:
~
W
>
o,
zz
00
::::::
z
o
:::
o I ~ a... ~o:::: o ...J ::J
~ cs
o O n, (9 o,
o ~~ z
::J 2 ui
I-
~ ~ O o
Q)
~ z ::J :r: o I-
o:::(
m o::~~ o
o::
(O
o o ~ ro w a.. www
o
U)
N -.::::t LO CD l'- (j)
= Ct')
~ w
LU _J u m CJ >00
O O O O O O O O O ~(J) ~ z oow z
zzzzzzzzz
io _J
l!)
r- ~ = Il) :2 O W Io:::(O W
u
w
~
LL
EC 155 81
8.3
08-26 Page 2
EC 155 B1
8.3
06-06 Page 13
EC 155 B1
8.3
10-40 Page 14
EC 155 B1
8.3
10-40 Page 15
EC 155 B1
8.3
06-06 Page 16
EC 155 B1
8.3
08-26 Page 25
EC 155 B1
8.3
06-06 Page 26
EC 155 B1
8.3
13-44 Page 29
EC 155 B1
8.3
08-26 Page 30
SECTION 9
OPERATIONAL INFORMATION
CONTENTS
PAGES
9.1 GUIDANCE FOR CARGO SLING OPERATIONS
PERSONNAL TRAINING - IMPERATIVE PRE-OPERATIONAL CHECKS ............ 1
AIRBORNE LOADS - FLIGHT PRECAUTIONS ..................................................... 2
CARGO RING SIZE RULE ..................................................................................... 3
9.2 to 9.19 PENDING
9.20 1 - HONEYWELL RDR-2000 WEATHER RADAR .................................... 1
2 - TELEPHONICS 1600 RADAR .................................................................. 5
9.24 ADELT CPT 609 DISTRESS BEACON INSTALLATION

OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 2
OPERATING PROCEDURE ................................................................................... 3
9.25 KANNAD 406 AF EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER

9.26 SMITH 503 DISTRESS BEACON INSTALLATION

9.27 MARMS
GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 1
LIMITATIONS - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ..................................................... 3
NORMAL PROCEDURES ...................................................................................... 4
9.28 PRO LINE 21 CNS
9.29 DIGITAL AUDIO CONTROL SYSTEM

EC 155 B1
9.0.P6
13-29 Page 1
PAGES
9.30 KANNAD 406 AP AND KANNAD AP INTEGRA

OPERATION - OPERATING PROCEDURE .......................................................... 2
9.31 COMMUNICATION, RADIO NAVIGATION AND NAVIGATION

INSTALLATION WITH THE DUAL GTN 750H
SYSTEM ................................................................................................................. 3
9.32 DMAP EURONAV

OPERATIONAL INFORMATION ............................................................................ 3
9.33 SECOND SEARCH LIGHT

GENERAL - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ........................................................ 1
OPERATION .......................................................................................................... 2
9.37 CAMERA VISION 1000

GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 1
DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................... 2
OPERATIONS ........................................................................................................ 3
EC 155 B1
9.0.P6
16-25 Page 2
SECTION 9.1
GUIDANCE FOR CARGO SLING OPERATIONS

1 PERSONNEL TRAINING
Cargo sling operations may only be conducted by pilots who already have considerable
experience with their aircraft. No pilot may perform solo cargo-carrying flights without
first having accomplished such operation in the company of an instructor. Mechanics on
ground duty must be fully informed by the pilot before each new operation, in particular
as regards:
their position on the ground considering the proposed flight path,
the direction in which to move away,
the hook-up operation,
hand signals to be used or radio instructions,
protective equipment : helmets, gloves, glasses (if applicable),
the number of round trips between replenishments,
the manner of retrieving slings and nets.
2 IMPERATIVE PRE-OPERATIONAL CHECKS

2.1 HELICOPTER CONDITION
In addition to the usual examination of the helicopter, the release unit must be
carefully examined and the mechanism checked for correct release operation.
2.2 CONDITION OF SLING EQUIPMENT
The nets, strops and sling must be examined thoroughly. Any worn or frayed
components are to be discarded. The cables, strops and shackles must be capable
of carrying three times the maximum anticipated load.
2.3 PREPARATION OF LOADS
Check the weight of the loads and the method of suspension.
2.4 CONDITION OF LOADING AND UNLOADING AREAS
Remove or tie down all that might be displaced by the rotor downwash.
2.5 TOTAL WEIGHT OF HELICOPTER WITH LOAD
Define maximum acceptable load compatible with terrain configuration and
atmospheric conditions. Unless the platforms are in clear surroundings and fairly
large, consider as maximum weight that which can be held in hover OGE calm air
over the higher of the two platforms (takeoff or landing).
EC 155 B1
9.1
06-06 Page 1
3 AIRBORNE LOADS
Heavy loads, such as bags of cement or drums of kerosene, which are carried in a net,
present no particular problem.
Special precautions must be taken in the case of bulky loads, which have a tendency to
oscillate and even to "float" during transport on the sling.
Permeability to air can have a stabilizing effect on a bulky load: for example, a cable car
should be carried with both its doors open.
Never carry an airfoil alone: there is a great risk of the airfoil flying up into the tail rotor.
If several cables are used to sling the load, they must be long enough to form an angle
of less than 45 between cables at the point of suspension under the helicopter;
experience shows that oscillation of the load is thus less likely to occur.
On the other hand, if the load is slung on a single sling cable, it is preferable that a fairly
short cable be used as there is then less risk of the load swinging, and it is easier to
judge the height of the load during approach.
For the retrieval of crashed helicopters it is generally possible to use a lifting ring on the
rotor shaft.
Airplanes are carried using straps passing under the fuselage or under the wings. The
cables must be attached in such a way that the airplane is slightly nose down when the
helicopter is hovering.
4 FLIGHT PRECAUTIONS
After hooking on the load the ground mechanic is to check the position of sling cables
then move away. The pilot must then make sure that the mechanic has moved away
and has given the hand-signal for takeoff.
Power must be applied slowly enough to allow the helicopter to center itself above the
load.
A vertical takeoff must be made, avoiding dragging the load along the ground or striking
any obstacle.
If the load starts to swing, reduce speed.
Approach must be made head into the wind with gradual reduction in airspeed, and
transition into hover high enough above the ground to eliminate the risk of dragging the
load.
Set the load down, then reduce collective pitch sufficiently to slacken the cables before
opening the release unit hook; this also allows the pilot to ensure that the load is
deposited. If the cables are long enough, move sideways a little before opening the
hook, to prevent the sliding items from falling onto the freight.
Even after the mechanic has signaled that the load is released, move away as if it were
not; this is an advisable precaution against possible misinterpretation of signals.
CAUTION
NEVER FLY AWAY WITH AN EMPTY NET OR AN UNBALLASTED SLING.
EC 155 B1
9.1
09-23 Page 2
5 CARGO RING SIZE RULE

Extreme care must be exercised when rigging a load to the Cargo Hook.
It is the responsibility of the operator to assure the cargo hook will function properly
with each rigging.
A placard located on both sided of the A/C illustrates the following:

Cables, straps, ropemust not be used directly on the cargo hook load beam.
Only one primary ring linked to a unique secondary ring shall be attached to
the hook load beam.
Cargo hook rigging shall respect the following rules:
Cargo hook Cargo hook

A B C E
Supplier Supplier P/N
Indraero SIREN AS 21-5-7* 110mm-40mm 16mm-20mm > 40mm < 110mm
* double keeper cargo hook
EC 155 B1
9.1
09-23 Page 3
SECTION 9.20
1 - HONEYWELL RDR-2000 WEATHER RADAR

1 GENERAL
The Honeywell RDR-2000 weather radar is a color radar system used primarily to
visually display weather information to aid the pilot in avoiding thunderstorms and
associated turbulences.
2 CONTROL AND DISPLAYS

2.1 DISPLAYS
The Weather radar information are displayed on SMD 45 (in Radar mode, on
Navigation Display (ND) only) and on the mission display 10.4" (*) (refer to
section 9.32 - DMAP EURONAV (*)).
NOTE
For configuration with mission display:
- The weather picture is displayed in sector or heading up mode. The range
data from ARINC453 output is controlled by the ND pilot or copilot.
- The zoom level data from DMAP control panel is not available.
- To be available on the mission screen, the radar picture must be displayed
on at least one ND.
(*) If fitted
EC 155 B1
9.20
13-44 Page 1
2.2 CONTROL UNIT

supply.
Radar selector - STBY: system fully energized, no radar transmission,
1 antenna parked (0 azimuth, 30 tilt down).
switch
- TST: multicoloured arc display test pattern.
2 WX mode button Weather mode selection.
3 WXA mode button Weather alert mode (Magenta areas flashing) selection.
4 GND MAP Ground mapping mode selection
5 GAIN control Adjusts the radar gain from 0 to -20 dB (MAP mode)
6 VP Vertical Profile mode selection
7 TRK Yellow track centerline for Vertical Profile mode
EC 155 B1
9.20
13-44 Page 2
3 OPERATION
Refer to the Pilot's guide for more detailed information.
CAUTION
CONTAINERS HOLDING FLAMMABLE OR EXPLOSIVE MATERIAL. THE RADAR
SHOULD NEVER BE OPERATED DURING REFUELING OPERATIONS.
EXCEPT OFF-STBY-TEST, RF ENERGY IS RADIATED FROM THE ANTENNA.
DO NOT ALLOW PERSONNEL WITHIN 25 ft OF THE ANTENNA WHILE IT IS
RADIATING. TESTS INVOLVING THE RADIATION OF RF ENERGY MUST NOT
BE MADE IN THE VICINITY OF REFUELING OPERATIONS. USE ONLY STBY
OR TEST POSITIONS IN SUCH CASES.
NOTE

EC 155 B1
9.20
13-29 Page 3
EC 155 B1
9.20
13-29 Page 4
SECTION 9.20
2 - TELEPHONICS 1600 RADAR

1 GENERAL
The Telephonics 1600 radar is a multi-mode system.
It includes a digital color display indicator to display the information received and
provision for navigation data overlay.
The system provides three types of primary operating modes:
Search mode (SRCH) capable of displaying targets on land or at sea despite
unfavorable weather conditions.
Weather mode (Wx, WxA) can supply continuous weather displaying.
Beacon mode (BCN) is capable of interrogating and receiving coded replies from
one or more beacons.
EC 155 B1
9.20
13-29 Page 5
2 CONTROL UNIT

supply.
- STBY: system fully energized, no radar transmission, no
display.
Radar selector
1 - TST: multicoloured arc display test pattern, no radar
switch
transmission.
- 60: directs the antenna to sector scan 60 about the
boresight of the aircraft.
2 Wx mode button Weather mode selection.
3 WxA mode button Weather alert mode (Magenta areas flashing) selection.
Selects Beacon only mode (if in mix mode BCN+SRCH or

4 BCN ONLY
BCN+Wx) or back to mix mode (if in Beacon only mode).
6 BCN FMT Sequentially selects Beacon format (Standard, DO172, OFF).
EC 155 B1
9.20
13-29 Page 6
BCN GAIN - Rotary function: adjusts the gain of the radar receiver in
7 Beacon mode.
CODE - Pushbutton function: sequentially selects Beacon codes.
8 SRCH Sequentially selects search modes.

9 SRCH GAIN Adjusts the gain of the radar receiver in Search mode.
3 OPERATION
Refer to the equipment manufacturers technical publications for more detailed
information.
CAUTION
CONTAINERS HOLDING FLAMMABLE OR EXPLOSIVE MATERIAL. THE
RADAR SHOULD NEVER BE OPERATED DURING REFUELING
OPERATIONS.
EXCEPT OFF-STBY-TEST, RF ENERGY IS RADIATED FROM THE
ANTENNA. DO NOT ALLOW PERSONNEL WITHIN 25 ft OF THE ANTENNA
WHILE IT IS RADIATING. TESTS INVOLVING THE RADIATION OF RF
ENERGY MUST NOT BE MADE IN THE VICINITY OF REFUELING
OPERATIONS. USE ONLY STBY OR TEST POSITIONS IN SUCH CASES.
NOTE
EC 155 B1
9.20
13-29 Page 7
SECTION 9.26
SMITH 503 DISTRESS BEACON INSTALLATION
1 GENERAL
Designed for guiding offshore search and rescue operations, the emergency locator
transmitter transmits a signal on the international distress frequencies (121.5 MHZ and
406.025 MHz).
The beacon switches on as soon as it is ejected from the aircraft, after using the control
unit or automatically using different detectors (frangible or hydrostatic switches).
CAUTION
THE OPERATING TIME OF THE SMITH 503 EMERGENCY LOCATOR
TRANSMITTER IS REDUCED AT TEMPERATURES BELOW -20C.
IF THE TRANSMITTER IS DEPLOYED ON HARD GROUND, IT MAY BE
DAMAGED AND NOT OPERATE.
2 DESCRIPTION
The emergency locator transmitter system is composed of:
- A cockpit control panel and indicator.
- A configuration unit.
- A system interface unit.
- A beacon release unit.
- A water activated switch.
- A beacon.
1. Distress signal transmit light.

2. Switch: Self test function, or reset.
3. Deployed indicator light (beacon is transmitting).
4. Activation of beacon deploy.
5. Activation of transmit.
EC 155 B1
9.26
08-26 Page 1
3 OPERATION
The beacon may be deployed upon ditching automatically or manually when decided by
the crew.
3.1 PRE-FLIGHT CHECK

x ARM/OFF Switch ............................... ARM (Guarded)
- Control panel:
x DEPLOY and TRANSMIT switches ... Guarded.
NOTE
Activation of deployable ELTs should be performed only shortly before ground
contact and not at high altitudes.

x ARM/OFF Switch ............................... OFF
Deploy switch (4) .............................................. A c t i v a t i o n o f b e a c o n d e p l o y .
Deployment of the beacon will
cause TX/TEST and BEACON
GONE annunciators to illuminate
together, with an audible tone.
Transmit switch (5) ........................................... Activation of Transmit. This initiates
beacon transmissions and causes
the TX/TEST annunciator to
illuminate together with an audible
tone.
EC 155 B1
9.26
14-26 Page 2
Transmit annunciator(1) ..................................... Illuminated. This indicates that

beacon is transmitting a distress
signal.
Beacon gone annunciator(3) .............................. Illuminated. This indicates that
beacon has been deployed and is
transmitting a distress signal.
RESET pushbutton(2) ........................................ Should "Transmit" be selected,
switches off all beacon transmission
and resets the system. This function
will not work if the beacon has been
deployed.
EC 155 B1
9.26
08-26 Page 3
4.3 DOWNLOADING WITH ROTOR SPINNING (POST MOD 07 31B62)

The TRANSFER menu can be activated in the following HUMS operating phase:
- Helicopter on the ground.
- Both engine running: Engine 1 N1 and engine 2 N1 > 5%.
- Rotor spinning.
BACK pushbutton.............................. Press............... FLIGHT DATA
DATA TRANSFER
pushbutton.................................... Press............... FLIGHT DATA
DATA TRANSFER
ENTER pushbutton ........................... Press............... TRANSFER RUN
.......................................................... Check..............
TRANSFER DONE
NOTE
In case of TRANSFER FAIL at the end of download, the transfer may

be manually restarted during one minute. If not, a new session starts.
Pressing BACK pushbutton directly initiates a new session.
EC 155 B1
9.27
09-23 Page 5
4.4 ROTOR SHUTDOWN

When the rotor is stopped, add before switching off power:
On display screen:
TRANSFER RUN
TRANSFER DONE .....................................Check
NOTE
In case of TRANSFER FAIL
In scratch pad zone:
NO CARD ..................................................Insert card in DTU
FULL CARD ...............................................Card is full, insert new card in DTU
In order to restart transfer manually, before power cut off:

BACK pushbutton .................Press ............... FLIGHT DATA
DATA TRANSFER
pushbutton........................Press ............... FLIGHT DATA
DATA TRANSFER
ENTER pushbutton ...............Press ............... TRANSFER RUN
..............................................Check .............. TRANSFER DONE
Usage data collected during flight can be validated either on board or later on ground
station.
To validate data immediately:
ENTER key provides management of option type (Y/N)
key acknowledges value displayed and switches to next item
EC 155 B1
9.27
09-23 Page 6
Data which can be validated are :

Airborne time and number of landings
OAT at take off
NR exceedances
Torque exceedances
Engine exceedances
ACTION DISPLAY SCREEN RESULT
Press BACK FLIGHT DATA Select flight data validation mode
Press ENTER AIRBORNE 2H10 Y Enter flight data validation mode
LANDING 1 Y
Press AIRBORNE 2H10 Y Validates 2H10 as airborne time
LANDING 1 Y
Press ENTER AIRBORNE 2H10 Y Contests 1 as number of landing
LANDING 1 N
Press N11 CYCLE 1 Y Acknowledges number of landing

is wrong
N21 CYCLE 0.8 Y
Process as before
until last page
Press ENTER ACKNOWLEDGE RUN Confirms acknowledgement
Check ACKNOWLEDGE DONE
EC 155 B1
9.27
09-23 Page 7

When TEST pushbutton is pressed:
Equipment Time < 10s Time > 10 s Conclusion

and Normal
remains off functioning
Honeywell will lit

Refer to
If and/or maintenance
remains illuminated manual
Normal
and remains off functioning
L3COM Refer to
If and/or remains illuminated maintenance
manual
4.6 ROTOR TUNING

4.6.1 General
MARMS allows measurement of vibration level to establish main or tail rotor
tuning diagnostic.
key switches from one field to another.
ENTER key activates the acquisition.
Main rotor tuning is performed in 4 configurations:
MAIN.R-FPOG : on ground, rotor turning, flat pitch.
MAIN.R-HOVER : in hover, ZRA < 50 ft.
MAIN.R-100KT : level flight, IAS between 90 and 110 kt.
MAIN.R-MCP : level flight, IAS > 130 kt.
Tail rotor tuning is performed in one configuration:
TAIL.R-FPOG : on ground, rotor turning, flat pitch.
EC 155 B1
9.27
14-15 Page 8
4.6.2 Operation
Join selected aircraft configuration
From main menu:
Press twice .............. ROTOR TUNING access to rotor tuning menu
Press ENTER ............. MAIN.R-FPOG
MAIN.R-HOVER
Press as required .... MAIN.R-MCP select needed configuration
Press ENTER ............. MAIN.R-MCP RUN acquisition activated
Check.......................... MAIN.R-MCP DONE acquisition ended
In case of FAIL, check aircraft configuration, try again.

In case of another failure, abort and apply maintenance procedures on ground.
EC 155 B1
9.27
14-15 Page 9
SECTION 9.28
PRO LINE 21 CNS
SMD45 Copilot SMD45 Pilot
PFD no.1 PFD no.2
ND no.1 ND no.2
FCDM no.1 Reconfiguration Unit FCDM no.2
28V ESS2
28V SB2
28V PB2
28V SB1
28V SB1
28V DB
CTL 4000 CTL 4000 X-TALK CTL 4000
Dual COM/NAV Dual COM/NAV FMS CTL4000
ADF XPDR
functions (optional) functions (optional)
functions copilot pilot functions
28V ESS2
28V PB2
28V PB2
28V PB2
28V SB1
28V DB
VHF VHF
VOR/ILS/MB/ADF no.1 DME VOR/ILS/MB no.2 XPDR
no.1 no.2
NAV-4000 DME-4000 NAV-4500 TDR-94D
VHF-4000 VHF-4000
XPDR
ADF VHF no.1 DME VHF no.2
Antennas
antenna antenna antenna antenna
MB VOR VHF DME DME VHF VOR MB

no.1 no.1 ADF no.1 CH1 CH2 no.2 no.2 no.2
ICS
Couplers
: RX / TX CTL-4000 with Transceivers

Pro Line 21 ARINC 429 : RX Transceivers to PFD/ND VOR/LOC antenna
Audio / Micro : RX / TX Transceiver with ICS
Power supplies ESS: Essential Bus PB: Primary Bus MB antenna

DB: Direct Battery SB: Shedding Bus
GPS antenna
Pro Line 21 CNS Block diagram
EC 155 B1
9.28
13-11 Page 1
NOTE 1
HF transmission on a sub-harmonic of VHF 1 or VHF 2 active frequency
may generate interferences.
NOTE 2
Transmission on HF may interfere with the VOR receiver (particularly on the
sub-harmonics frequencies of VOR-ILS) leading to possible temporary loss
of VOR-ILS indications. It is therefore advised to avoid transmitting on HF
during instrument departure, arrival or approach based on VOR or on ILS.
EC 155 B1
9.28
13-11 Page 2
SECTION 9.29
DIGITAL AUDIO CONTROL SYSTEM
1 GENERAL
The intercommunication system enables:
- Use of the radio communication systems,
- Use of the radio navigation systems,
- Telephone communication between the crew members and passengers,
- Priority calls, which are received on all the system units, irrespective of the selector
switch settings,
- Audio alarms to be transmitted to the headsets.
2 DESCRIPTION
- An Audio Management Unit (AMU),
- A Passenger Intercom Amplifier,
- Two Electronic Relay Units (ERU) to manage back-up and emergency modes for
cabin passengers (if fitted),
- Two Audio Control Panels (ACP) are installed in the cockpit (pilot and copilot) and
one or two Audio Control Panels (ACP) (if fitted) are installed in the cabin.
Each ACP enables operation of:
- the radio communication transmitter-receivers,
- the radio navigation receivers,
- the non-adjustable audio channels,
- the intercommunication system with call provision.
- Push-to-talk controls:
- a two-position push-to-talk switch on each cyclic stick enables:
in first position: ICS communication.
in second position: radio transmission.
- a push-to-talk switch is also located on the ACPs.
- An external connector, to be used by a ground mechanic.
EC 155 B1
9.29
13-11 Page 1
2.1 AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
Figure 1
NOTE
Labels ITEM 1 and 7 given for example

individual selection of the required transceivers:
volume of the associated transceiver can be adjusted
by rotating the knob. If backlighting is on, the
illumination of the triangular arrow will be at its
Radio maximum level.
1 communication - In the off position, the knob is retracted (pressed in),
potentiometers the volume is cut excepted when the rotary selector
(11) is pointed at the associated transceiver (refer to
item 11). If backlighting is on, the arrow illumination is
at its minimum level.
A Transmit access indicator located above the control
illuminates in green color when the associated
transceiver is selected.
EC 155 B1
9.29
13-11 Page 2
Selects a transmitter-receiver or a receiver and set a

preset minimum audio level when the associated
2 Rotary selector
potentiometer (1) is pushed in. This preset audio level
allows a safety monitoring of radio transmissions.
- TX: Radio PTT switch.

ICS/TX unstable
3 - ICS: ICS PTT switch.
push-to-talk switch
- NEUTRAL: Stick PTT switch.
Illuminates on all ACPs when the ISO CALL pushbutton is

4 ISO indicator
active on one of the crew's ACP.
5 ICS potentiometer ICS volume adjustment.
Flashes on all ACPs when the ISO CALL pushbutton is

6 CALL indicator active on one of the passenger's ACP (a tone is
transmitted in the ICS).

individual selection of the required receivers:
volume of the associated transceiver can be adjusted by
Radio navigation
7 rotating the knob. If backlighting is on, the illumination of
potentiometers
the triangular arrow will be at its maximum level.
- In the off position, the knob is retracted (pressed in), the
volume is cut. If backlighting is on, the arrow illumination
is at its minimum level.
Two functions:
ISO CALL
8 - Isolation/activation switch on the crews ACP.
pushbutton
- Call switch on the passenger's ACP.
Selection of ICS automatic PTT threshold:

- Set to the full clockwise position (PTT) the microphone
becomes active when the ICS/TX switch is on ICS
position.
VOX - Set to another position than (PTT), voice activated: the
ICS automatic PTT control allows the ICS automatic PTT threshold
9
threshold adjustment:
rotary control . Manual adjustment: from the full counterclockwise
position slowly rotate the control until no intercom
audio can be heard.
. PRESET position, the ICS automatic PTT threshold
is at a preset level.
EC 155 B1
9.29
13-11 Page 3
- NORM: Normal operation of the intercom system.

- BK-UP: The pilot and copilot ACPs maintain all
their functionalities. The cabin crew ACP
functions are disabled. Intercom with pilot
and co-pilot and transmission on the
radios selected by pilot (for ACP4) or
Pilot's and copilot's copilot (for ACP3) remain possible for the
ACPs cabin crew via the corresponding ERU.
(ACP1 and 2) - EMER: In emergency mode, the transmission
10
selection is automatically set to VHF1 for
EMER / BK-UP / NORM the copilot and VHF2 for the pilot. All
locking toggle switch audio will be at a fixed preset level.
Intercom with pilot and copilot and
transmission on the radios selected by
pilot (for ACP4) or copilot (for ACP3)
remain possible for the cabin crew via the
corresponding ERU. The Vox function is
disabled (intercom with ICS PTT).
11 TX indicator Illuminates when the TX PTT key line is active.
EC 155 B1
9.29
13-11 Page 4
SECTION 9.30
KANNAD 406 AP AND KANNAD AP INTEGRA

1 GENERAL
1.1 KANNAD AP INTEGRA
The KANNAD AP INTEGRA emergency locator transmits radio beacon signals
simultaneously on the international distress frequencies 121.5 MHz and 406.025
MHz to aid search and rescue operations.
The INTEGRA ELT has a built-in GPS and is able to transmit the position of the
aircraft.
As an option, the ELT can be connected to the FMS/GPS. In this case the priority is
given to the data from the built-in GPS (if valid position is acquired) to transmit the
position of the aircraft.
1.2 KANNAD 406 AP

The KANNAD 406 AP emergency locator transmits radio beacon signals
simultaneously on the international distress frequencies 121.5 MHz, 243.0 MHz and
406.025 MHz to aid search and rescue operations.
As an option, the emergency locator KANNAD 406 AP can be connected to the
FMS/GPS. In this case the emergency locator will transmit the position of the
aircraft.
EC 155 B1
9.30
13-51 Page 1
2 DESCRIPTION
The both ELT consist essentially of the following:
a transmitter located in the cargo hold RH side,
an omni-directional antenna mounted on top of the cargo hold LH side,
a remote control panel located on the instrument panel.

- ON: Transmission is effective.
- TEST mode:
1 Amber light . One long flash indicates good test.
. A series of short flashes indicates bad test.
. A short flash indicates beginning of the test.
The transmitter switch is set to "ARM":

- ON: Beacon is activated.
- ARMED: Arms the shock sensor circuit.
3-position switch
(Automatic activation in case of a crash)
2 (ON/ARMED/
RESET & TEST) - RESET & TEST:
. Self-test mode.
. In case of activation, switching to "RESET & TEST"
can reset the ELT.
3 OPERATION
3.1 PRE-FLIGHT CHECKS
On the transmitter: check that ARM/OFF/ON switch is set to ARM.
In the cockpit: check that the remote control switch is set to ARMED.
EC 155 B1
9.30
13-51 Page 2
3.2 OPERATION TESTING
NOTE
Test procedure is to be conducted once per month
The self-test mode is a temporary mode.

This mode is selected either:
when switching from OFF to ARM the switch on the transmitter.
when switching to RESET & TEST on the remote control panel (provided that
the switch on the transmitter is set to ARM).
The buzzer operates during the self-test procedure.

After landing, set the VHF receiver to 121.5 MHz to check that the emergency
locator transmitter has not been activated accidentally.
NOTE
It is strictly prohibited to test the ELT by transmitting.
4.1 AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The transmitter is activated automatically in the event of an impact assuming the
switches are set to ARMED.
NOTE
The RESET & TEST position stops the locator transmission and resets the
impact detector.
4.2 MANUAL OPERATION

The unit may be activated manually by setting the transmitter switch to ON or, the
switch on transmitter being set to ARM, by setting the switch on the remote control
panel to ON.
4.3 PORTABLE OPERATION

The transmitter may be used autonomously on the ground as follows:
disconnect the coax from the aircraft antenna,
remove the transmitter from its mounting bracket,
select an unobstructed area,
extend the built-in tape antenna,
place the unit upright with the antenna on top,
switch on the transmitter by setting the ARM/OFF/ON switch to ON.
EC 155 B1
9.30
13-11 Page 3
SECTION 9.31
COMMUNICATION, RADIO NAVIGATION AND

NAVIGATION INSTALLATION WITH THE
DUAL GTN 750H
THE PILOT'S GUIDE PUBLISHED BY THE MANUFACTURE MUST BE USED FOR THE
COMPLETE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.
1 GENERAL
This system provides radio communication, transponder control and radio navigation
(See SUP.62 for navigation functions).
2 DESCRIPTION
The Garmin GTN 750H is a panel-mounted Global Navigation System with a 6.9 in
diagonal LCD touchscreen display providing the following functions:
- Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS),
- VHF/AM radio-communication,
- VOR radio-navigation,
- Localizer and Glideslope Instrument Landing Systems,
- Remote transponder control.
The GTN750H incorporates an internal base map database, which includes basic
ground-based references such as roads + water.
Two database options are available:

- A Garmin worldwide coverage database with low level terrain detail,
- A regional database including accurate terrain height detail (this option is required
for the HTAWS function (if installed)).
The installation also incorporates the following equipment:

- HF/SSB 9000 radio (if installed),
- DME 4000,
- Marker,
- ADF 4000.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 1
2.1 ARCHITECTURE
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 2
3 SYSTEM
3.1 COMMUNICATION
3.1.1 VHF
- Volume: Turn knob for volume control.
NOTE
Volume should be set to 90% on the GTN, to maximum on
Volume / Squelch headsets (if applicable), and then radio volume managed
1 Emergency through the DACS.
Frequency
- Squelch: To override the automatic squelch, press the
knob momentarily.
- Emergency Frequency selection: Press and hold for
approximately 2 sec to select 121.5 as the active
frequency.
Active The upper row displays the active frequency.

2 Touching the active frequency swaps the active and
COM-Frequency standby frequencies.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 3
The COM Standby window is displayed by touching the

Display-COM or User frequency),
3
Standby - Monitor: Allows simultaneous monitoring of the Standby
and Active frequencies,
The large and small knobs can be used to modify the

standby frequency.
COM-Frequency Short press - changes between the COM and NAV windows
4
change NAV as being active.
Long press - exchanges the active and standby frequency
(in the active COM or NAV window).

Standby Touching the standby frequency opens the COM Standby
5
COM-Frequency window (3) which allows modification of the standby
frequency.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 4
VHF2 Emergency Pushbutton functions
The pushbutton is located on the pedestal between the two GTN 750H and
provides emergency control of the VHF2 in case of GTN control failure.

The pushbutton can be used to change the active and standby frequencies or select
the emergency frequency.
Item Function
- Less than 2 sec press ................. Toggle between Active and Standby
frequencies,
- More than 2 sec press................. Enter Emergency mode by setting
121.5 MHz as active frequency.
Short /Long press sequence examples:
Normal mode Normal mode
-
Short press
Normal mode Emergency mode
-
Long press
Then:
Emergency mode Emergency mode
(no change)
Short press
Or:
Emergency mode Normal mode
(return to initial
Normal mode
frequencies,
Long press but inversed)
NOTE
When in Emergency Radio mode, the "Less than 2 sec
press" function is inhibited. A more than 2 sec press is
necessary to exit to emergency mode.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 5
3.1.2 HF 9000 (if installed)

The cursor is positioned under the function/number to be
1 Cursor
changed (using the CURSOR control (7)).
Three alphanumeric characters display the emission mode
2 OPR
Two alphanumeric characters display the emission mode
3 MODE
FREQ/CHAN Numeric characters display frequency or channel number for
4
(numeric character) normal operation.
PWR Three level bar indicator for selectable output power level.
5
(level bar)
Turn to increment or decrement the function selected by the
6 VALUE (selector)
cursor.
Turn to move the cursor left or right to select the function to
7 CURSOR (selector)
be changed.
FREQ/LD Depress to load desired receive-transmit emission mode,
8
(pushbutton) frequency.
Turn to select maritime, emergency and user programmed
9 CHAN (selector)
preset channels.
DSBL
10 Depressing this button disables the squelch.
(pushbutton)
11 SQL Squelch control.
12 VOL Volume control.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 6
3.2 Transponder GTX 33H

The GTX 33H ES is controlled via the touchscreen display of the GTN 750H.
The transponder status and commands are crossfilled between the two GTN 750H
units.
Overhead Panel
The transponder receives weight-on-wheels information to allow automatic

selection of the transponder mode of operation.
NOTE 1
The Transponder passes automatically to ALT mode above 30 kt ground speed.
NOTE 2
Even if ALT mode is selected / displayed, the transponder will not transmit
information until the RadAlt is > 25 ft and the wheels are off ground.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 7
Touch the IDENT key once to reply with an identifying

1 Ident key squawk code. The IDENT key will show a green ID in the
top right corner of the key to indicate active Ident.
Code and mode display.

Transponder
2 R - Reply annunciator.
Settings
Touch to open the transponder control page.
VFR Squawk Code

3 Touch the VFR key to set the VFR squawk code (1200).
(1200) Key
Squawk Code
4 Code can be changed using the touch keypad.
Window
Transponder Green Bar indicates Standby, On or Altitude Reporting

5
Operation Mode Mode selection.
6 Flight ID Displays the Flight ID. Touch to change the ID.
Context Sensitive Instructions For Rotary Knob.

7 Context
Rotary knob can be used to change the code.
Enable ES
8 Touch to toggle extended squitter (ADSB-Out).
(if installed)
It is recommended to select the XPDR to ON once the GPS position is stable to

avoid automatic transition to ALT mode.
NOTE 1
In case of dual GTN 750H failure, the transponder continues to operate.
NOTE 2
The transponder function may be impacted by a lighting strike.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 8
3.3 RADIO NAVIGATION
3.3.1 VOR / ILS
When the NAV window is active,

- Volume: Turn knob for ident volume control.
NOTE
1 Volume / IDent Volume should be set to 90% on the GTN, to maximum on
headsets (if applicable), and then radio volume managed
through the DACS.
- IDent: Press to enable beacon identifier to be heard.
The upper row displays the active frequency.

Active
2 Touching the active frequency swaps the active and standby
NAV-Frequency
frequencies.

Standby NAV- Touching the standby frequency opens the NAV Standby
3
Frequency window (4) which allows modification of the standby
frequency.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 9
The NAV Standby window is displayed by touching the

4 Display
or User frequency),
Short press to activate the NAV window (NAV window

remains active for 30 seconds if no action, and defaults back
COM-Frequency to the COM window as active).
5
change NAV When the NAV window is active, the large and small knobs
can be used to modify the standby frequency.
Long press exchanges the active and standby frequencies.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 10
3.3.2 DME
The DME 4000 is integrated with the GTN750, with DME information displayed on
the IND-5000 indicator on the instrument panel (figure 1) and on the MFDs
associated with the respective VOR/ILS data.
Figure 1: DME indicator on instrument panel
1 DIST Distance.
2 G/S Ground Speed.
3 DIM The DIM control adjusts the display brightness.
4 CHAN Displays Channel selected (1 or 2) for display.
5 TTS Time To Station.
Test - Illuminates the indicators.

6 TEST / NVG
NVG - Dims the display for night vision levels.
The DME channel selector (figure 2) is used to turn on/off the IND-5000 and
display either channel 1 or channel 2 information on the indicator.
Figure 2: DME channel selector
The HOLD function is activated with dedicated HOLD pushbuttons for each DME
channel located on the center pedestal (figure 3).
Figure 3
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 11
3.3.3 Marker receiver and indicator

The Honeywell KR21 is a standalone indicator providing Airway, Outer, and Middle
marker visual and audio information. It is located on the instrument panel.
TLH / SENS T: Test - illuminates the indicators.

1 3 position L: Low Sensitivity.
selector H: High Sensitivity.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page 12
3.3.4 ADF-4000
1 Display Displays the active and standby frequencies and

main modes.
- Inner knob: Tunes least significant digits of

preset frequency.
2 Right Rotary Knob - Outer knob: Tunes most significant digits of
preset frequency.
- Press to swap active preset frequency.
- Inner knob: Brightness control.

- Outer knob: Mode selection.
3 Left Rotary Knob
- Short Press: Beacon identifier on/off.
- Long press: OFF.
NOTE
Pressing the left and right pushbuttons at the same time for more than 2 sec will
display the Radio Parameter Page (RADIO PARM) used for radio parameter
modification. Right button, to select and modify parameters.
The page times out to return to the normal display.
EC 155 B1
9.31
16-25 Page13
SECTION 9.32
DMAP EURONAV
THE PILOTS GUIDE PUBLISHED BY THE MANUFACTURER MUST BE USED FOR
1 GENERAL
The EURONAV is a digital map integrating miscellaneous data and overlays.
EC 155 B1
9.32
13-11 Page 1
2 DESCRIPTION
2.1 DMAP SWITCH
Figure 1: D MAP switch
The DMAP switch is located on the console.

OFF: The digital map is OFF
ON : The digital map is ON
RST: Allows resetting of the Digital MAP
2.2 DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT

The display control unit is located on the instrument panel.
Figure 2: Display Control Unit
1 SRC pushbutton: Scroll to the different video sources.

2 PIP pushbutton: Superimpose a sub picture on the main picture (Picture In
Picture).
3 PBP pushbutton: Split the screen in two windows (Picture By Picture).
4 SWAP pushbutton: Swap the PIP or PBP window sources.
5 FRZ pushbutton: Freeze any MAIN HD, RGB, Y/C, COMP picture.
6 ZOOM pushbuttons: Zoom in/out the MAIN picture, picture or resize a PIP
window.
7 Joystick: Browse within menu and move the centre of the frozen or
the zoomed image.
8 Rotary Knob: Provides push ON push OFF capability and dimming of the
screen brightness.
EC 155 B1
9.32
13-44 Page 2
2.3 DIGITAL MAP CONTROL UNIT
Figure 3 - Digital Map Control Unit
The digital map control unit is located on the console

EVT Marker Menu
SRC Search Menu
MEN Main Menu
ESC Escape Function
ENT Enter Function (access to macro-controls)
- Zoom Out
+ Zoom In
EMG Emergency Menu
A/R Rose Menu
MAP Maps and Labels Menu
The 4 arrow keys are used for map, menu and text window navigation.
3 OPERATIONAL INFORMATION
The DMAP is to be used only for situational awareness and complementary information.
CAUTION
NOT TO BE USED AS PRIMARY DISPLAY FOR NAVIGATION OR
WEATHER RADAR
NOTE
- RDR-2000: Weather radar display available only for range from 10 to 240 Nm.
EC 155 B1
9.32
13-11 Page 3
RCA
SECTION 9.33
SECOND SEARCH LIGHT
1 GENERAL
EC 155 B1
9.33
14-04 Page 1
*RC*
SECTION 9.33
SECOND SEARCH LIGHT
1 GENERAL

EC 155 B1
9.33
14-04 Page 1
3 OPERATION
A selector switch on the overhead panel is used by the pilot to select the light he wants
(RH and LH search light). The copilot can control the light not selected by the pilot.
Each light is turned on by setting the switch on the pilot's and copilot's collective pitch
lever to ON.
The four-way pushbutton on the collective pitch lever controls the elevation and
azimuth for the light.
The green LAND LT indicator light on the CAD indicates that the landing light switch is
ON.
To retract the light, pulse the switch on the collective pitch lever with the switch set to
RTRCT.
EC 155 B1
9.33
02-20 Page 2
SECTION 9.37
COCKPIT CAMERA VISION 1000
1 GENERAL
The VISION 1000 installation is a cockpit imaging device.
The camera can be used to replay flights.
The system records:
Aircraft position by GPS data,

Flight attitudes,
Cockpit imagery (instrument panel, controls and outside environments as visible
through the windshield,
Ambient audio.
The cockpit camera operates automatically as soon as the helicopter is powered on.
EC 155 B1
9.37
16-12 Page 1
2 DESCRIPTION
The installation is composed of:
- A camera located on the cabin ceiling,
- A GPS antenna located in the instrument panel.
Item Description
1 GPS connection linked to the GPS antenna
2 Camera
3 Access door for SD card
4 SD memory card
5 Status indicator LED
6 Power port (28 VDC)
Ethernet port (for external communications with a
7
ground station)
EC 155 B1
9.37
16-12 Page 2
3 OPERATIONS
The cockpit camera does not require any flight crew attention during aircraft operation.
For correct operation, an SD memory card must be inserted in the camera.
The end of the recording is automatically done as soon as the helicopter is
powered OFF.
Status indicator (LED):
LED status Description

Red Failure
Blue Start sequence
Green Normal operation

- SD card not inserted
Yellow - Non-formatted SD card
- GPS position not received
No LED illuminated Equipment not functioning
NOTE
The recorded data are automatically overwritten when the memory

of the SD card is full. (Possibility of 4 hours recording).
EC 155 B1
9.37
16-12 Page 3
FLIGHT MANUAL APPENDIX
EC 155 B1
IMPORTANTE NOTE
The effectivity of the appendix at the latest revision is specified on the

List of Effective Pages.

EC 155 B1
APP.9.1.P1
12-08 Page 1

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
Indicated ............................ Specific to indicated civilian Airworthiness Authority.
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:

XXX.................................... Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX.
(3) GROUP OF AIRCRAFT EFFECTIVITY:

PC2 DLE ........................... Specific to aircraft authorized to use PC2 DLE
procedures
DATE
APPENDIX PAGES (1) (2) (3)
CODE
APP.9.1.P1 1 12-08
APP.9.1.P5 1 to 2 12-08 PC2 DLE
APP.9.1 1 to 28 12-08
EC 155 B1 APP.9.1.P5
BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2)
NORMAL REVISION 0 DATE CODE 11-08 NOT ISSUED
NORMAL REVISION 1 DATE CODE 12-08

Title Incorporation of hot conditions (ISA+10 < OAT < ISA +30) performance
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information
CUSTOMIZED RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (3) PC2 DLE

Title Creation of the Appendix dealing with PC2 DLE performance.
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information
Title Distribution of PC2DLE procedure guide enlarges to all aircraft.
Revised
APP.9.1.P5
information
Deleted
None
information
EC 155 B1 APP.9.1.P5
APPENDIX 9.1
1 GENERAL
This section provides additional procedure and performance: PC2 DLE (PC2 Defined
Limited Exposure) in order to operate over OFFSHORE or similar elevated helideck
environment.
It is the operator duty to check that there is no objection from their National Aviation
Authority of using PC2DLE procedures
The principle of PC2 DLE is to determine the optimized take-off and landing weight for
the mission taking into account the best safety compromise between:
- Risks induced by helideck environment (AEO)

- Risks induced by exposure time after an engine failure (OEI)
- Risks induced by potential additional flights.
Depending of the needs, 2 ways are offered:
- Either calculation of the take-off and landing weight versus the wished (defined) Total
Theoretical Exposure Time (TTET) and Hp, OAT, available drop down, factorized
headwind.
- Or calculation of the defined TTET versus the wished take-off and landing weight and
Hp, OAT, available drop down, factorized headwind.
Observations:
The Total Theoretical Exposure Time (TTET) is calculated with factored Headwind (see
definition) for a total and sudden engine failure and with the remaining engine without
power margin.
In many case the real exposure time should be lower due to positive effect of actual
headwind, engine failure profile and available engine power margins.
Performances dealing with the PC2 DLE operation given in this section are based on
the following standard takeoff and landing procedures.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 1
1.1 DEFINITIONS
ITEM DEFINITION
CAT. A
CAT.A performance: climb at VTOSS, OEI 2 min from 35 ft to 200 ft.
1st segment
CAT. A CAT.A performance: climb at Vy, OEI CONTINUOUS from 200 ft to
2d segment 1000 ft.
Committal Point. The committal point is defined as the point in the
approach at which the pilot flying decides that, in the event of an engine
CP
failure being recognised, the safest option is to continue to the deck.
CP < 40 ft.
Defined Point After Takeoff. The point within the takeoff and initial
DPATO climbing phase before which the helicopters ability to continue the flight
safely with OEI is not assured and a forced landing may be required.
Defined Point Before Landing (VLSS and -200 ft/min < R/D < 0 ft/min).
The point within the approach and landing phase after which the
DPBL
helicopters ability to continue the flight safely with OEI is not assured
and a forced landing may be required.
Drop down Height loss below the elevated helideck surface.
The actual period during which the OEI performance of the helicopter in
Exposure
still air does not guarantee a safe forced landing or the safe
time
continuation of the flight.
Factored
Headwind after factoring.
wind
PC2 DLE Performance Class 2 Defined Limited Exposure.
RP Rotation Point. The rotation point is defined as the point at which a
cyclic input is made to initiate a nose-down attitude change during the
takeoff flight path when reaching a height of 15 ft with the rotor at the
edge of the elevated helideck.
TTET Total Theoretical Exposure Time.
V1 Decision speed: V1 = VTOSS - 10 kt
VLSS Minimum groundspeed 40 ft above the helideck at which the drop down
is possible.
VTOSS Takeoff Safety Speed is determined for:
Tempered condition ISA - 10 OAT ISA + 10: VTOSS is 50 kt IAS.
Hot condition ISA + 10 < OAT ISA + 30: VTOSS is 55 kt IAS.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 2
2 OPERATING FLIGHT ENVELOPE LIMITS

The performance given in this appendix is only applicable within the following operative
flight envelope:
- 1000 ft Hp + 1000 ft
ISA - 10 OAT ISA + 30
NOTE
For ISA - 10 OAT ISA + 10 (A - tempered conditions) or ISA + 10 < OAT ISA +
30 (B - hot conditions) use the appropriate set of graph.
B
A
3 TAKEOFF PROCEDURES
3.1 NORMAL TWIN-ENGINE TAKE-OFF FROM ELEVATED HELIDECK
kt
Figure 1: Elevated helideck normal AEO takeoff

EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 3
1. Heating system..................................................... Off

3. NR increases........................................................ Check 360 rpm
4. Altimeter and Radio altimeter DH ......................... adjusted
5. Parking brake ....................................................... Applied
6. Hover at 3 ft.......................................................... Rotor at the edge of the elevated
helideck
7. Collective pitch position ........................................ Memorized (use trigger depress
if fitted)
NOTE
Hover 3 ft collective pitch position can be memorized as a predetermined

reference to adjust 330 rpm following an engine failure.
8. Apply MTP............................................................ Establish through collective effort

At the RP:
9. Pitch Attitude change by 15 ................................ Nose down
10. Attitude ................................................................. Nose-down reduce
11. Power ................................................................... Reduce to MCP and collective
trim released
12. Vy ......................................................................... Establish
altitude is reached
17. Parking brake ....................................................... released
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 4
3.2 TAKEOFF WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE BEFORE OR AT THE RP

A safe force landing on the deck is enabled Aircraft is operating outside the
exposure time
RP
15 ft
Figure 2: Elevated helideck rejected takeoff
AS SOON AS FAILURE IS DETECTED: ABORTED TAKEOFF

1. Collective pitch............................................... Slightly decrease around pitch
position memorized at hover 3 ft
(use trim release if fitted)
2. NR 330........................................................ Maintain
3. Attitude........................................................... Adjust to reach the landing area
Before touch down:
4. Collective pitch............................................... Apply continuously depressing
collective trigger
Near the ground
5. Collective pitch............................................... Apply maximum pitch if necessary
After touch-down:
6. Collective pitch............................................... Fully lower
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 5
3.3 TAKEOFF WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE AT OR AFTER DPATO:

The aircraft is capable of continuing the flight. Aircraft is operating outside the
exposure time
3ft
Figure 3: Elevated helideck OEI at or after DPATO
AS SOON AS FAILURE IS DETECTED: CONTINUED TAKEOFF

1. Pitch Attitude set ............................................Quickly nose-down - 15
2. Collective pitch ...............................................Maintain until audio horn then lower
to maintain NR above 320 rpm
At V1:
3. Pitch attitude...................................................Nose-on the horizon
5. OEI 2 min .......................................................Select
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 6
At 200 ft
7. In level flight, IAS................................... Vy.
8. At Vy, landing gear ................................ Retract.
9. OEI continuous ...................................... Select.
10. Collective pitch ...................................... Adjust to maintain.
NR > 330 rpm.
11. RPM switch ........................................... NORM RPM H
12. NR 330 rpm ........................................ Maintain.
13. Parking brake ........................................ Released
At 1000 ft:
14. Affected engine ENG #.......................... OFF.
15. Affected engine booster pumps ............. OFF.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 7
3.4 TAKEOFF WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE BETWEEN THE RP

(FUSELAGE ROTATION STARTED) AND BEFORE DPATO
A safe forced landing is not assured - Aircraft is operating inside exposure time.
3ft
Figure 4 Elevated helideck OEI landing or ditching

1. Pitch Attitude set ..........................................Nose down 15 until the edge
of the elevated heliport is cleared
4. Nose down attitude.......................................reduce to decrease rate of descent
might be continued.
ELSE
5. IAS ...............................................................Reduce for touch down
6. Floatation (if fitted) ......................................Inflated for ditching
NOTE
the factored wind reduced the exposure time by 1.5 s (respectively 3 s ...).
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 8

FAILURE UPON ELEVATED HELIDECK TAKEOFF
The takeoff weight of this section guarantees at least the CATEGORY A 1st and 2d
segments climbing performance and the twin-engine hover performance OGE.
6) and Hot conditions ISA + 10 < OAT ISA + 30 (refer to figure 7)), the Takeoff
performance is presented through two charts and a correction table to take account of
wind, Hp and OAT.
- The lower chart (refer to example figure 5) gives the Total Theoretical Exposure Time
(wind 0 kt, SL, ISA or ISA + 20) depending on the takeoff weight and the available
drop down (helideck height minus wished margin).

- Either the TTET depending on Hp, OAT, factored wind, available drop down and
wished takeoff weight (see example 1 figure 5).
- Or the takeoff weight depending on HP, OAT, factored wind, available drop down and
wished TTET (see example 2 figure 5).
NOTE
1) TTET begins at the Rotation Point. It includes:

- The theoretical exposure time to deck edge (around 0.5 s up to ISA+10)
corresponding to the hatched blue zone on the TTET graph determination.
- The theoretical exposure time when deck edge is cleared (drop down).
power margin.
With the wind correction the effect on the real exposure time could be
estimated - see example 1
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 9

CONDITIONS
PC2DLE MAXIMUM
Figure 5 Example
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 10
Example 1 (refer to figure 5): TTET determination depending on Wished

takeoff weight = 4700 kg for:
- Hp= 500 ft
C) The upper chart gives a Maximum weight = 4820 kg (above wished takeoff weight
OK).
D) The lower chart gives (for a weight of 4700 kg) a TTET = 2.3 s
(without wind, sea level, ISA).
- Factored wind correction -1.5 s,
TTET = 2.3 (TTET without wind) - 1.5 (wind correction effect) + 0.25 (Hp correction) +

greater than the factored wind, real TTET should be = 1.55 - 1.5 0.5 s.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 11
Example 2 (refer to figure 5): Takeoff weight determination depending on

- Hp= -500 ft
- Factored wind correction +1.5 s
(Wished total theoretical exposure time)+ 1.5 (Factored wind correction) 2.5 s.
D) The lower chart gives (for a TTET of 2.5 s) a weight = 4740 kg.
F) The maximum takeoff weight is the minimum value between 4740 kg and 4920 kg
Maximum takeoff weight 4740 kg.

greater than the factored wind, real TTET should be = 1 - 1.5 0.5 s.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 12
5 TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE
5.1 SL/ISA

CONDITIONS
PC2DLE MAXIMUM
Figure 6
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 13
5.2 SL/ISA + 20

-1000 ftsame TTET -10C decrease TTET by 0.5s
CONDITIONS
PC2DLE MAXIMUM
- NR=360 rpm SL/ISA + 20 TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE
Figure 7
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 14
6 LANDING PROCEDURES
6.1 NORMAL TWIN ENGINE LANDING ON ELEVATED HELIDECK
Figure 14 Flat offset approach
Figure 8 Normal AEO landing
CAUTION
THE PILOT MUST HAVE THE HELIDECK ON HIS SIDE OF THE HELICOPTER.
NOTE
VLSS is the minimum ground speed, 40 ft above the deck at which drop down is
possible.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 15
1. Compute VLSS and TTET (refer to landing performance 8).
2. RPM switch.................................................................... HIGH RPM H
3. NR increases ................................................................. Check 360 rpm

4. Parking brake ................................................................ Applied
5. Carry out a shallow approach aiming to achieve VLSS with a rate of descent lower
than 200 ft/min
6. Reduce speed from VLSS to 10 kt of groundspeed at a rate of approximately 2kt/s.
7. From the committal point drift to the helideck while reducing speed.
Proceed with normal landing:
8. Touch down vertically.
CAUTION
NOSE-UP ATTITUDE MUST NOT EXCEED 10 NEAR GROUND LEVEL TO

PREVENT TAIL ROTOR GUARD FROM STRIKING THE GROUND.
9. Cyclic stick..................................................................... Centered.

After touch-down:
10. Collective pitch lever.................................................... Low-pitch stop.
Depress trim feels release
control on collective lever.
11. RPM switch ................................................................. NORM RPM H
12. NR decreases.............................................................. Check
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 16
6.2 ENGINE FAILURE BEFORE OR AT DPBL - ABORTED LANDING

AND OEI CLIMB
Go around is mandatory Aircraft is operating outside the exposure time
- 5
Figure 9: Aborted landing and OEI climb
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 17
AS SOON AS THE FAILURE IS DETECTED: GO AROUND

1. Collective pitch.......................................Raise as necessary while maintaining
NR > 330 rpm.
2. Pitch Attitude..........................................Set - 5 within approx. 1,5 seconds
to accelerate to VTOSS (50 or 55 kt
depending on OAT). Maintain
collective position to adjust 330 rpm.

3. OEI 2 min...............................................Select.
At 200 ft:
5. In level flight IAS ....................................Vy.
6. Landing gear ..........................................Retract.
7. OEI continuous ......................................Select.
8. Collective pitch.......................................Adjust to maintain NR > 330 rpm.
As soon as the climb is established:
9. RPM switch ............................................NORM. RPM H
10. NR 330 rpm ......................................Maintain.
11. Parking brake.......................................Released
At 1000 ft:
12. Affected engine ENG # ........................OFF.
13. Affected engine booster pumps ...........OFF.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 18
6.3 LANDING WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE AT OR AFTER THE CP

Landing is mandatory.
Figure 10: Landing with an engine failure at or after the CP
AS SOON AS THE FAILURE IS DETECTED:

1. Continue drift to the helideck without pausing for hover IGE.
2. Control NR.
As aircraft approaches the helideck surface:
3. Control attitude and cushion touchdown.
4. On the helideck, reduce collective pitch to minimum.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 19
6.4 LANDING WITH AN ENGINE FAILURE AFTER DPBL AND BEFORE CP

A safe forced landing is not assured. Aircraft is operating within the exposure time.
Attitude
Change - 20
Figure 11: Landing with an engine failure after DPBL and before CP
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 20

1. Pitch Attitude set .......................................... Nose down 20
2. Collective pitch ............................................. Maintain until audio horn then
3. Rotor rpm ..................................................... maintain above 330 rpm
4. Nose down attitude ...................................... reduce to decrease rate of descent
might be continued.
ELSE
5. IAS ............................................................... Reduce for touch down
6. Floatation (if fitted) ...................................... Inflated for ditching
NOTE
the factored wind reduced the exposure time by 4 s (respectively 8 s ...).
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 21

FAILURE - LANDING ON ELEVATED HELIDECK
The landing weight of this section guarantees at least the CATEGORY A 1st and 2d
segments climbing performance in case of go-around and the twin-engine hover
performance OGE.
14) and Hot conditions ISA + 10 < OAT ISA + 30 (refer to figure 15)), the Landing
performance is presented through two charts and correction table to take account of
wind, Hp and OAT.
- The lower chart (refer to example figure 13) gives the Total Theoretical Exposure
Time and the VLSS (wind 0 kt, SL, ISA or ISA + 20) depending on the landing
weight and the available drop down (helideck height minus wished margin).
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 22

- Either the TTET and VLSS depending on Hp, OAT, factored wind, available drop
down and wished landing weight (see example 1 figure 13).
- Or the landing weight depending on HP, OAT, factored wind, available drop down
and wished TTET (see example 2 figure 13).
NOTE
1) The TTET consists of:
- The exposure time which begins at the DPBL and ends at CP (drop down) -
cf. ZONE A.
- Only for heavy weights and ISA + 20, it could include an exposure time to
deck which begins at CP - cf. ZONE B (refer to figure 12).
power margin.
Figure 12
With the wind correction the effect on the real exposure time could be estimated
- see example 1
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 23

CONDITIONS
PC2DLE MAXIMUM
Figure 13 Example
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 24
Example 1 (refer to figure 13): TTET and VLSS determination depending on

Wished takeoff weight = 4600 kg for:
- Hp= 500 ft
C) The upper chart gives a Maximum weight = 4820 kg (above wished landing weight
OK).
D) The lower chart gives (for a weight of 4600 kg) a TTET = 5.35 s (without wind, sea
level, ISA) and a VLSS 20.5 kt.
- Factored wind correction -4 s,
TTET = 5.35 (TTET without wind) - 4 (wind correction effect) + 0.5 (Hp correction) +
10 kt greater than the factored wind, real TTET should be = 2.6 - 4 0 s.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 25
Example 2 (refer to figure 13): Landing weight determination depending on

- Hp= -500 ft
- Factored wind correction +4 s
(Wished total theoretical exposure time) + 4 (Factored wind correction) 5 s.
D) The lower chart gives (for a TTET of 5 s) a weight = 4570 kg and a VLSS 19.5 kt.
F) The maximum landing weight is the minimum value between 4240 kg and 4920 kg
Maximum landing weight 4570 kg.
10 kt greater than the factored wind, real TTET should be = 1 - 4 0 s.
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 26
8 LANDING PERFORMANCE
8.1 SL/ISA

CONDITIONS
PC2DLE MAXIMUM
Figure 14
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 27
8.1 SL/ISA

-1000 ft decrease TTET by 1.0s -10C decrease TTET by 1.5s
CONDITIONS
PC2DLE MAXIMUM
- NR=360 rpm SL/ISA + 20 LANDING PERFORMANCE
Figure 15
EC 155 B1
APP.9.1
12-08 Page 28
SECTION 10
ADDITIONAL PERFORMANCE
CONTENTS
10.1 CORRESPONDENCE CHARTS PAGES
PRESSURE ALTITUDE/DENSITY ALTITUDE .......................................................1

TAS/CAS.................................................................................................................2
10.2 SERVICE CEILING
TWIN ENGINE: MAX CONTINUOUS RATING.......................................................1

OEI: 2 min POWER RATING ..................................................................................2
OEI: CONTINUOUS POWER RATING...................................................................3
10.3 LEVEL FLIGHT PERFORMANCE

SINGLE AND TWIN-ENGINE LEVEL FLIGHT SPEED AND HOURLY FUEL
CONSUMPTION CHARTS .....................................................................................1
PERFORMANCE CHARTS WITH AIR INTAKE SCREENS ...................................1
PERFORMANCE CHARTS WITH SAND FILTERS INACTIVE ............................17
10.4 HOVER FLIGHT PERFORMANCE

TWIN ENGINE: IGE AT MAX CONTINUOUS RATING ........................................... 1
TWIN ENGINE: OGE AT MAX CONTINUOUS RATING .........................................2
OEI: IGE AT 30 s RATING.......................................................................................3
OEI: OGE AT 30 s RATING .....................................................................................4
EC 155 B1
10.0.P6
08-26 Page 1
SECTION 10.3
LEVEL FLIGHT PERFORMANCE
1 SINGLE AND TWIN-ENGINE LEVEL FLIGHT SPEED AND

HOURLY FUEL CONSUMPTION CHARTS
Choose the altitude / O.A.T. combination nearest to flight conditions.
Interpolate if necessary.
1.1 TORQUE SCALE

Dotted lines:
- AEO TAKEOFF: indicates the torque at takeoff on two engines, which can deliver
the minimum guaranteed power.
- AEO MAX CONT: indicates the torque with two engines at max. continuous power,
which can deliver the maximum guaranteed power.
- OEI MAX CONT: indicates the torque with one engine at max. continuous power,
which can deliver the minimum guaranteed power.
1.2 MAXIMUM ENDURANCE SPEED

This is given by dotted line E.
2 LIST OF FIGURES
2.1 PERFORMANCE CHARTS WITH AIR INTAKE SCREENS
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 1
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 2
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 3
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 4
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 5
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 6
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 7
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 8
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 9
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 10
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page11
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 12
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 13
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 14
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 15
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 16
2.2 PERFORMANCE CHARTS WITH SAND FILTERS INACTIVE

EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 17
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 18
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 19
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 20
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 21
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 22
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 23
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 24
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 25
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 26
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 27
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 28
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 29
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 30
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 31
EC 155 B1
10.3
08-26 Page 32

155b1 FLM Easa

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

155b1 FLM Easa

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Issue Dated : 18/10/2016

PRESCRIBED SECTION PRESCRIBED SECTION

SUP 0 RN18 16-25 R SUP 37 RN1 05-14

SUP 1 RN8 15-15 SUP 38 RN0 06-39

SUP 6 RN1 16-10 SUP 39 RN5 14-42

SUP 11 RN4 14-26 SUP 40 RN1 14-07

SUP 14 RN6 14-46 SUP 51 RN1 03-04

SUP 15 RN4 15-12 SUP 52 RN2 08-50

SUP 17 RN2 14-04 SUP 53 RN2 11-48

SUP 18 RN0 05-41 SUP 54 RN1 06-49

SUP 19 RN0 04-20 SUP 55 RN1 02-47

SUP 20 RN0 02-20 SUP 56 RN4 06-14

SUP 21 RN1 02-47 SUP 57 RN3 10-29

SUP 22 RN0 02-20 SUP 58 RN1 05-32

SUP 23 RN1 14-04 SUP 59 RN1 10-28

SUP 24 RN2 03-41 SUP 60 RN3 15-28

SUP 25 RN1 03-41 SUP 61 RN0 13-09

SUP 27 RN0 02-39 SUP 62 RN0 16-25 R

SUP 28 RN1 03-41

SUP 31 RN1 02-45 Volume 2

SUP 35 RN1 15-28

REGISTRATION No. SERIAL No.

The DIRECTION GENERALE DE

Date of approval: 31 JUL 2002

AIRBUS HELICOPTERS Direction Technique Support

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DGAC APPROVED EC 155 B1

REVISION TO AIRCRAFT PUBLICATION: EC155 B1

- The outline of the revision is given below:

PAGES TO BE DELETED PAGES TO BE INSERTED

SECTION PAGES DATE-CODE SECTION PAGES DATE-CODE

PAGES TO BE DELETED PAGES TO BE INSERTED

SECTION PAGES DATE-CODE SECTION PAGES DATE-CODE

PMVA - NR16 - 16-25

OF CONDITIONAL REVISIONS (RC)

IF A NORMAL REVISION (RN) MODIFIES THE PAGE NUMBER FOR ANY

N Section Page Date Applicable before condition is met:

0.0.P3 1 *RC* 09-04

RCA 3.2 5 *RC* 09-04 AMS 07-22B52 (PA N8.30)

RCB 2.3 2 *RC* 04-29 AMS 07-53C49 (Superior reinforced

RCD 2.1 1 *RC* 04-15 AMS 07-67B62

RCE 3.2 6 *RC* 04-15 AMS OP-79B31

RCF 4.3 2 *RC* 06-14 AMS 07 -71C16 (TU 93C)

EASA APPROVED EC 155 B1

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES

SECTION PAGE DATE (1) SECTION PAGE DATE (1)

0.0 P1 1 14-28 2.4 1 12-16

2.0 P6 1 04-36 3.2 1 12-16

SECTION PAGE DATE (1) SECTION PAGE DATE (1)

3.2 16 04-36 4.2 2 12-16

3.3 1 12-16 4.9 1 14-28

SECTION PAGE DATE (1) SECTION PAGE DATE (1)

5.1 7 02-20 5.1 18 04-36

LOG OF NORMAL APPROVED REVISIONS

Approved on October 28, 2014

2.2 WEIGHT AND CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS

2.3 FLIGHT ENVELOPE LIMITS

2.4 VEHICLE LIMITATIONS

EASA APPROVED EC 155 B1

2.5 SYSTEM LIMITATIONS PAGE

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LIMITATIONS

2 APPROVED TYPES OF OPERATION

5 MINIMUM FLIGHT CREW / MAXIMUM PERSONNEL

0.0.P3 1 RC 09-04

RCA 3.2 5 RC 09-04 AMS 07-22B52 (PA N8.30)

RCB 2.3 2 RC 04-29 AMS 07-53C49 (Superior reinforced

RCD 2.1 1 RC 04-15 AMS 07-67B62

RCE 3.2 6 RC 04-15 AMS OP-79B31

RCF 4.3 2 RC 06-14 AMS 07 -71C16 (TU 93C)